advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 696
V60 CROSS COUNTRY O W NE R 'S M ANU AL VÄLKOMMEN! We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo strives to build one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental requirements. To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com). We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and other cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or medication – or have an impaired ability to drive in some other way. TABLE OF CONTENTS OWNER'S INFORMATION YOUR VOLVO 18 Volvo ID 28 Safety 44 Owner's manual in centre display 19 Creating and registering a Volvo ID 28 Safety during pregnancy 45 Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display 20 Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure 30 Whiplash Protection System 45 Owner's Manual in mobile devices 22 IntelliSafe – driver support and safety 33 Pedestrian Protection System 47 Volvo Cars support site 23 Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment 34 Seatbelts 48 Reading the owner's manual 23 Software updates 37 Putting on and taking off seatbelts 48 The owner's manual and the environment 25 Recording data 37 Seatbelt tensioner 50 Terms & Conditions for Services 38 Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* 51 Customer Privacy Policy 38 Door and seatbelt reminder 51 Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment 39 Airbags 53 Installation of accessories 39 Driver airbags 53 Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket 40 Showing the car's identification number 41 Driver distraction 2 SAFETY Owner information 41 Passenger airbag 54 Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* 56 Side airbags 58 Inflatable curtains 59 Safety mode 59 Starting and moving the car after safety mode 60 Child safety 61 Child seats 62 Upper mounting points for child seats 62 Lower mounting points for child seats 63 i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats 64 Child seat positioning 65 Child seat mounting 66 Overview table for location of child seats 68 Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts 69 Table for location of i-Size child seats Table for location of ISOFIX child seats DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL 76 Handling a message saved from the driver display 104 Instruments and controls in lefthand drive car Overview of centre display 106 Instruments and controls in righthand drive car 77 Managing the centre display 109 Driver display 79 Activating and deactivating centre display 112 71 Driver display settings 83 Fuel gauge 84 Navigating in the centre display's views 112 72 Trip computer 84 Managing subviews in centre display 116 Function view in centre display 119 Moving apps and buttons in centre display 121 Symbols in the centre display's status bar 121 Keyboard in centre display 123 Changing keyboard language in centre display 126 Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display 126 Changing the appearance in the centre display 128 Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display 128 Show trip data in the driver display 86 Resetting the trip meter 87 Show trip statistics in the centre display 87 Settings for trip statistics 88 Date and time 88 Outside temperature gauge 89 Indicator symbols in the driver display 90 Warning symbols in the driver display 92 License agreement for the driver display 93 Application menu in driver display 100 Handling the application menu in the driver display 101 Changing system units Messages in the driver display 129 102 Changing system language Managing messages in the driver display 129 103 Other settings in the centre display's top view 129 3 LIGHTING 4 Open contextual setup in the centre display 130 Resetting user data for change of ownership 131 Resetting settings in the centre display 131 Table showing centre display settings 132 Driver profiles 133 Selecting driver profile 134 Renaming a driver profile 134 Protect driver profile 135 Linking remote control key to driver profile 135 Voice control of radio and media 145 Lighting control 148 Settings for voice recognition 146 Adjusting light functions via the centre display 149 Adapting the headlamp pattern from the headlamps 150 Position lamps 150 Daytime running lights 151 Dipped beam 151 Using main beam 152 Active main beam 153 Using direction indicators 154 Active bending lights* 155 156 Rear fog lamp 157 Resetting settings in the driver profiles 136 Front fog lamps/cornering lights* Message in centre display 137 Brake lights 157 Managing messages in the centre display 137 Emergency brake lights 158 Handling a message saved from the centre display 138 Hazard warning flashers 158 Using home safe lighting 159 Head-up display* 139 Approach light duration 159 Activating and deactivating the head-up display* 140 Interior lighting 159 Adjusting interior lighting Settings for head-up display* 161 141 Voice recognition 142 Using voice recognition 143 Controlling a telephone with voice recognition 145 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL CLIMATE Manual front seat 182 Climate 200 Power* front seat 183 Climate zones 200 201 Windows, glass and mirrors 164 Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds 164 Adjusting the power* front seat 183 Climate control - sensors Reset sequence for pinch protection 165 Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* 184 Perceived temperature 201 Controlling climate control with voice recognition 202 Air quality 203 Clean Zone* 203 Clean Zone Interior Package* 204 Interior Air Quality System* 204 Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* 205 Power windows 165 166 Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* 185 Operating power windows Rearview and door mirrors 167 Massage settings* in the front seat 186 Adjusting rearview mirror dimming 168 187 Angling the door mirrors 169 Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat Panorama roof* 170 Operating the panorama roof* 171 Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind 174 Wiper blades and washer fluid 174 Using windscreen wipers 175 Using the rain sensor 176 Using the rain sensor's memory function Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat 188 Adjusting the side support* in the front seat 189 Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat 190 Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* 191 Lowering the backrests in the rear seat 192 177 194 211 177 Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat Climate controls Using windscreen and headlamp washers Steering wheel controls and horn 213 Using the rear window wiper and washer 195 Activating and deactivating heated front seat* 178 Steering lock 196 214 Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing 179 Adjusting the steering wheel 196 Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* 214 Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* 216 Passenger compartment filter 205 Air distribution 206 Changing air distribution 206 Opening, closing and aiming the air vents 207 Table of air distribution options 208 5 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM 6 Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* 216 Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* 217 Activating auto climate control 217 Activating and deactivating air recirculation 218 Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation 218 Activating and deactivating max defroster 219 Preconditioning* 228 Lock confirmation 240 Start and switch off preconditioning* 228 Lock indication setting 241 Preconditioning time setting* 229 Remote control key 241 Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* 229 Locking and unlocking with the remote control key 243 Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* 231 Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking 244 Removing time setting for preconditioning* 231 Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key 245 Climate comfort when parking* 232 Remote control key range 245 232 Replacing the battery in the remote control key 246 Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* 220 Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking* Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* 221 Symbols and messages for parking climate control* 234 Ordering more remote control keys 249 221 Heater* 235 250 Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors Red Key - restricted remote control key* Parking heater* 236 Settings for Red Key* 250 Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors 222 Additional heater* 237 Detachable key blade 251 Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater* 237 Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade 253 Immobiliser 254 Type approval for the remote control key system 255 264 Regulating fan level for front seat 222 Regulating fan level for rear seat* 223 Regulating temperature for front seat 224 Regulating temperature for rear seat* 225 Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* Synchronising temperature 226 Keyless locking and unlocking* 265 Activating and deactivating air conditioning 227 Settings for Keyless entry* 266 Parking climate* 227 Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* 266 DRIVER SUPPORT Antenna locations for the start and lock systems 267 Driving support systems 284 Speed-dependent steering force 284 Locking and unlocking from inside the car 268 Electronic stability control 285 Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car 269 Electronic Stability Control in sport mode 286 Activating and deactivating child safety locks 270 Activating or deactivating sport mode for electronic stability control 287 Automatic locking when driving 271 288 Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate 271 Symbols and messages for electronic stability control Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate* Connected Safety 289 274 Activating or deactivating Connected Safety 290 Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* 275 Limitations of Connected Safety 291 Distance Warning* 291 Private locking 277 293 Activating and deactivating private locking 277 Activating or deactivating distance warning Limitations of Distance Warning 293 Alarm* 278 Speed limiter 294 Changing the tolerance for the automatic speed limiter 300 Limitations for automatic speed limiter 300 Cruise control 301 Selecting and activating cruise control 302 Deactivating cruise control 303 Standby mode for cruise control 303 Adaptive cruise control* 304 Controls and display mode for adaptive cruise control* 305 Selecting and activating adaptive cruise control* 306 Deactivating adaptive cruise control* 307 Standby mode for adaptive cruise control* 308 Limitations for adaptive cruise control* 309 Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display 310 Activating and deactivating alarms* 280 Selecting and activating speed limiter 295 Reduced alarm level* 281 Deactivating the speed limiter 296 311 Double lock* 281 Symbols and messages for adaptive cruise control* 282 Temporary deactivation of speed limiter 296 Temporarily* deactivating double locks Pilot Assist* 313 Limitations for speed limiter 297 Controls and display view for Pilot Assist* 315 316 Automatic speed limiter 297 Selecting and activating Pilot Assist* Activating or deactivating the automatic speed limiter 299 Deactivate Pilot Assist* 317 Standby mode for Pilot Assist* 318 7 8 Temporary disabling of steering assistance with Pilot Assist* 319 Subfunctions for City Safety 347 Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* 367 Limitations of Pilot Assist* 319 Setting the warning distance for City Safety 349 Messages for Cross Traffic Alert* 369 Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* 321 Detection of obstacles with City Safety 350 Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk 322 City Safety in cross traffic 353 Change of target with driver support 323 Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic Set the stored speed for driver support 324 Set time interval to vehicle ahead 325 Automatic braking with driver support 326 Drive mode for driver support 327 Cornering support* 328 Activating or deactivating cornering support* 329 Limitations for cornering support* 329 Limitations of City Safety 356 Overtaking Assistance 330 Messages for City Safety 360 Use Overtaking Assistance 330 Rear Collision Warning* 361 Radar unit 331 Limitations of Rear Collision Warning* 361 Type approval for radar device 332 BLIS* 362 Camera unit 340 Activating or deactivating BLIS 363 Limitations for camera and radar unit 341 Limitations of BLIS 364 Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit 345 Messages for BLIS 365 Cross Traffic Alert* City Safety™ 346 Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic Alert* Road Sign Information* 370 Activating or deactivating road sign information* 371 353 Display mode for road sign information* 371 City Safety steering assistance for evasive manoeuvre 354 Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation* 374 Limitations of City Safety steering assistance when taking evasive action 355 Warning for speed limitation and speed camera from road sign information* 374 Automatic braking in the event of an impeded evasive manoeuvre with City Safety 355 Activating or deactivating warnings from road sign information* 375 City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles 356 Limitations of Road Sign Information* 376 Driver Alert Control 377 Activating or deactivating Driver Alert Control 378 Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning from Driver Alert Control 378 Limitations of Driver Alert Control 379 Lane assistance 379 Activating or deactivating lane assistance 381 Selecting assistance option for lane assistance 381 366 367 Limitations of Lane assistance 382 STARTING AND DRIVING Symbols and messages for lane assistance 383 Display mode for lane assistance 385 Steering assistance at risk of collision 386 Activating or deactivating steering assistance in the event of a collision risk 387 Steering assistance upon risk of run-off Park assist lines for park assist camera* 400 Sensor fields for parking assistance system 402 Activate park assist camera 403 Starting the car 418 Switching off the car 419 Ignition positions 420 Selecting ignition mode 421 Alcohol lock* 421 Bypass of the alcohol lock* 422 Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock* 423 Symbols and messages for Park assist camera 405 387 Park Assist Pilot* 407 Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision 388 Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot* 408 Brake functions 423 Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision* 389 Using Park Assist Pilot* 409 Foot brake 423 Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist Pilot* 412 Brake assistance 424 Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 412 Braking on wet roads 425 Messages for Park Assist Pilot* 415 Braking on gritted roads 425 Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision 390 Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision 391 Brake system maintenance 425 Parking brake 426 Park Assist* 392 Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides* 393 Activating and deactivating the parking brake 426 Activating or deactivating the parking assistance system* 394 Automatic parking brake activation setting 428 Limitations of Parking assistance 395 Parking on a hill 428 Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot 396 In the event of a fault in the parking brake 428 Park assist camera* 397 Automatic braking when stationary 429 Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas* 398 Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill 430 Help when starting on a hill 430 9 Auto braking after a collision 431 Hill descent control 451 Towbar* 472 Gearbox 431 452 Specifications for towbar* 473 Extendable and retractable towbar* 474 Driving with a trailer 476 Automatic gearbox 431 Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button Gear positions for automatic gearbox 432 Economical driving Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* 453 435 Preparations for a long trip 454 Trailer stability assist* 477 Gear selector inhibitor 437 Winter driving 455 Checking trailer lamps 478 Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor 438 Driving in water 455 Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* 479 Opening and closing the fuel filler flap 456 Towing 480 Kick-down function 438 Filling fuel 456 Fitting and removing the towing eye 482 Recovery 483 Gear shift indicator 439 Handling of fuel 458 All-wheel drive 440 Petrol 458 HomeLink®* 484 440 Petrol particle filter 459 Programming HomeLink®* 485 460 Using HomeLink®* 487 Drive modes* Changing drive mode* 10 442 Diesel HomeLink®* Drive mode Eco 443 Empty tank and diesel engine 461 Type approval for Activating and deactivating drive mode Eco with the function button 445 Diesel particulate filter 462 Compass* 488 Start/stop function 445 Emission control with AdBlue® 463 Activating and deactivating the compass* 488 Driving with start/stop function 445 Calibrating the compass* 488 Deactivating the start/stop function 447 Conditions for the Start/Stop function 447 Level control* and shock absorption Settings for level control* Low speed control Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving using a function button 451 Handling AdBlue® Checking and filling with AdBlue® 464 465 Symbols and messages for AdBlue® 467 449 Overheating in the engine and drive system 469 450 Overloading the starter battery 470 450 Using jump starting with another battery 470 487 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sound, media and Internet 492 Playing a video 508 Audio settings 492 Playing back DivX® 509 Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone 522 Sound experience* 493 Settings for video 509 Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones 523 Apps 494 Media via Bluetooth® 509 Downloading apps 495 Connecting a device via Bluetooth® 510 Removing devices connected to Bluetooth 523 Updating apps 496 Media via USB port 510 Managing phone calls 523 Managing text messages Connecting a device via USB port 510 524 Settings for text messages Technical specifications for USB devices 511 525 Managing the phone book Compatible media formats 526 511 Settings for phone 526 499 Apple® CarPlay®* 512 Settings for Bluetooth devices 527 Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app 500 Using Apple® CarPlay®* 513 Internet-connected car* 527 Settings for radio 515 528 500 Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone RDS radio 502 502 Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) 529 Digital radio* Link between FM and digital radio* 503 Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) 530 Media player 503 Settings for car modem* 530 Media playback 504 531 Controlling and changing media 505 Searching media 506 Deleting apps Radio 496 497 Start radio 497 Changing radio band and radio station 498 Searching for radio stations Settings for Gracenote® 507 CD player* 508 Video 508 Apple® CarPlay®* Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* 515 Android Auto* 516 Using Android Auto* 517 Settings for Android Auto* 517 Tips for using Android Auto* 518 Phone 519 Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot 520 No or poor Internet connection 532 Remove Wi-Fi network 533 Wi-Fi technologies and security 533 User terms and conditions and data sharing 533 Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically 521 Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually 522 11 ECALL Activating and deactivating data sharing 534 Data sharing for services 534 Storage space on hard disk 535 License agreement for audio and media 536 12 WHEELS AND TYRES eCall 548 Tyres 552 Automatic collision alarm with eCall 548 Dimension designation for tyre 554 Emergency assistance with eCall 549 Dimension designation for wheel rim 555 Roadside Assistance 549 Tyres' rotation direction 555 Tread wear indicators on the tyres 556 Checking tyre pressure 556 Adjusting tyre pressure 557 Recommended tyre pressure 558 Tyre pressure monitoring system* 558 Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* 560 See tyre pressure status in the centre display* 561 Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure 562 When changing wheels 563 Tool kit 563 Jack* 564 Wheel bolts 565 Removing a wheel 565 Fitting the wheels 567 Spare wheel* 569 Handling the spare wheel 570 Winter tyres 570 Snow chains 571 572 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Emergency puncture repair kit Volvo service programme 600 Using a puncture repair kit 573 Passenger compartment interior 580 600 576 Tunnel console 581 Data transfer between car and workshop via Wi-Fi Using the cigarette lighter* 581 Download Center 601 Managing system updates via the Download Centre 601 Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit Electrical sockets 583 Using electrical sockets 585 Using the glovebox 586 Sun visors 588 Cargo area 588 Recommendations for loading 588 Roof load and loading on load carriers 589 Bag hooks Load retaining eyelets Car status 602 Book service and repair 603 Sending car information to a workshop 604 Raise the car 605 Servicing the climate control system 607 590 Head up display when replacing the windscreen* 607 591 Opening and closing the bonnet 608 Through-load hatch in the rear seat 591 Engine compartment overview 609 Fitting and removing cargo cover* 592 Engine oil 610 Operating cargo cover* 592 Checking and filling with engine oil 611 Fitting and removing safety grilles* 594 Topping up coolant 612 Fitting and removing the safety net* 595 Bulb replacement 614 First aid kit* 597 Starter battery 615 Warning triangle 598 Support battery 618 Symbols on the batteries 619 Battery recycle 620 Fuses and central electrical units 620 Replacing a fuse 621 13 SPECIFICATIONS 14 Fuses in engine compartment 622 Touching up minor paintwork damage 648 Type designations 656 Fuses under glovebox 627 Colour codes 649 Dimensions 659 Fuses in cargo area 632 650 Weights 661 Cleaning the interior 637 Replacing the wiper blade, rear window Towing capacity and towball load 662 Cleaning the centre display 637 Engine specifications 664 Cleaning the head up display* 638 Engine oil — specifications 665 Adverse driving conditions for engine oil 666 Replacing windscreen wiper blades 651 Set the wiper blades in service position 652 Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining 639 Cleaning the seatbelts 639 Coolant — specifications 667 Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats 639 Transmission fluid — specifications 667 Cleaning leather upholstery* 640 Brake fluid — specifications 667 Cleaning the leather steering wheel 641 Fuel tank - volume 668 Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts 641 Tank capacity for AdBlue® 668 Cleaning the exterior 642 Air conditioning — specifications 668 Polishing and waxing 642 Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 670 Handwashing 643 Approved wheel and tyre sizes 673 Automatic car wash 644 Minimum permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres 674 High-pressure washing 646 Approved tyre pressures 675 Cleaning the wiper blades 646 Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components 646 Cleaning wheel rims 647 Rustproofing 648 Car paintwork 648 Filling washer fluid 653 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Alphabetical Index 677 15 OWNER'S INFORMATION OWNER'S INFORMATION Owner information The car's centre display1 Owner's information is available in several different product formats, both digital and printed. The owner's manual is available in the car's centre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a supplement to the owner's manual available in the glovebox, with specifications and fuse information, amongst other things. A printed owner's manual can be ordered. In the centre display, drag down the top view and tap on Owner's manual. Available here are options for visual navigation with exterior and interior images of the car. The information is searchable and is also divided into categories. Mobile app In App Store or Google Play, search for "Volvo Manual", download the app to your smartphone or tablet and select the car. Available in the app are video tutorials and options for visual navigation with exterior and interior images of the car. The content is searchable, and the various sections are designed to facilitate navigation. Volvo Cars support site Go to support.volvocars.com and select your country. Here you can find owner's manuals, both online and in PDF format. On the Volvo Cars support site there are also video tutorials and further information and help regarding your Volvo and your car ownership. The page is available for most markets. Printed information There is a supplement to the owner's manual1 in the glovebox that contains information on fuses and specifications, as well as a summary of important and practical information. There is also a Quick Guide available in printed format that helps you to get started with the most commonly used functions in the car. Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner's information may also be available in printed format in the car. A printed owner's manual and associated supplement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to order. 1 18 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display. OWNER'S INFORMATION IMPORTANT The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo's recommendations in the owner's information. If there should be a difference between the information in the centre display and the printed information then it is always the printed information that applies. Owner's manual in centre display digital2 A version of the owner's manual is available in the car's centre display. The digital owner's manual can be accessed from the top view, and in some cases the contextual owner's manual can also be accessed from the top view. The information in the owner's manual can be accessed directly via the owner's manual homepage or its top menu. NOTE The digital owner's manual is not available while driving. Owner's manual NOTE Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner's information is not compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back through the screen structure. Related information • • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19) Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 22) Volvo Cars support site (p. 23) Reading the owner's manual (p. 23) 2 Applies for most markets. Top view with button for owner's manual. To open the owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual. }} 19 OWNER'S INFORMATION || Contextual owner's manual Related information • Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display (p. 20) • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) • Downloading apps (p. 495) Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display The digital owner's manual can be accessed from the centre display top view in the car. The content is searchable, and the various sections are designed to facilitate navigation. Top view with button for contextual owner's manual. The contextual owner's manual is a shortcut to an article in the owner's manual that describes the active function shown on the screen. When the contextual owner's manual is available, it is shown to the right of Owner's manual in the top view. Tapping on the contextual owner's manual therefore opens an article in the owner's manual that is related to the content that is shown on the screen. E.g. tap on Navigation Manual – an article that is related to navigation opens. This only applies to some of the apps in the car. For downloaded third party apps, for example, it is not possible to access appspecific articles. 20 The owner's manual is accessed from the top view. – To open the owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual. There is a range of different options for finding information in the owner's manual. The options can be accessed from the owner's manual homepage and from the top menu. OWNER'S INFORMATION Opening the menu in the top menu – Press in the upper list in the owner's manual. > A menu with different options for finding information is opened: Homepage Tap on the symbol to go back to the start page in the owner's manual. Categories The articles in the owner's manual are structured into main categories and subcategories. The same article can be found in several appropriate categories so that it can be found more easily. 1. Quick Guide Press the symbol to access a page with links to a selection of articles that can be useful to read in order to get to know the more common functions of the car. The articles can also be accessed via categories, but are collected here for faster access. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety. Hotspots for exterior and interior Exterior and interior overview images of the car. Different parts are designated with hotspots that lead to articles about those parts of the car. 3. Tap on an article to open it. To go back, press the back arrow. 3. Tap on the title to open the article. To go back, press the back arrow. Favourites Press the symbol to access the articles saved as favourites. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety. Saving or deleting articles as favourites Save an article as favourite by pressing at the top right when an article is open. When an article has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in: . To remove an article as a favourite, press the star again in the current article. Press Categories. > The main categories are shown in a list. 2. Tap on a main category ( ). > A list of subcategories ( ) and articles ( ) is shown. 2. Tap on a hotspot. > The title of the article about the area is shown. Video 1. Press Exterior or Interior. > Exterior or interior images are shown with so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot leads to articles about the corresponding part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the screen to browse among the images. Press the symbol to view brief instruction videos for various functions in the car. }} 21 OWNER'S INFORMATION || Owner's Manual in mobile devices Information Tap on the symbol to obtain information about which version of the owner's manual is available in the car as well as other useful information. The owner's manual is available as a mobile app3 from both the App Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets. various sections are designed to facilitate navigation. Using the search function in the top menu 1. Tap on in the top menu of the owner's manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part of the screen. 2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt". > Suggestions for articles and categories are shown while letters are being entered. 3. Tap on the article or category to access it. Related information • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19) Keyboard in centre display (p. 123) Reading the owner's manual (p. 23) The owner's manual can be downloaded as a mobile app from the App Store or Google Play. The QR code provided here takes you directly to the app. Alternatively, you can search for "Volvo manual" in the App Store or Google Play. The app contains a video along with exterior and interior images where different parts of the car are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which lead to articles about the area in question. The content is searchable, and the 3 For 22 certain mobile devices. The mobile app is available from both the App Store and Google Play. Related information • Reading the owner's manual (p. 23) OWNER'S INFORMATION Volvo Cars support site Support on the Internet in it is possible to get an overview of service, agreements and warranties, amongst other things. Here there is also information about accessories and software adapted for your car model. Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The support site is available for most markets. Related information More information on your car is available on the Volvo Cars website and support site. It contains support for functions such as webbased services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and apps. Videos and step-by-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a mobile phone. Downloadable information Maps For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation there is the facility to download maps from the support page. Owner's manuals as PDF Owner's manuals are available for download in PDF format. Select car model and model year to download the manual as required. Contact The support site contains contact details to customer support and your nearest Volvo retailer. Log in to Volvo Cars website Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to www.volvocars.com. When you have logged • Volvo ID (p. 28) Reading the owner's manual To help you get to know your new car, read the Owner's Manual before you drive it for the first time. Reading the owner's manual is a way to become familiar with new functions, get advice on how to handle the car in different situations and learn how to make use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the owner's manual. The intention of this owner's information is to explain all possible functions, options and accessories included in a Volvo vehicle. It is not intended as an indication or guarantee that all of these features, functions and options are included in every vehicle. Some terminology used may not exactly match terminology used in sales, marketing and advertising materials. Development work is constantly underway in order to improve our product. Modifications may mean that information, descriptions and illustrations in the owner's manual differ from the equipment in the car. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice. Do not remove this manual from the car - if problems should arise then the necessary information about where and how to seek professional help will be missing. © Volvo Car Corporation }} * Option/accessory. 23 OWNER'S INFORMATION || Options/accessories In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment). All, at the time of publication known, options and accessories are marked with an asterisk: *. The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations. NOTE Risk of property damage NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions. Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information. Warning of personal injury White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property. In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer. Special texts WARNING Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury. IMPORTANT "Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage. 24 Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality. * Option/accessory. OWNER'S INFORMATION Information ate from the car's appearance depending on equipment level and market. The owner's manual and the environment Related information The Owner's Manual is printed on paper originating from controlled forests. The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC®-certified forests or other controlled sources. • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19) Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 22) Volvo Cars support site (p. 23) White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field. NOTE It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car. Related information • Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 30) Illustrations and video clips Illustrations and video clips used in the owner's manual are sometimes schematic and are intended to provide an overall picture or example of a certain function. They may devi- 25 YOUR VOLVO YOUR VOLVO Volvo ID Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives access to a wide range of services via a single username and password. NOTE The services available may vary over time and depend on equipment level and market. Examples of services: • Volvo On Call app* – check the car with your phone. For example, you can check fuel level, show the nearest petrol station and lock the car remotely. • Send to Car – send addresses from map services on the Web, directly to the car. • Book service and repair – register a workshop/dealer at volvocars.com and book service directly from the car. NOTE If the username/password for a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also changed automatically for other services. Volvo ID is created from the car, volvocars.com or the Volvo On Call app1. 1 28 When a Volvo ID is registered in the car, several services will be made available. Several Volvo IDs can be used for the same car and several cars can even be connected to the same Volvo ID. Related information • Creating and registering a Volvo ID (p. 28) • Book service and repair (p. 603) Creating and registering a Volvo ID It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com or with Volvo On Call app2, the Volvo ID must also be registered to the car to enable use of the various Volvo ID services. Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app 1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download Centre in the centre display's app view. 2. Start the app and register a personal email address. 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address. > A Volvo ID has now been created and automatically registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used. Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars website 1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in3 using the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo ID. 2. Enter a personal email address. 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address. > A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car. If you have Volvo On Call*. * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call app4 1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On Call app to the phone, via e.g. App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play. Registering your Volvo ID to the car If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as follows: 1. 2. Select to create Volvo ID. 3. The web page for creating a Volvo ID opens. Fill in the requested information. NOTE 4. Tick the box to accept the terms and conditions. 5. Press the button that creates your Volvo ID. 6. An e-mail message is sent to the address given. Confirm that the address is correct. > Now the Volvo ID is ready to use. If not done already, download the Volvo ID app from Download Centre in the centre display's app view. To download apps, the car must be connected to the Internet. 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your email address. 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the email address linked to your Volvo ID. > Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used. Related information Volvo ID (p. 28) • • • Downloading apps (p. 495) • Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 601) 2 Only applies to certain markets. 3 Available on certain markets. 4 Cars with Volvo On Call*. * Option/accessory. 29 YOUR VOLVO Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on the development of safer and more effi- Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core values and influences all operations. The environmental work is based on the whole life cycle of the car and takes into account the environmental impact it has, from design to scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new product developed must have less impact on the environment than the product it replaces. Volvo's environmental management work has resulted in the development of more effective and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal environment is also important to Volvo - the 30 cient products and solutions in order to reduce the negative impact on the environment. air inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air outside thanks to the climate control system. Your Volvo complies with stringent international environmental standards. All Volvo's manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this supports a systematic approach to the operation's environmental issues, which leads to continuous improvement with reduced environmental impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means that environmental laws and regulations in force are complied with. Volvo also requires that its partners must also meet these requirements. Fuel consumption Since a large part of a car's total environmental impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide. YOUR VOLVO Contributing to a better environment An energy-efficient and economical car can contribute to reduced environmental impact and also involve reduced costs for the owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce fuel consumption and thereby save money and contribute to a better environment - here is some advice: • Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph) and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption. • Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals for service and maintenance of the car. • Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations. • Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops and uneven speed contribute to increased fuel consumption. • Use preconditioning* before starting in cold conditions - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather. The engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly, which decreases consumption and reduces emissions. Also remember to always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards. Clean air in the passenger compartment An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen entering the passenger compartment via the air intake. The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside. The system cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example. IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked with the remote control key. Interior The material used in the interior of a Volvo is carefully selected and has been tested in order to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details are hand-made, such as the seams of the steering wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is monitored in order not to emit strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and bright light. Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you also contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which workshop premises shall be designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. The workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care. Recycling Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it is also important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner * Option/accessory. }} 31 YOUR VOLVO || of the car is therefore requested to contact a retailer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility. Related information 32 • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 670) • • Economical driving (p. 453) • The owner's manual and the environment (p. 25) • Air quality (p. 203) Start and switch off preconditioning* (p. 228) * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO IntelliSafe – driver support and safety IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of systems5, whose purpose is to make a car journey safer, to prevent injuries and to protect passengers and other road users. WARNING The functions are supplementary aids they cannot handle all situations in all conditions. The driver always bears responsibility that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed. Support With the aim of assisting the driver to drive the car in a safer way, IntelliSafe has the following functions. • • • • • • • Active main beam Tunnel detection Pilot Assist *Cross Traffic Alert *Blind Spot Information Park Assist* • • • • • • • • • • Park assist camera* Road Sign Information* Electronic stability control Roll Stability Control • • • • Speed limiter* Whiplash Protection System Pedestrian Protection System Seatbelts with seatbelt tensioners Airbags NOTE Cruise control Read the individual sections on each system in order to fully understand the functions and learn about important warnings. Adaptive cruise control* Rear Collision Warning Driver Alert Control All-wheel drive6 Prevention With the aim of assisting the driver to avoid an accident, IntelliSafe has the following functions. Related information • • • Active main beam (p. 153) Safety (p. 44) Driving support systems (p. 284) • City Safety • Distance Warning* • Lane assistance • Collision Avoid. Assistance Protection With the aim of protecting the driver and passengers in certain situations in the event of an accident, IntelliSafe has the following collaborative functions. Park Assist Pilot* 5 Some of the systems 6 All Wheel Drive are fitted as standard, while others are options. This may vary depending on market, model year and car model. * Option/accessory. 33 YOUR VOLVO Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment Sensus makes it possible to use different types of apps and turn the car into a Wi-Fi hotspot. This is Sensus 34 Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible to receive relevant support, information and entertainment when it is necessary, without distracting the driver. Information when it is needed, where it is needed The different displays in the car provide information at the right time. The information is shown in different locations based on how it should be prioritised by the driver. Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are connected with entertainment, online connectivity, navigation* and the user interface between driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communication possible between you, the car and the outside world. * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised. Head-up display* The head-up display shows selected information that the driver should deal with as soon as possible. Such information may, for example, include traffic warnings, speed information and navigation* information. Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls are also shown in the head-up display. The display is operated via the right-hand steering wheel keypad and via the centre display. Driver display 12-inch* driver display. }} * Option/accessory. 35 YOUR VOLVO || Many of the main functions of the car are controlled from the centre display, a touch screen which reacts to touch. The number of physical buttons and controls in the car is therefore minimal. The screen can even be operated while wearing gloves. 8-inch driver display. The driver display shows information on speed and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being played. The display is operated via the two steering wheel keypads. Centre display From here, for example, you can control the climate control system, the entertainment system and seat position*. The information that is shown in the centre display can be acted on by the driver or someone else in the car when the opportunity arises. Voice recognition system The voice recognition system can be used without the driver needing to take his/her hands off the steering wheel. The system can understand natural speech. Use voice recognition to, for example, play back a song, call someone, increase the temperature or read out a text message. Related information • • • • • • 36 Head-up display* (p. 139) Driver display (p. 79) Overview of centre display (p. 106) Voice recognition (p. 142) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 531) * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO Software updates Recording data So that you as a Volvo customer get the best experience of your car, Volvo continuously develops the systems in the cars and the services that you are offered. You can update the software in your Volvo to the latest version when your car is serviced at an authorised Volvo dealer. The latest software update allows you to benefit from available improvements, including improvements from earlier software updates. As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, certain information about the vehicle's operation, functionality and incidents are recorded in the car. This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to register and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short time, usually 30 seconds or less. For more information about released updates and answers to frequently asked questions, please go to support.volvocars.com. NOTE Functionality after updating may vary depending on market, model, model year and options. Related information The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record data related to the following in the event of traffic accidents or collision-like situations: • How the various systems in the car worked • Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 34) • Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts were fastened/tensioned • Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 601) • The driver's use of the accelerator or brake pedal • The travel speed of the vehicle This information can help us understand the circumstances in which traffic accidents, injuries and damage occur. The EDR only records data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. The EDR does not record any data during normal driving conditions. Similarly, the system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geographic location of the accident or near-miss situation. However, other parties, such as the police, could use the recorded data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special equipment and access to either the vehicle or the EDR is required to be able to interpret the registered data. In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a number of computers designed to continually check and monitor the function of the car. They can record data during normal driving conditions, but in particular register faults affecting the vehicle's operation and functionality, or upon activation of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function). Some of the recorded data is required to enable service and maintenance technicians to diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehicle. The registered information is also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Information registered in the vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehicle is serviced or repaired. }} 37 YOUR VOLVO In addition to the above, the registered information can be used in aggregate form for research and product development with the aim of continuously improving the safety and quality of Volvo cars. Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be forced to disclose information of this nature to the police or other authorities who may assert a legal right to access such. Special technical equipment which Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to is required to be able to read and interpret the recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is securely stored and managed and that its management complies with relevant legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo retailer. 38 Terms & Conditions for Services Customer Privacy Policy Volvo offers services that help to enhance car safety and comfort. These services include everything from assistance in emergencies to navigation and various maintenance services. Volvo respects and safeguards the personal integrity of everyone visiting our website. This policy regards to the handling of customer data and personal information. The purpose is to give current, past and potential customers a general understanding of: Before using the services, it is important for you to read the support information for Terms & Conditions for Services at www.volvocars.com. Related information • Customer Privacy Policy (p. 38) • The circumstances in which we gather and process your personal data. • • • The types of personal data we gather. The reason we gather your personal data. How we handle your personal data. For more information on the policy, search support information at www.volvocars.com. Related information • • • User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 533) Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 38) Recording data (p. 37) YOUR VOLVO Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment WARNING The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations. Options or accessories described in this manual are marked with an asterisk. In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo retailer. Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket (p. 40) We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. • Volvo original accessories are tested to ensure that they function with the car systems for performance, safety and emissions control. In addition, a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where accessories may or may not be safely installed in your Volvo. Always seek the advice of a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessories in or on your car. Reading the owner's manual (p. 23) • Accessories that are not approved by Volvo may not have been specifically tested for use with your car. • Some of the car's performance or safety systems can be negatively affected if you install accessories that have not been tested by Volvo, or if you permit someone without experience of the car to install accessories. • Damage that is caused by accessories installed in a non-approved or incorrect way is not covered by any new car warranty. More warranty information can be found in the service and warranty booklet. The driver always bears the ultimate responsibility that the car is used safely and that laws and regulations in force are followed. The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car's electronic system. We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. It is also important that the car has maintenance and service according to Volvo's recommendations, the owner's information and the service and warranty booklet. If the on-board information differs from the printed owner's manual then the printed information always has precedence. Related information • • • Installation of accessories Installation of accessories (p. 39) }} 39 YOUR VOLVO || Volvo does not accept any liability for deaths, personal injury or costs arising as a result of the installation of non-original accessories. Related information • Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment (p. 39) Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket Incorrect connection and installation of software or diagnostic tools may have a negative effect on the car's electronic system. We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is under the instrument panel on the driver's side. 40 NOTE Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the consequences if unauthorised equipment is connected to the On-board Diagnostic socket (OBDII). This socket should only be used by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Related information • Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment (p. 39) YOUR VOLVO Showing the car's identification number Driver distraction When contacting a Volvo dealer concerning your Volvo On Call subscription, for example, you will need the car's identification number (VIN7). 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Continue to System System Information Vehicle Identification Number. > The car's identification number is shown. Another way of finding the VIN is to look on the dashboard through the car's windscreen, on the first page of the service and warranty booklet or in the car's registration certificate. 7 Vehicle Identification Number VIN is positioned in a similar place on all models. The driver is responsible for doing everything possible to ensure the safety of themselves, their passengers and other road users. Part of this responsibility is avoiding distractions such as carrying out an activity that is not related to operating the car in a driving environment. Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with content-rich entertainment and communications systems. This could be mobile phones with handsfree, navigation systems and audio systems with lots of functions. You may also have other portable electronic devices for your own convenience. Used correctly, in a safe way they can enrich the driving experience. If they are used in the wrong way they could distract you. We wish to give the following warnings regarding such systems, to indicate Volvo's concern for your safety. Never use a device or function in the car in such a way that it will distract you from the task of driving safely. Distractions can lead to serious accidents. Apart from these general warnings, we offer the following advice regarding the new functions that may be in the car: }} 41 YOUR VOLVO || WARNING • Never use a hand-held mobile phone while driving. In some areas it is forbidden for the driver to use a mobile phone while the car is moving. • If the car is equipped with a navigation system you must only set and change the itinerary when the car is parked. • Never program the audio system while the car is moving. Program the radio's presets when the car is parked and then use the programmed presets for faster and simpler use of the radio. • Never use laptops or hand-held computers while the car is moving. Related information • 42 Sound, media and Internet (p. 492) SAFETY SAFETY Safety WARNING The vehicle is equipped with several safety systems that work together to protect the vehicle's driver and passengers in the event of an accident. The car is equipped with a number of sensors that react in the event of an accident and activate different safety systems, such as different types of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on the specific accident situation, such as collisions at different angles, roll-over or driving off the road, the systems react in different ways to provide good protection. If the warning symbol remains illuminated or is switched on during driving and the message SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to workshop is shown in the driver display, it means that part of one of the safety systems does not have full functionality. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted as soon as possible. WARNING Never modify or repair the car's various safety systems yourself. Defective work in one of the systems can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. There are also mechanical safety systems such as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also constructed so that a large part of the force of a collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body. The car's safety mode may be activated after a collision if an important function in the car has been damaged. If the specific warning symbol is broken then the general warning symbol is illuminated instead and the driver display shows the same message. Warning symbol in driver display The warning symbol is illuminated in the driver display when the car's electrical system is set in ignition position II. The symbol is extinguished after approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is fault-free. 44 Related information • • • • • • Safety during pregnancy (p. 45) Seatbelts (p. 48) Airbags (p. 53) Whiplash Protection System (p. 45) Pedestrian Protection System (p. 47) Safety mode (p. 59) • Child safety (p. 61) SAFETY Safety during pregnancy It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers adjust their seating position. Seatbelt that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel. Related information • • • • The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen. Safety (p. 44) Seatbelts (p. 48) Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Whiplash Protection System Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests and seat cushion, as well as a specially designed head restraint in the front seats. WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the collision and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence. When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward and the seat cushions move downward to change the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. Its movement helps to absorb some of the forces that can arise and cause whiplash. WARNING WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt. Seating position As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat and steering wheel such }} * Option/accessory. 45 SAFETY || WARNING Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the front seats have been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the seats must be replaced. Some of the seats' protective properties may have been lost even if they do not appear damaged. WARNING Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat's backrest. If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then any load must be secured to prevent it from sliding up to the front seat backrest in the event of a collision. WARNING WHIPS and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by WHIPS. Related information • • • • Safety (p. 44) Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Rear Collision Warning* (p. 361) If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not make contact with the lowered backrest or child seat. Seating position For good protection from WHIPS the driver and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed. Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent WHIPS from functioning. 46 Set the correct seating position in the front seat before driving starts. Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint. * Option/accessory. SAFETY Pedestrian Protection System The Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is a system which, in certain frontal collisions, contributes to mitigating a pedestrian's impact with the car. In certain frontal collisions with a pedestrian, the sensors in the front of the car react and the system is activated. When PPS is activated, the following occur: • • The rear section of the bonnet is raised. An automatic alarm is sent via Volvo On Call*. The sensors are active at a speed of approx. 25-50 km/h (15-30 mph). The sensors are designed to detect a collision with an object that has similar properties to those of the human leg. NOTE There may be objects in the traffic environment that prompt a signal to the sensors that is similar to a collision with a pedestrian. It is possible that the system will be activated in the event of a collision with such an object. WARNING Do not fit any accessories or change anything in the front. Incorrect intervention at the front may cause incorrect function in the system and lead to serious injury and damage to the car. Related information • Safety (p. 44) Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms are used and that only genuine parts are used for them. WARNING Never modify or repair the system yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. Defective work in the system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. WARNING Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop in the event of any damage to the front of the car in order to ensure that the system is intact. Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification PPS has been activated, or a fault has occurred in the system. Follow the recommendation given. * Option/accessory. 47 SAFETY Seatbelts WARNING Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide good protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position. Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt. WARNING Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly. WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. 48 Related information Safety (p. 44) • • • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50) • Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 51) Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 48) Putting on and taking off seatbelts Make sure that all passengers have fastened their seatbelts before starting to drive. Putting on seatbelts 1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it is not twisted or damaged. NOTE The seatbelt is equipped with an inertia reel that is locked in the following situations: • • • • if the belt is extended too quickly. during braking and acceleration. if the car leans heavily. when driving in bends. SAFETY 2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in the intended buckle. > A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked. 3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be adjusted for height. WARNING Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts and buckles would otherwise possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serious injury. The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over the arm). Press together the seat mounting and move the seatbelt up or down. 4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat. The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen). }} 49 SAFETY || WARNING Each seatbelt is designed for only one person. WARNING Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly. WARNING Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury. Taking off seatbelts 1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. 2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose. Related information • • • 50 Seatbelts (p. 48) Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50) Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 51) Seatbelt tensioner The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tensioners and electric* seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seatbelts in critical situations and collisions. When the critical situation has come to an end, the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt pretensioner are restored automatically, but they can also be restored manually. IMPORTANT Standard seatbelt tensioner If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated. All the seatbelts are equipped with a standard seatbelt tensioner. The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient force in order to more effectively restrain the occupant. WARNING Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. Electric seatbelt tensioner* The driver and front passenger seatbelts are equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt. The seatbelt tensioners work together and can be activated together with the driver support systems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In critical situations, such as panic braking, driving off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits something in the terrain), skidding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor. The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust the occupant to a better position, reducing the risk of striking the car's interior and improving the effect of safety systems, such as the car's airbags. Related information • • • Seatbelts (p. 48) Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 48) Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* (p. 51) * Option/accessory. SAFETY • • • Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 56) Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* City Safety™ (p. 346) The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to be reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner can be reset manually if the belt remains extended. 1. Stop the car at a safe place. Rear Collision Warning* (p. 361) Door and seatbelt reminder The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door, bonnet or lid. Driver display graphics 2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it. > The seatbelt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset. WARNING Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt. Related information • • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50) Graphics in the driver display with different types of warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is dependent on the vehicle's speed. The driver display's graphics show which seats in the car are occupied by belted and unbelted passengers. The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tailgate or any door is open. The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing the O button on the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Seatbelts (p. 48) }} * Option/accessory. 51 SAFETY || Seatbelt reminder Visual reminder in the roof console. A visual reminder is given in the roof console and by means of the warning symbol in the driver display. The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed, driving time and distance. The belt status of the driver and passengers is shown in the driver display's graphic when a belt is buckled or unbuckled. Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system. Front seat A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. 52 Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions: • Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. The driver display's graphics are shown when the seatbelts are in use. • Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is unfastened during a journey by means of a visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder will cease once the seatbelt has been put on again. Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate and fuel filler flap If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is not closed properly, the driver display's graphics show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the source of the warning. If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's information symbol illuminates. If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's warning symbol illuminates. Related information • • Seatbelts (p. 48) Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 48) SAFETY Airbags The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable curtains for driver and passengers. Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags. • Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems. • Always contact a doctor. NOTE The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt positions. Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns. WARNING Deployed airbags If any of the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended: • Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is equipped with steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's side. WARNING It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that none, one or more airbags are deployed. The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the cables to the starter battery. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Driver airbags Related information • • • • • Safety (p. 44) Driver airbags (p. 53) Passenger airbag (p. 54) Side airbags (p. 58) Inflatable curtains (p. 59) Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's side in the front seat. In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the driver as well as the knees and legs. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second. }} 53 SAFETY || WARNING WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Do not place or attach any object on the top or front of the panel where the knee airbag is stowed. Passenger airbag As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is equipped with an airbag on the passenger side in the front seat. Related information • • Airbags (p. 53) Passenger airbag (p. 54) WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Steering wheel airbag location This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG. Knee airbag1 location The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG. 1 54 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets. Front passenger airbag in front seat. In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag helps to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the passenger as well as the knees and legs. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation SAFETY of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second. Label for passenger airbag WARNING Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated. To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Passenger airbag location Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. Label on the passenger side's sun visor. The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above. WARNING If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated. Related information • • • Airbags (p. 53) Driver airbags (p. 53) Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 56) The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG. WARNING Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located. * Option/accessory. 55 SAFETY Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch (PACOS). The switch for the passenger airbag is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open. Check that the switch is in the required position. WARNING Activating passenger airbag If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated. Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF to ON. > The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag on Please acknowledge. NOTE ON - The airbag is activated and all frontfacing passengers (children and adults) can sit safely on the passenger seat. If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II. OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the passenger seat. 56 * Option/accessory. SAFETY 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button. > A text message and a warning symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated. WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. The passenger airbag must always be activated when front-facing passengers (children and adults) are sitting in the front passenger seat. Deactivating passenger airbag Pull the switch outward and turn from ON to OFF. > The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag off Please acknowledge. NOTE If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II. 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button. > A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated. WARNING Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. }} 57 SAFETY || IMPORTANT If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated. Side airbags WARNING The side airbags on the driver's and passenger seats act to protect the chest and hips in the event of a collision. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the side airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Related information • • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50) WARNING Child seats (p. 62) Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag. Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags. The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest frames of the front seats and help to protect the driver and passengers in the front seat. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision. WARNING Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. Side airbags and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag. Related information • 58 Airbags (p. 53) SAFETY Inflatable curtains WARNING The Inflatable Curtain (IC), helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision. Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hooks are only designed for light coats and jackets (not for solid objects such as umbrellas). Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine parts that are approved for fitting within these areas. WARNING Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised. The inflatable curtain is mounted along both sides of the headlining and helps protect the driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG. WARNING A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated. WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the inflatable curtain system can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. Safety mode Safety mode is a protective state that is triggered when a collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system. If the car has been in a collision, the message Safety mode See Owner's manual may be shown on the driver display with a warning symbol as long as the display is not damaged and the car's electrical system is still in working order. This message means that the car has reduced functionality. WARNING Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once. If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example. Related information • Airbags (p. 53) }} 59 SAFETY || WARNING Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See Owner's manual has been shown. WARNING If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Related information • • • Safety (p. 44) Starting and moving the car after safety mode (p. 60) Recovery (p. 483) Starting and moving the car after safety mode If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example. 3. Then try to start the car. > The car's electronics carry out a systems check and then try to resume normal status. IMPORTANT If the message Safety mode See Owner's manual is still shown on the display the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service must then be used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving. Starting the car after safety mode 1. Check the general damage situation of the car and whether any fuel has been leaking. There must be no smell of fuel either. If there is only minor damage and a check has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be attempted. WARNING Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once. 2. Switch off the car. Moving the car after safety mode 1. If the driver display shows the message Normal mode The car is now in normal mode after a start attempt, the car can be carefully moved if standing in a dangerous position. 2. Do not move the car further than necessary. WARNING If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. 60 SAFETY Related information • • • Safety mode (p. 59) Starting the car (p. 418) Recovery (p. 483) Child safety Children must always sit secure while travelling in the car. Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats and attachment devices) which is designed for fitting in this particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment, you obtain good conditions for a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety equipment fits in well and is simple to use. The equipment that should be used is selected taking account of the weight and size of the child. Volvo recommends that children travel in a rear-facing child seat until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then in a front-facing child seat until the child is 140 cm (4 feet 7 inches) tall. NOTE When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included. In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions. Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger. Related information • • • Safety (p. 44) Child seats (p. 62) Activating and deactivating child safety locks (p. 270) NOTE Legal provisions about the type of child seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country to country. Check what does apply. 61 SAFETY Child seats Related information Suitable child seats should always be used when children are travelling in the car. Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is positioned, mounted and used correctly. • • • Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 63) Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting. • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 64) • • Child seat positioning (p. 65) NOTE When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included. Child safety (p. 61) Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 62) Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 56) Upper mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with upper mounting points for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats. The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the upper mounting points. The location of the mounting points In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions. NOTE Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use. NOTE Long-term installation and use of child seats may cause wear and tear on the car's fittings. Volvo recommends using the kick guard accessory to protect the car's fittings. 62 Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on the rear of the backrest. The mounting points are located on the rear of the rear seat's outer seats. * Option/accessory. SAFETY WARNING The child seat's upper straps must be routed through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer. NOTE Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats. • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 69) Lower mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with lower mounting points for child seats in the front seat* and the rear seat. The lower mounting points are designed to be used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child seats. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the lower mounting points. The location of the mounting points NOTE In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points. Related information • • Child seats (p. 62) Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 63) Mounting point locations in the front seat. • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 64) • Overview table for location of child seats (p. 68) The mounting points in the front seat are located on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom. The mounting points in the front seat are only mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a * Option/accessory. }} 63 SAFETY || switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*. i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats Lift the covers in order to access the mounting points. The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats in the rear seat. i-Size/ISOFIX2 is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard. • • Child seats (p. 62) • Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 63) • Overview table for location of child seats (p. 68) • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 71) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 72) Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points. The location of the mounting points Mounting point locations in the rear seat. The mounting points in the rear seat are located on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails. Related information Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 62) Related information • • Child seats (p. 62) • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 64) • Overview table for location of child seats (p. 68) • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 69) Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 62) 2 Names 64 Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols2 on the upholstery of the backrest. The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are located behind covers in the lower section of the rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats. and symbols change depending on market. * Option/accessory. SAFETY Child seat positioning It is important to position the child seat in the right place in the car. The choice of location depends, amongst other things, on the type of child seat and whether the passenger airbag is activated. NOTE Label for passenger airbag Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply. WARNING Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible. Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys. If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear-facing child seats can be fitted on the front passenger seat. Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated. Label on the passenger side's sun visor. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. Related information The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above. • • • Child seats (p. 62) Child seat mounting (p. 66) Overview table for location of child seats (p. 68) • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 69) • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 71) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 72) 65 SAFETY Child seat mounting NOTE It is important to remember a number of things when a child seat is mounted and used, which depend on where the child seat is positioned. Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use. WARNING Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally. Do not secure the straps for the child seat into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps. Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen. NOTE When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included. In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions. 3 The accessory range varies depending 4 Does not apply to the centre seat. 5 Varies depending on market. 66 on market. NOTE Long-term installation and use of child seats may cause wear and tear on the car's fittings. Volvo recommends using the kick guard accessory to protect the car's fittings. Installation in the front seat • When fitting rear-facing child seats, check that the passenger airbag is deactivated. • When fitting front-facing child seats, check that the passenger airbag is activated. • Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list. • ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console3 accessory. • If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, Volvo recommends that the lower mounting points are used with these3. • If the child seat is equipped with support legs, always fit the support leg/support legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object. Installation in the rear seat • Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved4 or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list. • A child seat with support legs must not be fitted in the centre seat. • The outer seats are equipped with the ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i-Size5. • The outer seats are equipped with upper mounting points. Volvo recommends that child seat's upper straps should be pulled through the hole in the head restraint before being tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer. SAFETY • • If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, never adjust the position of the seat in front after the straps have been fitted in the lower mounting points. Always remember to remove the lower straps when the child seat is not installed. If the child seat is equipped with support legs, always fit the support leg/support legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object. • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 69) • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 71) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 72) With the installation of an infant seat in the rear seat, Volvo recommends a distance of at least 50 mm (2 inches) from the front part of the infant seat to the rearmost part of the seat in front. Related information • • Child seat positioning (p. 65) Overview table for location of child seats (p. 68) 67 SAFETY Overview table for location of child seats The table gives an overview of the types of child seats suitable for the car's seats. Seat positions in right-hand drive cars. Seat positions in left-hand drive cars. Seat positionB A B C i-Size child seats Universally approved child seats secured using the car's seatbelt Other child seat categoriesA 3, 5 2C, 3, 5 2C, 3, 4, 5 For more information, contact the child seat manufacturer. According to the numbering above. Activated airbag for front-facing child seats. Deactivated airbag for rear-facing child seats. Related information • • • 68 • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 71) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 72) Child seat positioning (p. 65) Child seat mounting (p. 66) Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 69) SAFETY Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts The table gives a recommendation for which child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child. Weight Group 0 max 10 kg Group 0+ max 13 kg Group 1 9-18 kg Group 2 15-25 kg NOTE Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car. Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)A Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)A Outer rear seat Centre rear seat UB, C X UC LC UB, C X UC LC LD UFB, E UE, LD LE LD UFB, F UF, LD LF }} 69 SAFETY || Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)A Group 3 22-36 kg Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)A UFB, F X Outer rear seat Centre rear seat UF LF U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group. UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats. L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group. A B C D E F The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. Adjust the backrest to a more upright position. Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146). Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212). Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312). WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. Related information • • • • 70 Child seat positioning (p. 65) Child seat mounting (p. 66) Overview table for location of child seats (p. 68) Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 71) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 72) • Seatbelts (p. 48) SAFETY Table for location of i-Size child seats The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R129. The table gives a recommendation for which i-Size child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child. Type of child seat NOTE Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car. Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats) Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat X X i-UA, B X i-Size child seats i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing. X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats. A B Volvo recommends that children travel in a rear-facing child seat until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age. Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4-129R-000002). Related information • • • Child seat positioning (p. 65) Child seat mounting (p. 66) Overview table for location of child seats (p. 68) • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 69) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 72) • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 64) 71 SAFETY Table for location of ISOFIX child seats The table gives a recommendation for which ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child. Weight Group 0 max 10 kg Group 0+ max 13 kg 72 Size classA Type of child seat E Rear-facing infant seat E Rear-facing infant seat C Rear-facing child seat D Rear-facing child seat The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be included in the manufacturer's vehicle list. NOTE Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car. Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rearfacing child seats)B, C Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)B, C Outer rear seat Centre rear seat ILB, D, XE X ILD X ILB, D, F, XE X ILD X SAFETY Weight Group 1 9-18 kg Size classA Type of child seat A Front-facing child seat B Front-facing child seat B1 Front-facing child seat C Rear-facing child seat D Rear-facing child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rearfacing child seats)B, C Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)B, C Outer rear seat Centre rear seat X ILB, F, G, XE ILG, IUFG X ILB, F, XE X IL X IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group. X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems. A B C D E F G For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label. Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market). There are no upper mounting points for child seats here. The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146). Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket. Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat. Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. NOTE If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat. NOTE Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo dealer for information about which i-Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends. }} 73 SAFETY || Related information • • • 74 Child seat positioning (p. 65) Child seat mounting (p. 66) Overview table for location of child seats (p. 68) • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 69) • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 71) • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 64) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Instruments and controls in lefthand drive car The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located. Steering wheel and instrument panel Horn Centre and tunnel console Left-hand steering wheel keypad Bonnet opening Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/closing*, halogen headlamp levelling Roof console Centre display Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media Gear selector Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter Steering wheel paddles for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox* Head-up display* Driver display Start knob Front reading lamps and interior lighting Drive mode control* Panorama roof* Parking brake Display in roof console, ON CALL button* Automatic braking when stationary Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror Wipers and washing, rain sensor* Right-hand steering wheel keypad Steering wheel adjustment 76 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Driver's door Instruments and controls in righthand drive car Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/closing*, halogen headlamp levelling The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located. Bonnet opening Steering wheel and instrument panel Horn Steering wheel adjustment Left-hand steering wheel keypad Roof console Memories for power front seat*, door mirror and head-up display* settings Central locking Power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety lock* Adjusting front seat Related information • • • • • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 196) Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter Steering wheel paddles for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox* Head-up display* Lighting control (p. 148) Driver display Starting the car (p. 418) Wipers and washing, rain sensor* Driver display (p. 79) Overview of centre display (p. 106) Front reading lamps and interior lighting Panorama roof* Display in roof console, ON CALL button* Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror Right-hand steering wheel keypad }} Gearbox (p. 431) * Option/accessory. 77 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Centre and tunnel console Driver's door Centre display Memories for power front seat*, door mirror and head-up display* settings Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media Central locking Gear selector Power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety lock* Start knob Adjusting front seat Drive mode control* Parking brake Automatic braking when stationary 78 Related information • • • • • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 196) Lighting control (p. 148) Starting the car (p. 418) Driver display (p. 79) Overview of centre display (p. 106) Gearbox (p. 431) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Driver display The driver display shows information about the car and driving. The driver display contains gauges, indicators and indicator and warning symbols. The content of the driver display depends on the car's equipment, settings and which functions are active at that time. The driver display is activated as soon as a door is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver display extinguishes after a while if it is not used. To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following: • • • Depress the brake pedal. Activate ignition position I. Open one of the doors. The driver display is available in two versions, 8-inch and 12-inch*. Driver display, 8-inch WARNING If the driver display should extinguish, not illuminate on activation/start or be fully or partially illegible, the car must not be used. You should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop. WARNING In the event of a fault in the driver display the information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other safety systems may not be shown. In which case, the driver cannot check the status of the car's systems or receive current warnings and information. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Location in the driver display: On the left In the middle On the right Fuel gauge Speedometer Media player Drive mode Road Sign Information* Phone Cruise control and speed limiter information Navigation information* Door and seatbelt information Clock Distance to empty tank Start/stop function status App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad) Outside temperature gauge – Instantaneous fuel consumption Gear shift indicator Tachometer/ECO gaugeA }} * Option/accessory. 79 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || A B On the left In the middle On the right Indicator and warning symbols – OdometerB – – Trip meter – – Indicator and warning symbols – – Voice recognition – – Engine temperature gauge – – Messages, in some cases with graphics – – CompassA Depends on drive mode selected. Accumulated mileage. Driver display, 12-inch* The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. 80 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Location in the driver display: A B On the left In the middle On the right Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer/ECO gaugeA Trip meter Outside temperature gauge Gear shift indicator OdometerB Clock Drive mode Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge Road Sign Information* Door and seatbelt information Start/stop function status – Media player Distance to empty tank – Navigation map* Instantaneous fuel consumption – Phone App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad) – Voice recognition – – CompassA – Depends on drive mode selected. Accumulated mileage. Dynamic symbol The dynamic symbol in its basic form. different types of message. An amber or red marker around the symbol indicates the degree of severity of a control or warning message. The centre of the driver display contains a dynamic symbol that changes appearance for }} * Option/accessory. 81 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Examples of indicator symbol. With an animation, the basic shape can be turned into a graphic showing where a problem is situated, or in order to clarify information. Related information 82 • • Driver display settings (p. 83) • Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 90) Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 92) Trip computer (p. 84) • • • Messages in the driver display (p. 102) • Drive modes* (p. 440) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 101) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Driver display settings Settings for the driver display's display options can be made via the driver display's application menu and via the centre display's settings menu. Settings via the driver display's app menu • navigation system*. Settings via the centre display Selecting information type 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Displays Display Information. Driver 3. Select what should be shown in the background: • Show no information in background • Show information for current playing media • Show navigation even if no route is set1 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. The app menu is opened and controlled using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel. In the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display from: • • • 1 trip computer media player phone 2. Tap on System System Languages and Units System Language to select language. > A change will affect the language in all displays. These settings are personal and are saved automatically to the active driver profile. Related information • • • Selecting theme 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Tap on My Car Themes. Selecting language 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. Displays Driver display (p. 79) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 101) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) Display 3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver display: • • • • Glass Minimalistic Performance Chrome Rings The 12-inch* driver display shows the map, the 8-inch driver display only shows guidance. * Option/accessory. 83 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Fuel gauge Trip computer The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the fuel level in the tank. The car's trip computer records vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average speed whilst driving. In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, information is recorded about both instantaneous and average fuel consumption. The information from the trip computer can be shown in the driver display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Fuel gauge in the 8-inch driver display: The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Fuel gauge in the 12-inch driver display: The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the quantity of fuel in the tank. When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and changes to amber. The trip computer also indicates the distance to empty tank. The bars in the fuel gauge indicate the quantity of fuel in the tank. When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and changes to amber. The trip computer also indicates the distance to empty tank. Only an amber bar remains when the fuel level is critically low. Refuel the car as soon as possible. Related information • • • 84 Driver display (p. 79) Filling fuel (p. 456) Fuel tank - volume (p. 668) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL • • • • • Trip meter Odometer Instantaneous fuel consumption Distance to empty tank Tourist - alternative speedometer Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display. Trip meter There are two trip meters, TM and TA. Examples of trip computer information in the 12-inch driver display*. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. TM can be reset manually and TA is reset automatically if the car is not used for at least four hours. The following information is registered while driving: • • • • Mileage Driving time The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the remaining drivable fuel quantity. When the gauge shows "----", there is not enough fuel left to be able to calculate the remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible. NOTE There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed. An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. Tourist - alternative speedometer Average fuel consumption The alternative digital speedometer makes it easier to drive in countries where speed limit signs are in a different unit than that shown in the car's instruments. Odometer The following meters are included in the trip computer: The trip computer calculates the remaining mileage with the fuel available in the tank. Average speed The values apply from the trip meter's latest reset. Examples of trip computer information in the 8-inch driver display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Distance to empty tank The odometer records the car's total mileage. This value cannot be reset to zero. Instantaneous fuel consumption This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the car has at the moment. The value is updated approximately every second. The digital speed is then shown in the opposite unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer. If the analogue speedometer is graduated in mph, the digital speedometer shows the corresponding speed in km/h and vice versa. }} * Option/accessory. 85 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Related information • Show trip data in the driver display (p. 86) • • Resetting the trip meter (p. 87) • • Show trip statistics in the centre display (p. 87) Show trip data in the driver display The trip computer's recorded and calculated values can be shown in the driver display. The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display. Driver display (p. 79) Changing system units (p. 129) App menu Left/right Up/down Confirm 86 figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Open the app menu in the driver display by pressing (1). (It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message first has to be confirmed by pressing the O button (4) before the app menu can be opened.) 2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or right with (2). > The top four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TM. The next four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with (3). Open and navigate in the app menu2 using the righthand steering wheel keypad. 2 The 1. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL 3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select which information to show in the driver display: • • • • • Resetting the trip meter Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk switch. Odometer Distance to empty tank Tourist (alternative speedometer) Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no display of mileage Instantaneous fuel consumption, average consumption for TM or TA, alternatively, no display of fuel consumption Select or deselect an option with the O button (4). The change is made immediately. Related information • • – Trip computer (p. 84) Resetting the trip meter (p. 87) Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e. mileage, average consumption, average speed and driving time) with a long press on the RESET button on the left-hand stalk switch. Show trip statistics in the centre display Trip statistics from the trip computer are displayed graphically in the centre display and provide an overview that facilitates more fuelefficient driving. Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics. Each bar in the diagram symbolises a distance of 1, 10 or 100 km, alternatively miles. The bars are filled in from the right as driving progresses. The bar on the far right shows the value for the current distance. The average fuel consumption and total driving time are calculated since the last time the trip statistics were reset. A short press on the RESET button resets only the mileage. The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically when the car has not been used for four or more hours. Related information • Trip computer (p. 84) }} 87 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Settings for trip statistics Date and time Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics. 1. Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics. The clock is shown in both the driver display and the centre display. Clock location 2. Press Preferences to Trip statistics from the trip computer3. • change graph scale. Select resolution 1, 10 or 100 km/miles for the bar. • reset data after every trip. Performed when the car has been stationary for more than 4 hours. • reset data for the current trip. Related information • • Settings for trip statistics (p. 88) Trip computer (p. 84) Trip statistics, calculated average consumption and total driving time are always reset simultaneously. Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display. Clock location in the 12-inch* and 8-inch driver display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. In certain situations, messages and information may cover the clock in the driver display. In the centre display, the clock is located at the top right of the status bar. Related information • • • 3 The 88 Show trip statistics in the centre display (p. 87) Trip computer (p. 84) Resetting the trip meter (p. 87) figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Date and time settings – Select Settings System Date and Time in the centre display's top view to change settings for time and date format. Adjust the date and time by pressing the up or down arrow on the touch screen. Outside temperature gauge The outside temperature is shown in the driver display. A sensor detects the temperature outside of the car. Change the unit for the temperature gauge, etc. via system settings in the centre display's top view. Related information • • Driver display (p. 79) Changing system units (p. 129) Automatic time for cars with GPS When the car is equipped with a navigation system, Auto Time can be selected. The time zone is then adjusted automatically based on the location of the car. For certain types of navigation systems, the current location (country) must also be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time is not selected, time and data are adjusted with arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen. Summer time In certain countries, it is possible to select the Auto Daylight Saving Time setting for automatic setting of summer time. For other countries, the Daylight Saving Time setting can be selected manually. Related information • • Driver display (p. 79) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) Outside temperature gauge location in the 12-inch* and 8-inch driver display. The figure is schematic parts may vary depending on car model. If the car has been stationary, the gauge may display a temperature reading that is too high. When the outside temperature is in the range –5 °C to +2 °C (23 °F to 36 °F), a snowflake symbol lights up that warns of potentially slippery conditions. The symbol is also illuminated briefly in the head-up display*, if the car is equipped with one. * Option/accessory. 89 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Indicator symbols in the driver display The indicator symbols alert the driver that a function is activated, that a system is operating, or that a fault or abnormal condition has occurred. Symbol Specification Information, read display text When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the driver display. The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols. Fault in brake system The symbol lights up when there is a fault in the parking brake. ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function. 90 Symbol Specification Automatic brake on The symbol illuminates when the function is activated and the foot brake or parking brake is acting. The brake holds the car stationary when it has stopped. Tyre pressure system The symbol illuminates when tyre pressure is too low. If there is a fault in the tyre pressure system, the symbol will flash for approx. 1 minute and then illuminate with a constant glow. This may be because the system cannot detect or warn of low tyre pressure as intended. Emissions system If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. Symbol Specification Left and right-hand direction indicator The symbol flashes when the direction indicators are used. Position lamps The symbol lights up when the position lamps are switched on. Fault in the headlamp system The symbol illuminates if a fault has occurred in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights) or if another fault has occurred in the headlamp system. Active main beam on The symbol lights up blue when active main beam is on. Active main beam off The symbol lights up white when active main beam is off. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Symbol Specification Symbol Specification Symbol Specification Main beam On Rain sensor on Stability system, sport mode The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash. This symbol illuminates when the rain sensor is on. The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is activated. Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience. The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car. Active main beam on The symbol lights up blue when active main beam is on. Position lamps are switched on. Active main beam off The symbol lights up white when active main beam is off. Position lamps are switched on. Main beam On The symbol lights up when main beam and the position lamps are switched on. Preconditioning on The symbol illuminates when the engine block and passenger compartment heater/air conditioning are preconditioning the car. Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system. Lane assistance White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected. Front fog lamps on Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected. This symbol illuminates when the front fog lamp is switched on. Amber symbol: Lane assistance warns/intervenes. Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on. }} 91 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Symbol Specification Lane assistance and rain sensor White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected. Rain sensor is on. Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected. Rain sensor is on. AdBlue system (diesel) The symbol illuminates when the AdBlue level is low or in the event of a fault in the AdBlue system. Related information • • 92 Driver display (p. 79) Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 92) Warning symbols in the driver display The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated or that a serious fault or condition exists. Symbol Specification Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety or drivability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the driver display at the same time. The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols. Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates or flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt. Symbol Specification Airbags If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, a fault has been detected in one of the car's safety systems. Read the message in the driver display. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Visit the nearest authorised workshop to have the brake fluid level checked and rectified. Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied. A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen. Read the message in the driver display. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Symbol Specification Symbol Specification Low oil pressure Collision risk If this symbol illuminates while driving when the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. City Safety warns of a risk of collision with other vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists or large animals. Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. High engine temperature License agreement for the driver display A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following text is Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer or developer. The symbol switches on while driving when the temperature of the engine is too high. An explanatory text is shown on the driver display at the same time. Related information • Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 90) • Driver display (p. 79) }} 93 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || 94 Boost Software License 1.0 Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the "Software") to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following: The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a source language processor. THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derive from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project. }} 95 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || 96 FreeType Project License 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg Introduction The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: o We don't promise that this software works. However, we are be interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution) o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you've used the FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. Legal Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType engine'. This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType archive, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this. The FreeType project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below. 1. No Warranty THE FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license. 2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType code, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us. 3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors and contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. 4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o [email protected] Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation. o [email protected] Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current FreeType web page, which will allow you to download our latest development version and read online documentation. You can also contact us individually at: David Turner <[email protected]> Robert Wilhelm <[email protected]> Werner Lemberg <[email protected]> Libpng License This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail. COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: and with the following additions to the disclaimer: There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: Tom Lane If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence. Glenn Randers-Pehrson libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: Willem van Schaik Simon-Pierre Cadieux John Bowler Eric S. Raymond Kevin Bracey Gilles Vollant Sam Bushell }} 97 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. 1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented. 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following set of individuals: 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution. Andreas Dilger The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated. Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or 98 portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions: A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" boxes and the like: printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31). Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. Glenn Randers-Pehrson [email protected] April 15, 2002 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL MIT License Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders> Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. zlib License The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders> This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/ projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0. SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008) THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. }} 99 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc. Application menu in driver display Application menu (app menu) in the driver display provides quick access to commonly used functions for certain apps. Related information • Driver display (p. 79) App Functions Trip computer Selection of trip meter, selection of what to show in the driver display, etc. Media player Selection of active source for the media player. Phone Calling a contact from the call list. Navigation Guide to destination, etc. Related information The figure is schematic. The app menu in the driver display can be used instead of the centre display and is controlled using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel. The app menu makes it easier to switch between different apps or functions within the apps without having to let go of the steering wheel. App menu functions Different apps give access to different types of functions. The following apps and their associated functions can be controlled from the app menu: 100 • • • Driver display (p. 79) Overview of centre display (p. 106) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 101) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Handling the application menu in the driver display Opening/closing the app menu – The application menu (the app menu) in the driver display is operated with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Press on open/close (1). > The app menu opens/closes. NOTE It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message has to be confirmed first before the app menu can be opened. If the app menu is opened again, the functions of the most recently selected app are shown first. Related information • • Application menu in driver display (p. 100) Messages in the driver display (p. 102) The app menu closes automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain options have been selected. The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. The figure is schematic. Open/close Left/right Up/down Confirm Navigating and selecting in the app menu 1. Navigate between the apps by pressing on the left or right (2). > Functions for previous/next app are shown in the app menu. 2. Browse through the functions for the selected app by tapping on up or down (3). 3. Confirm or highlight an option for the function by pressing on confirm (4). > The function is activated and for some options the app menu then closes. 101 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Messages in the driver display buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example. The driver display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events. Examples of messages in the driver display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Examples of messages in the driver display4. Example of message in the 8-inch driver display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. The driver display shows messages that are of high priority for the driver. Messages can be shown in different parts of the driver display depending on what other information is currently being displayed. After a while, or when the message has been acknowledged/action taken if required, the message disappears from the driver display. If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car Status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or 4 With 102 12-inch driver display.* * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Service messages Shown below is a selection of important service messages and their meanings. Message Stop safelyA Turn off engineA Specification Service urgent Drive to workshopA Contact a workshopB to check the car immediately. Service requiredA Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible. Regular maintenance Book time for maintenance Regular maintenance Time for maintenance Specification Regular maintenance Time for regular service contact a workshopB. Shown when the service date has passed. Maintenance overdue Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB. Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB. Message Temporarily offA A B Managing messages in the driver display Messages in the driver display are handled using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again. Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Managing messages in the driver display (p. 103) • Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 104) • Message in centre display (p. 137) Examples of messages in the driver display5 and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Time for regular service contact a workshopB. Shown before the next service date. Time for regular service contact a workshopB. Shown at the next service date. }} 103 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || 2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm (2). > The message disappears from the driver display. For messages without buttons: – Examples of messages in the driver display6 and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Left/right Confirm Some messages in the driver display contain one or more buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example. Managing a new message For messages with buttons: 1. Navigate between the buttons by pressing on the left or right (1). 5 With 6 With 104 8-inch driver display. 12-inch driver display. Related information • Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display. Close the message by pressing on confirm (2), or allow the message to close automatically after a while. > The message disappears from the driver display. If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car Status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this. • • Handling a message saved from the driver display Messages in the driver display (p. 102) Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 104) Message in centre display (p. 137) Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app. Messages that are shown in the driver display and that need to be saved are added in the Car Status app in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Reading a saved message To read a saved message immediately: To book service for a saved message: – Press the button to the right of the Car message stored in Car Status application message in the centre display. > The saved message is shown in the Car Status app. – With Call to make Appointment: The phone app is initiated and calls a service centre to book service and repair work. To read a saved message later: 1. Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display. > The app is opened in the bottom tile of the home view. 2. Select the Messages tab in the app. > A list of saved messages is shown. 3. Tap on a message to expand/minimise. > More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically. Managing a saved message In maximised mode, some messages have two buttons available to book service or read the owner's manual. To read the owner's manual for a saved message: – In maximised mode for the message, press Owner's manual to read about the message in the owner's manual. > The owner's manual opens in the centre display and shows information linked to the message. Saved messages in the app are deleted automatically each time the engine is started. Related information • • • 7 In maximised mode for the message, press Request appoint./Call to make Appointment7 for help in booking service. > With Request appoint.: The Appointments tab opens in the app and creates a request to book service and repair work. Messages in the driver display (p. 102) Managing messages in the driver display (p. 103) Message in centre display (p. 137) Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered. 105 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Overview of centre display Many of the car's functions are controlled from the centre display. Presented here is the centre display and its options. 106 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively8. Function view - car functions that are activated or deactivated with a press. Certain 8 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars. functions are also so-called trigger functions, which means they open a window with setting options. Examples of these include Camera. Settings for the head-up }} 107 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || display* are also made from the function view, but adjustments are made using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Phone - the phone function can be reached from here. Tap on the subview to expand it. • • Home view - the first view that is shown when the screen is started. Extra subview - recently used apps or car functions that do not belong in any of the other subviews. Tap on the subview to expand it. • Application view (app view) - apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app. Status bar - the activities in the car are shown right at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media-related information, the clock and indication about on-going background activity are shown on the right. Top view - drag the tab down in order to access the top view. Settings, Owner's manual, Profile and the car's saved messages are accessed from here. In some cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation Settings) and the contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation Manual) can also be accessed in the top view. Navigation - leads to map navigation, with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview to expand it. Media - recently used apps associated with media. Tap on the subview to expand it. 108 Climate row - information and direct interaction to set temperature and seat heating for example*. Tap on the symbol in the centre of the climate row in order to open the climate view with more setting options. • • • • Climate controls (p. 211) Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display (p. 128) Changing the appearance in the centre display (p. 128) Changing system language (p. 129) Changing system units (p. 129) Cleaning the centre display (p. 637) Message in centre display (p. 137) Related information • • Managing the centre display (p. 109) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) • • • Function view in centre display (p. 119) • Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) • Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 130) • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19) Apps (p. 494) Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 121) Media player (p. 503) Phone (p. 519) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Managing the centre display Many of the car's functions are controlled and regulated from the centre display. The centre display is a touch screen that reacts to touch. Using the touch screen functionality in the centre display The screen reacts differently depending on whether you press, drag or swipe across it. Actions such as browsing between different views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and Procedure moving apps can be performed by touching the screen in different ways. An infrared light curtain just above the surface of the screen enables the screen to detect a finger that is just in front of the screen. This technology makes it possible to use the screen even with gloves on. Two people can interact with the screen at the same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver and passenger side respectively. IMPORTANT Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it. The table below presents the different procedures for operating the screen: Execution Result Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function. Press twice in quick succession. Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map. Press and hold. Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map. Press and hold your finger against the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location. Tap once with two fingers. Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map. }} 109 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Procedure Execution Result Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps or map points on the map. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen. Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen. Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open. 110 Drag apart Zooms in. Drag together Zooms out. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Returning to home view from another view 1. The control is used for many of the car's functions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one of the following: Briefly press the home button below the centre display. > The last position of the home view is shown. • drag the control to the desired temperature, • 2. Briefly press again. > All subviews of the home view are set to their default mode. tap on + or − in order to raise or lower the temperature gradually, or • tap on the desired temperature on the control. NOTE In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen. Related information The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it is possible to scroll in the view. • Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 112) Using the controls in the centre display • Moving apps and buttons in centre display (p. 121) • Keyboard in centre display (p. 123) Scrolling in a list, article or view When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it is possible to scroll downward or upward in the view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the view. Temperature control. 111 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Activating and deactivating centre display 1. The centre display can be dimmed and reactivated using the home button beneath the screen. Give a long press on the physical home button below the screen. > The screen goes dark except for the climate row, which continues to be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running. 2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the home button. > The view that was displayed before the screen was switched off will be shown again. NOTE The screen cannot be deactivated when a prompt to perform an action is shown on the screen. Home button for the centre display. The effect of using the home button that the screen dims and the touchscreen no longer reacts to touch. The climate row will still be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running, such as climate, audio, guidance* and apps. When the centre display is dimmed, it is a good opportunity to clean the screen. The dimming function can also be used to fade the screen so that it does not disturb while driving. NOTE The centre display deactivates automatically when the engine is off and the driver's door is opened. Related information • • • 112 Cleaning the centre display (p. 637) Changing the appearance in the centre display (p. 128) Navigating in the centre display's views There are five different basic views in the centre display: home view, top view, climate view, application view (app view) and function view. The screen is started automatically when the driver's door is opened. Home view Home view is the view that is shown when the screen is started. It consists of four subviews: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview. An app or car function selected from the app or function view starts in the respective subview of the home view. E.g. FM radio starts in the Media tile. The extra tile shows the last used app or car function that is not associated with any of the other three areas. The subviews show brief information about each different app. NOTE When the car is started, the home view's various sub-views show information on the current status of apps. Overview of centre display (p. 106) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL NOTE In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen. Status bar pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen. In the top view, access is always available to: • Settings • Owner's manual • Profile • The car's saved messages. The activities in the car are shown at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media-related information, the clock and indication that background activity is in progress are shown on the right. • Top view Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation Settings). Change settings directly in the top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is running. • Contextual Owner's Manual (e.g. Navigation Manual). Gain access directly in the top view to articles in the digital owner's manual that are related to the content displayed on screen. In the top view, access is given to the following in some cases: Climate view The climate row is always visible at the bottom of the screen. The most common climate settings can be made directly there, such as setting temperature and seat heating*. Press the symbol in the centre of the climate row to open the climate view and gain access to more climate settings. Press the symbol to close the climate view and return to the previous view. Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on the home button or at the bottom of the top view and drag upward. The underlying view is then visible and available for use again. NOTE Top view dragged down. A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at the top of the screen. Open the top view by The top view is not available during starting/shutdown or when a message is shown on the screen. It is also not available when climate view is shown. }} * Option/accessory. 113 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Application view number of unread text messages for Messages. Function view Tap on an app to open it. The app then opens in the tile to which it belongs, e.g. Media. You can scroll down in the app view, depending on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up. Go back to the home view again by swiping from left to right9 across the screen, or by pressing the home button. Application view with the car's apps. left9 Swipe from right to across the screen in order to access the application view (app view) from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Certain apps show brief information directly in the app view, such as the 9 Applies 114 The function view with buttons for different car functions. Swipe from left to right9 across the screen in order to access the function view from the home view. From here you can activate or deactivate different car functions, e.g. BLIS*, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*. to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Depending on the amount of functions, it is also possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up. Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with a press, a function is activated or deactivated by pressing the relevant function button. Some functions (trigger functions) open in a new window when pressed. Go back to the home view again by swiping from right to left9 across the screen, or by pressing the home button. Related information • Managing subviews in centre display (p. 116) • Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 121) • Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) • Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 130) • • • • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19) Driver profiles (p. 133) Climate controls (p. 211) Apps (p. 494) Function view in centre display (p. 119) Overview of centre display (p. 106) 9 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. 115 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Managing subviews in centre display Home view consists of four subviews: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview. These views can be expanded. 116 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Expanding a subview from default mode Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display. }} 117 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Expanding a subview: – For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone: Press anywhere on the subview. When a tile is expanded, the extra tile in the home view is temporarily forced away. The other two tiles are minimised and only certain information is shown. When the extra tile is tapped, the other three tiles are minimised and only certain information is displayed. When a new subview is opened in full-screen mode, no information from the other subviews is shown. In expanded mode, open the app in full screen - press on the symbol. Press on the symbol to go back to the expanded mode, or press the home button at the bottom of the screen. Closing an expanded subview: The subview can be closed in three different ways. • Tap on the upper part of the expanded subview. • Tap on another tile (this tile will then open in expanded mode instead). • Briefly press the physical home button below the centre display. Opening or closing a subview in full screen mode The extra tile10 and the tile for Navigation can be opened out in full screen mode, with even more information and more setting options. 10 118 Related information • • The expanded view provides access to the basic functions of the app. – There is always the option to go back to home view by pressing the home button. To go back to the home view's standard view from full screen mode – press twice on the home button. Home button for the centre display. Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile. • Managing the centre display (p. 109) Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 112) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Function view in centre display All the buttons for car functions are located in the function view, one of the centre display's basic views. Navigate to the function view from home view by swiping from left to right across the screen11. Different types of buttons There are three different types of buttons for car functions; see below: Type of button Property Affects car function Function buttons Have on/off positions. Most buttons in function view are function buttons. When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button. Press the button to activate/deactivate a function. Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions. When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it may be a window to change seat position. • Camera • Headrest Fold • Head-up Display Adjustments Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes. Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning. 11 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. • Park In • Park Out }} 119 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || The buttons' different modes When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a function or parking button, the function is activated. When a function is activated, extra text with an explanation for certain functions is shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and then the button is shown with the LED indicator illuminated. The function is deactivated when the LED indicator is extinguished. For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at certain speeds is shown, for example, when the button is depressed. Press the button once briefly to activate or deactivate the function. When a warning triangle is shown in the righthand section of the button there is something not working as intended. Related information • • 120 Managing the centre display (p. 109) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Moving apps and buttons in centre display NOTE Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by moving them to the bottom, off the visible screen. This way it will be easier to find the apps you use more often. The apps and buttons for car functions in the app view and function view respectively can be moved and organised as desired. 1. Swipe from right to left12 to access the app view, or swipe from left to right12 to access the function view. NOTE Apps and car function buttons cannot be added to locations that are already occupied. 2. Tap on an app or button and hold it down. > The app or button changes size and becomes slightly transparent. It is then possible to move it. 3. Drag the app or button to a vacant space in the view. The maximum number of rows available for use in order to position apps or buttons is 48. To move an app or button outside the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the view. New rows are then added, where the app or button can be located. Related information • • • Overview of the symbols that can be shown in the centre display's status bar. The status bar shows activities in progress and, in some cases, their status. Not all symbols are shown all the time due to the limited space in the status bar. Symbol Specification Connected to the Internet. Roaming activated. Function view in centre display (p. 119) Apps (p. 494) Managing the centre display (p. 109) An app or button can thus be located further down and is then not visible in the normal mode for the view. Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down in the view. 12 Symbols in the centre display's status bar Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. Signal strength in mobile phone network. Bluetooth device connected. Bluetooth activated but no device connected. Information sent to and from GPS. Connected to Wi-Fi network. Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). The car then shares the available connection. }} 121 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Symbol Specification Car modem activated. USB sharing active. • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 510) • • Phone (p. 519) Date and time (p. 88) Process in progress. Timer for preconditioning active. Audio source being played back. Audio source stopped. Phone call in progress. Audio source muted. News is received from the radio channel. Traffic information is received. Clock. Related information 122 • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) • • Message in centre display (p. 137) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Keyboard in centre display The centre display keyboard makes it possible make entries using keys. It is also possible to "draw in" letters and characters on the screen by hand. The keyboard can be used to enter characters, letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages from the car, enter passwords or search for articles in the digital owner's manual. The keyboard is only shown when entries can be made on the screen. }} 123 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the keyboard is being used. 124 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Row of suggested words or characters13. The suggested words are adjusted as new letters are being entered. Browse among the suggestions by pressing on the right and left arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note that this function is not supported by all language selections. If not available, the row will not be shown on the keyboard. The characters available on the keyboard depend on which language was selected (see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it. The button works in different ways, depending on the context in which the keyboard is used - either to enter @ (when an email address is entered) or to create a new row (for normal text input). Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown. Used to enter capital letters. Press again to enter one capital letter and then continue with lower-case letters. Another press makes all letters capital letters. The next press restores the keyboard to lowercase letters. In this mode, the first letter after a full stop, exclamation mark or question mark is a capital letter. The first letter in the text field is also a capital letter. In text fields intended for names or 13 addresses, each word automatically starts with a capital letter. In text fields for password, web address or email address entry, all letters are automatically lower case unless otherwise set with the button. Variants of a letter or character Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then shown with numbers. Press , which in number mode is shown instead of , to return to the letter keyboard, or to open the keyboard with special characters. Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The available characters and word suggestions (1) vary depending on the selected language. To make it possible to change languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings. Space. Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes one character at a time. Hold the button depressed to delete characters more quickly. Changes keyboard mode to write letters and characters by hand instead. Pressing the confirmation button above the keypad (not visible in the illustration) confirms the entered text. The appearance of the button differs depending on context. Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can be entered by holding down the letter or character. A box is displayed showing possible variants of letters or characters. Press the required variant. If no variant is selected, the original letter/character is entered. Related information • Changing keyboard language in centre display (p. 126) • Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 126) • • Managing the centre display (p. 109) Managing text messages (p. 524) Applies to Asiatic languages. 125 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Changing keyboard language in centre display Switching between different languages in the keyboard When a number of languages have been selected in Settings, the button in the keyboard is used to switch between the different languages. To make it possible to switch between different languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings. Adding or deleting languages in settings The keyboard is automatically set to the same languages as the system language. The keyboard language can be manually adapted without affecting the system language. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press System System Languages and Units Keyboard Layouts. 3. Select one or more languages from the list. > It is now possible to switch between the selected languages directly from the keyboard for text input. If no languages have been actively selected under Settings, the keyboard retains the same language as the car's system language. To change keyboard language with list: 1. Give a long press on the button. > A list opens. To change the keyboard language without displaying the list: – • • 126 Applies to certain system languages. The centre display keyboard allows you to enter characters, letters and words on the screen by "drawing" by hand. Press the button on the keyboard to change from typing with the keys to entering letters and characters by hand. 2. Select the required language. If more than four languages have been selected under Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list from the keyboard. > The keyboard is adapted to the selected language and other word suggestions are given. One short press of the button. > The keyboard is adapted to the next language in the list without displaying the list. Related information 14 Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display Changing system language (p. 129) Keyboard in centre display (p. 123) Area for writing characters/letters/words/ parts of word. The text field where the characters or word suggestions14 appear as they are written on screen (1). DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Suggestions for characters/letters/word/ part of word. It is possible to scroll through the list. Space. A space can also be created by entering a dash (-) in the area for handwritten letters (1). See the heading "Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition" below. Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete one character/one letter at a time. Wait a moment before pressing again to delete the next character/letter, etc. Return to the keyboard with regular character input. Switch off/on sound when entering. Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown. Change text input language. 15 Writing characters/letters/words by hand 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of a word in the area for hand-written letters (1). Write a word or parts of a word above each other or on a line. > A number of suggested characters, letters or words is shown (3). The most likely choice is found at the top of the list. IMPORTANT Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it. 2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a moment. > The character/letter/word at the top of the list is entered. It is also possible to select a different character by pressing the required character, letter or word in the list. For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space. Deleting/changing characters/letters written by hand Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping across the handwriting field (1). – There are several options for deleting/ changing characters/letters: • Press the intended letter or word in the list (3). • Press the text undo button (5) to delete the letter and begin again. • Swipe horizontally from right to left15 over the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete multiple letters by swiping over the area several times. • Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes all of the entered text. }} 127 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Changing row in the free text field with handwriting Changing the appearance in the centre display The appearance of the screen in the centre display can be changed by selecting a theme. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Themes. Displays Display 3. Then select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or Chrome Rings. Change row by hand by drawing the above character in the handwriting field16. Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition As a supplement to these appearances, it is possible to choose between Normal and Bright. With Normal, the screen background is dark and the text is light. This alternative is the default for all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in which the background is light and the text is dark. This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong daylight. This alternative is always available for the user and is not affected by the surrounding lighting. Related information Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right17. • Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) • Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 112) • Cleaning the centre display (p. 637) Related information • 16 17 128 Keyboard in centre display (p. 123) For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed. For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left. Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display The centre display can be used to change the volume of the system sound or switch off the system sound altogether. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Sound System Volumes. 3. Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to change the volume/switch off screen touch sounds. Drag the control to the desired volume. Related information • • • Overview of centre display (p. 106) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) Audio settings (p. 492) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Changing system units Changing system language Units settings are defined in the centre display's Settings menu. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. Language settings are defined in the centre display menu Settings. NOTE Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner's information is not compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back through the screen structure. 2. Continue to System System Languages and Units Units of Measurement. 3. Select a unit standard: • Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees Other settings in the centre display's top view You can change settings and information for many of the car's functions via the centre display. 1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab at the top or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen. 2. Press Settings to open the settings menu. Celsius. • Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees 1. Celsius. • US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahrenheit. > The units in the driver display, centre display and head-up display are changed. Related information • • • Overview of centre display (p. 106) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) Changing system language (p. 129) Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Continue to System System Languages and Units. 3. Select System Language. Languages that support voice recognition have a voice recognition symbol. > The language in the driver display, centre display and head-up display is changed. Related information • • • Overview of centre display (p. 106) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) Changing system units (p. 129) Top view with button for Settings. 3. Press on one of the categories and the subcategories to navigate to the required setting. 4. Change one or more settings. Different types of setting are changed in different ways. > The changes are saved immediately. }} 129 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Open contextual setup in the centre display 2. Press Navigation Settings. > A navigation settings page opens. It is possible to use contextual setup for most of the car's basic apps so that you can change settings directly in the top view in the centre display. 3. Change settings as desired and confirm the selections. Press Close or the physical home button beneath the centre display to close setup view. Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all. Third party apps A subcategory in the settings menu with different types of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio buttons). Third party apps are not included in the car's system from the beginning, but are the type that can be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings are always made inside the app and not from the top view. Related information • • • Overview of centre display (p. 106) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 131) Table showing centre display settings (p. 132) Top view with button for contextual setting. Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing a specific setting relating to the active function shown on screen. The apps installed in the car from the beginning, e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and are part of the car's embedded functions. The settings for these apps can be changed directly via contextual setting in the top view. When contextual setup is available: 1. 130 Drag down top view when an app is in expanded mode, e.g. Navigation. Related information • • • • Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) Overview of centre display (p. 106) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 131) Downloading apps (p. 495) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Resetting user data for change of ownership Resetting settings in the centre display In the event of a change of ownership, user data and system settings should be restored to factory settings. The settings in the car can be reset at different levels. Restore all user data and system settings to the original factory settings in the event of a change of ownership. In the event of a change of ownership it is also important to change the owner of the Volvo On Call* service. It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings defined in the centre display settings menu. Related information • Reset Personal Settings - clears per- • Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 131) • Resetting settings in the driver profiles (p. 136) 4. Press OK to confirm the reset. For Reset Personal Settings, the reset must be confirmed by pressing Reset for the active profile or Reset for all profiles. > Selected settings are reset. Two types of reset There are two different types of resets for settings in the settings menu: • Factory reset - clears all data and files and resets all settings to their default values. sonal data and resets personal settings to their default values. Related information • • • Overview of centre display (p. 106) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) Table showing centre display settings (p. 132) Resetting settings Follow these instructions to reset your settings. NOTE Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Continue to System Factory reset. 3. Select the required reset type. > A pop-up window is shown. * Option/accessory. 131 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Table showing centre display settings The settings menu in the centre display has a number of main categories and subcategories where settings and information for many of the car's functions are collected. There are seven main categories: My Car, Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication, Climate and System. In turn, each category contains a number of subcategories and setting options. The tables below show the first level of subcategories. The setting options for a function or area are described in more detail in the corresponding section of the owner's manual. Some settings are personal, which means that they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other settings are global, which means they are not linked to a driver profile. My Car Subcategories Displays Subcategories Subcategories Locking TV* Parking Brake and Suspension Video Wipers Sound Communication Subcategories Subcategories Phone Tone Text Messages Balance Android Auto* System Volumes Apple CarPlay* Navigation Bluetooth Devices Subcategories Wi-Fi Map Car Wi-Fi Hotspot Route and Guidance Car Modem Internet* Traffic Volvo On Call* Media Volvo Service Networks IntelliSafe Subcategories Climate Drive Preferences/Individual Drive Mode* AM/FM radio The main category Climate has no subcategories. Lights and Lighting Gracenote® DAB* Mirrors and Convenience 132 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL System Subcategories Driver Profile Date and Time System Languages and Units Privacy and Data Keyboard Layouts Voice Control* Factory reset System Information Related information • • • Overview of centre display (p. 106) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 131) Driver profiles Many of the settings made in the car can be adapted according to the driver's personal preferences and can be saved in one or more driver profiles. The personal settings are automatically saved in the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the car is adapted to the settings of that specific driver profile. What settings are saved in the driver profiles? Many of the settings defined in the car will be saved automatically in the active driver profile unless the profile is protected. In the car, the settings defined are either personal or global. Only personal settings are saved in driver profiles. Settings that can be saved in a driver profile include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors, front seats, navigation*, audio and media system, language and voice control. Some settings, referred to as global settings, can be changed but are not saved to a specific driver profile. Changes to global settings affect all profiles. files. They remain the same regardless of which driver profile is active. Keyboard layout settings are an example of global settings. If driver profile X is used to add additional languages to the keyboard, these remain available for use even if driver profile Y is used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved to a specific driver profile - the settings are global. Personal preferences If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre display brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X - the brightness setting is a personal setting. Related information • • • Selecting driver profile (p. 134) Renaming a driver profile (p. 134) Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 135) • • Protect driver profile (p. 135) • Table showing centre display settings (p. 132) Resetting settings in the driver profiles (p. 136) Global settings The global settings and parameters are not changed when changing between driver pro- * Option/accessory. 133 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Selecting driver profile When the centre display has been started, the selected driver profile is shown at the top of the screen. The driver profile last used is the one that will be active next time the car is unlocked. It is possible to change to another driver profile after the car has been unlocked. However, if the remote control key has been linked to a driver profile then this is what is selected when the car is started. There are two options for changing to another driver profile. Option 1: 1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown in the top of the centre display when the display has been started. > A list of selectable driver profiles is shown. 2. Select the driver profile required. 3. Press Confirm. > The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver profile. Option 2: 1. Drag down the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Profile. > The same list as for Option 1 is shown. 134 3. Select the driver profile required. Renaming a driver profile 4. Press Confirm. > The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver profile. It is possible to change the name of the different driver profiles used in the car. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. Option 3: 2. Press System 1. 3. Select Edit Profile. > A menu opens, where the profile can be edited. Drag down the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 3. Press System Driver Profiles. > A list of selectable driver profiles is shown. 4. Select the driver profile required. > The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver profile. 4. Tap in the box Profile Name. > A keyboard appears, and it is possible to to change the name. Tap on close the keyboard. 5. Save the name change by pressing Back or Close. > The name has now been changed. NOTE Related information • • • • A profile name cannot start with a space, as the profile name will not then be saved. Driver profiles (p. 133) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) Renaming a driver profile (p. 134) Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 135) Driver Profiles. Related information • • Selecting driver profile (p. 134) Keyboard in centre display (p. 123) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Protect driver profile In some cases it is preferable not to save various settings defined in the car to the active driver profile. In this case, it is possible to protect the driver profile. NOTE Protecting a driver profile is only possible when the car is stationary. To protect a driver profile: 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press System Driver Profiles. 3. Select Edit Profile. > A menu opens, where the profile can be edited. 4. Select Protect Profile to protect the profile. 5. Save your profile protection option by pressing Back/Close. > When the profile is protected, settings defined in the car will not be saved automatically to the profile. Instead, your changes must be saved manually under Settings System Driver Profiles Edit Profile by pressing Save current settings to the profile. When the profile is unprotected, on the other hand, your settings will be saved automatically to the profile. Related information • Driver profiles (p. 133) Linking remote control key to driver profile It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. The driver profile along with all of its settings will then be automatically selected every time the car is used with that specific remote control key. The first time the remote control key is used, it is not linked to any specific driver profile. When the car is started, the Guest profile will automatically be activated. A driver profile can be selected manually without linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked, the last active driver profile is activated. Once the key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver profile does not need to be selected when that specific key is used. Linking a remote control key to a driver profile NOTE Connecting a remote control key to a driver profile is only possible when the car is stationary. First select the profile to be linked to the key, if the profile to be linked is not already active. }} 135 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || The active profile can then be linked to the key. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press System Driver Profiles. 3. Select the desired profile. The display returns to the home view. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a key. 5. Select Connect key to link the profile with the key. It is not possible to link a driver profile to a different key than the one currently being used in the car. If there are multiple keys in the car, the message More than one key is found, put the key you want to connect on backup reader will be displayed. 4. Drag down the top view again and tap on Settings System Driver Profiles Edit Profile. Resetting settings in the driver profiles Settings that have been saved to one or more driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary. NOTE Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press System Factory reset Personal Settings. Reset 3. Select one of the options Reset for the active profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel. Backup reader's location in the tunnel console. > When the message Profile connected to key is shown, the key and the driver profile are linked. 6. Press OK. > This key is now linked to the driver profile and will remain linked as long as the Connect key box is not unticked. Related information • • • 136 Driver profiles (p. 133) Renaming a driver profile (p. 134) Remote control key (p. 241) Related information • • Driver profiles (p. 133) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 131) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Message in centre display The centre display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events. Pop-up messages In some cases, a message is shown in the form of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have higher priority than messages shown in the status bar and require acknowledgement/ action before they disappear. Managing messages in the centre display Messages in the centre display are handled in centre display views. Related information • Managing messages in the centre display (p. 137) • Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 138) • Messages in the driver display (p. 102) Example of a message in the centre display's top view. Example of a message in the centre display's top view. The centre display shows messages that are of lower priority for the driver. Some messages in the centre display have a button (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message. Most messages are shown above the centre display's status bar. After a while, or when any required action related to the message has been taken, the message disappears from the status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display. Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or a button for activating/deactivating a function linked to the message. }} 137 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Managing a new message For messages with buttons: – Press the button to perform the action or allow the message to close automatically after a while. > The message disappears from the status bar. Handling a message saved from the centre display Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display. Managing a saved message Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message. For messages without buttons: – Close the message by tapping on it, or allow the message to close automatically after a while. > The message disappears from the status bar. – Related information 138 Message in centre display (p. 137) • Messages in the driver display (p. 102) Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 138) Press the button to perform the action. Saved messages in the top view are deleted automatically when the car is switched off. Related information If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display. • • 2. Tap on a message to expand/minimise. > More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically. Examples of saved messages and possible options in the top view. Messages that are shown in the centre display that need to be saved are added in the top view of the centre display. Reading a saved message 1. Open the top view in the centre display. > A list of saved messages is shown. Messages with an arrow to the right can be maximised. • • Message in centre display (p. 137) • Messages in the driver display (p. 102) Managing messages in the centre display (p. 137) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Head-up display* The head-up display supplements the car's driver display and projects information from the driver display onto the windscreen. The projected image can only be seen from the driver position. NOTE The driver's ability to see the information in the head-up display is impaired by the following • • use of polarising sunglasses a driving position which means that the driver is not sitting centred in the seat • objects on the display unit's cover glass • unfavourable light conditions. Examples of what can be shown in the display. Speed IMPORTANT The head-up display shows warnings and information relating to speed, cruise control functions, navigation, etc. in the driver's field of vision. Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls can also be shown in the head up display. The display unit from which the information is projected is located in the instrument panel. To avoid damage to the display unit's cover glass - do not store any objects on the cover glass and make sure that no objects fall down onto it. Cruise control Navigation Road signs A number of symbols can be shown temporarily in the head-up display, e.g.: If the warning symbol illuminates read the warning message in the driver display. If the information symbol illuminates - read the message in the driver display. }} * Option/accessory. 139 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || The snowflake symbol illuminates in the event of a risk of icy conditions. NOTE Certain visual defects may cause headaches and a feeling of stress during the use of the head-up display. City Safety in the head-up display In the event of a collision warning, the information in the head-up display is replaced by the warning symbol for City Safety. This graphic is illuminated even if the head-up display is switched off. Related information • Activating and deactivating the head-up display* (p. 140) • • Cleaning the head up display* (p. 638) Head up display when replacing the windscreen* (p. 607) Activating and deactivating the head-up display* The head-up display can be activated and deactivated when the car has been started. Press the Head-up Display button in the centre display function view. An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. Related information • • Settings for head-up display* (p. 141) Head-up display* (p. 139) The warning symbol for City Safety flashes in order to attract the driver's attention if there is a risk of collision. 140 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Settings for head-up display* Adjust the settings for the head-up display's projection onto the windscreen. Settings can be defined when the car has been started and a projected image is shown on the windscreen. Adjusting brightness and vertical position 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Displays Display Options. Head-Up Confirm The brightness of the graphics is automatically adapted to their background light conditions. The brightness is also affected by the adjustment of the brightness in the car's other displays. Selecting display options Select which functions are to be shown in the head-up display. Lowering the position 1. Press the Head-up Display Adjustments button in the centre display function view. 2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of the projected image in the driver's field of vision using the steering wheel's righthand keypad. The height position can be stored in the memory function for the power* front seat using the keypad in the driver's door. 3. Select one or more functions: • • • • Show Navigation Show Road Sign Information Show Driver Support Show Phone The setting is saved as a personal setting in the driver profile. Reducing the brightness Increasing the brightness Raising the position }} * Option/accessory. 141 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Calibrate the horizontal position Related information The head-up display's horizontal position may need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display unit is replaced. Calibration means that the projected image is rotated clockwise or anticlockwise. • • 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up Display Options Head-Up Display Calibration. 3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with the steering wheel's right keypad. • • Head-up display* (p. 139) Activating and deactivating the head-up display* (p. 140) Driver profiles (p. 133) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) Voice recognition Voice control18 allows you to control functions in the car, e.g. climate system, radio or a Bluetooth-connected phone with spoken commands. In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the navigation system can also be controlled with voice recognition. What is voice control? Voice control is an aid that can facilitate the use of different commands in your car. In principle, it works like a normal application in which you enter information in a fixed sequence in order to perform a task, but instead of typing on a keyboard you use voice commands. It may therefore be a good idea to learn how, and in what order, a voice command should be spoken in order to achieve the desired result. The voice control system allows you to control certain infotainment and climate functions using voice commands. The system can respond with speech and by showing information in the driver display. WARNING Rotate anticlockwise Rotate clockwise The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road. Confirm 142 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Using voice recognition • Start voice control19 Voice control system microphone System updating The voice recognition system is continuously improved. It is recommended to always have the latest version installed. Download updates from support.volvocars.com. Related information To give commands via the voice control system, you have a "dialogue" with the system. Depress the steering wheel button for voice recognition to activate the system and initiate a dialogue using voice commands. After you have pressed the button, a beep tone can be heard and the voice control symbol is shown in the driver display. This shows that the system has started to listen and you can start to say the commands. As soon as you start to talk, the system is trained to recognise and understand your voice. This takes several seconds and is done automatically, which means that you do not need to start any voice training manually. • • Using voice recognition (p. 143) Remember the following: Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 145) • Speak after the tone with a normal voice at a normal tempo. • • Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) • Do not speak while the system is replying (the system cannot understand commands during this time). • Settings for voice recognition (p. 146) 18 19 Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 202) Applies to certain markets. Applies to certain markets. Avoid background noise in the passenger compartment by having the doors, windows and panoramic roof* closed. In general, the system works by listening for a basic command which is followed by more detailed commands that specify what you want the system to do. To change the system audio volume, turn the rotary volume knob when the voice speaks. It is possible to use other buttons during voice control. However, other sounds will be silenced during dialogue with the system, which means that it is not possible to execute any functions linked with audio using the buttons. Cancel voice control Voice control can be cancelled in different ways: • • Tap briefly on and say "Cancel". Give a long press on the steering wheel until you hear button for voice control two beeps. This stops voice recognition even when the system is speaking. Voice control is also cancelled if you do not reply during a dialogue. The system will first ask for a reply three times and if there is still }} * Option/accessory. 143 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || no response then voice control will be cancelled automatically. To speed up communication and skip the prompts from the system, press the steering . This canwheel button for voice control cels the system voice and you can say the next command. Commands for specific functions such as phone and radio are described in specific sections. Digits The number commands are stated differently depending on the function to be controlled: • Example of voice recognition control 1. Press . 2. Say "Call [Forename] [Surname] [number category]", e.g. "Call Robin Smith Mobile". > The system dials the selected contact from the phonebook. If the contact has several phone numbers (e.g. home, mobile, work), the right category must be referred to. • Commands/phrases • The following commands can generally be used, regardless of the situation: • "Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction in the ongoing dialogue. • • "Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.20 20 144 "Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system replies with the commands available in the current situation, a prompt or an example. Phone numbers and postcodes must be spoken individually, number by number, e.g. "zero, three, one, two, two, four, four, three" (03122443). House numbers can be spoken individually or in groups, e.g. "two, two" or "twenty-two" (22). For English and Dutch, several groups can be said in sequence, e.g. "twenty-two, twenty-two" (22 22). For English, double or triple can be used, e.g. "double zero" (00). Numbers can be given within the range 0-2300. To change the speed or activate/deactivate repetition mode: 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press System select settings. • Repeat Voice Command • Speech Rate Related information • • • • • Voice recognition (p. 142) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 145) Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 202) Settings for voice recognition (p. 146) Frequencies can be spoken as "ninety eight point eight" (98.8), "a hundred and four point two" or "hundred four point two" (104.2). Speed and repetition mode It is possible to adjust the speed if the system is speaking too quickly. Repetition mode can be enabled so that the system repeats what you have said. Note that this only stops the dialogue when the system is not speaking. To do that, give a long press on Voice Control and until two beep tones are heard. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Controlling a telephone with voice recognition21 Call a contact, have messages read aloud or dictate brief messages with voice control commands to a Bluetooth connected telephone. To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice recognition command must include contact information that is entered in the phone book. If a contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers then the number category can also be stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin Smith Mobile". Press mands: message. For this function to work, the car must be connected to the Internet. Related information • • • • • • Voice recognition (p. 142) Using voice recognition (p. 143) Voice control of radio and media23 Commands for radio and media player device control are shown below. Tap on and say one of the following commands: Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) • Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 202) "Media" - starts a dialogue for media and radio and shows examples of commands. • "Play [artist]" - plays back music by the selected artist. • "Play [song title]" - plays back the selected song. • "Play [song title] from [album]" - plays back the selected song from the selected album. Settings for voice recognition (p. 146) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) and say one of the following com- • "Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact from the phone book. • "Play [TV channel name]" - starts the selected TV channel*24. • "Call [phone number]" - dials the phone number. • "Play [radio station]" - starts playing back the selected radio channel. "Recent calls" - displays the call list. • "Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected radio frequency in the current frequency band. If no radio source is active, the FM band is started by default. • "Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" starts the selected radio frequency in the selected frequency band. • "Radio" - starts FM radio. • • • 21 22 23 "Read message" - message is read out. If there are several messages - select which message should be read out. "Message to [contact]" – the user is requested to say a brief message. The message is then repeated aloud and the user can choose to send22 or revise the Applies to certain markets. Only certain phones can send messages via the car. For information on which phones are compatible, see support.volvocars.com. Applies to certain markets. }} * Option/accessory. 145 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || • • • • • • • • • "Radio FM" - starts FM radio. "Radio AM" - starts AM radio.25 "DAB " - starts DAB radio*. "TV" - starts playback from TV*24. "CD" - starts playback from CD*. "USB" - starts playback from USB. "iPod" - starts playback from iPod. "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Bluetooth-connected media source. "Similar music" - plays back music similar to the music currently playing back from USB devices. Related information • • • Voice recognition (p. 142) Using voice recognition (p. 143) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 145) • Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 202) • Settings for voice recognition (p. 146) Settings for voice recognition26 Related information Settings for the voice control system are selected here. • • • Settings System Voice Control Settings can be made within the following areas: • • Repeat Voice Command • Gender • Speech Rate • • • Voice recognition (p. 142) Using voice recognition (p. 143) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 145) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 202) Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) Audio settings (p. 492) Changing system language (p. 129) Audio settings Select audio settings under: Settings Sound Voice Control System Volumes Language settings Voice recognition is not possible for all languages. Languages available for voice recognition are marked with an icon in the language . list Changing the language also affects menu, message and help texts. Settings System System Languages and Units System Language 24 25 26 146 Applies to certain markets. Availability varies depending on model and/or market. Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. LIGHTING LIGHTING Lighting control The different lighting controls are used to control both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior lighting. The interior brightness is adjusted using a thumbwheel on the instrument panel. Exterior lighting Position Specification Position Daytime running lights. Specification Daytime running lights and position lamps in daylight. Main beam flash can be used. Dipped beam and position lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated. Daytime running lights and position lamps. Position lamps when the car is parked.A The Active main beam function can be activated. Main beam flash can be used. Dipped beam and position lamps. Main beam can be activated. Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on. Main beam flash can be used. Main beam flash can be used. Active main beam on/off. A Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch. When the car's electrical system is in ignition position II, the following functions are available for the rotating ring's different positions: 148 If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be position from another position to switch moved to on only the position lamps instead of other lighting. Volvo recommends that when the vehicle is driven. mode is used * Option/accessory. LIGHTING WARNING The car's lighting system is not able to determine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations. The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suitable for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations. Thumbwheel in instrument panel • • • • • • • • • Using direction indicators (p. 154) Using main beam (p. 152) Dipped beam (p. 151) Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 156) Rear fog lamp (p. 157) Active bending lights* (p. 155) Brake lights (p. 157) Adjusting light functions via the centre display Several light functions can be adjusted and activated via the centre display. This applies to active main beam, home safe lighting and approach light, for example. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. Emergency brake lights (p. 158) 2. Press My Car Hazard warning flashers (p. 158) 3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior Lighting and then select the function that needs to be adjusted. Lights and Lighting. Related information • • • • • • Thumbwheel (to left) for adjusting interior brightness. • Lighting control (p. 148) Active main beam (p. 153) Using home safe lighting (p. 159) Approach light duration (p. 159) Using direction indicators (p. 154) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) Function view in centre display (p. 119) Related information • Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 149) • • Interior lighting (p. 159) Position lamps (p. 150) * Option/accessory. 149 LIGHTING Adapting the headlamp pattern from the headlamps The headlamp pattern can be reset when changing from right to left-hand traffic, and vice versa. This function adapts the light from the headlamps to reduce the risk of dazzling oncoming traffic. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. Position lamps Position lamps can be used so that other road users can see the car if it stops or is parked. The position lamp is switched on with the rotating ring on the stalk switch. 3. Select Temporary Right Hand Traffic/ Temporary Left Hand Traffic. NOTE Related information • Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 129) • • Function view in centre display (p. 119) Active bending lights* (p. 155) When driving for more than 30 seconds at max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime running lights are switched on. The driver . should turn to a position other than If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside, the rear position lamps come on (if not already switched on) to warn road users approaching from behind. This takes place irrespective of the position of the rotating ring or the ignition position of the car's electrical system. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Exterior Lights. Active bending lights are not available when the headlamp pattern is temporarily adapted from left to right-hand traffic, or vice-versa. position from another position to switch on only the position lamps instead of other lighting. Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position. Turn the rotating ring to the position the position lamps are switched on (number plate lighting is switched on at the same time). Related information • • Lighting control (p. 148) Ignition positions (p. 420) If the car's electrical system is in ignition position II then the daytime running lights are switched on instead of the front position lamps. When the rotating ring is in this position, the position lamps are switched on regardless of the ignition position of the car's electrical system. If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be moved to the position lamp 150 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Daytime running lights The car has sensors that detect the light conditions in the surroundings. The daytime running lights are switched on when the rotating , ring on the stalk switch is in position or as well as when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II. In position , the headlamps change automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness. beam also takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated. WARNING This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain. Dipped beam When driving with the stalk switch's rotating position, dipped beam is ring in the activated automatically in weak daylight or darkness or when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II. The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct beam pattern for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations. Related information • • • Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position. If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the position, the daytime running lights (DRL1) are switched on when the car is driven in daylight. The car automatically changes lighting from daytime running light to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness. Changing to dipped 1 Lighting control (p. 148) Ignition positions (p. 420) Dipped beam (p. 151) Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position. With the stalk switch's rotating ring in position, dipped beam is also activated automatically if: • • • the front fog lamps* are activated the rear fog lamp is activated the front and rear fog lamps are activated With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the position, dipped beam is always acti- }} Daytime Running Lights * Option/accessory. 151 LIGHTING || vated when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II. Tunnel detection The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel and switches from daytime running lights to dipped beam. Using main beam Main beam is operated with the left-hand stalk switch. Main beam is the car's strongest lighting and should be used when driving in the dark for better visibility, as long as it does not dazzle other road users. Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch must be in mode for tunnel detection to work. Lighting control (p. 148) Daytime running lights (p. 151) Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring. Main beam flash Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main beam flash position. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released. Main beam Main beam can be activated when the steering wheel stalk switch's rotating ring 2 or is in position . Activate 152 dipped beam is activated. When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the driver display. • • Ignition positions (p. 420) 2 When Deactivate by moving the stalk switch backwards. Related information Related information • • • main beam by moving the stalk switch forwards. Lighting control (p. 148) Active main beam (p. 153) LIGHTING Active main beam Activate active main beam Active main beam is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam. Active main beam is activated and deactivated by turning the left-hand stalk switch to posi. The rotating ring then returns to tion position . When active main beam is illuminates with a activated, the symbol white glow in the driver display. When main beam is activated, the symbol shines blue. If active main beam is deactivated while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to dipped beam. Adaptive functionality The symbol represents active main beam. The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can also take streetlights into account. When the camera sensor no longer detects any oncoming car or car in front, main beam is switched on again after about a second. 3 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 4 Depending on the car's equipment level. For cars with LED3 headlamps*, active main beam has adaptive functionality4. In this case, unlike what happens during conventional dimming, the light beam continues to illuminate with main beam on both sides of oncoming traffic or vehicles ahead – only the part of the light beam that points directly to the vehicle is dimmed. Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both sides of the vehicle. The main beam is partly dimmed, i.e. if the light beam shines with slightly more than in the driver dipped beam, the symbol display shines blue. Limitations for active main beam The camera sensor on which the function is based has limitations. }} * Option/accessory. 153 LIGHTING || If this symbol is shown in the driver display, together with the message Active High Beam Temporarily unavailable, then switching between main and dipped beam must be persymbol extinformed manually. The guishes when these message are shown. • Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Using direction indicators The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved. The same applies if this symbol is shown together with the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual. Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When active main beam becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked, the message goes out and the symbol illuminates. Direction indicators. WARNING Active main beam is an aid for using the optimum beam pattern when conditions are favourable. The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require. Related information • • 154 Lighting control (p. 148) Using main beam (p. 152) Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. If the function is deactivated via the centre display, the lamps will flash once. LIGHTING NOTE This automatic flashing sequence can be stopped by moving the stalk switch immediately in the opposite direction. • If the symbol for direction indicators in the driver display flashes more quickly than normal - see the message in the driver display. • Active bending lights* Active bending lights are designed to provide additional illumination in bends and junctions. Cars with LED5 headlamps* can have active bending lights, depending on the car's equipment level. The function is only active in weak daylight or darkness and only when the car is moving and dipped beam is switched on. Deactivating/activating the function The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be deactivated/ activated via the centre display's function view. Press the Active Bending Lights button. Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to its end position. The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement. Related information Related information • • Hazard warning flashers (p. 158) Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 149) Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively. • Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 149) • Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 156) Active bending lights follow steering wheel movements to provide additional illumination in bends and junctions and can thereby provide the driver with improved visibility. The function is activated automatically when the car is started. In the event of a fault in the function, the symbol illuminates in the driver display at the same time as the driver display shows an explanatory text. 5 LED (Light Emitting Diode) * Option/accessory. 155 LIGHTING Front fog lamps/cornering lights* The fog lights are activated manually when driving in fog and automatically when reversing in order to complement the reversing light. If the car is fitted with cornering lights*, the fog lights come on automatically in dull daylight or darkness in order to light up the area diagonally in front of the car. The front fog lamps switch off automatically when the car is switched off or when the rotating ring on the stalk switch is set to the position. NOTE Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary from country to country. Related information • • • • • Lighting control (p. 148) Ignition positions (p. 420) Rear fog lamp (p. 157) Active bending lights* (p. 155) Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 149) Cornering lights* The front fog lamps can include the cornering lights function, which temporarily illuminates the area diagonally in front of the car in the direction the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the direction indicators. Button for front fog lamps. The rear fog lamps can only be switched on when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II and the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position , or . Press the button to activate and deactivate. symbol illuminates in the driver disThe play when the front fog lamps are switched on. 156 The function is activated in weak daylight or darkness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in the or position and the speed of the car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph). In addition, both cornering lights are switched on as a supplement to the reversing lamp during reversing. The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be activated and deactivated via the centre display. * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than the normal rear lights and should only be used in reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or dust so that other road users have an early warning of a vehicle ahead. Press the button to switch the lights on/off. symbol in the driver display illumiThe nates when the rear fog lamp is switched on. The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when: • the car is switched off or when the rotating ring on the stalk switch is set to the position • the stalk switch's rotating ring is in posiand the front fog lamps are tion switched off. Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking. The brake light is illuminated when the brake pedal is depressed and when the car is braked automatically by one of the driver support systems. Related information • • • Emergency brake lights (p. 158) Brake functions (p. 423) Driving support systems (p. 284) NOTE Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country. Button for rear fog lamp. The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the car, on the driver's side. The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when: • ignition position II is active and the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position or • the stalk switch's rotating ring is in posiand the front fog lamps are tion switched on. Related information • • • Lighting control (p. 148) Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 156) Ignition positions (p. 420) * Option/accessory. 157 LIGHTING Emergency brake lights Hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about heavy braking. Hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indicators being activated simultaneously. The function can be used to give a warning in the event of traffic hazards. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking shining with a constant glow. The emergency brake lights are activated during heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at high speeds. Related information • • • 158 Brake lights (p. 157) Foot brake (p. 423) Hazard warning flashers (p. 158) Regulations for the use of hazard warning flashers may vary between countries. Related information • • After the driver brakes to a low speed and then releases the brake, the brake light returns to normal glow. The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at the same time. These flash until the driver accelerates the car to a higher speed again or switches off the car's hazard warning flashers. NOTE Button for hazard warning flashers. Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. The hazard warning flashers are automatically activated when the car brakes so powerfully that the emergency brake lights are activated and the speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to flash after the emergency brake lights have stopped flashing and are then deactivated automatically when the car drives away again or are deactivated if the button is depressed. Emergency brake lights (p. 158) Using direction indicators (p. 154) LIGHTING Using home safe lighting Approach light duration Interior lighting Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked. To activate the function: Approach lighting is switched on when the car is unlocked and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. The function is activated when the remote control key is used for unlocking. In daylight, position lamps, interior roof lamps, floor lights and cargo area lighting are activated. In weak daylight or darkness, number plate lighting and lighting in the outer handles are also activated* with their light source aimed towards the ground. The passenger compartment is equipped with several types of lighting, e.g. general interior lighting, adjustable decor illumination and lock lighting. 1. Switch off the car. 2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward toward the instrument panel and release. 3. Get out of the car and lock the door. > A symbol in the driver display is illuminated to indicate that the function is activated and outer lighting is switched on: Position lamps, headlamp beams, number plate lighting and lighting in outer handles*. The length of time that home safe lighting remains on can be set via the centre display. Related information • Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 149) • Approach light duration (p. 159) The lighting stays on for approx. 2 minutes if no doors are opened. If a door is opened within the activation time, the time for the interior lighting and lighting in the outer handles* will be extended. All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually at least 5 minutes from when: • the car has been switched off and its electrical system is in ignition position 0 • the car has been unlocked, but it has not yet been started. Front roof lighting The function can be activated and deactivated via the centre display. Related information • Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 149) • • Using home safe lighting (p. 159) Remote control key (p. 241) Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting. Reading lamp, left-hand side Passenger compartment lighting }} * Option/accessory. 159 LIGHTING || Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The passenger compartment lighting goes off when: Reading lamp, right-hand side • • • • Reading lighting The reading lamps on the right and left-hand sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in. Passenger compartment lighting The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are switched on or off with a short press on the button in the roof console. The car is locked The car is started A side door is closed A side door has remained open for approx. 2 minutes. Rear roof lighting The rear area of the car has reading lighting, which is also used as passenger compartment lighting. Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The automatic function is activated by a short press on the AUTO button in the roof console. With the automatic system activated, the light indicator in the button illuminates and the passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off according to the following. The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in. Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed. The passenger compartment lighting comes on when: • • • Sun visor mirror lighting* The car is unlocked The car is switched off A side door is opened. In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof. Reading lamps above the rear seat. The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed. Ground lighting* The ground lighting is switched on or off when the corresponding door is opened or closed. 160 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Door sill lighting The door sill lighting is switched on or off when a door is opened or closed. Lighting in the tunnel console's front cup holder The lighting in the cargo area is switched on or off when the tailgate is opened or closed. The lighting in the front cup holders is switched on when the car is unlocked and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. Decor lighting Related information Lighting in the cargo area The ambient light is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. • • • • Adjusting interior lighting (p. 161) Lighting control (p. 148) Ignition positions (p. 420) Passenger compartment interior (p. 580) Adjusting interior lighting The lamps inside the car come on differently depending on the ignition position used. The interior lighting can be adjusted with a thumbwheel in the instrument panel, and certain light functions can also be adjusted via the centre display. The thumbwheel on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel, is used to adjust the brightness of the display light, control light, ambient light and ambience light* Ambience lights* Adjusting ambient decor illumination The car is equipped with LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is running. The ambience light can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting. Lighting in storage compartments in doors The lighting in the storage compartments in the doors is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 3. Choose between the following settings: • Under Ambient Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High. • Under Ambient Light Level, select from Reduced and Full. Adjusting ambience light* The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is running. }} * Option/accessory. 161 LIGHTING || Changing the brightness of the lights 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting. 3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High. Changing the colour of the light 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting. 3. Choose between By Temperature and By Colour in order to change the colour of the light. With the By Temperature option, the light changes according to the set passenger compartment temperature. With the By Colour option, the Theme Colours subcategory can be used to adjust further. Related information • • 162 Interior lighting (p. 159) Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 149) • Ignition positions (p. 420) WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Windows, glass and mirrors The car contains several different windows, glass panes and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are laminated. The windscreen has laminated glass, and laminated glass is available as an option for certain other glass areas. Laminated glass is reinforced, which provides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. • Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 220) Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 221) All power windows and sun blinds* have pinch protection which is deployed if they are blocked by any object while opening or closing. In the event of blocking, the movement stops and then reverses automatically to approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked position (or to full ventilation position). The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass. It is possible to force pinch protection when closing has been cancelled, e.g. when ice is formed, by continuing to press the control in one and the same direction. The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is laminated1 If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested. Related information • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) • • • • • • Panorama roof* (p. 170) 1 164 WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work. Power windows (p. 165) Rearview and door mirrors (p. 167) Head-up display* (p. 139) Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) Related information • Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165) • • Operating power windows (p. 166) Operating the panorama roof* (p. 171) Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Reset sequence for pinch protection If a problem occurs with the electrical functions for the electric windows, a reset sequence can be tested. Power windows WARNING Each door has a control panel for the electrically-driven power windows. The driver's door has controls for operating all windows and also to activate the child safety locks. Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work. • Always operate the windows with caution. • Do not allow children to play with the controls. • • If a problem persists, or if it concerns the panoramic roof, contact a workshop2. Reset the power window 1. Start with the window in closed position. 2. Then operate the controls in the manual position 3 times upwards to closed position. > The system is initialised automatically. Related information • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) • Operating power windows (p. 166) 2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • Driver's door control panel. Electric child safety locks* that deactivate the controls in the rear doors to prevent doors or windows from being opened from the inside. Controls for rear windows. Controls for front windows. Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. Related information • • Operating power windows (p. 166) • Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165) Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) * Option/accessory. 165 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Operating power windows WARNING Using the driver's door control panel, all power windows can be operated - using the control panels in the other doors operates the power window in the individual door. The power windows are equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested. Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle. NOTE One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly. WARNING Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. • • • • • Always operate the windows with caution. Do not allow children to play with the controls. Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. Operating the power windows. Operating with auto. Move one of the controls up or down to the end position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position. In order for the power windows to be used, the ignition position must be I or II. The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the car has been switched off and after the ignition has been switched off - although not after a door has been opened. It is only possible to operate one control at a time. It can also be operated using a remote control key or keyless opening* with the door handle. 166 NOTE Operating without auto. Move one of the controls gently up or down. The power windows move up or down as long as the control is held in position. The windows cannot be opened at speeds above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph), but they can be closed. The driver always bears responsibility for following traffic regulations in force. NOTE It may not be possible to operate windows at low temperatures. Related information • • • Power windows (p. 165) Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165) * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 265) Rearview and door mirrors • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 243) The rearview mirrors and door mirrors can be used to give the driver better visibility to the rear. Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 221) Interior rearview mirror The interior rearview mirror is adjusted by angling it manually. The interior rearview mirror is equipped with HomeLink*, automatic dimming* and compass*. Door mirrors WARNING Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear to be further away than they actually are. The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door control panel. There are also a number of automatic settings that can be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*. Related information • • • • HomeLink®* (p. 484) Compass* (p. 488) Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 168) Angling the door mirrors (p. 169) * Option/accessory. 167 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Adjusting rearview mirror dimming Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver. Use dimming when disturbed by light from behind. Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the interior rearview and door mirrors. Automatic dimming is always active while driving, apart from when gearbox reverse position is selected. Manual dimming The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror's lower edge. NOTE To change dimming sensitivity: 1. 2. Press My Car Convenience. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment. 3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming, select Normal, Dark or Light. The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming. 168 Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. Control for manual dimming. 2. Return to normal mode by moving the control towards the windscreen. NOTE If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the interior rearview and door mirrors is reduced. When sensitivity is changed there is no immediately noticeable change in dimming, but the change takes place gradually. Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior rearview mirror and the door mirrors. 1. For the door mirrors to be equipped with automatic dimming, the interior rearview mirror must also be equipped with automatic dimming. Related information • • Rearview and door mirrors (p. 167) Angling the door mirrors (p. 169) Mirrors and The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward facing - that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Angling the door mirrors To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door mirrors need to be set to the preferences of the driver. There are a number of automatic settings that can also be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*. Using controls for door mirrors 3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated. Folding in rearview mirrors electrically* 1. Note that the button may need to be pressed twice, depending on whether it was already preselected. The button flashes when the door mirror is angled down. When reverse gear is disengaged, the door mirror automatically starts to return after approx. 3 seconds and then reaches its original position after approx. 8 seconds. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously. Resetting to neutral 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illuminates. 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre. 3 Only in combination with power seat with memory buttons*. Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button. – Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position. Controls for door mirrors. A door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking, for example. The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces. 2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position. The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door control panel. Ignition position must be at least I. Angling during parking3 Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/ extending* to work correctly. 1. Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. 2. Fold them out again by pressing the L and R buttons simultaneously. 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. Automatic angling during parking3 With this setting, the door mirror is automatically angled down when reverse gear is selected. The folded position is preset and cannot be adjusted. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Convenience. Mirrors and 3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to activate/deactivate and to select which review mirror should be angled. }} * Option/accessory. 169 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS || You can make the door mirror return to its original position by pressing the L or R button twice. Automatic retraction when locking* When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key, the door mirrors can be automatically retracted/extended. However, if the mirrors have been folded in manually then they have to be folded out manually as well. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Convenience. Panorama roof* The panorama roof is divided into two glass sections. The front section can be opened vertically at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizontally (open position). The rear section is fixed roof glass. The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and a sun blind made of perforated fabric and located under the glass roof to provide extra protection from factors such as strong sunlight. WARNING Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. • Always operate the windows with caution. • Do not allow children to play with the controls. • • Mirrors and 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate/deactivate. • Related information • • 170 Rearview and door mirrors (p. 167) Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 168) • Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 221) Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. IMPORTANT The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control located in the roof. • Do not open the panoramic roof when load carriers are fitted. • Do not place any heavy objects on the panoramic roof. In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS IMPORTANT • Remove ice and snow before opening the panoramic roof. Take care not to scratch surfaces or damage strips. • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it has frozen closed. Wind deflector • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 265) Operating the panorama roof* Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 243) The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control in the roof panel and both are equipped with pinch protection. WARNING Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. • Always operate the windows with caution. • Do not allow children to play with the controls. • • • The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is raised when the panorama roof is in the open position. Related information • • • Operating the panorama roof* (p. 171) Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind (p. 174) Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. IMPORTANT • Do not open the panoramic roof when load carriers are fitted. • Do not place any heavy objects on the panoramic roof. }} * Option/accessory. 171 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS || IMPORTANT • Remove ice and snow before opening the panoramic roof. Take care not to scratch surfaces or damage strips. • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it has frozen closed. In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II. It can also be operated using a remote control key or keyless opening* with the door handle. WARNING Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle. IMPORTANT The movement of both panoramic roof and sun blind are also stopped if the roof control is operated again in the opposite direction to the current direction of movement. Open and close ventilation position The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested. NOTE For manual opening, the sun blind must be fully open before the panoramic roof can be opened. When the procedure is reversed, the panoramic roof must be fully closed before the sun blind can be fully closed. NOTE It may not be possible to operate windows at low temperatures. Check that the panoramic roof is properly closed when closing. Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge. Open by pressing the control upward once. Close by pressing the control downward once. When the ventilation position is selected the front glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun blind is fully closed when ventilation position is selected, then it opens automatically approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches). The sun blind follows automatically if the panoramic roof is closed from ventilation position. The movement of the roof is stopped if the control is released during manual operation, or when the glass reaches the comfort position4 or the maximum opening or closing position. 4 Comfort 172 position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Fully open and close the panoramic roof using the roof control downward to the manual closing position instead. Automatic operation 1. Open the sun blind to maximum position press the control backward to the position for automatic opening and release. 2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for automatic opening and release. Operation, manual mode Operation, automatic mode Manual operation 1. To open the sun blind - press the control backwards to the position for manual opening. 2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for manual opening. 3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third time to the position for manual opening. Related information • • • • • Panorama roof* (p. 170) Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind (p. 174) Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 265) Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 243) 3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third time to the position for automatic opening and release. Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/ downward to the automatic closing position instead. Automatic operation - rapid opening or closing The panoramic roof and sun blind can be opened or closed simultaneously: – To open - press the control rearward to the automatic operation position twice and release. – To close - press the control forward/ downward to the automatic operation position twice and release. Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/ * Option/accessory. 173 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind With this function, the sun blind is closed automatically 15 minutes after the car has been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is in order to lower the passenger compartment temperature and protect the car's upholstery from sun-fading. The function is deactivated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be activated or deactivated in the centre display. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Locking. Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to activate/deactivate. Together with the washer fluid, the wipers aim to improve visibility as well as headlamp pattern. Washer fluid direct from the wiper blades and heating* of the wiper blades gives improved vision. Information indicating that the washer fluid needs topping up appears in the driver display when there is approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remaining. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • Filling washer fluid (p. 653) Operating the panorama roof* (p. 171) • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 651) • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 650) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Related information 174 Wiper blades and washer fluid Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) The sun blind is also closed when all windows are closed using the remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle. • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 243) • NOTE • • • • Panorama roof* (p. 170) Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 265) Set the wiper blades in service position (p. 652) * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Using windscreen wipers Intermittent wiping The windscreen wipers are designed to clean the windscreen. Different settings for the windscreen wipers are set using the righthand stalk switch. Move the lever up to switch the wipers to intermittent wiping. Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected. Continuous wiping Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to sweep at normal speed. Raise the stalk switch further for the wipers to sweep at high speed. IMPORTANT • • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • Filling washer fluid (p. 653) • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 651) • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 650) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) Set the wiper blades in service position (p. 652) Before activating the wipers - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen and rear window is scraped away. Right-hand stalk switch. The thumbwheel is used to set rain sensor sensitivity and wiper swipe frequency. IMPORTANT Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating. Single sweep Lower the stalk switch and release to make one sweep. Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers. Related information • • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) 175 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Using the rain sensor The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitivity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the right-hand stalk switch. Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain . sensor button • Move the lever down to make the wipers move. Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward. Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) Rain sensor button Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency When the rain sensor is activated, the rain is shown in the driver sensor symbol display. Activating the rain sensor When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or in ignition position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch is in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep. 176 Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sensor button or moving the stalk switch up to another wiper program. Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • Filling washer fluid (p. 653) The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in ignition position 0 or when the engine is switched off. • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 651) • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 650) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Deactivating the rain sensor Right-hand stalk switch. Related information The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when wiper blades are set in service position. The rain sensor is reactivated when service mode has been deactivated. IMPORTANT The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deactivate the rain sensor while the car is running or when the car's electrical system is in ignition position I or II. The symbol in the driver display extinguishes. Set the wiper blades in service position (p. 652) WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Using the rain sensor's memory function • Set the wiper blades in service position (p. 652) Using windscreen and headlamp washers The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 651) • Activating/deactivating the memory function Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 650) Windscreen and headlamp washers are designed to clean the windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and headlamp washers are started using the right-hand stalk switch. • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) The memory function for the rain sensor can be activated in such a way that the rain sensor button does not need to be depressed each time the car is started: 1. Starting windscreen and headlamp washers Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Wipers. 3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/ deactivate the memory function. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) • Filling washer fluid (p. 653) Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) Washing function, right-hand stalk switch. – Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers. > The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch has been released. }} 177 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS || IMPORTANT Avoid activating the washer system when it is frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the pump. • • Filling washer fluid (p. 653) • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 651) • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 650) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Headlamp washing* To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at a defined interval when the headlamps are switched on. Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with the symbol, is shown in the driver display, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it. The headlamps are only washed if main or dipped beam is switched on. Set the wiper blades in service position (p. 652) Using the rear window wiper and washer The rear windscreen washer and wiper are designed to clean the rear window. Washing/ wiping is started and settings are changed by means of the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch. Activating the rear window wiper and washer NOTE The rear window wiper motor is equipped with overheating protection which means that it is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling-down period. Related information • • 178 Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS • Set the wiper blades in service position (p. 652) Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 651) • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 650) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are switched on initiates rear window wiping. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Wipers. 3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deactivate wiping when reversing. Select for intermittent wiping with the rear window wiper. – Select for continuous speed with the rear window wiper. Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch forward to start rear window washing and wiping. Related information • • If the rear windscreen wiper is already operating at a constant speed then no change takes place when reverse gear is engaged. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) Using the rain sensor (p. 176) • • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • Filling washer fluid (p. 653) • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 651) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) Filling washer fluid (p. 653) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) Set the wiper blades in service position (p. 652) }} 179 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS || 180 • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 650) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Manual front seat The car's front seats have a range of setting options in order to enhance comfort. Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down. • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 190) Change the backrest inclination by turning the control knob. • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) WARNING Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident. Related information Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cushion* by pumping up/down.1 Change the length* of the seat cushion by pulling the lever up and moving the seat cushion forward/backward by hand. Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting the handle and adjusting the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted. Change the lumbar support* by pressing the button upward/downward/forward/ back2. 1 Only applies to the driver's seat. 2 Applicable to four-way lumbar support*. 182 • • • Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forwards/backwards. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Power* front seat The car's front seats have a range of setting options in order to enhance comfort. The power seat can be moved forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/ lowered as well as adjusted in length* and the backrest inclination can be changed. The lumbar support* can be adjusted upward/ downward/forward/backward.3 Seat setup can take place when the engine is running and within a certain time after unlocking the door without the engine running. Adjustment can also be performed within a certain time after the engine has been switched off. • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 190) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) IMPORTANT The power seats have overload protection that is triggered if any seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, remove the object and then move the seat again. Related information • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) 3 Applicable to four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar 4 Not available in cars with two-way lumbar support*. support* is adjusted forwards/backwards. Adjusting the power* front seat Set the preferred seat position using the control on the front seat's seating section. To set the various comfort functions, turn the multifunction control4 up/down. The illustration shows the controls from a car with four-way lumbar support*. Cars with two-way lumbar support* do not have the rotatable multifunction control. In cars with four-way lumbar support*, turn the multifunction control4 up/down to set the different comfort functions. In cars with two-way lumbar support*, use the round button to adjust the lumbar support forward/backward. Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by adjusting the control up/down. }} * Option/accessory. 183 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL || Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down. Move the seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/backward. Change the backrest inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward. Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time. The backrests of the front seats cannot be lowered fully forward. • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* You can store the position for power* seat, door mirrors and head-up display* in the memory buttons. Store two different positions for the power* seat, the door mirrors and the head-up display* using the memory buttons. The buttons are located on the inside of one of the front doors or both*. Related information • • • 184 Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 190) Button M for storing settings. Memory button. Memory button. Storing a position 1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display to the desired position. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL 2. Press and hold the M button depressed. The light indicator in the button illuminates. 3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1 or 2 button. > When the position has been stored in the selected memory button, an acoustic signal can be heard and the light indicator in the M button extinguishes. • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 190) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) If the positions for the power* seat, the door mirrors and the head-up display* have been stored, they can be activated by using the memory buttons. • • Angling the door mirrors (p. 169) Using a stored setting Settings for head-up display* (p. 141) If none of the memory buttons is depressed within three seconds then the M button extinguishes and no storing takes place. The seat, the door mirrors or the head-up-display must be readjusted before a new memory can be set. Related information • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) A stored setting can be used with the front door either open or closed: Open front door – Depress one of the memory buttons 1 ( ) or 2 ( ) with a short press. Power seat, door mirrors and head-up display move and then stop at the positions stored in the selected memory button. }} * Option/accessory. 185 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL || Closed front door – Hold one of the memory buttons 1 ( ) or 2 ( ) depressed until seat, door mirrors and head-up display stop in the positions that are stored in the selected memory button. • If the memory button is released, the movement of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will be stopped. WARNING • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel. • • Do not adjust the seat while driving. Make sure there is nothing under the seats when they are being adjusted. Related information • • • • 186 Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 190) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) • • Angling the door mirrors (p. 169) Massage settings* in the front seat Both the multi-function control on the side of the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display. Settings for head-up display* (p. 141) Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's seating section. Settings for massage The following setting options are available for massage: • On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch on/off the massage function. • Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage programs. Select between Swell, Tread, Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder. Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL • Intensity: Select between Low, Normal • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 190) Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) Both the multi-function control on the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display. and High. • Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and Fast. Restarting massage The massage function is deactivated automatically after 20 minutes. Reactivation of the function is performed manually. – Tap on Restart, which is shown in the centre display, to restart the selected massage program. > The massage program restarts. If no action is taken, the message remains shown in the top view. Adjusting massage settings in the front seat The front seat has massage in the backrest. The massage is performed by air cushions that can massage with different settings. The massage function can only be activated when the car's engine is running. Related information • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) 1. Activate the multi-function control by turnupwards/downwards. ing the control The seat settings view will be shown in the centre display. }} * Option/accessory. 187 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL || 2. Select Massage in the seat settings view. 3. To choose between the different massage functions, select either directly in the centre display or by moving the cursor up/ down using the multi-function control's /lower button. Change the upper setting in the selected function directly in the centre display, by pressing the arrows, or by using the multi-function control's button. front /rear Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat 2. Select Cushion extension in the seat settings view. Depending on equipment level selected, seat cushion length is adjusted either using the multifunction control* on the side of the seat's seat cushion, or manually using a control on the front of the seat cushion. Adjusting the length of the seat cushion using the multifunction control • Press the front section of the four-way to extend the seat cushion. button • Press the rear section of the four-way button to retract the seat cushion. Adjusting the length of the seat cushion manually Related information • • • • 188 Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat cushion. • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) 1. • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 190) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) Activate the multi-function control by turnupwards/downwards. ing the control The seat settings view will be shown in the centre display. Control for seat cushion adjustment. 1. Grip the handle on the front of the seat and pull upwards. 2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion. 3. Release the handle and make sure that the seat cushion has reached the correct position. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Related information • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the side support* in the front seat Increase comfort in the front seat by adjusting the sides of the backrest. Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Press the front section of the four-way button to increase side support . • Press the rear section of the four-way button to decrease side support . Related information • • • • • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 190) Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's seating section. Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to provide side support. Both the multi-function control on the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display. • 2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings view. To adjust the side support: 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning the it up/down . The seat settings view will be shown in the centre display. Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 190) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) * Option/accessory. 189 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat The lumbar support is adjusted using a control on the side of the seat cushion. The lumbar support is adjusted using the multifunction control in cars with four-way lumbar support*, or using the round button in cars with two-way lumbar support*. The control is located on the side of the seat's seating section. Depending on the equipment level selected, the lumbar support can be adjusted forward/back and up/down (four-way lumbar support) or forward/back (two-way lumbar support). 2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view. Adjust the lumbar support in the car using the four-way lumbar support Adjust the lumbar support in the car using the two-way lumbar support 1. 1. • Press the round button up /down to move the lumbar support upwards/ downwards. • Press the front section of the button to increase lumbar support. • Press the rear section of the button to decrease lumbar support. Multifunction control in cars with four-way lumbar support*. Activate the multi-function control by turnupwards/downwards. ing the control The seat settings view will be shown in the centre display. Press the front section of the round button to increase lumbar support. of the round but2. Press the rear section ton to decrease lumbar support. Control in cars with two-way lumbar support*. 190 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Related information • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* The front passenger seat can be adjusted from the driver's seat. Activating the function The function is activated via the function view in the centre display: Press the Adjust Passenger Seat button to activate. Move the passenger seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/ backward. Adjust passenger seat From activation of the function, the driver must adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If no adjustment is made within this time the function is deactivated. The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the controls on the driver's seat: Change the passenger seat's backrest inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward. Related information • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) }} * Option/accessory. 191 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) Lowering the backrests in the rear seat • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) The rear seat's backrest is divided into two parts. The two parts can be folded forward individually. • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 190) WARNING • Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away. Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can lead to trapping injuries. • When loading long objects, they must always be strapped in securely to avoid injury and damage during sudden braking. • Always switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading and unloading the car. • For cars with automatic gearbox, set the gear selector in P to prevent it from being moved by mistake. IMPORTANT The armrest* for the centre seat must be raised before lowering the seat. The through-load hatch in the rear seat must be closed before lowering. NOTE The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be fully folded forward. Lowering the backrest To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must be stationary and at least one rear door open. IMPORTANT There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery. 192 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Pull up the backrest's locking handle while folding the backrest forward at the same time. The locking handle for the head restraints is pulled up automatically when the backrest is folded. A red indicator on the lock catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place. 4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head restraint. WARNING When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place. NOTE Ensure that there are no occupants or objects in the rear seat. Lower the centre seat's head restraint manually. WARNING When the backrests are lowered, the head restraints can accommodate the seat cushion of the seat being lowered. Adjust the head restraints on the seat being lowered to avoid material damage. 3. The backrest disengages from the lock and needs to be lowered manually to the horizontal position. Raising the backrest Raising the backrest to upright position is carried out manually: 1. Move the backrest up/back. 2. Press the backrest until the lock engages. Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up. The head restraints of the outer seats must always be raised when there are passengers on any of the rear seats. Related information • Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat (p. 194) • • Private locking (p. 277) Activating and deactivating private locking (p. 277) 3. Raise the head restraints manually. 193 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat Adjust the centre seat head restraint according to the height of the passenger. Fold down the outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward visibility. Adjust the head restraint for the centre seat To lower the head restraint, the button (see illustration) must be depressed while the restraint is carefully moved down. Press the Headrest Fold button to activate/deactivate lowering. WARNING The centre seat's head restraint must be adjusted according to the passenger's height so that, if possible, the whole of the back of the head is covered. Slide it up manually as required. The centre seat head restraint must be in its lowest position when the centre seat is not used. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be correctly adjusted to the height of the passenger so that it covers the whole of the back of the head if possible. Fold down the rear seat's outer head restraints via the centre display* The outer head restraints can be retracted via the centre display's function view. You can lower the head restraints in ignition position 0. 194 Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard. WARNING Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are passengers in any of the outer rear seats. WARNING The head restraint must be in locked position after being folded up. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Steering wheel controls and horn Fold down the rear seat's outer head restraints using handles For cars with electronically controlled head restraint folding*, the outer head restraints can be folded using handles on the top of the seat, see figure . Note that this method also folds the backrests. If only the head restraints shall be folded, e.g. to improve visibility, it can be performed from the centre display instead*. 5 Speed The steering wheel houses the horn and controls for e.g. the driver support systems and voice recognition. For cars without electronic folding, the outer head restraints are folded manually using the inner control on the upper side of the seat; see figure . Related information • Lowering the backrests in the rear seat (p. 192) Limiter, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist. Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel. Controls for driver support systems5. Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox. Controls for voice recognition and menu, message and phone handling. }} * Option/accessory. 195 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL || Horn Steering lock Adjusting the steering wheel The steering wheel lock makes it difficult to steer the car if it is stolen, for example. A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock is locked or unlocked. The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions. Activating the steering lock The steering lock is activated when the car is locked from the outside and the engine is switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the steering lock will be activated automatically after a while. The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel. Related information • • Steering lock (p. 196) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 196) Deactivating the steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the car is unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked, the steering wheel lock will be deactivated as long as the remote control key is in the passenger compartment and the car is started. Related information • • Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 195) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 196) The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for depth. The steering wheel is adjusted in different ways depending on whether or not the car is equipped with knee airbag6. WARNING Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away. The steering wheel must never be adjusted while driving. With speed related power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is regulated according to the car's speed in 6 The 196 car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL order to give the driver enhanced road responsiveness. Adjusting the steering wheel in a car without a knee airbag Adjusting the steering wheel in a car with a knee airbag Lever for steering wheel adjustment. 1. Lever for steering wheel adjustment. 1. Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you. 3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you move the lever back. Pull the lever backwards to release the steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you. 3. Push the lever forwards to secure the steering wheel. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you move the lever back. Related information • • • Steering lock (p. 196) Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 195) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) * Option/accessory. 197 CLIMATE CLIMATE Climate Climate zones The car is equipped with electronic climate control. The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment. All climate control system functions are controlled from the centre display and physical buttons in the centre console. The number of climate zones that the car is divided into governs the options for setting different temperatures for different parts of the passenger compartment. 4-zone climate* 2-zone climate Some functions for the rear seat can also be controlled from the climate controls* at the rear of the tunnel console. Related information • • • • • • • • • 200 Climate zones (p. 200) Climate zones with 4-zone climate. Climate control - sensors (p. 201) With 4-zone climate the temperature in the passenger compartment can be set separately for the left and right-hand sides in both the front and rear seat. Perceived temperature (p. 201) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 202) Parking climate* (p. 227) Heater* (p. 235) Air quality (p. 203) Climate zones with 2-zone climate. Related information With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the passenger compartment can be set separately for the left and right-hand sides. • Climate (p. 200) Air distribution (p. 206) Climate controls (p. 211) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Climate control - sensors The climate control system has a number of sensors to help control the climate in the car. Sensor location Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instrument panel. Moisture sensor - in the casing by the interior rearview mirror. With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate control system air intake. Related information • • Climate (p. 200) Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204) Perceived temperature The climate control system regulates the climate in the passenger compartment based on the perceived temperature, not on actual temperature. The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physically perceived temperature as affected by factors such as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity, solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the time. The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand side's air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides. Related information • Climate (p. 200) Outside temperature sensor - in the righthand door mirror. Temperature sensor for the passenger compartment - by the physical buttons in the centre console. NOTE Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects. * Option/accessory. 201 CLIMATE Controlling climate control with voice recognition1 • "Turn on auto" - activates automatic regulation of the climate control. Voice recognition commands for the climate control system to e.g. change temperature, activate a heated seat* or change fan level. Press and say one of the following commands: • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" activates/deactivates the air conditioning. • "Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate control and shows examples of commands. • "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets the desired temperature. 202 • "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat ventilation*. "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for the ventilated seat* one step. "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" activates/deactivates the air circulation. • "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster" - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows and door mirrors. • • "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max defroster off" - activates/deactivates the max defroster. Related information "Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off electric defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated windscreen*. • • "Sync temperature" - synchronises the temperature for all climate zones in the car with the temperature set for the driver's side. • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated rear window and door mirrors. • • "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the desired air flow. "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn steering wheel heat off" - activates/ deactivates the heated steering wheel*. • "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" closes the desired air flow. • • "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" changes the air flow to Max/Off. "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the setting for the heated steering wheel* one step. • "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" raises/lowers the fan level one step. • "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat" - activates/deactivates the heated seat*. 1 "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" raises/lowers the setting for the heated seat* one step. • "Raise temperature"/"Lower temperature" - raise/lower the temperature setting one step. • • • • • • Climate (p. 200) Voice recognition (p. 142) Using voice recognition (p. 143) Settings for voice recognition (p. 146) Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Air quality The materials selected for the passenger compartment and the air cleaning system ensure that the air quality in the passenger compartment is high. • • • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204) Clean Zone* Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204) The Clean Zone function checks and indicates whether or not all conditions have been met for good air quality in the passenger compartment. Passenger compartment filter (p. 205) Materials in the passenger compartment The interior of the passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. Tested materials have been developed in order to reduce the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean. The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior. Air cleaning system In addition to the passenger compartment filter, the car is equipped with an air cleaning system that helps to maintain high air quality in the passenger compartment. Related information • • Climate (p. 200) Clean Zone* (p. 203) The indicator is visible in the climate view in the centre display. The indicator is visible in the climate row when the climate view is not open. If the conditions have not been met then the Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions have been met, this is indicated by the text changing colour to blue. Conditions that need to be met: • • That all doors and the tailgate are closed. That all side windows and the panorama roof* are closed. }} * Option/accessory. 203 CLIMATE || • • • That the air quality system Interior Air Quality System* is activated. That the ventilation fan is activated. That the air recirculation is deactivated. NOTE Clean Zone does not indicate that the air quality is good. It only indicates that the conditions for good air quality have been met. Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System* Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances. The following is included: Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully automatic air quality system that separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and contaminants in the passenger compartment. IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. • Related information • • • • Air quality (p. 203) Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204) Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204) Passenger compartment filter (p. 205) • An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is unlocked with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old. If the air quality sensor senses that the outside air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and air recirculation is activated. NOTE The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment. The fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). Related information • • • • In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting. Air quality (p. 203) Clean Zone* (p. 203) In the event of misting, the defrost functions for windscreen, side windows and rear window should be used. Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204) Passenger compartment filter (p. 205) Related information 204 • Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* (p. 205) • • Air quality (p. 203) Clean Zone* (p. 203) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE • • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204) Passenger compartment filter (p. 205) Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* The air quality sensor is part of the fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor should be activated/deactivated. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/ deactivate the air quality sensor. Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter. Replacing the passenger compartment filter To maintain high climate system performance, the filter must be changed at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often. NOTE Related information • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204) There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted. Related information • • • • Air quality (p. 203) Clean Zone* (p. 203) Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204) Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204) * Option/accessory. 205 CLIMATE Air distribution Changing air distribution The climate control system distributes the incoming air via a number of different vents in the passenger compartment. The air distribution can be changed manually if required. Automatic and manual air distribution With auto-regulated climate control running the air distribution takes place automatically. If necessary, the air distribution can be controlled manually. 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. Adjustable air vents Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable, which means that you can open/close the vent to aim the air flow. Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger compartment. With 2-zone climate - four on the instrument panel and one on each of the door pillars between the front and rear doors. Addition with 4-zone climate* - two at the rear of the tunnel console. Related information 206 Climate (p. 200) • • • Changing air distribution (p. 206) • Table of air distribution options (p. 208) Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 207) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Opening, closing and aiming the air vents Some air vents in the passenger compartment can be opened, closed and aimed individually. If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side windows then misting can be eliminated. If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards then, in a hot climate, a comfortable environment is obtained in the passenger compartment. The air distribution buttons in the climate view. Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel and centre console Opening and closing the air vents Air vents on the instrument panel: – Air distribution - air vents in the floor 2. Press one or more of the air distribution buttons in order to open/close the corresponding air flow. > The air distribution is changed and the buttons illuminate/extinguish. Related information • • • Air distribution (p. 206) Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 207) Turn the rotary knob in the middle of the air vent to open/close the air flow from the vent. Air vents at the rear of the tunnel console*: – Roll the thumbwheel under the air vent in order to open/close the air flow from the vent. The longer the white lines on the thumbwheel that are visible, the higher the air flow. Aiming the air vents – Move the lever in the middle of the air vent horizontally/vertically to direct the air flow from the vent. Related information • • • Air distribution (p. 206) Changing air distribution (p. 206) Table of air distribution options (p. 208) The air flow is at maximum when the marking on the knob is in vertical position. Air vents in the door pillars: – Move the lever in the middle of the air vent up/down to open/close the air flow from the vent. The air flow is switched off in the bottom position, while it is constant in other positions. Table of air distribution options (p. 208) * Option/accessory. 207 CLIMATE Table of air distribution options The air distribution can be changed manually if required. The following options are available for setting. Air distribution Purpose If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control. 208 Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this, fan level must not be low). Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate. Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides heat or cooling to the floor. CLIMATE Air distribution Purpose Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates. Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or humid climate. Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor temperatures. Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor. Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment. }} 209 CLIMATE || Related information • • • 210 Air distribution (p. 206) Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 207) Changing air distribution (p. 206) CLIMATE Climate controls Main climate In addition to the climate row's functions, other main climate functions can also be controlled in the Main climate tab. The climate control system's functions are controlled from physical buttons in the centre console, the centre display and the climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console*. Physical buttons in centre console Temperature controls for driver and passenger side. Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver and front passenger seat, as well as heated steering wheel*. Button for heated windscreen* and max defroster. Button for heated rear window and door mirrors. Climate row in centre display The most common climate functions can be regulated from the climate row. Button for access to the climate view. The graphic on the button shows activated climate settings. Climate view in centre display Open climate view by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. Depending on equipment level, the climate view can be divided into several tabs. Change between the tabs by swiping left/right or by pressing the respective heading. Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting the windows and door mirrors. AC - Controls for air conditioning. Recirc - Controls for air recirculation. }} * Option/accessory. 211 CLIMATE || Climate controls at rear of tunnel console* Controls for air distribution. Fan controls for front seat2. AUTO - Auto regulating the climate. Rear climate control* All climate functions for the rear seat can be regulated in the Rear climate tab. Controls for heated rear seat*. Fan controls for rear seat. Temperature controls for rear seat. 2nd row climate - Controls for climate functionality in the rear seat. Fan controls for rear seat. Temperature controls for rear seat. Controls for heated rear seat*. Parking climate* The car's parking climate control can be regulated in the Parking climate tab. 2 With 212 Locking/unlocking button on the climate panel. If the car is not equipped with a climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console, but has heated rear seats*, there are physical buttons at the rear of the tunnel console for controlling this function. The climate panel has a screen lock to prevent unintentional change of fan speed and temperature. When the screen is locked, only the a 2-zone climate, the controls are shared with the rear seat. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE seat controls* and the unlocking button are shown. After unlocking, the fan speed and temperature can be changed via the climate panel and all selected climate settings are shown. The screen locks automatically after a period of inactivity. Related information • • Climate (p. 200) Activating and deactivating heated front seat* (p. 213) • Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* (p. 214) • Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* (p. 216) • Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 216) • • • • Synchronising temperature (p. 226) Activating and deactivating air conditioning (p. 227) Activating and deactivating heated front seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold. 1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel. If the car is not equipped with ventilated seats or heated steering wheel (for the driver's side), the button for heated seats is immediately available in the climate row. Activating auto climate control (p. 217) Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 218) • Activating and deactivating max defroster (p. 219) • Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 220) • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 221) • • Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 222) Regulating fan level for rear seat* (p. 223) 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the button shows the set level. }} * Option/accessory. 213 CLIMATE || WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries. Related information • • Climate controls (p. 211) Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* (p. 214) Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated seats should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated driver's and passenger seat. > An "A" is shown at each button for heated front seats in the climate row when automatic starting has been activated. 4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated. Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold. Activating and deactivating the heated rear seat from the front seat* 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Select the Rear climate tab. 3. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the button shows the set level. Related information • • 214 Climate controls (p. 211) Activating and deactivating heated front seat* (p. 213) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Activating and deactivating the heated rear seat from the rear seat With 4-zone climate*: Related information • Climate controls (p. 211) With 2-zone climate: Seat heating indication and controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console. Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel console. – Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand side's physical buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel console to switch between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the LEDs in the button show the set level. – Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand side's buttons for heated seats on the tunnel console's climate panel to switch between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the screen in the climate panel shows the set level. WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries. * Option/accessory. 215 CLIMATE Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* The seats can be ventilated to provide increased comfort in a hot climate, for example. The ventilation system consists of fans in the seats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the cooler the passenger compartment air becomes. The system can be activated when the engine is running. The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold. 1. 2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the button shows the set level. Related information • 1. Climate controls (p. 211) If the car is not equipped with heated seats or ventilated seats, the button for heated steering wheel is immediately available in the climate row. Press the left or right-hand side's steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel. If the car is not equipped with heated seats or heated steering wheel (for the driver's side), the button for ventilated seats is immediately available in the climate row. Press the driver's side steering wheel and seat button in the climate row of the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel. 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated steering wheel in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the button shows the set level. Related information • • 216 Climate controls (p. 211) Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* (p. 217) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated steering wheel should be activated/ deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated steering wheel. > An "A" is shown at the button for heated steering wheel in the climate row when automatic starting has been activated. 4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated. Activating auto climate control NOTE With auto climate control activated, multiple climate functions are controlled automatically. 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Give a short or long press on AUTO Climate. • Temperature and fan speed can be changed without deactivating the automatically-regulated climate control system. The automatically-regulated climate control system is deactivated when the air distribution is changed manually or when maximum defroster is activated. Related information • Climate controls (p. 211) Short press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled automatically. Long press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled automatically, temperature and fan speed are changed to standard settings: 22 °C (72 °F) and level 3 (level 2 in the rear seat3). > Auto-regulation of the climate is activated and the button illuminates. • Related information • Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 216) 3 For cars with 4-zone climate*. * Option/accessory. 217 CLIMATE Activating and deactivating air recirculation Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment. 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. Related information • • Climate controls (p. 211) Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation (p. 218) Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment. It is possible set whether the air recirculation timer should be activated/deactivated. When the timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically switched off after 20 minutes. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/ deactivate the air recirculation timer. 2. Press Recirc. > Air recirculation is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. IMPORTANT If the air in the car is recirculated for too long then there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows. NOTE It is not possible to activate air recirculation when max defroster is activated. 218 Related information • Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 218) CLIMATE Activating and deactivating max defroster NOTE Max defroster starts with a certain delay in order to avoid a short increase in fan level if the heated windscreen is deactivated by two quick presses of the button. Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist and ice from windows. Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation of the climate and air recirculation, activates air conditioning and changes the fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI. Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre display NOTE Changing the fan level to 5 increases the noise level. When max defroster is deactivated, the climate control system returns to the previous settings. Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre console There is a physical button in the centre console for quick access to max defroster. With heated windscreen* the max defroster can only be activated individually from the climate view in the centre display. Physical button in the centre console. Cars without heated windscreen: – Press the button. > Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Cars with heated windscreen: – 1. Activated heated windscreen 2. Press Max. > Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Activated heated windscreen and max defroster Related information Press the button repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels: • • Deactivated. > Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. • Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. • Climate controls (p. 211) * Option/accessory. 219 CLIMATE Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre display NOTE If the heated windscreen is activated when the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the engine then the engine will be restarted. A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window. Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre console In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated windscreen. 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. Related information • • Climate controls (p. 211) Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* (p. 221) 2. Press Electric. > Heated windscreen is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. NOTE Physical button in the centre console. – Press the button repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels: • • Activated heated windscreen Activated heated windscreen and max defroster Deactivated. > Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. • 220 A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer. NOTE The heated windscreen may affect the performance of transponders and other communication equipment. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated windscreen should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone. The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors. 1. Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre console 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated rear window and door mirrors. 2. Press Rear. > Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated windscreen. Related information • • Related information • Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre display Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 220) Climate controls (p. 211) Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 222) Physical button in the centre console. – Press the button. > Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. * Option/accessory. 221 CLIMATE Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone. 1. Regulating fan level for front seat4 1. 222 4 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat. The climate control system automatically adjusts the air flow within the selected fan level based on requirements. This means that the fan speed may change even though the fan level is the same. • 3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors. Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 221) NOTE Related information 2. Press Climate. • If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged, which results in a risk of misting on the insides of the windows. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. Related information IMPORTANT The fan can be set to several different automatically controlled fan speeds for the front seat. Fan control buttons in the climate view. 2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max. > Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate. Climate controls (p. 211) CLIMATE Regulating fan level for rear seat* The fan can be set to several different automatically controlled fan speeds for the rear seat. Regulating the fan level for the rear seat from the front seat 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Select the Rear climate tab. The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the climate view. Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console. 3. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5. 2. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5. > Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate. The rear seat's fan level can be switched off by tapping on 2nd row climate. > Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate. Regulating the fan level for the rear seat from the rear seat 1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel console climate panel to access the controls. NOTE The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if the fan level for the front seat is in position Off. The rear seat fan speed can only be switched off from the climate view in the centre display. }} * Option/accessory. 223 CLIMATE || NOTE The climate control system automatically adjusts the air flow within the selected fan level based on requirements. This means that the fan speed may change even though the fan level is the same. Regulating temperature for front seat5 The temperature can be set to the desired number of degrees for the front seat's climate zones. Related information • Climate controls (p. 211) Temperature control. 2. Regulate the temperature by either of the following: • Temperature buttons in the climate row. 1. drag the control to the desired temperature, or press +/− to raise/lower the temperature gradually. > The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature. • Press the left or right-hand side temperature button in the centre display's climate row to open the controls. NOTE Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature. Related information • 5 For 224 2-zone climate, also rear seat. Climate controls (p. 211) CLIMATE Regulating temperature for rear seat* The temperature can be set to the desired number of degrees for the rear seat's climate zones. Regulating temperature for rear seat from front seat 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Select the Rear climate tab. Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the climate view. 3. Press the left or right-hand side temperature button to open the control. Temperature control. 4. Regulate the temperature by means of the following: • drag the control to the desired temperature press +/− to raise/lower the temperature gradually. > The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature. • Regulating temperature for rear seat from rear seat 1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel console climate panel to access the controls. }} * Option/accessory. 225 CLIMATE || Synchronising temperature Related information The temperature in the car's different climate zones can be synchronised with the temperature set on the driver's side. • Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console. 2. Press the left or right-hand side </> buttons on the tunnel console's climate panel in order to lower/raise the temperature gradually. > The temperature changes and the screen in the climate panel shows the set temperature. NOTE Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature. Related information • 226 Climate controls (p. 211) Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature controls. 1. Press the driver's side temperature button in the centre display's climate row in order to open the controls. 2. Press Synchronise temperature. > The temperature for all zones in the car is synchronised with the temperature set for the driver's side and the synchronisation symbol is shown adjacent to the temperature button. The synchronisation is stopped by means of a further press on Synchronise temperature or by means of changing the temperature settings for a climate zone other than the driver's. Climate controls (p. 211) CLIMATE Activating and deactivating air conditioning The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required. When the air conditioning is activated, the climate control system automatically controls starting and switching off as required. NOTE It is not possible to activate the air conditioning when the fan control is in Off position. Related information • 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Press AC. > The air conditioning is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Climate controls (p. 211) Parking climate* Parking climate control is a generic term for various functions that improve the passenger compartment climate when the car is parked, e.g. preconditioning. Functions belonging to the parking climate control are controlled from the Parking climate in climate view in the centre display. Open climate view by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. Related information • • • • Climate (p. 200) Preconditioning* (p. 228) Climate comfort when parking* (p. 232) Symbols and messages for parking climate control* (p. 234) NOTE Close all side windows and the panoramic roof* so that the air conditioning should work as well as possible. * Option/accessory. 227 CLIMATE Preconditioning* Preconditioning is a climate function which, if possible, attempts to reach comfort temperature in the passenger compartment before departure. Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via the timer. The function utilises several systems in different cases: • • When it is warm, the ventilation cools the passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside the car. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. Related information 228 Start and switch off from car 1. During preconditioning of the passenger compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature set in the climate control system. • Preconditioning heats* or ventilates the passenger compartment, if possible, prior to driving. The function can use direct start from the centre display or a mobile phone. In a cold climate, the parking heater* warms up the passenger compartment to a comfortable temperature. NOTE • • Start and switch off preconditioning* Parking climate* (p. 227) Start and switch off preconditioning* (p. 228) Preconditioning time setting* (p. 229) Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 3. Press Preconditioning. > Preconditioning is started/switched off and the button is illuminated/extinguished. NOTE The car's doors and windows should be closed during the preconditioning of the passenger compartment. WARNING Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*: • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. Starting from the app* Start of preconditioning and information about the selected settings can be managed from a device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Preconditioning heats* the passenger compartment to a comfortable temperature or ventilates the passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside. The passenger compartment can also be preconditioned with the car remote start function * Option/accessory. CLIMATE (Engine Remote Start - ERS)6 via the Volvo On Call* app. Related information • • • Parking climate* (p. 227) Preconditioning* (p. 228) Preconditioning time setting* (p. 229) Preconditioning time setting* The timer can be set so that the preconditioning is finished at a predetermined time. The timer can handle up to 8 different settings for: • • A time on a single date Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* The timer for preconditioning can manage up to 8 time settings. Adding a time setting A time on one or more days of the week, with or without repetition. Related information • • Preconditioning* (p. 228) Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 229) • Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* (p. 231) • Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 231) The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate tab in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 6 Certain markets. }} * Option/accessory. 229 CLIMATE || 3. Press Add timer. > A pop-up window is shown. NOTE 7. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time setting. > The time setting is added to the list and is activated. It is not possible to add a time setting if there already are 8 settings entered for the timer. Delete a time setting in order to be able to add a new one. WARNING Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*: With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by ticking/unticking the box for Repeat weekly. With Days: Select the days of the week for preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for the days of the week. 6. Set the time when the preconditioning should be finished by scrolling with the arrows. 230 Related information In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • • • • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • • 5. With Date: Select the date for preconditioning by scrolling the date list with the arrows. 4. Edit the time setting in the same way as described in "Adding a time setting" above. • 4. Tap on Date to set the time for a single date. Tap on Days to set the time for one or more days of the week. 3. Press the time setting that is to be changed. > A pop-up window is shown. Preconditioning* (p. 228) Preconditioning time setting* (p. 229) Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* (p. 231) Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 231) When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. Editing a time setting 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* WARNING Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*: A time setting in the timer for preconditioning can be activated or deactivated based on need. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping on the timer button to the right of the setting. > The time setting is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the climate view. 1. • Removing time setting for preconditioning* A time setting for preconditioning that is no longer required can be deleted. The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting in the tab Parking climate in the climate view. 1. Related information • • • • Open the climate view in the centre display. Preconditioning* (p. 228) 2. Select the Parking climate tab. Preconditioning time setting* (p. 229) 3. Press Edit list. Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 229) 4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list. > The icon changes to the text Delete. Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 231) 5. Press Delete to confirm. > The time setting is removed from the list. }} * Option/accessory. 231 CLIMATE || Related information • • • • Preconditioning* (p. 228) Preconditioning time setting* (p. 229) Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 229) Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* (p. 231) Climate comfort when parking* The climate in the car's passenger compartment can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if the engine needs to be switched off but the driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car and maintain the level of climate comfort. Starting climate comfort retention is only possible via direct start. The function utilises several systems in different cases: • • Residual heat from the engine, in a cold climate, heats the passenger compartment to comfort temperature. When it is warm, the ventilation cools the passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside the car. NOTE Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car. Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking* Climate comfort retention maintains the climate in the passenger compartment after driving. The function can use direct start from the centre display. 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Press Keep climate comfort. > Climate comfort retention is started/ switched off and the button illuminates/extinguishes. NOTE It is not possible to start climate comfort retention if there is not enough residual heat in the engine to maintain the passenger compartment climate, or if the outside temperature is above approx. 20°C (68°F). Related information • • 232 Parking climate* (p. 227) Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking* (p. 232) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE NOTE Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car. Related information • Climate comfort when parking* (p. 232) * Option/accessory. 233 CLIMATE Symbols and messages for parking climate control* A number of symbols and messages regarding parking climate control can be shown in the driver display. Symbol This symbol illuminates in the driver display when the parking heater is active. Message Specification Parking climate Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible. Service required Parking climate Temporarily unavailable Parking climate Unavailable Fuel level too low Parking climate Unavailable Charge level too low Parking climate Limited Charge level too low A Messages relating to parking climate control can also be displayed in a device which has the Volvo On Call* app. Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a workshopA to check the function. Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill the vehicle's fuel tank. Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the parking heater*. Start the car. The running time for parking climate control is limited when the state of charge in the starter battery is low. Start the car. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • 234 Parking climate* (p. 227) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Heater* The heater has two subfunctions that help to heat the passenger compartment or engine in different situations. The heater has two subfunctions: • Parking heater - heats the passenger compartment, if necessary, when the parking climate control's preconditioning is activated. • Additional heater - heats the passenger compartment and engine, if necessary, during driving. NOTE Make sure that there is enough charge in the battery if the heater needs to be used. The heater is powered by the car's starter battery. If the charge level of the starter battery is too low, then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message. WARNING Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel. Check in the driver display that the heater is switched off. This symbol is lit when it is working as a parking heater. Related information NOTE Battery and charging Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's fuel tank if the heater needs to be used. Fuel and refuelling The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing. When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel housing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal. NOTE Warning label on fuel filler flap. • • • Climate (p. 200) Parking heater* (p. 236) Additional heater* (p. 237) The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel tank. If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the heater. If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message. * Option/accessory. 235 CLIMATE Parking heater* The parking heater heats the passenger compartment as necessary before driving if the car's preconditioning is activated. The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing. When this symbol illuminates in the driver display, the parking heater may be active. NOTE When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel housing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal. NOTE WARNING Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*: Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's fuel tank if the parking heater needs to be used. Make sure that there is enough charge in the starter battery if the parking heater needs to be used. IMPORTANT Repeated use of the parking heater combined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting. If the heater is used on a regular basis, then the car should be driven for the same amount of time that the heater is used in order to ensure that the car's battery is recharged with the same amount of energy as consumed by the parking heater. 236 In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. WARNING If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds coming from the parking heater, switch off the heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. The parking heater starts automatically if the parking climate's preconditioning* is activated and the passenger compartment needs to be heated up. Depending on factors such as fuel availability, battery level, passenger compartment temperature and ambient temperature, the heater has different running times, but never longer than 30 minutes. • Related information • • Heater* (p. 235) Additional heater* (p. 237) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Additional heater* The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving. The additional heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing. NOTE When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel housing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal. • Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater* (p. 237) Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater* The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving. It is possible to set whether automatic start for the additional heater should be activated/ deactivated. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Additional Heater to activate/ deactivate automatic start of the additional heater. NOTE The additional heater starts and is controlled automatically when heating is required while the car is being driven. Volvo recommends that the automatic start for the additional heater should be switched off for short driving distances. It switches off automatically when the car is switched off. Related information NOTE • Additional heater* (p. 237) Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs to be used. Related information • • Heater* (p. 235) Parking heater* (p. 236) * Option/accessory. 237 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Lock confirmation The car indicates with hazard warning flashers when the car is locked or unlocked. Lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel Indication in lock buttons The lock and alarm indicator shows the status of the locking system: Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door. Front door Exterior indication Locking • The car's hazard warning flashers indicate locking by flashing and retracting the door mirrors1. Unlocking • The car's hazard warning flashers indicate unlocking by two flashes and extending the door mirrors1. All doors, the tailgate and the bonnet must be closed for the car to indicate that it is locked. If locking takes place with just the driver door closed2, locking will take place but the lock indication with hazard warning flashers will only take place when all doors, the tailgate and the bonnet have been closed. 1 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors. 2 Not applicable to with cars equipped with keyless 240 • • A long flash indicates locking. • Rapid flashes after disarming the alarm* indicate that the alarm has been triggered. Short flashes indicate that the car is locked. An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button of either front door indicates that all doors are locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extinguish in both doors. locking/unlocking*. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Rear door* Lock indication setting Remote control key It is possible to select various options for how the car confirms locking and unlocking in the settings menu in the centre display. To change the locking response setting: The remote control key locks and unlocks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote control key needs to be inside the car for it to be started. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Locking. 3. Press Visible Locking Feedback to select when the car is to give a visible response: • Lock • Unlock • Both Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door. An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button for one of the doors indicates that the door in question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its lamp will extinguish while the others will continue to illuminate. Other indication The home safe lighting and approach light functions can also be activated when locking and unlocking. Related information • • • Lock indication setting (p. 241) Approach light duration (p. 159) Using home safe lighting (p. 159) Or switch off the function by selecting Off . To change the setting for retractable rearview mirrors* when locking: 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Convenience. Mirrors and 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate or deactivate the function. Related information • Lock confirmation (p. 240) Remote control key3 or key tag (Key Tag)*. The remote control key is not physically used when starting since the car is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive Start) as standard. You simply need to have the key in the front part of the passenger compartment. For cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry)* the key can be anywhere in the car to start the car. In this case, a slightly smaller, lighter key tag (Key Tag) is also supplied. The remote control keys can be linked to different driver profiles to save personal preferences in the car. }} * Option/accessory. 241 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Remote control key buttons automatically when the button is held depressed. The tailgate is also closed with a long press – acoustic warning signals sound. Panic function – Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn. The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 3 minutes. The remote control key has four buttons - one on the left-hand side and three on the right-hand side. Locking – Pressing the button locks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also arms the alarm*. Press and hold to close all of the windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously. Unlocking – Pressing the button unlocks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also deactivates the alarm. A longer press opens all windows simultaneously. This total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather. WARNING If anyone is left in the car, make sure the power windows and panoramic roof* are de-energised by always taking the remote control key with you when you leave the car. NOTE Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car. • A remote control key or key tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The "Double lock" function is also deactivated. The key left behind is reactivated when the car is unlocked. • A Red Key left in the car will be deactivated even when the car is locked using Volvo On Call, and reactivated when the car is unlocked using Volvo On Call or with another valid key. Button-less key (Key Tag)* The key tag provided with the keyless locking and unlocking function works in the same way as the standard remote control key as regards keyless starting and locking and unlocking. The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It has no detachable key blade and the battery cannot be replaced. Tailgate – Unlocks the tailgate only and disarms its alarm. On cars with power operated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened 3 The 242 figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Red Key - restricted remote control key* NOTE When the remote control key is placed in the cup holder, make sure that no other car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) are in the cup holder. Several car keys close to each other in the cup holder can cause interference with each other. A Red Key is a key that makes it possible to set restrictions for some of the car's properties, e.g. the car's maximum speed and the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. A key for any car owner who wants their car to be driven responsibly even when someone else is driving it. Interference Related information Remote control key functions for keyless starting and keyless locking and unlocking* can be disrupted by electromagnetic fields and screening. • • NOTE Avoid storing the remote control key close to metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers - preferably no closer than 10-15 cm (4-6 inches). • • • • • The buttons on the remote control key can be used to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler flap simultaneously. Locking with the remote control key Starting the car (p. 418) Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 243) Remote control key range (p. 245) Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 246) Detachable key blade (p. 251) Immobiliser (p. 254) Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 135) If there is still interference - use the remote control key's detachable key blade to unlock and then place the key in the backup reader in the cup holder to disarm the car and allow the car to be started. 4 If Locking and unlocking with the remote control key the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking* then all side doors must be closed. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. – Press the remote control key lock the car. button to For the lock sequence to be activated, the driver door must be closed4. If any of the other doors or the tailgate are open, these are locked and alarmed* only when they are closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are activated when all the doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. }} * Option/accessory. 243 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Automatic relocking NOTE Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car. • • A remote control key or key tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The "Double lock" function is also deactivated. The key left behind is reactivated when the car is unlocked. A Red Key left in the car will be deactivated even when the car is locked using Volvo On Call, and reactivated when the car is unlocked using Volvo On Call or with another valid key. Locking when the tailgate is open NOTE Unlocking with the remote control key 5 If 244 Press the remote control key unlock the car. When the remote control key does not work NOTE Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt. button to Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking It is possible to select different sequences for remotely controlled unlocking. To change setting: 1. • Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking (p. 244) • Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key (p. 245) • • Remote control key (p. 241) • Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 253) Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 246) Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Locking Interior Unlock. Remote and 3. Select option: • All Doors - unlocks all doors simultaneously. If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be discharged - in which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with the detachable key blade. Related information If the car has been locked while the tailgate is open, be careful not to leave the remote control key in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed and the car is completely locked5. – If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally. • Single Door - unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of the doors requires two presses on the remote control key's unlock button. The settings made here also affect central unlocking via opening handles from the inside. Related information • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 243) • Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 268) the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.* * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key 2. With the power operated tailgate option* Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the button remote control key's > The tailgate is unlocked and opened, while the side doors remain locked and their alarm functions armed. It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by pressing a button on the remote control key. Related information • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 243) • Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 271) Remote control key range In order for the remote control key to work properly it needs to be within a certain distance from the car. For manual use The remote control key's functions for e.g. locking/unlocking that are activated by pressor have a range that extends ing on approx. 20 metres (65 feet) from the car. If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again. For keyless* use 1. butPress the remote control key's ton. > The tailgate is unlocked but remains closed. The side doors are still locked and the alarm is armed*. The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel extinguishes in order to show that the entire car is not locked. Lightly grasp the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to open the tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed. The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered by the system's antennas. For keyless use, a remote control key or the button-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicircular area with a radius of approx. }} * Option/accessory. 245 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || 1.5 metres (5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre (3 feet) from the tailgate. NOTE The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade. Replacing the battery in the remote control key The battery in the remote control key needs to be replaced when it has become discharged. NOTE All batteries have a limited service life and must eventually be replaced (does not apply to Key Tag). The service life of the battery varies depending on how often the vehicle/key is used. If the remote control key is removed from the car If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is running, the warning message Car key not found Removed from car is shown in the driver display and an acoustic reminder sounds when the last door is closed. The message extinguishes when the key is returned to the car, followed by a press of the right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last door is closed. Related information • • • Remote control key (p. 241) Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt. The battery in the button-less key6 (Key Tag) cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop. IMPORTANT A discharged Key Tag must be handed over to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key must be deleted from the car since it is still possible to use it to start the car via back-up start. The battery for the remote control key should be replaced if • the information symbol illuminates and the message Car key battery low is shown in the driver display • the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres (65 feet) of the car. Antenna locations for the start and lock systems (p. 267) Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 264) 6 Supplied 246 NOTE with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Opening the key and changing the battery Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Slide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards. Turn the key, move the button to the side and slide the back shell a few millimetres upwards. Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the battery cover anticlockwise until the markings meet at the OPEN text. The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key. Carefully lift away the battery cover by pressing e.g. a fingernail into the recess. Then prize the battery cover upwards. The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key. }} 247 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || NOTE Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, subsection 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria. The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated. IMPORTANT Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function. Install a new battery with the (+) side up. Avoid touching the remote control key's battery contacts with your fingers. Place the battery in the holder with the edge down. Then slide the battery forwards so that it fastens under the two plastic catches. Press the battery down so that it fastens under the upper black plastic catch. NOTE Use batteries with the designation CR2032, 3 V. 248 Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Ordering more remote control keys Reposition the rear side's shell and press it down until a clicking sound can be heard. Turn the remote control key over and refit the front side's shell by pressing it down until a clicking sound can be heard. Then slide the shell back. > A further click will indicate that the shell is properly positioned and securely attached. Then slide the shell back. > A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached. IMPORTANT Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the environment. Related information • Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 253) • • Starting the car (p. 418) The car is supplied with two remote control keys. A button-less key is supplied if the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Additional keys can be ordered. A total of twelve keys can be programmed and used for one single car. If additional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles are added one per new remote control key. This also applies for the key tag. Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the workshop. The code of the missing key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure. The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked via driver profiles in the centre display's top view, select Settings System Driver Profiles. Related information • Remote control key (p. 241) Remote control key (p. 241) * Option/accessory. 249 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Red Key - restricted remote control key* A Red Key makes it possible for the car's owner to set limitations for certain of the car's properties. The limitations are intended to encourage the car to be driven in a safe manner, e.g. when being loaned out. Driver profile for Red Key Settings for Red Key* A Red Key is connected to a special Red Key driver profile, and when it is active, the key's settings cannot be changed. It is not possible to change to another driver profile either; this requires a normal remote control key. The holder of a regular remote control key can change settings for a Red Key. However, certain driver support functions are always active. The Red Key driver profile is activated when the car is unlocked with a Red Key without a normal remote control key in the vicinity. 1. NOTE In the event of a change of driver, the car must be locked and unlocked in order to activate a new driver profile. Ordering Red Key For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's maximum speed, set speed reminders and determine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. In addition, some of the car's driver support systems will always be active. Other functions of the key are the same as those of a normal remote control key. The restrictions are intended to act as measures to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young drivers, valet parking or a workshop. One or more Red Key can be ordered from a Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with restrictions can be programmed and used for a single car - at least one must be a normal remote control key. Related information • • Settings for Red Key* (p. 250) Remote control key (p. 241) To change setting: Unlock the car with the normal remote control key. 2. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 3. Press System Driver Profiles Red Key. > The following settings can be defined: • Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise Control* • Reduced Maximum Volume • Max Speed Limit • Speed Limit Warning Details and settings on first use Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise Control Set the time gap (1 is the shortest and 5 is the longest gap). On first use, the setting is 5.0. Reduced Maximum Volume Lower maximum volume for media sources. On first use, the function is "On". 250 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Max Speed Limit Set a maximum speed for this key. On first use, the function is "On" and the speed is 120 km/h (75 mph). • Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph) • Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) Speed restriction symbol. • • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* Detachable key blade Road Sign Information* The remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which a number of functions can be activated and some operations carried out. The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades. Related information • Red Key - restricted remote control key* (p. 250) The key blade's application areas Using the remote control key's detachable key blade Speed Limit Warning Warns when car moves above set values. On first use, the function is "On" and the values are 50, 70 and 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph). • • • Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph) Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6 • the left-hand7 front door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key • • all doors are emergency-locked the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated and deactivated. The button-less key8 does not have a detachable key blade. If necessary, use the detachable key blade from the normal remote control key. Driver support functions The following driver support functions will always be active for the user of a Red Key: • • • • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* Lane assistance (LKA)* Distance Warning* City Safety }} * Option/accessory. 251 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Detaching the key blade Related information Detach the key blade by angling it up. Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Guide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards. The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key. Return the key blade to its intended position in the remote control key after use. Refit the shell by pressing it downward until a clicking sound is heard. Then slide the shell back. > A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached. 7 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive. 8 Supplied with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*. 252 • Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 253) • Remote control key (p. 241) KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade 5. Pull out the handle. > The door opens. Amongst other things, the detachable key blade can be used to unlock the car from the outside - e.g. if the remote control key's battery has become discharged. Locking will be performed in the same way, but with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of clockwise in step (3). Unlocking Switch off the alarm and start the car* NOTE When the door is unlocked using the key blade and is then opened, the alarm is triggered. 2. Then turn the start knob clockwise and release it. > The alarm signal stops sounding and the alarm is switched off. Locking It is also possible to lock the car with the remote control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the event of a loss of power or if the key's battery has become discharged. The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the detachable key blade. Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead have a lock switch on the end of each door which must be depressed using the key blade - they are then mechanically locked/ blocked to prevent them being opened from outside. Pull out the front door handle on the lefthand side9 to its end position so that the lock cylinder become visible. The doors can still be opened from the inside. Insert the key in the lock cylinder. Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key blade is pointing straight back. Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting position. Remove the key from the lock cylinder and release the handle so that the rear section of the handle is resting against the car again. 9 This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive. The backup reader's location in the cup holder. Deactivate the alarm as follows: 1. Place the remote control key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the bottom of the cup holder in the tunnel console. }} * Option/accessory. 253 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || NOTE Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the child safety locks. – Remove the detachable key blade from the remote control key. Insert the key blade in the hole for lock reset and press the key in until it bottoms, approx. 12 mm (0.5 inches). • A door's lock reset only locks that particular door - not all doors simultaneously. • A manually locked rear door with activated manual or electric child safety locks cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside. A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking button. Immobiliser The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised person from starting the car. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key. The following error message in the driver display is related to the electronic immobiliser: Symbol Related information • • • Message Specification Car key not found Error reading the remote control key during starting - place the key on the key symbol in the cup holder and try again. See Owner's manual Starting the car (p. 418) Detachable key blade (p. 251) Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 280) The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside. • Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 246) The door is blocked against opening from the outside. To return to position A, the inner door handle must be opened. • Remote control key (p. 241) Related information • • Remote control key (p. 241) Ordering more remote control keys (p. 249) The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock button on the remote control key or with the central locking button on the driver's door. 254 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Type approval for the remote control key system Type approval for the car's remote key system can be seen in the following tables. Lock system keyless start (Passive Start) and keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*) For detailed information on type approval, go to www.volvocars.com. CEM marking for the remote control key system. For supplementary type approval numbers, see following tables. Country/Area Type approval Europe Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that this VO3-134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements and other relevant provisions contained in directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com. Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250 Serbia P1614120100 Argentina CNC ID: C-14771 }} * Option/accessory. 255 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Type approval Brazil MT-3245/2015 Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015 Malaysia RAAT/37A/1215/S(15-5198) Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396 Russia The United Arab Emirates 256 ER37847/15 DA0062437/11 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Type approval Namibia TA-2016-02 South Africa TA-2014-1868 Remote control key Country/Area Type approval Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio equipment HUF8423 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com. Wavelength: 433.92 MHz Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/104 }} 257 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Morocco Type approval AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015 Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015 Mexico IFETEL Marca: HUF Modelo (s): HUF8423 NOM-121-SCT1-2009 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. Namibia 258 TA-2015-102 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Type approval Oman Serbia }} 259 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Type approval South Africa TA-2015-432 The United Arab Emirates Key Tag Country/Area Type approval Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio equipment HUF8432 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com. Wavelength: 433.92 MHz Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany Jordan 260 TRC/LPD/2015/107 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Morocco Type approval AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015 Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015 Mexico IFETEL Marca: HUF Modelo (s): HUF8432 NOM-121-SCT1-2009 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. Namibia TA-2015-103 }} 261 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Oman Serbia 262 Type approval KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Type approval South Africa TA-2015-414 The United Arab Emirates Related information • Remote control key (p. 241) 263 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* With the keyless locking and unlocking function, carrying the remote control key in a pocket or bag will suffice. The car is locked or unlocked via a touch-sensitive surface on the door handle. Touch-sensitive surfaces Door handle The outside of the door handles contains a recess for locking, while the inside contains a touch-sensitive surface for unlocking. Touch-sensitive recess for locking Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking 264 NOTE It is important that only one touch-sensitive surface is activated at a time. Gripping the handle while touching the lock surface risks giving double commands. This means that the requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not be executed, or will be executed with a delay. Related information • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 265) Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 266) Tailgate handle The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure plate that is only used for unlocking. NOTE Be aware that the system may be activated in connection with car washing if the remote control key is in range. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Keyless locking and unlocking* Keyless locking Keyless unlocking With keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to touch the door handle's touch-sensitive surface to lock or unlock the car. All side doors must be closed to be able to lock the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be open when locking the car with a side door handle. – NOTE One of the car's remote control keys must be within range for locking and unlocking to work. – Touch the marked surface towards the rear on the outside of a door handle after the door has been closed. Or press the button on the underside of the tailgate before it closes. > The lock indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash to indicate the car is locked. To close all side windows and the panoramic roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door handle and hold it there until all of the side windows and the panoramic roof have been closed. Touch-sensitive recess for locking Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking NOTE Be aware that the system may be activated in connection with car washing if the remote control key is in range. Locking when the tailgate is open If the car has been locked and the tailgate is still open, make sure that the remote control key is not left in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed. NOTE Grasp a door handle or gently press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to unlock the car. > The lock indicator on the instrument panel stops flashing to indicate that the car is unlocked. Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate can only be used for unlocking. Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally. If the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed. }} * Option/accessory. 265 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Related information • • • Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 266) Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 266) Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 264) Settings for Keyless entry* Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* It is possible to select different sequences for Keyless entry. To change setting: With keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to touch the touch-sensitive surface on the tailgate handle to unlock the tailgate. 1. NOTE Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Tap on My Car Unlock. Locking One of the car's remote control keys must be within range behind the car for unlocking to work. Keyless 3. Select option: • All Doors - unlocks all doors simultaneously. • Single Door - unlocks selected door. Related information • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 265) Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 264) The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock. To open: 1. 266 Press gently on the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle. > The lock is released. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM 2. Lift by the outside handle in order to open the tailgate. IMPORTANT • Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel. • Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel. Antenna locations for the start and lock systems WARNING People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the keyless system's antennas with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system. An antenna for the keyless starting system and antennas for the keyless locking system* are built into the car. Related information • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 264) • Remote control key range (p. 245) It is also possible to unlock the tailgate handsfree with a foot movement under the rear bumper, see separate section. WARNING Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area. Related information • • • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 265) Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 264) Antenna locations: Under the cup holder in the front section of the tunnel console In the upper front section of the left-hand rear door10 In the upper front section of the right-hand rear door10 In the cargo area10 Remote control key range (p. 245) Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* (p. 275) * Option/accessory. 267 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Locking and unlocking from inside the car Alternative unlocking method Locking using a button in the front door The doors and tailgate can be locked and unlocked from inside using the central locking controls in the front doors. – Central locking Locking using a button in the rear door* Press the button - both front doors must be closed. > All doors and the tailgate are locked. Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side door11. – Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in the front door. Unlocking using a button in the front door – 10 11 12 268 Press the button to unlock all side doors and the tailgate. Pull the opening handle on one of the side doors and release. > Depending on the settings in the remote control key, either all doors will be unlocked or only the selected door will be unlocked and opened. To change this setting, tap on Settings My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock in the centre display's top view. Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door. The rear door lock buttons lock their respective rear door. Unlocking the rear door – Pull the opening handle. > The rear door is unlocked and opened12. Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Provided that the child safety lock is not activated. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Related information • Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking (p. 244) • Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car (p. 269) • Activating and deactivating child safety locks (p. 270) Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car The tailgate can be unlocked from inside by pressing the button on the instrument panel. – Related information • Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 268) • Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 271) Brief press on the button on the instrument panel. > The tailgate can be unlocked and opened from the outside by grasping the rubberised pressure plate. With the power operated tailgate option*: – Long press on the button on the instrument panel. > The tailgate is opened. * Option/accessory. 269 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Activating and deactivating child safety locks NOTE The child safety locks prevent the rear doors being opened from inside. The child safety locks may be either manual or electric*. Activating and deactivating manual child safety locks • A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously. • Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock. Activating and deactivating electric* child safety locks The electric child safety locks can be activated and deactivated in all ignition positions higher than 0. Activation and deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the car, provided that no door is opened. When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear • windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel • doors cannot be opened from inside. To deactivate the locks: – Press the button in the driver's door control panel. > The driver display shows the message Rear child lock Deactivated and the button's lamp goes out - the locks are deactivated. When the car is switched off, the current setting is stored – if the child safety locks are activated when the car is switched off, the function will continue to be activated next time the car is started. Manual child safety locks. Not to be confused with manual door locks. – 2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel. > The driver display shows the message Rear child lock Activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are active. Use the remote control key's detachable key blade to turn the knob. The door is blocked against opening from the inside. The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside. 270 Button for electric activation and deactivation. 1. Start the car or choose an ignition position higher than 0. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Symbol Message Specification Rear child lock Activated Child safety locks are activated. Rear child lock Deactivated Child safety locks are deactivated. Related information • Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 268) • Detachable key blade (p. 251) Automatic locking when driving The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move. To change this setting: 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Locking. Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate Function where the tailgate can be opened and closed at the touch of a button. Opening Choose one of the following options to open the power operated tailgate: 3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving to deactivate or activate this function. Related information • Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 268) – Long press on the remote control key's button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate starts to open. }} * Option/accessory. 271 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || – Long press on the instrument panel's button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate starts to open. – Foot movement* under the rear bumper. Press the button on the underside of the tailgate to close. > The tailgate closes automatically and remains unlocked. – Closing Choose one of the following options to close13 the power operated tailgate: NOTE – 13 272 • The button is active 24 hours after the hatch has been left open. Thereafter, it must be closed manually. • If the flap has been open for more than 30 minutes, it will close at a slow speed. Light press on the tailgate handle. A car with keyless locking and unlocking* has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM – Long press on the button on the remote control key. > The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound – the tailgate remains unlocked. – Long press on the button on the instrument panel. > The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound – the tailgate remains unlocked. – Foot movement* under the rear bumper. > The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound – the tailgate remains unlocked. Closing and locking IMPORTANT During manual tailgate operation, open or close it slowly. Do not use force to open/ close it if there is resistance. It may be damaged and stop working correctly. Cancel opening or closing Press the button on the underside of the tailgate to close it and simultaneously lock13 the tailgate and doors (all doors must be closed for locking). > The tailgate closes automatically – the tailgate and doors are locked, and the alarm* is armed. – NOTE 13 detected sufficiently close to the tailgate. • One of the car's remote control keys must be within range for locking and unlocking to work. • When using keyless* locking or closing, three signals will sound if the key is not A car with keyless locking and unlocking* has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. Cancel opening or closing in one of the following ways: • • • Press the button on the instrument panel. Press the remote control key's button. Press the closing button on the underside of the tailgate. • Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle. • Using a foot movement*. The tailgate's movement is interrupted and stops. The tailgate can then be operated manually. If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position, the next activation will open the tailgate. }} * Option/accessory. 273 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Pinch protection Pre-tensioned springs If something with sufficient resistance prevents the tailgate from opening or closing then the pinch protection is activated. • • Adapt the tailgate's opening position to low roof height. To adjust max. opening: During opening - movement is interrupted, the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal sounds. 1. During closing - movement is interrupted, the tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate returns to the programmed max. position. WARNING Watch out for the risk of crushing when opening and closing. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open position. NOTE It is not possible to program an opening position lower than half-open tailgate. The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate. WARNING Check that there is nobody near the tailgate before starting to open or close it as a crush injury may have severe consequences. Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate. They are pretensioned with high pressure and can cause injury if opened. Always operate the tailgate with caution. Related information 274 Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate* • Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate* (p. 274) • Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* (p. 275) • Remote control key range (p. 245) button on the underside of 2. Press the the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. > Two short acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been saved. To reset max. opening: – Manually move the tailgate to its highest possible position – press and hold the button on the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. > Two acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been cleared. The tailgate will then assume its maximum position when opened. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM NOTE • If the system has been operating continuously for a long time, it is switched off to avoid overload. It can be used again after about 2 minutes. Related information • Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 271) Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* A function which allows the tailgate to open and close by moving a foot under the rear bumper makes life easier when your hands are full. If the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking* then you can unlock the tailgate with a foot movement. The function with both opening and closing of the tailgate is also available when the car is equipped with power operated tailgate*. NOTE The foot-operated tailgate function is available in two versions: • Opening and closing with foot movement • Only unlocking with foot movement (lift up the tailgate manually to open it) The sensor is located on left of centre in the bumper. One of the car's remote control keys must be within range behind the car, approx. 1 metre (3 feet), for opening and closing to be possible. This also applies to an already unlocked car in order to avoid accidental opening e.g. in a car wash. Note that the function for opening and closing with foot movement requires power operated tailgate*. }} * Option/accessory. 275 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Opening and closing with foot movement Cancelling opening or closing with foot movement – Make one slow forward kicking motion when opening or closing is in progress in order to stop the movement of the tailgate. • Remote control key range (p. 245) The remote control key does not have to be in the vicinity of the car to cancel opening or closing of the tailgate. If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position, the next activation will open the tailgate. NOTE Kicking motion within the detector's activation area. – Make one slow, forward kicking motion under the left part of the rear bumper. Then take a step back. The bumper must not be touched. > A short acoustic signal sounds when opening or closing is activated - the tailgate is opened/closed. If several kicking motions take place without an approved remote control key being located behind the car, opening will not be possible until after a certain delay. Do not leave your foot positioned under the car during the kicking motion. This could cause activation to fail. 276 There is a risk of reduced function, or no function, if the rear bumper is loaded with large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For this reason, make sure you keep it clean. NOTE Pay attention to the possibility that the system may be activated in a car wash or similar if the remote key is within range. Related information • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 264) • Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 271) * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Private locking The tailgate can be locked with the private locking function which prevents it from being opened, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The private locking function button is located in the centre display function view. Depending on the current status of the lock, Private Locking Unlocked or Private Locking Locked is shown. Activating and deactivating private locking Private locking is activated with a function button in the centre display and an optional PIN code. Activating and deactivating private locking (p. 277) 1. Press the button for private locking in the function view. NOTE The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a minimum for the private locking function to be activated. Private locking has two codes: • A security code is created the first time the function is used. • A new PIN code is selected every time the function is activated. Related information • To create a security code: Enter the security code before using for the first time A security code needs to be selected during the first time the function is used. It can then be used to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN code has been forgotten or lost. The security code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN codes set for the private locking function. Save the security code in a safe place. > A pop-up window is shown. 2. Enter the preferred security code and press Confirm. > The security code is saved. The private locking function is now ready for activation. Activate private locking 1. Press the button for private locking in the function view. > A pop-up window is shown. }} 277 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || 2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock the tailgate after locking and tap on Confirm. > The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of locking takes place by means of a green indicator being shown by the button in the function view. Deactivate private locking 1. Press the button for private locking in the function view. > A pop-up window is shown. 2. Enter the code that was used for locking and tap on Confirm. > The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation of unlocking takes place by means of the green indicator by the button in the function view extinguishing. Forgotten PIN code If the PIN code has been forgotten or the wrong PIN code has been entered more than three times, the security code can be used to deactivate private locking. 14 278 If the car is unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On Call app, private locking will be deactivated automatically. Alarm* The alarm provides audible and visual warnings if anyone enters the car without a valid remote control key or manipulates the starter battery or alarm siren. When armed, the alarm is triggered if: Forgotten security code If the security code has also been forgotten, contact an authorised Volvo dealer for help with deactivating private locking. • Related information a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened14 • a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*) • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*) • • the starter battery's cable is disconnected • Private locking (p. 277) the siren is disconnected. Alarm signals When the alarm has been triggered, the following happens: • A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off. • Hazard warning flashers flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off. If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified, the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times14. Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Alarm indicator ment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the panoramic roof* open or if the passenger compartment heater is used. NOTE Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insurance. To avoid this: A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status: • • • LED not lit – alarm not armed. The LED flashes once every other second – alarm is armed. After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds or until ignition position I has been activated - the alarm has been triggered. Movement and tilt sensors* Movement and tilt sensors react to movements inside the car, if the window is broken or if anyone tries to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle away. • Close the window and panoramic roof when leaving the car. • If the passenger compartment or parking heater is to be used – direct the airflow from the air vents so that they do not point upwards in the passenger compartment. Alternatively, use a reduced alarm level to temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt sensors. Related information • • • Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 280) Reduced alarm level* (p. 281) Double lock* (p. 281) Also switch off the movement and tilt sensors when the car is being transported on a ferry or train as these movements may affect the car and trigger the alarm. In the event of an alarm system fault If there is a fault in the alarm system, the driver display shows the symbol and the message Alarm system failure Service required. In which case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The movement sensor triggers an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compart- * Option/accessory. 279 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Activating and deactivating alarms* 1. The alarm is armed when the car is locked. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade. > The alarm is triggered. Arming the alarm Lock and arm the car alarm as follows • press the remote control key's lock button . • touch the marked surface on the outside of the door handles or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate15. If the car is equipped with both keyless locking/unlocking* and a power-operated tailgate*, the button on the underside of the tailgate can also be used to lock the car and arm the car alarm. A red LED on the instrument panel flashes once every two seconds when the car is locked and the alarm is armed. Deactivate the alarm Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows • press the remote control key's unlock button . • grip one of the door handles or press gently on the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate15. Deactivate the alarm without a functioning remote control key The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the remote control key's battery is dead. 15 280 The backup reader's location in the cup holder. 2. Place the remote control key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel console's cup holder. 3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it. > The alarm is deactivated. Switching off a triggered alarm – Press the remote control key's unlock button or set the car in ignition position I by turning the start knob clockwise and then releasing. Applies to cars with keyless locking and unlocking*. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Automatic arming and rearming of the alarm Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally. If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time. Reduced alarm level* Double lock* A reduced alarm level means that the movement and tilt sensors are temporarily switched off. Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry. Double lock means that all opening handles are released mechanically when locking from the outside, which makes it impossible to open the doors from the inside. Double lock is activated when locking with a remote control key or with keyless locking*, and takes place with a delay of approx. 10 seconds after the doors have locked. If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated. Press the Reduced Guard button in the centre display function view to switch off the movement and tilt sensors when subsequently locking the car. In certain markets, the alarm is armed automatically after a certain delay after the driver's door has been opened and closed without being locked. To change this setting: 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Locking. 3. Select Passive Arming Deactivation to deactivate the function temporarily. Related information • Alarm* (p. 278) At the same time, the double lock function is deactivated, i.e. unlocking from inside is possible. If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the reduced alarm level must be reactivated. The car can only be unlocked with a remote control key, keyless unlocking* or the Volvo On Call* app when double lock is activated. The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with the detachable key blade, the alarm will be triggered. NOTE Related information • • Alarm* (p. 278) • Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked. • The alarm is triggered if anyone attempts to open the doors from inside. Double lock* (p. 281) }} * Option/accessory. 281 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || WARNING Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the function in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. Related information • Temporarily* deactivating double locks (p. 282) • Alarm* (p. 278) Temporarily* deactivating double locks If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the double lock function should be deactivated, to allow unlocking from the inside. WARNING Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the function in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the double lock function must be deactivated again. The system is reset the next time the engine is started. Related information • • Double lock* (p. 281) Alarm* (p. 278) Press the Reduced Guard button in the centre display's function view in order to deactivate the double lock function temporarily. This also means that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are switched off. After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the centre display and double locks are temporarily deactivated in the subsequent locking of the car. In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are deactivated immediately, but when double locks are temporarily deactivated, they will be active for a maximum of 10 minutes after locking. 282 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT DRIVER SUPPORT Driving support systems The car is equipped with different driver support systems which can assist the driver in different situations, either actively or passively. For example, the systems can help the driver to: • • maintain a set speed maintain a certain time interval to the vehicle ahead • prevent a collision by giving a warning to the driver and braking the car • help the driver to park. Some of the systems are fitted as standard while others are options – which alternative applies is market dependent. Related information 284 • IntelliSafe – driver support and safety (p. 33) • • • • • • • • Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284) Cornering support* (p. 328) Electronic stability control (p. 285) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Speed-dependent steering force Pilot Assist* (p. 313) Speed related power steering causes the steering wheel force to increase with the speed of the car so as to be able to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. On motorways the steering is firmer. When parking and at low speed steering is light and requires less effort. Radar unit (p. 331) Camera unit (p. 340) City Safety™ (p. 346) Rear Collision Warning* (p. 361) BLIS* (p. 362) Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 366) Road Sign Information* (p. 370) Driver Alert Control (p. 377) Lane assistance (p. 379) Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 386) Park Assist* (p. 392) Park assist camera* (p. 397) Park Assist Pilot* (p. 407) NOTE In rare situations the power steering may become too hot and then needs to be temporarily cooled – during this time the power steering operates with reduced power and turning the steering wheel may then be perceived to be slightly heavier. Then the message Power steering Assistance temporarily reduced and this symbol are shown in the driver display. While the power steering is working at reduced power, the driver support functions and steering assistance system are not available. Connected Safety (p. 289) Speed limiter (p. 294) Automatic speed limiter (p. 297) Distance Warning* (p. 291) Cruise control (p. 301) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING If the temperature increases too much, the servo may be forced to switch off completely. In such a situation, the driver display shows the Power steering failure Stop safely message, combined with a symbol. Change the steering force level* Steering wheel resistance can be adjusted when using INDIVIDUAL drive mode. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Select My Car Drive Modes Steering Force. Steering wheel resistance selection can only be accessed if the car is stationary or is moving at low speed and in a straight line. Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Drive modes* (p. 440) Electronic stability control Electronic Stability Control (ESC1) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction. The driver display shows this symbol when the system is engaged. Braking from the system may be heard as a pulsing sound, and the car may accelerate more slowly than expected when applying the throttle. The system consists of the following subfunctions: • • • • Stability function2 Spin control and traction control system Engine Drag Control Trailer stability assist WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Stability function2 The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car. 1 Electronic Stability Control 2 Also known as Active Yaw Control. }} * Option/accessory. 285 DRIVER SUPPORT || Spin control and traction control system The function is active at low speed and brakes the drive wheels that spin so that additional traction shall be transferred from the drive wheels that are not spinning. The function can also prevent the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during acceleration. Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Activating or deactivating sport mode for electronic stability control (p. 287) • Symbols and messages for electronic stability control (p. 288) • Trailer stability assist* (p. 477) Engine Drag Control Engine Drag Control (EDC3) can prevent involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gear on slippery road surfaces. Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car. Trailer stability assist*4 Trailer stability assist (TSA5) stabilises a car towing a trailer in situations where they begin snaking. NOTE Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if ESC Sport Mode is activated. 3 Engine Drag Control 4 Trailer stability assist is included 5 Trailer Stability Assist 6 Electronic Stability Control 286 Electronic Stability Control in sport mode The stability system (ESC6) is always activated – it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select ESC Sport Mode, which allows for a more active driving experience. With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction selected, intervention from the system is reduced and the car is allowed to skid more and greater control than normal is thus transferred to the driver. When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the function can be considered as deactivated, despite the function continuing to help the driver in many cases. NOTE With ESC Sport Mode selected, Trailer Stability Assist (TSA7) is deactivated. ESC Sport Mode also provides more traction even if the car has become bogged down or is driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or deep snow. when the Volvo genuine towbar is installed. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • • Electronic stability control (p. 285) Activating or deactivating sport mode for electronic stability control (p. 287) Trailer stability assist* (p. 477) Activating or deactivating sport mode for electronic stability control The stability system (ESC8) is always activated – it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experience. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. • • • • Speed limiter Cruise control Adaptive cruise control* Pilot Assist* Related information • Electronic Stability Control in sport mode (p. 286) • Electronic stability control (p. 285) The driver display indicates activated ESC Sport Mode by displaying this symbol with a constant glow until the function is deactivated or the engine is switched off. The next time the engine is started, the system is back in its normal mode again. The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be selected when one of the following functions is activated: 7 Trailer Stability Assist 8 Electronic Stability Control * Option/accessory. 287 DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for electronic stability control shown on the driver display. Here are some examples. A number of symbols and messages regarding electronic stability control (ESC9) can be Symbol Message Specification Constant glow for approx. 2 seconds. System check when the engine is started. Flashing light. The system is being activated. Constant glow. Sport mode is activated. NOTE: The system is not deactivated in this mode – it is partly reduced. ESC The system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled. Temporarily off ESC The system is disengaged. Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again. Service required A text message can be cleared by briefly button, located in the centre pressing the of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. 9 Electronic 288 Stability Control If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Electronic stability control (p. 285) DRIVER SUPPORT Connected Safety10 Connected Safety communicates information between your own car and other vehicles via the Internet11. The function is intended to make a driver aware that there may be a potentially dangerous traffic situation further ahead on the same road. The Connected Safety function can inform the driver whether another vehicle further ahead on the same road has activated its hazard warning flashers or detected slippery driving conditions. Information about slippery driving conditions is also given if your own car detects slippery surfaces. NOTE Connected Safety communication between vehicles only works for the vehicles equipped with the function and have it activated. Alarm on hazard warning flashers If your own car's hazard warning flashers are activated, information about this can be sent to vehicles approaching your own car's position. Alarm on hazard warning flashers Alarm on slippery driving conditions If slippery driving conditions are detected by your own car - in addition to you the driver drivers in other vehicles will also be informed about this via the Internet. In vehicles with head-up display, the warning symbols for Connected Safety are also shown there. 10 11 When the approaching vehicle is close to the slippery section of road, the symbol doubles in size on the vehicle's instrument panel. When your own car is approaching a vehicle with flashing hazard warning flashers, this symbol is shown on the instrument panel. Connected Safety can help the driver with the following: • • If an ice alert is triggered, this symbol is displayed on the instrument panel when a vehicle approaches the slippery road section, both in your own car and in other vehicles that have received the information via Connected Safety. When your own car is close to a vehicle with flashing hazard warning flashers, the symbol doubles in size. Alarm on slippery driving conditions If your own car detects a deterioration in friction between tyres and road surface, the information is sent to the vehicles approaching the position of your own car. Not available on all markets. Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. }} 289 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • • • 12 290 Driving support systems (p. 284) Activating or deactivating Connected Safety (p. 290) Limitations of Connected Safety (p. 291) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Activating or deactivating Connected Safety For Connected Safety to be able to share information on road conditions with other vehicles, the function needs to be activated. The function can be deactivated if you do not want to share information. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. Related information Connected Safety (p. 289) • • • Internet-connected car* (p. 527) • Limitations of Connected Safety (p. 291) User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 533) When activated, several windows are shown with terms and conditions that must be accepted by the driver to enable connection to the Internet12. For example, a situation where the driver must accept data being sent from the car using his/her mobile phone. If there is no Internet connection, your own car will still inform you, the driver, that slippery driving conditions have been detected by your own car. For Connected Safety to work optimally, your own car needs to be connected to the Internet. Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations of Connected Safety retailer for Volvo has information on current areas. Information about vehicles with activated hazard warning flashers or which have detected slippery driving conditions is not always communicated between all vehicles within the same area. This can be because for example: • • Poor or no contact with the Internet. • Vehicles that have detected slippery surfaces, or have activated their hazard warning flashers, do not have the function activated. • Vehicles on slippery surfaces make manoeuvres that are too weak for friction between tyres and road surface to be detectable, e.g. steering wheel movement, acceleration or braking. Vehicles that have detected slippery surfaces, or have activated their hazard warning flashers, are not equipped with the function. • There may be no warning due to missing or defective global positioning/satellite navigation. • Detection of slippery surfaces or activation of hazard warning flashers has taken place on a minor road which is missing in Volvo Cars database. • Connected Safety is not available in all markets and does not cover all areas - a WARNING • In certain situations, the function may give incorrect warnings for slippery driving conditions. • The function cannot always detect other vehicles with activated hazard warning flashers or detect all sections of road with slippery surfaces. Distance Warning*13 The Distance Warning function can assist the driver to notice that the time interval to the vehicle ahead may be too short. This requires the car to be equipped with a head-up display* to be able to display Distance Warning. Related information • • Connected Safety (p. 289) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Distance Warning symbol on the windscreen with head-up display. In cars equipped with head-up display, a symbol is shown on the windscreen for as long as the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value. However, this assumes that the Show Driver Support function is activated via the settings in the car's menu system. Distance warning is active at speeds above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to the vehicle ahead travelling in the same direc}} * Option/accessory. 291 DRIVER SUPPORT || tion. No distance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles. WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. NOTE Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise. NOTE Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* is active. WARNING Distance warning only reacts if the time window to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value – the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected. • Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk (p. 322) • Head-up display* (p. 139) Related information 13 292 • • First aid kit* (p. 597) • • Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 293) Activating or deactivating distance warning (p. 293) Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 325) Distance Alert * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Activating or deactivating distance warning14 The distance warning function can be deactivated. The function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called head-up display*. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. Limitations of Distance Warning15 Head-up display* (p. 139) The distance warning function may have limitations in certain situations. The function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called headup display*. WARNING Distance Warning is activated automatically each time the engine is started. • A vehicle's size may affect the ability to be detected, e.g. motorcycles, which could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter time window than set or that the warning is temporarily absent. • Extremely high speeds can cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter time window than that set due to limitations in radar unit range. NOTE Related information • • • Distance Warning* (p. 291) This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 293) Related information • • 14 15 Distance Warning* (p. 291) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Distance Alert Distance Alert * Option/accessory. 293 DRIVER SUPPORT Speed limiter A speed limiter (SL16) can be likened to a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set maximum speed by the speed limiter. : From active mode – deactivates/ changes the speed limiter to standby mode WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. : Reduces stored maximum speed Marker for stored max speed The car's current speed Stored maximum speed Buttons and symbols for the function. : Activates the speed limiter from standby mode and resumes stored maximum speed : Increases the stored maximum speed : From standby mode – activates the speed limiter and stores current speed Related information • • • • 16 294 Speed Limiter Driving support systems (p. 284) Limitations for speed limiter (p. 297) Selecting and activating speed limiter (p. 295) Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 296) DRIVER SUPPORT • Temporary deactivation of speed limiter (p. 296) Selecting and activating speed limiter • Set the stored speed for driver support (p. 324) • Automatic speed limiter (p. 297) The speed limiter function (SL17) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed. 2. When speed limiter is selected – press the steering wheel button (2) to activate. > The symbol is white – the speed limiter is started and the current speed is stored as maximum speed. Related information • • • Speed limiter (p. 294) Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 296) Temporary deactivation of speed limiter (p. 296) The speed limiter cannot be activated until after the engine has been started. The lowest maximum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph). 1. Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the symbol (4). for the speed limiter > The symbol is grey – the speed limiter is in standby mode. 17 Speed Limiter 295 DRIVER SUPPORT Deactivating the speed limiter The speed limiter and switched off. (SL18) can be deactivated • • Speed limiter (p. 294) Temporary deactivation of speed limiter Selecting and activating speed limiter (p. 295) The speed limiter (SL19) can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode. • Temporary deactivation of speed limiter (p. 296) Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal Related information The speed limiter can also be temporarily deactivated and overridden with the accelerator pedal without the speed limiter first having to be set in standby mode - e.g. to be able to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation. In which case, proceed as follows: 1. 1. Press the steering wheel button (2). > The symbol and indicators turn grey – the speed limiter is set in standby mode and the driver can exceed the set speed limit. 2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to change to another function. > The driver display's symbol and indicator for speed limiter (4) are switched off – which deletes the stored maximum speed. 18 19 296 Speed Limiter Speed Limiter Fully depress the accelerator pedal and release it to interrupt acceleration when the desired speed has been reached. > In this mode, the speed limiter is still activated and the driver display's symbol is therefore WHITE. 2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the temporary acceleration is finished. > The car is then engine-braked automatically to below the last stored maximum speed. DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • Speed limiter (p. 294) • Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 296) Selecting and activating speed limiter (p. 295) Limitations for speed limiter (SL20) Speed limiter has certain general limitations. On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s (SL21) braking effect may be inadequate and hence the stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this case, the driver is alerted by the message Speed limit exceeded in the driver display. NOTE A text message that the maximum speed is exceeded will be activated if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h (approx. 2 mph). Related information • 20 21 22 23 24 Speed Limiter Speed Limiter Automatic Speed Limiter Speed Limiter Road Sign Information Speed limiter (p. 294) Automatic speed limiter The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL22) function helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum speed to the speed shown on the road signs. The Speed Limiter function (SL23) can be changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL). The automatic speed limiter uses speed information from the Road Sign Information* (RSI24) function to automatically adapt the car's maximum speed. WARNING Even if the driver clearly sees the speedrelated road sign, the speed information from the Road Sign Information* (RSI) function to ASL may be incorrect – in such cases the driver must intervene him/herself and accelerate or brake to a suitable speed. }} * Option/accessory. 297 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING • • • 298 The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. Is SL or ASL active? Symbols in the driver display show which speed limiter function is active: Symbol The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. SL ASL ✓ ✓ Colour of sign symbol Meaning Greenish yellow ASL is active Grey A Orange ✓ Sign symbol after "70" = ASL is activated. A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode. The ASL symbol The sign symbol (displayed alongside the stored speed, "70", in the centre of the speedometer) can be shown in three colours with the following meanings: ASL has been set in standby mode ASL is in temporary standby mode - e.g. due to a traffic sign not being read Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Activating or deactivating the automatic speed limiter (p. 299) • Changing the tolerance for the automatic speed limiter (p. 300) • Limitations for automatic speed limiter (p. 300) • • Speed limiter (p. 294) Road Sign Information* (p. 370) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Activating or deactivating the automatic speed limiter NOTE • The automatic speed limiter function (ASL25) can be activated and deactivated as a supplement to the speed limiter (SL26). Activating the automatic speed limiter Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. 1. > GREEN button indication – the function is activated and the driver display shows a sign symbol in the centre of the speedometer. . 2. Press the steering wheel button > ASL is activated with the car’s current speed. If the automatic speed limiter function is activated, Road Sign Information* is shown in the driver display even if RSI27 is not activated. • To remove road sign information from the driver display, you must deactivate both automatic speed limiter and RSI. • When the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated but RSI is deactivated, no warnings are given from RSI. RSI must also be activated in order to receive warnings. Related information • • • • Speed limiter (p. 294) Automatic speed limiter (p. 297) Limitations for automatic speed limiter (p. 300) Road Sign Information* (p. 370) Deactivating the automatic speed limiter To deactivate the automatic speed limiter: – Tap on the button in the function view. > GREY button indication – ASL is switched off and SL is activated instead. WARNING After switching from ASL to SL the car will no longer follow the signed speed limit but only the stored maximum speed. 25 26 27 Automatic Speed Limiter Speed Limiter Road Sign Information – RSI * Option/accessory. 299 DRIVER SUPPORT Changing the tolerance for the automatic speed limiter The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL28) can be set for different tolerance levels. The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the speed setting is in the speed limiter. If, for example, the car follows a signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the driver can instead choose to allow the car to maintain 75 km/h (47 mph). – Press the steering wheel button (1) until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the speedometer (2) changes to 75 km/h (47 mph). > After which, the car uses the selected tolerance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph). The tolerance is followed until a road sign with a lower or higher speed is passed - then the car follows the new signed speed limit instead and the tolerance is deleted from the memory. NOTE The maximum selectable tolerance is +/- 10 km/h (5 mph). Limitations for automatic speed limiter Automatic speed limitation (ASL29) takes place using speed information from the Road Sign Information function* (RSI30) – not from the speed limit road signs that the car passes. If road sign information cannot interpret and provide speed information to the driver support systems, the automatic speed limiter sets in standby mode and changes to normal speed limiter. In such cases the driver must intervene and brake to a suitable speed. The automatic speed limiter will be reactivated when road sign information can once again interpret and provide speed information. Related information Related information • • Buttons and symbols for the function. 28 29 30 300 • Automatic speed limiter (p. 297) Limitations for automatic speed limiter (p. 300) • • • Speed limiter (p. 294) Automatic speed limiter (p. 297) Road Sign Information* (p. 370) Road Sign Information* (p. 370) Automatic Speed Limiter Automatic Speed Limiter Road Sign Information – RSI * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Cruise control The cruise control (CC31) helps the driver maintain an even speed, which can result in more relaxed driving on motorways and long, straight roads in regular traffic flows. Overview : Reduces stored speed Marker for stored speed WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. The car's current speed Stored speed NOTE In cars equipped with adaptive cruise control* (ACC32), it is possible to switch between cruise control and adaptive cruise control. Buttons and symbols for the function. : Activates cruise control from standby mode and resumes stored speed : Increases the stored speed : From standby mode – activates cruise control and stores current speed : From active mode – deactivates/ changes cruise control to standby mode 31 32 Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control Using engine braking instead of the foot brake With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less frequent application of the foot brake. On a downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable to start moving a little faster and }} * Option/accessory. 301 DRIVER SUPPORT || limit the acceleration by engine braking. In this case the driver can temporarily disable foot brake application by Cruise Control. To do so, proceed as follows: – Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway down and release. > Cruise Control will disengage its automatic foot braking and then uses engine braking only. Selecting and activating cruise control The cruise control function (CC33) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed. Reactivating cruise control to the last stored speed Related information • • • • • • 2. When cruise control is selected – press the steering wheel button (2) to activate. > The symbol is white – cruise control is started and the current speed is stored as maximum speed. The lowest speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph). – Driving support systems (p. 284) Selecting and activating cruise control (p. 302) Deactivating cruise control (p. 303) Standby mode for cruise control (p. 303) Set the stored speed for driver support (p. 324) Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display (p. 310) In order to start the cruise control from the standby mode, the car's current speed must be 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. 1. WARNING A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button. Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the symbol (4). for cruise control > The symbol is grey – cruise control is in standby mode. Related information • • • 33 302 When cruise control is selected – press to activate. the steering wheel button > The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow the most recently stored speed again. Cruise control (p. 301) Deactivating cruise control (p. 303) Standby mode for cruise control (p. 303) Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Deactivating cruise control Cruise control switched off. (CC34) can be deactivated and Related information • • Cruise control (p. 301) Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display (p. 310) • Selecting and activating cruise control (p. 302) • Standby mode for cruise control (p. 303) Standby mode for cruise control Cruise control (CC35) can be deactivated and set in standby mode. This can take place due to driver intervention or automatically. Standby mode means that the function is selected in the driver display but not activated. In this case, cruise control does not regulate speed. Standby mode on driver intervention The cruise control is deactivated and set in standby mode if any of the following occurs: • • • 1. (2). Press the steering wheel button > The symbol and indicators turn grey – cruise control is set in standby mode. 2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to change to another function. > The driver display's symbol and indicator for cruise control (4) are switched off – which deletes the stored maximum speed. 34 35 Cruise Control Cruise Control • The foot brake is used. The gear selector is moved to N position. The clutch pedal is held depressed for longer than 1 minute. The driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute. The driver must then control the speed himself/herself. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. }} * Option/accessory. 303 DRIVER SUPPORT || Automatic standby mode Automatic standby mode may occur if: • • • • wheels lose traction engine speed is too low/high brake temperature is too high speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph). The driver must then control the speed himself/herself. Adaptive cruise control*36 (ACC37) The adaptive cruise control helps the driver to maintain an even speed combined with a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead. An adaptive cruise control can provide a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows. When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed. If the cornering support* function is activated, this may also affect the speed of the car. WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • • Cruise control (p. 301) Selecting and activating cruise control (p. 302) Deactivating cruise control (p. 303) The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead. The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is adapted automatically via the preset time interval to the vehicle. 36 37 304 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Adaptive Cruise Control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed. The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all. The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed. IMPORTANT Maintenance of driver support components must only be performed at a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Controls and display mode for adaptive cruise control* (p. 305) • Selecting and activating adaptive cruise control* (p. 306) Controls and display mode for adaptive cruise control*38 • Limitations for adaptive cruise control* (p. 309) • Symbols and messages for adaptive cruise control* (p. 311) A summary of how adaptive cruise control (ACC39) is controlled using the left-hand keypad on the steering wheel and how the function is shown in the display. • Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk (p. 322) • • Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 325) • Automatic braking with driver support (p. 326) • Change of target with driver support (p. 323) • Overtaking Assistance (p. 330) Set the stored speed for driver support (p. 324) : From standby mode - activates and stores the current speed : From active mode - deactivates/ changes to standby mode : Activates the function from standby mode and resumes stored speed : Increases the stored speed : Reduces stored speed Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead }} * Option/accessory. 305 DRIVER SUPPORT || Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead Target vehicle indicator: the function has detected and is following a target vehicle at the preset time interval Related information • • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Limitations for adaptive cruise control* (p. 309) Selecting and activating adaptive cruise control*40 Adaptive cruise control (ACC41) must first be selected and then activated to enable it to control speed and distance. Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead Driver display To start the function requires the following: • The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed. • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of Indication of speeds. Stored speed. Speed of vehicle ahead. Current speed of your car. 38 39 40 41 306 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. Adaptive Cruise Control This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph). • For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph). 1. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the adaptive cruise control (4). symbol > The symbol is grey – the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode. 2. When speed limiter is selected – press the (1) to activate. steering wheel button > The symbol is white – the speed limiter is started and the current speed is stored as maximum speed. Reactivating adaptive cruise control to the last stored speed – When the adaptive cruise control is selected – press the steering wheel button to activate. > The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow the most recently stored speed again. WARNING A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button. Additional indicators in the driver display The time interval is only adjusted to the vehicle ahead by the ACC when the distance symbol shows two vehicles. Deactivating adaptive cruise control*42 The adaptive cruise control (ACC43) can be deactivated and switched off. At the same time a speed range is marked. The higher speed is the stored speed, and the lower speed is that of the vehicle ahead (target vehicle). Related information • • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) • Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display (p. 310) • Limitations for adaptive cruise control* (p. 309) Deactivating adaptive cruise control* (p. 307) 1. Press the steering wheel button (2). > The symbol and indicators turn grey – the adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode. The indicator for time interval and symbol for target vehicle, if activated, are also switched off. 2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to change to another function. > The driver display's symbol and indicator for adaptive cruise control (4) are switched off – which deletes the stored maximum speed. }} * Option/accessory. 307 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING • • With the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. When the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver may be warned of the short distance by the Distance Warning* function instead. Standby mode for adaptive cruise control*44 Adaptive cruise control (ACC45) can be deactivated and set to standby mode. This can take place due to driver intervention or automatically. Standby mode means that the function is selected in the driver display but not activated. Adaptive cruise control does not then regulate the speed or distance to the vehicle in front. Standby mode on driver intervention Related information • • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) • Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display (p. 310) • Selecting and activating adaptive cruise control* (p. 306) Limitations for adaptive cruise control* (p. 309) The adaptive cruise control is deactivated and set in standby mode if any of the following occurs: • • • • The foot brake is used. The gear selector is moved to N position. The driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute. The clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox. stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. WARNING • With the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. • When the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver may be warned of the short distance by the Distance Warning* function instead. Automatic standby mode Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC46. If any of these other systems stops working, adaptive cruise control is deactivated automatically. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last 42 43 44 45 46 308 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. Adaptive Cruise Control This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. Adaptive Cruise Control Electronic Stability Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING With automatic standby mode, the driver is warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display. • The driver must then regulate the car's speed, apply the brakes as needed and maintain a safe distance to other vehicles. Automatic standby mode may occur if: • • the speed is below 5 km/h ((3 mph)) and ACC is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump. the speed is below 5 km/h ((3 mph)) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no longer has a vehicle to follow. • speed is reduced to below 30 km/h (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox. • • • • • • • the driver opens the door. • • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Limitations for adaptive cruise control*47 Selecting and activating adaptive cruise control* (p. 306) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC48) may have limitations in certain situations. • Deactivating adaptive cruise control* (p. 307) Steep roads and/or heavy load • Limitations for adaptive cruise control* (p. 309) Related information Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake. Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to the car. Miscellaneous Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected when the adaptive cruise control is activated. the driver takes off the seatbelt. engine speed is too low/high. one or more wheels lose traction. brake temperature is high. the parking brake is applied. the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/ radio waves are blocked). }} * Option/accessory. 309 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING • This is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible and must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead. • The function does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects. • Do not use the function in demanding situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads. Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control*49 in the centre display • GREEN button indication – adaptive cruise control is deactivated and normal cruise control is set in standby mode. • GREY button indication – normal cruise control is deactivated and adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode. Cruise control (CC) 47 48 49 50 310 Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Cruise control (p. 301) A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise control is active: Related information • • • • When the normal cruise control (CC50) is selected in the driver display, it is possible to change to adaptive cruise control (ACC51) in the centre display's function view. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information A A Adaptive cruise control (ACC) A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. Adaptive Cruise Control This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for adaptive cruise control*52 A number of symbols and messages regarding the adaptive cruise control (ACC53) can be shown via the driver display and/or the head-up display*. In the following illustrative example, the road sign information* (RSI54) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph). The previous illustration shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. The previous illustration shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed. 51 52 53 54 Adaptive Cruise Control This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. Adaptive Cruise Control Road Sign Information }} * Option/accessory. 311 DRIVER SUPPORT || Symbol Message Specification The symbol is WHITE. The car is maintaining the stored speed. Adaptive Cruise Contr. Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode. Unavailable The symbol is GREY. Adaptive Cruise Contr. Service required The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The symbol is GREY. Windscreen sensor Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • 312 Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Pilot Assist*55 Pilot Assist can help the driver to drive the car between the lane's side markings using steering assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, combined with a preselected time interval to the vehicle ahead. How Pilot Assist works The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended for use on motorways and similar major roads where it can contribute to more comfortable driving and a more relaxed driving experience. The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead and detects side markings. Camera and radar unit The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's side markings on the road surface using the camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is maintained with automatic speed adjustment whilst the steering assistance helps to position the car in the lane. WARNING Pilot Assist steering assistance is automatically deactivated and is resumed without prior warning. The current status of steering assistance is indicated by the colour of the steering wheel's symbol: If the cornering support* function is activated, this may also affect the speed of the car. Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into account the speed of the preceding car and the lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or avoid an obstruction on the road. • GREEN steering wheel indicates active steering assistance • GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indicates deactivated steering assistance. If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambiguously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist temporarily deactivates steering assistance, but resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again - although the speed and distance control functions remain active. The steering wheel vibrates slightly when deactivated temporarily in order to alert the driver to the change. Distance readers Readers, side markings 55 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. }} * Option/accessory. 313 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed. Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed smoothly. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the car in front brakes suddenly. Due 314 to the limitations of the camera and radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all. Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed. IMPORTANT Maintenance of driver support components must only be performed at a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Round bends and when the road splits Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should therefore not wait for the steering assistance from Pilot Assist but should always be prepared to increase his/her own steering input, especially in bends. • When the car approaches an exit or if the lane splits, the driver should steer towards the desired lane in order to specify the desired direction to Pilot Assist. Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in the middle of the lane When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to position the car in between the lane markings and therefore it is recommended to let the car find a good placement to achieve as smooth a driving experience as possible. The driver checks that the car is positioned safely in the lane, and always has the ability to adjust the position by making his/her own steering corrections. • If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to turn Pilot Assist off or switch to adaptive cruise control*. Hands on the steering wheel In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s hands must be on the steering wheel. If Pilot Assist detects that the driver is not holding the steering wheel, the driver is prompted after a pause to actively steer the car, via a symbol and a text message. If the driver's hands still cannot be detected on the steering wheel after a few seconds, the prompt to actively steer the car is repeated, supplemented by an acoustic warning signal. If Pilot Assist cannot detect the driver's hands on the steering wheel after a further few seconds, the warning signal becomes intensive and the steering function is deactivated. Pilot Assist must then be restarted using the steer. ing wheel button * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Selecting and activating Pilot Assist* (p. 316) Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319) Controls and display view for Pilot Assist* (p. 315) • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* (p. 321) • Set the stored speed for driver support (p. 324) • • Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 325) • Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk (p. 322) • Automatic braking with driver support (p. 326) • Controls and display view for Pilot Assist*56 A summary of how Pilot Assist is controlled using the left-hand keypad on the steering wheel and how the function is shown in the display. Controls : Increases the stored speed : Reduces stored speed Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead ◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive cruise control Function symbol Change of target with driver support (p. 323) Overtaking Assistance (p. 330) : Activates Pilot Assist from standby mode and resumes the stored speed and time interval Symbols for target car Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead Buttons and symbols for the function. Symbol for activated/deactivated steering assistance ▶: Switches from adaptive cruise control* to Pilot Assist : From standby mode - activates Pilot Assist and stores the current speed : From active mode - deactivates/ changes Pilot Assist to standby mode 56 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. }} * Option/accessory. 315 DRIVER SUPPORT || Driver display Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*57 • For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph). Pilot Assist must first be selected and then activated to be able to control speed and distance and to give steering assistance. 1. Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the symbol for Pilot Assist (4). > The symbol is grey – Pilot Assist is in standby mode. 2. When Pilot Assist is selected – press the steering wheel button (2) to activate. > The symbol is white – Pilot Assist is started and the current speed is stored as maximum speed. Indication of speeds. Reactivating Pilot Assist to last stored speed Stored speed – Speed of vehicle ahead Current speed of your car Related information • 57 316 Pilot Assist* (p. 313) In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that: • The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed. • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph). When Pilot Assist is selected – press the to activate. steering wheel button > The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow the most recently stored speed again. WARNING A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button. This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Deactivate Pilot Assist*58 NOTE Note that Pilot Assist only works when the driver has hands on the steering wheel. WARNING Pilot Assist can be deactivated and switched off. Additional indicators in the driver display Pilot Assist only regulates the time interval to the vehicle ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle (1) above the steering wheel symbol. Pilot Assist steering assistance is only active when the steering wheel symbol (2) has changed from GREY to GREEN. At the same time a speed range is marked. The higher speed is the stored speed, and the lower speed is that of the vehicle ahead (target vehicle). Related information • • • 58 Pilot Assist* (p. 313) Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 317) Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319) • With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the driver must intervene and steer, regulating both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. • When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of the short distance by the distance warning* function instead. Related information 1. (2). Press the steering wheel button > The symbol and indicators turn grey – Pilot Assist is set in standby mode. The indicator for time interval and symbol for target vehicle, if activated, are also switched off. 2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to change to another function. > The driver display's symbol and indicator for Pilot Assist (4) are switched off – which deletes the stored maximum speed. • • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) • Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display (p. 310) • Limitations for adaptive cruise control* (p. 309) • Temporary disabling of steering assistance with Pilot Assist* (p. 319) Selecting and activating adaptive cruise control* (p. 306) This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. * Option/accessory. 317 DRIVER SUPPORT Standby mode for Pilot Assist*59 WARNING Pilot Assist can be deactivated and set in standby mode. This can take place due to driver intervention or automatically. Standby mode means that the function is selected in the driver display but not activated. In this case, Pilot Assist does not regulate the speed or distance to the vehicle in front, or provide steering assistance. Standby mode on driver intervention Pilot Assist is deactivated and set in standby mode if any of the following occurs: • • • The foot brake is used. The gear selector is moved to N position. The direction indicators are used for longer than 1 minute. • The driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute. • The clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox. With automatic standby mode, the driver is warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display. • Automatic standby mode may occur if, for example: • • • the driver opens the door. • • • • • the parking brake is applied. • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump. Automatic standby mode Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC60. If any of these other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is deactivated automatically. 59 60 318 The driver must then regulate the car's speed, apply the brakes as needed and maintain a safe distance to other vehicles. brake temperature is high. • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow. • speed is reduced to below 30 km/h (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox. Related information • • Pilot Assist* (p. 313) • • Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 317) Selecting and activating Pilot Assist* (p. 316) Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319) the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel. engine speed is too low/high. the driver takes off the seatbelt. one or more wheels lose traction. the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/ radio waves are blocked). This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. Electronic Stability Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Temporary disabling of steering assistance with Pilot Assist*61 Pilot Assist steering assistance can be temporarily disabled and resumed without prior warning. When the direction indicators are used, Pilot Assist steering assistance is temporarily disengaged. When this is no longer the case, steering assistance is automatically reactivated if the lane's side markings can still be detected. Limitations of Pilot Assist*62 The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in certain situations. The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help the driver in many situations. But the driver is at all times responsible for maintaining a safe distance to surrounding objects and a correct position in the lane. If Pilot Assist is unable to interpret the lane clearly, e.g. if the camera or radar unit is unable to see the side markings for the lane, Pilot Assist temporarily disables steering assistance – speed and distance regulation functions remain active. Steering assistance is resumed when the lane can be interpreted again. In these situations, slight vibration in the steering wheel may alert the driver to the fact that steering assistance has been deactivated temporarily. Related information • • Pilot Assist* (p. 313) • • Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 317) 61 62 WARNING In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering assistance may have difficulty helping the driver in the right way or it may be automatically deactivated - in which case, the use of Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of such situations may be that: • the lane markings are worn, missing or cross each other. • lane division is unclear, for example, when the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in the event of multiple sets of markings. • edges or other lines than lane markings are present on or near the road, e.g. kerbs, joints or repairs to the road surface, edges of barriers, roadside edges or strong shadows. • • • the lane is narrow or winding. the lane contains ridges or holes. weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, snow or fog or slush or impaired view Selecting and activating Pilot Assist* (p. 316) Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319) This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. }} * Option/accessory. 319 DRIVER SUPPORT || with poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet road surface etc. • The driver should also note that Pilot Assist has the following limitations: • • The camera and radar sensor does not have the capacity to detect all oncoming objects and obstacles in traffic environments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles or objects which completely or partially block the route. • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, animals, etc. • The recommended steering input is force limited, which means that it cannot always help the driver to steer and keep the car within the lane. • 320 High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers, etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they may be detected incorrectly as lane markings, with a subsequent risk of contact between the car and such obstacles. The driver must ensure him/herself that the car is at a suitable distance from such obstacles. In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the function has the option of using information from map data, which may result in varied performance. Pilot Assist is switched off if the power steering for speed related steering force is working with reduced power – e.g. during cooling due to overheating. WARNING Pilot Assist must only be used if there are clear lane lines painted on each side of the lane. All other use involves increased risk of contact with surrounding obstacles that cannot be detected by the function. WARNING • • • This is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible and must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead. The function does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects. Do not use the function in demanding situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads. imposed by Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to the desired position. Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake. Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to the car. NOTE Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system. Miscellaneous Off Road drive mode cannot be selected when Pilot Assist is activated. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. The driver always has the possibility of correcting or adjusting a steering intervention * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • Pilot Assist* (p. 313) • • Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Drive modes* (p. 440) Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*63 A number of symbols and messages regarding Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display and/or the head-up display*. In the following illustrative example, the road sign information (RSI64) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph). The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed. Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected. The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected. 63 64 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. Road Sign Information }} * Option/accessory. 321 DRIVER SUPPORT || The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. Pilot Assist provides steering assistance as the lane markings can be detected. Related information • • Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk The driver support systems of adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist* can warn the driver if the distance to the vehicle ahead suddenly becomes too short. Pilot Assist* (p. 313) Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319) The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed. Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assistance since the lane's side markings can be detected. Audio and symbol for collision warning. Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk of collision Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit Adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist use approx. 40% of the capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be braked more heavily than the driver support is capable of and the driver does not brake, the warning lamp and 322 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required. NOTE Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise. WARNING The driver support systems only warn of vehicles which their radar unit has detected – hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Never wait for a warning. Apply the brakes when the situation requires. Change of target with driver support The driver supports of adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist*, in combination with automatic transmission, have a change of target function at certain speeds. Change of target Related information • • • • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Pilot Assist* (p. 313) Distance Warning* (p. 291) Head-up display* (p. 139) If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front. Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen. In cars equipped with a head up display*, the warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing symbol. When the driver supports are following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes target vehicle – from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle – the driver supports will slow down for the stationary vehicle. }} * Option/accessory. 323 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING When the driver supports are following another vehicle at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the driver supports will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate to the stored speed. • Set the stored speed for driver support • It is possible to set stored speed for the speed limiter, cruise control, adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist* functions. If the driver increases the car's speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering wheel button (1), the speed stored will be the car's speed when the button is depressed, provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed. The driver must then intervene him/ herself and brake. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Automatic standby mode with change of target The driver supports are disengaged and set in standby mode: • • when the speed is below 5 km/h ((3 mph)) and the driver supports are uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or another object, such as a speed bump. when the speed is below 5 km/h ((3 mph)) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that the driver supports no longer have a vehicle to follow. Related information • • • 324 Driving support systems (p. 284) : Increases the stored speed. : Reduces stored speed. Stored speed. – Change a set speed with short presses on (1) or the steering wheel buttons (2) or by pressing and holding them. • Short presses: Each press changes the speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph). • Press and hold: Release the button when the speed indicator (3) has moved to the desired speed. Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Pilot Assist* (p. 313) The speed set after the last button press is stored in the memory. Automatic gearbox The driver support functions can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph). Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph). Note that the lowest programmable speed is 30 km/h (20 mph) – even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Manual gearbox the driver support functions can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h (87 mph). The lowest programmable speed is 30 km/h (20 mph) – the maximum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph). Related information • • • • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Speed limiter (p. 294) Set time interval to vehicle ahead NOTE It is possible to set the time interval to the vehicle ahead to be maintained by the adaptive cruise control*, Pilot Assist* and Distance Warning* functions. Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds. When the symbol in the driver display shows two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front at a pre-set time interval. When only one car is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead. Cruise control (p. 301) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Pilot Assist* (p. 313) NOTE When the symbol in the driver display shows a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist follows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap. When only one steering wheel is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead. Control for time interval. Decrease time interval Increase time interval Distance indicator – Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval. > The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval. }} * Option/accessory. 325 DRIVER SUPPORT || The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary significantly in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly. NOTE • The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time interval. • Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations. • If the driver supports do not seem to respond with a speed increase when activated, it may be because the time window to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time window. WARNING 326 • Only use a time window that suits the current traffic conditions. • The driver should be aware that short time windows limit the amount of time available to react and take action in an unexpected traffic situation. Related information • • • • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Pilot Assist* (p. 313) Distance Warning* (p. 291) Head-up display* (p. 139) Automatic braking with driver support The driver supports of adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist* have a special brake function in slow traffic and while stationary. Brake function in slow queues and while stationary For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the vehicle in front starts moving again then the driver support function is set in standby mode with automatic braking. – The function is reactivated in one of the following ways: • • Press the steering wheel button . Depress the accelerator pedal. > The function resumes following the vehicle ahead if it starts moving forward within approx. 6 seconds. WARNING A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING Driver supports only warn of obstacles which their radar unit has detected – hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. • Never wait for a warning or intervention. Apply the brakes when the situation requires. NOTE The driver supports can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 5 minutes – then the parking brake is applied and the function is disengaged. Before the driver supports can be reactivated, the parking brake must be released. Cessation of automatic braking In some situations, automatic braking ceases on coming to a standstill and the function is set in standby mode. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself to keep it stationary. • the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R position • the driver sets the function in the standby mode. Automatic activation of parking brake In certain situations, the parking brake is applied in order to keep the car stationary. This takes place if the function is holding the car stationary with the foot brake and: • the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt • the function has kept the car stationary for more than approx. 5 minutes • • the brakes have overheated The driver can select different driving styles for how driver support should maintain the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE. Select one of the following options: • Eco – The driver support focuses on good fuel economy, which means longer time interval to the vehicle ahead. • Comfort – The driver support focuses on following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible. • Dynamic* – The driver support focuses on following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead more closely, which in certain cases may mean heavier acceleration and braking. the driver switches the engine off manually. Related information • • • • Drive mode for driver support Driving support systems (p. 284) Related information Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) • • • Pilot Assist* (p. 313) Brake functions (p. 423) Driving support systems (p. 284) Drive modes* (p. 440) Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 325) This may take place in the following situations: • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal • the parking brake is applied * Option/accessory. 327 DRIVER SUPPORT Cornering support*65 Curve Speed Assist can help the driver to reduce speed ahead of sharper bends if the preset speed for the driver support adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* is estimated as being too high. The calculation is made using information from map data in the car's satellite navigator Sensus Navigation*. After the bend has been passed, the car resumes the previously preset speed. In connection with the function reducing the car's speed, this symbol is shown in the driver display. The driver can cancel the function at any time by choosing to brake or by using the accelerator pedal. WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Pilot Assist* (p. 313) Drive modes* (p. 440) Drive modes Assistance during cornering depends on the drive mode set. If the drive mode options are unavailable, the function selects the Comfort option. Using the Dynamic option, the car negotiates bends with sporty characteristics and with slightly more powerful acceleration out of the bends. 65 328 This function is only available in certain markets. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Activating or deactivating cornering support* The cornering support function can be activated as a complement to the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist*. The driver can also choose to deactivate the function. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. During subsequent engine starting, the last used setting is reactivated or settings are followed that were made in the driver profile linked to the key used66. Related information • • 66 67 Cornering support* (p. 328) Limitations for cornering support* (p. 329) Limitations for cornering support* The cornering support function may have limitations in certain situations. This function is only available in certain markets. A driver should be aware about the following examples of limitations. • Cornering support may have limited performance on smaller roads and in built-up areas. • On slip roads or intersections, the cornering support may be switched off temporarily. • If the satellite navigator67 map data is not updated, cornering support may have limited functionality. • If the satellite navigator67 does not have contact with the satellite system, cornering support may have limited functionality. • On new or rebuilt roads, map data may be incorrect. • When calculating a suitable cornering speed, any risk of reduced traction due to adverse weather or road conditions is not included. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • • Cornering support* (p. 328) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) These options are market-dependent. Only with Volvo's satellite navigator Sensus Navigation* installed. * Option/accessory. 329 DRIVER SUPPORT Overtaking Assistance WARNING Overtaking Assistance can help the driver when overtaking other vehicles. The function can be used with adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist*. • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. How overtaking assistance works When adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is following another vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to overtake by activating the direction indicator68, the systems help by accelerating the vehicle towards the vehicle ahead before the driver's vehicle reaches the overtaking lane. • The function then delays reducing speed in order to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car is approaching a slower vehicle. The function remains active until the driver’s vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle. WARNING Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road – the car will then accelerate briefly. 68 330 Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Use Overtaking Assistance Overtaking assistance can be used with adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist*. There are a number of criteria if Overtaking Assistance is to be used. The following conditions must exist for Overtaking Assistance to be activated: • there must be a vehicle in front (the “target vehicle”) • your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h (43 mph) • the stored speed must be high enough for overtaking to take place safely. To start the Overtaking Assistance: – Activate the direction indicator. Use the left-hand direction indicator in a left-hand drive car right in a right-hand drive car. > Overtaking Assistance is started. Related information • • • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Use Overtaking Assistance (p. 330) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Pilot Assist* (p. 313) On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING When using the Overtaking Assistance System, the driver should be aware that there may be undesired acceleration if the conditions suddenly change. Radar unit Related information The radar unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of sensing other vehicles. • • Some situations should therefore be avoided, such as if: • the car is approaching an exit for turnof that is in the same direction as overtaking would normally occur. • the vehicle ahead slows down before the driver's car has crossed over into the overtaking lane. • the traffic in the overtaking lane slows down. • a right-hand drive car is driven in a county with left-hand traffic (or vice versa). Situations of this type are avoided by temporarily setting adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist to standby mode. Related information • • • • Overtaking Assistance (p. 330) • Standby mode for Pilot Assist* (p. 318) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Pilot Assist* (p. 313) Driving support systems (p. 284) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) • Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit (p. 345) • Type approval for radar device (p. 332) Radar unit location. The radar unit is used by the following functions: • • • • • Distance Warning* Adaptive cruise control* Pilot Assist* Lane assistance City Safety Modification of the radar unit could result in its use being illegal. Standby mode for adaptive cruise control* (p. 308) * Option/accessory. 331 DRIVER SUPPORT Type approval for radar device Here you can find type approval for the car's radar units for adaptive cruise control* (ACC69), Pilot Assist* and BLIS*70. Market ACC & PA BLIS Symbol Type approval ✓ Botswana Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário. ✓ Modelo: L2C0054TR 4122-14-8645 Brazil EAN: (01)07897843840855 ✓ Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode causar interferência em sistemas devidamente autorizados. 03563-17-05364 69 70 332 Adaptive Cruise Control Blind Spot Information * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Market ACC & PA BLIS Symbol Type approval Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the following link www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation. ✓ Frequency Band: 76GHz – 77GHz Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA Europe Hereby, Hella KgaA Hueck & Co., declares that RS4 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. ✓ The Declaration of conformity may be consulted at Hella KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker Straße 75/ 59552 Lippstadt, Germany and on the website www.hella.com/vcc. Frequency Band: 24050-24250 MHz Maximum Output Power: 20 dBm EIRP The United Arab Emirates (UAE) Ghana Registered No: ER37536/15 ✓ Dealer No: DA37380/15 ✓ ✓ Registered No: ER53878/17 Dealer No: DA44932/15 NCA Approved: 1R3-1M-7E1-0B7 }} 333 DRIVER SUPPORT || Market ACC & PA BLIS Symbol Type approval 37295/POSTEL/2014 ✓ 4927 Certificate number: 50459/SDPPI/2017 Indonesia Country of origin Germany ✓ Certificate number: 53578/SDPPI/2017 Country of origin China PLG ID: 6051 ✓ Jamaica ✓ Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD) Jordan ✓ ✓ Malaysia This product contains a Type Approved Module by Jamaica: SMA – “RS4”. Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255 Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3 Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD) CID F 15000578 AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC Morocco ✓ NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014 DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014 334 DRIVER SUPPORT Market ACC & PA BLIS ✓ Symbol Type approval IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0299 Radar de corto alcance RS4 Hella KGaA Hueck & Co Mexico ✓ IFETEL: RLVHERS17-0286 La operación de este equipo esta sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. Moldova ✓ ✓ Nigeria ✓ Oman ✓ Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission. }} 335 DRIVER SUPPORT || Market ACC & PA BLIS ✓ Serbia И011 14 ✓ ✓ Singapore И011 17 DA 105753 ✓ ✓ 336 Type approval ✓ Russia South Africa Symbol DA 103238 TA-2014/1824 ✓ TA-2016/3407 DRIVER SUPPORT Market ACC & PA BLIS Symbol Type approval Certification No. ✓ MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR South Korea MSIP-CMM-HLA-RS4 ✓ ✓ 이 기기는 무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판 매자 또는 사용 자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바 라 며, 가정외의 지역에서 사용 하는 것을 적으 로 합니다 CCAB15LP0560T3 CCAB17LP0470T5 Taiwan ✓ 警語 經型式認證合格之低 率射頻電機,非經許可,公司 商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率 大 率或變更原設計之特性及 能 低 率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法 通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應立即停用 ,並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用 前項合法通信,指依 電信法規定作業之無線電通信 低 率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻 射性電機設備之干擾 }} 337 DRIVER SUPPORT || Market ACC & PA BLIS Symbol Type approval є, щ Delphi ( ✓ ь ) ь є RACAM/SRR2 КМ № 679 24 Delphi : Delphi. (П П 2009 .) : 24,05 – 24,25 П Ukraine ✓ ь : 20 Б ( .) EIRP HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA є, щ є 2014/53/Є . П www.hella.com/vcc RS4 ь : 24,05 – 24,25 П 338 Vietnam ✓ Zambia ✓ ь : 20 Б ( .) EIRP : DRIVER SUPPORT Type approval for radio equipment Market Symbol Europe Type approval Hereby, Volvo cars, declares that all radio equipment's are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. R 204-750001 Japan This device is granted pursuant to the Japanese Radio Law and the Japanese Telecommunications Business Law. This device should not be modified (otherwise the granted designation number will become invalid). For detailed information on type approval, go to support.volvocars.com. Related information • • • • Radar unit (p. 331) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304) Pilot Assist* (p. 313) BLIS* (p. 362) * Option/accessory. 339 DRIVER SUPPORT Camera unit Related information The camera unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of for example detecting lane lines or traffic signs. • • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit (p. 345) Location of the camera unit. The camera unit is used by the following functions: • • • • • • • • • 340 Adaptive cruise control* Pilot Assist* Lane assistance* Steering assistance at risk of collision City Safety Driver Alert Control* Road Sign Information* Active main beam* Park Assist* * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations for camera and radar unit The camera and radar unit has certain limitations – which in turn also limit those functions that use the unit. A driver should be aware about the following examples of limitations. Camera and radar Blocked unit The camera unit is placed inside the upper section of the windscreen together with the car's radar unit. Do not place, stick or mount anything on the inside or outside of the windscreen, in front of or around the camera and radar unit – this may interfere with camera and radar-based functions. This may result functions being reduced, being switched off completely or giving incorrect function responses. If the driver display shows this symbol and the message "Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual", this means that the camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and large animals in front of the car, and that the car's camera-based and radar-based functions may be disrupted. The marked area must be cleaned regularly and kept free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc. The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action: Cause Action The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit. Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera view. No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall. }} 341 DRIVER SUPPORT || Cause Action Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals or camera view. No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road surface. Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera and radar unit. Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light conditions. High temperature At very high temperatures the camera and radar unit can temporarily be switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started so as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera and radar unit restarts automatically when the temperature has fallen sufficiently. The following is also applicable so as not to risk incorrect function for the driver supports that use the radar unit: • Damaged windscreen NOTE If not rectified it can lead to reduced performance for the driver support systems that use the camera and radar unit. This may result functions being reduced, being switched off completely or giving incorrect function responses. 71 342 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. If a scratch, crack or stone chip appears on the windscreen in front of any of the "windows" for the camera and radar unit and covers an area of approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or more, a workshop71 must be contacted so that the windscreen can be replaced. • Volvo recommends not repairing cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the camera and radar unit – the entire windscreen should be replaced instead. • Before replacing a windscreen, contact a workshop71 to verify that the correct windscreen has been ordered and will be fitted. • The same type of windscreen wipers or windscreen wipers approved by Volvo must be fitted when the windscreen is replaced. • When replacing the windscreen, the camera and radar unit must be recalibrated by a workshop71 to ensure the functionality of all the camera and radar-based systems in the car. Radar Vehicle speed The radar unit's ability to detect a vehicle ahead is greatly reduced if the speed of the vehicle ahead is very different to the speed of your own car. DRIVER SUPPORT Limited field of vision The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected. vehicle that drives in between your car and the vehicle ahead. Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected. In bends, the radar unit may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view. Low trailers dust storms and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged. Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings can also significantly reduce camera function when it is used to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals and other vehicles. Low trailer in radar shadow. Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver should therefore be particularly careful when driving behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* is activated. The radar unit's field of vision. Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting vehicles at close distances - e.g. a Camera Impaired vision The cameras have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. may "see" worse in for example intense snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy }} * Option/accessory. 343 DRIVER SUPPORT || Park assist camera* Blind sectors Defective camera If a camera sector is black and contains this symbol then it means that the camera is out of order. brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in reduced image quality. Rear parking camera WARNING The following illustration shows an example. Pay additional attention while reversing when this symbol is shown if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car. The symbol indicates that the parking assistance sensors rearward are switched off and will not warn of any obstacles. There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of vision. In the park assist camera's 360° view* obstacles/objects may "vanish" in the gaps between the individual cameras. WARNING Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, a relatively large sector could be hidden from view. An obstacle could thereby go undetected until the car is very close to it. NOTE The car's left-hand camera is out of order. A black camera sector is also shown in the following instances, but then without the symbol for defective camera: • • • open door open tailgate Related information Camera unit (p. 340) • • • Radar unit (p. 331) • Park assist camera* (p. 397) folded-in door mirror. Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in 344 A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the camera's view. Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit (p. 345) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit Related information In order that the camera and radar unit shall function correctly, they must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo. NOTE Camera unit (p. 340) • • • Radar unit (p. 331) • Park assist camera* (p. 397) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or no function. Location of rear radar units. Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left and right-hand sides of the car. Location of the parking sensors. • To ensure best possible functionality, the surfaces in front of the sensors must be kept clean. • Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors. • Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - be careful not to scratch the lenses. IMPORTANT Maintenance of driver support components must only be performed at a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. * Option/accessory. 345 DRIVER SUPPORT City Safety™ Safety72 City can use lights, sound and a brake pulse warning to alert the driver to pedestrians, cyclists, larger animals and vehicles that appear suddenly. The function helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of an imminent risk of collision if the driver does not react in time by braking and/or swerving. WARNING City Safety activates a short, sharp braking procedure, normally stopping the car just behind the vehicle in front. City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation. City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention. Automatic braking takes place only after or at the same time as the collision warning. Location of the radar unit. City Safety can help to prevent a collision or reduce the collision speed. City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal, cyclist or a vehicle. The City Safety function can help the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g. when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident. 72 346 The function is not available in all markets. The driver or passengers are not normally aware of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation where a collision is immediately imminent. • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Subfunctions for City Safety (p. 347) Setting the warning distance for City Safety (p. 349) DRIVER SUPPORT • Detection of obstacles with City Safety (p. 350) • City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles (p. 356) • Automatic braking in the event of an impeded evasive manoeuvre with City Safety (p. 355) • • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 353) • • Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) City Safety steering assistance for evasive manoeuvre (p. 354) Messages for City Safety (p. 360) Subfunctions for City Safety City can help the driver to avoid a collision with a vehicle, a cyclist, a pedestrian or a larger animal in front by reducing the car's speed with the auto-brake function. If the speed difference is greater than the following specified speeds, the City Safety autobrake function cannot prevent a collision but mitigates the consequences of it. Vehicles For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph). cyclists For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by up to 50 km/h (30 mph). Pedestrians For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph). Large animals In the event of a risk of a collision with a large animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by up to 15 km/h (9 mph). The brake function for large animals is primarily intended to reduce the force of the impact at higher speeds and is most effective at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at lower speed. 73 The function is not available in all markets. Subfunctions for City Safety Safety73 Function overview. Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk of collision Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit City Safety carries out three steps in the following order: 1. Collision warning 2. Brake support 3. Auto Brake The following text explains what happens during the three steps: }} 347 DRIVER SUPPORT || 1 - Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision. In cars equipped with a head up display*, the warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing symbol. large animals that are crossing the road in front of the car. In the event of a risk of collision with a pedestrian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle/vehicles the driver's attention is alerted by means of a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning. There is no brake pulse warning at lower speeds, sudden driver braking or acceleration. The brake pulse frequency varies according to the car's speed. 2 - Brake support If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake support is activated. Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking action if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision. Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen. Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise. If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or The seatbelt tensioner can be activated in connection with the engagement of the automatic brake function. NOTE 348 3 - Auto Brake The automatic brake function is activated last. In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may begin with light braking and then progress to full brake action. When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object, the car remains stationary in anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the car has been braked to avoid collision with a slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to match that of the vehicle in front. NOTE On cars with manual gearbox, the engine stops when the Auto-brake function has stopped the car, unless the driver has managed to depress the clutch pedal beforehand. The driver can always interrupt a braking intervention by firmly depressing the accelerator pedal. NOTE When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on. When City Safety is activated and brakes the vehicle, the driver display shows a text message to the effect that the function is/has been active. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING City Safety must not be used by the driver to change his/her driving style - the driver must not rely on City Safety alone and allow it to do the braking. Setting the warning distance for City Safety City Safety74 is always activated but the driver can select the warning distance for the function. NOTE Related information The City Safety function cannot be deactivated. It is activated automatically when the engine/electric operation is started and remains switched on until the engine/electric operation is switched off. City Safety™ (p. 346) • • • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 353) • • • Head-up display* (p. 139) City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles (p. 356) Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50) When warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing, the warning distance can be reduced, which reduces the total number of warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a warning at a later stage. The Late warning distance should therefore only be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driving. The warning distance determines the sensitivity of the system and regulates the distance at which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning should be deployed. To select warning distance: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view. 2. Under City Safety Warning, select Late, Normal or Early to set the desired warning distance. If the Early setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, the Normal or Late warning distance can be selected. 74 The function is not available in all markets. }} * Option/accessory. 349 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING • City Safety warns the driver when there is a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten the driver’s reaction time. • Even if the warning distance has been set to Early warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily. 75 350 No automatic system can guarantee 100% correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test City Safety by driving at people, animals or vehicles this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives. • • NOTE The warning with direction indicators for Rear Collision Warning* is deactivated if the warning distance for collision warning in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late". The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking functions are, however, still active. Related information • • • City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) Rear Collision Warning* (p. 361) Detection of obstacles with City Safety City Safety75 can help the driver to detect vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians. Vehicles City Safety detect most vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the driver's own car. This function can also detect oncoming vehicles and cross traffic in certain cases. In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear lights must be working and clearly illuminated. With the warning distance set at Early, the warnings will come more in advance. This may mean that the warnings come more frequently than at the warning distance Normal, but it is recommended since it can make City Safety more effective. The function is not available in all markets. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Cyclists WARNING City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations and, for example, cannot see: • • Examples of what City Safety interprets as a cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline. Good performance requires that the system function that detects a cyclist must receive the clearest possible information about the body and bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement. partially obscured cyclists. cyclists if the background contrast of the cyclist is poor – warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all. • cyclists wearing clothing that obscures the body outline. • bicycles loaded with large objects. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed. Pedestrians Good performance requires that the system function that detects a pedestrian must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement. In order that it shall be possible to detect a pedestrian there must be a contrast with the background and this will be affected by such things as clothes, the background and the weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may either be detected late or not at all, which may mean that warnings and braking are late or omitted. City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps. If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist. For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle designed for adults. Examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body outlines. }} 351 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING Large animals WARNING City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and, for example, cannot see: • • • City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all large animals in all situations and, for example, cannot see: partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides their body contour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.). pedestrians if the background contrast of the pedestrians is poor - warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all. pedestrians who are carrying larger objects. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed. Examples of what City Safety interprets as large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with clear body outline. Good performance requires that the system function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and horse) must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the animal directly from the side in combination with what is a normal pattern of movement for the animal. If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect the animal. City Safety can also detect large animals in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps. 352 • • partially obscured large animals. • • large animals that run or move quickly. • small animals such as dogs and cats, for example. larger animals seen from the front or from behind. large animals if the background contrast of the animals is poor - warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed. Related information • • City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) DRIVER SUPPORT City Safety in cross traffic • Safety76 City can help the driver when turning and crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at an intersection. Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming crossing vehicles. For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first enter the sector in which City Safety can analyse the situation. the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on. Related information • • City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic In some cases City Safety may have difficulty helping the driver deal with collision risks due to oncoming cross traffic. Examples are: • stability control ESC intervenes in the event of slippery driving conditions • The following further criteria must also be fulfilled: if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late • • your car must be travelling at no less than 4 km/h (3 mph) if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by something • • your car must turn to the left in markets with right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand traffic) if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps switched off • if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpredictable manner, for example, abruptly changes lanes at a late stage. 76 The function is not available in all markets. }} 353 DRIVER SUPPORT || NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • • • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 353) City Safety steering assistance for evasive manoeuvre helps to straighten the car again after passing the obstacle. City Safety steering assistance can help the driver to steer away from a vehicle/obstacle when it is not possible to avoid a collision simply by braking. City Safety steering assistance cannot be switched off, it is always activated. City Safety steering assistance can detect: Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) vehicles cyclists pedestrians larger animals. Related information Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) • • Your car steers away Slow moving/stationary vehicles or obstacles. City Safety engages by amplifying the driver's steering input, which only occurs after the driver has begun an evasive manoeuvre - and then only if the driver is not steering enough to avoid a collision. In parallel with the amplified steering input, the brake system is also used to further amplify the steering input. The function also 354 • • • • City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations of City Safety steering assistance when taking evasive action Automatic braking in the event of an impeded evasive manoeuvre with City Safety City Safety may have limited functionality in certain situations and fail to intervene e.g.: City Safety77 has the facility to assist the driver by automatically braking the car earlier when it is not possible to avoid a collision by only steering away. City Safety assists the driver by continuously attempting to anticipate whether there are "escape routes" to the side in case a slow or stationary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late stage. • • • outside the speed range 50-100 km/h (30-62 mph) if the driver initiates an evasive manoeuvre if the steering servo creating speeddependent steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to overheating. City Safety does not intervene with the autobrake function as long as the driver him/ herself has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a steering manoeuvre. However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver by automatically starting to brake at an earlier stage. Related information • • City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • City Safety steering assistance for evasive manoeuvre (p. 354) • • • Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier. Your car Slow/stationary vehicle 77 The function is not available in all markets. 355 DRIVER SUPPORT City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles • your car's lane must have clear lane markings City Safety can assist the driver to use emergency braking for an oncoming vehicle in your car's lane. If an oncoming vehicle enters your car's lane and a collision is unavoidable, City Safety can reduce the car's speed with a view to reducing the violence of the impact. • your car must be positioned straight in its own lane • the oncoming vehicle must be within your car's lane markings • the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on • this function can only handle "front to front" collisions • this function can only detect vehicles with four wheels. WARNING Warnings and brake interventions due to an impending collision with an oncoming vehicle always come very late. Related information Your car Oncoming vehicles For this function to work, the following criteria must be met: 356 • your car must be travelling at more than 4 km/h (3 mph) • the road section must be straight • • City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) Limitations of City Safety The City Safety78 function may have limitations in certain situations. Surroundings Low objects Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function. Skidding On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC79 are designed to give the best possible braking force with maintained stability. Oncoming light The visual warning signal in the windscreen may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. Heat In the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the visual warning signal in the windscreen may be temporarily disengaged. DRIVER SUPPORT The camera and radar unit's field of view The camera's field of vision is limited, which is why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehicles in some situations cannot be detected, or they are detected later than anticipated. Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late or not at all. If a text message in the driver display indicates that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of the car. This means that the functionality of City Safety may be reduced. However, an error message is not shown in all situations where the windscreen sensors are obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to keep the area of windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit clear. Driver intervention Reversing When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated. Low speed City Safety is not activated at very low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system therefore does not intervene in situations where your car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly, e.g. when parking. Miscellaneous WARNING Driver supports only warn of obstacles which their radar unit has detected – hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. • Never wait for a warning or intervention. Apply the brakes when the situation requires. Active driver Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene or postpone warning/intervention in situations where the driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive manner, even if a collision is unavoidable. Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore delay a collision warning and intervention in order to minimise unnecessary warnings. IMPORTANT Maintenance of driver support components must only be performed at a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 78 79 The function is not available in all markets. Electronic Stability Control }} 357 DRIVER SUPPORT || • Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if a traffic situation or external influences mean that the camera and radar unit cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals or vehicles correctly. • For vehicles to be detected at night, their headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be switched on and shining clearly. • The camera and radar unit has a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists. The system can provide effective warnings and brake interventions as long as the relative speed is below 50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large animals is less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The warning and brake intervention for large animals is less effective at lower speeds. • 358 disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility. WARNING Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles and large animals could be • Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). • Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit — this can interfere with camera-dependent functions. • Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of the camera sensor may reduce its functionality, fully deactivate it or give incorrect function response. WARNING • The City Safety auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed, but to ensure full brake performance the driver should always depress the brake pedal – even when the car auto-brakes. • The warning and steering assistance are only activated if there is a high risk of collision – you must therefore never wait for a collision warning or for City Safety to intervene. • The warning and brake intervention for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). • City Safety does not activates any auto-brake functions in the event of heavy acceleration. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Market limitation City Safety is not available in all countries. If City Safety does not appear in the centre dis- DRIVER SUPPORT play's Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this function. Search path in the top view of the centre display: • Settings My Car IntelliSafe Related information • • City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) 359 DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for City Safety A number of messages regarding City Safety can be shown in the driver display. Here are some examples. Message Specification City Safety When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated in connection with a text message being shown. Automatic intervention City Safety The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA. Reduced functionality Service required A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message persists, contact a workshopA. Related information • 360 City Safety™ (p. 346) DRIVER SUPPORT Rear Collision Warning*80 WARNING Warning81 The Rear Collision (RCW) function can help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle approaching from behind. Drivers in vehicles behind can be warned about an imminent collision by the function flashing intensively with the direction indicators. If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the function detects that the car is in danger of being hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners may tension the front seatbelts. The Whiplash Protection System is also activated in the event of a collision. • Rear collision warning. The function is not available in all markets. Rear collision warning. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. In certain cases the Rear Collision Warning (RCW) may have difficulty helping the driver in the event of a collision risk. This can, for example, be if: • the vehicle approaching from behind is detected too late • the vehicle approaching from behind changes lane at the last moment • a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system - the function is then deactivated automatically. NOTE In certain markets, RCW does not give a warning with the direction indicators due to local traffic regulations - in such cases, this part of the function is deactivated. Related information • • 80 81 82 The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • Immediately before a collision from behind, this function may also activate the foot brake in order to reduce the forward acceleration of the car during the collision. However, the foot brake is only activated if the car is stationary. The foot brake releases immediately if the accelerator pedal is depressed. This function is activated automatically each time the engine is started. • Limitations of Rear Collision Warning*82 Driving support systems (p. 284) Limitations of Rear Collision Warning* (p. 361) Whiplash Protection System (p. 45) }} * Option/accessory. 361 DRIVER SUPPORT || NOTE The warning with direction indicators for Rear Collision Warning* is deactivated if the warning distance for collision warning in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late". BLIS* The BLIS83 function is intended to help the driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and to the side of the car so as to provide assistance in heavy traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction. The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking functions are, however, still active. NOTE Principle of BLIS This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Zone in blind spot Zone for quickly approaching vehicle. The system is designed to react when: Related information • • • 83 362 Rear Collision Warning* (p. 361) Setting the warning distance for City Safety (p. 349) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Location of BLIS lamp. BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of: • • vehicles in the car's blind spot quickly approaching vehicles in the left and right lanes closest to the car. • • your car is overtaken by other vehicles another vehicle is quickly approaching your car. When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indicator lamp on the door mirror on the affected side illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning, the indicator lamp will change over from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light. Blind Spot Information * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT BLIS is active when the driver's vehicle is travelling at a speed above 10 km/h (6 mph). WARNING If passing vehicles drive more than 15 km/h (9 mph) faster than the driver's vehicle, BLIS will not react. NOTE • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • • • 84 Driving support systems (p. 284) Activating or deactivating BLIS The BLIS84 function can be activated or deactivated. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator lamps blinking once. If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was switched off, it will continue to be deactivated when the engine is next started and no indicator lights will then be illuminated. Related information • • BLIS* (p. 362) Limitations of BLIS (p. 364) Activating or deactivating BLIS (p. 363) Limitations of BLIS (p. 364) Messages for BLIS (p. 365) Blind Spot Information * Option/accessory. 363 DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations of BLIS WARNING The BLIS85 function may have limitations in certain situations. • • BLIS does not work on sharp bends. BLIS does not work when the car is reversing. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left and right-hand sides of the car86. • • BLIS* (p. 362) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Examples of limitations: • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts. • The BLIS function is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system. • For good performance of BLIS, there should be no bicycle rack, luggage carrier or similar mounted on the car's towbar. 85 86 364 Blind Spot Information NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for BLIS A number of messages regarding BLIS87 can be shown in the driver display. Here are some examples. Message Specification Blind spot sensor The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA. Service required Blind spot system off BLIS and CTAB have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system. Trailer attached A B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Cross Traffic Alert* A text message can be cleared by briefly button, located in the centre pressing the of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message persists, contact a workshopA. Related information • • 87 BLIS* (p. 362) Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 366) Blind Spot Information * Option/accessory. 365 DRIVER SUPPORT Cross Traffic Alert*88 Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a driver support that supplements BLIS89 and is designed to help the driver detect traffic crossing behind the car when it is reversing. The auto-brake subfunction can help the driver to stop the car in the event of a risk of collision with an unobserved vehicle. detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians. CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if reverse gear has been selected. If CTA senses that something is approaching from the side, this is also indicated with: • an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the left-hand or right-hand speaker according to the direction from which the object approaches. • an illuminated icon in the Park Assist System graphic on the screen. • an icon on the Park assist camera top view. Examples of areas where CTA can assist the driver to detect obstacles during reversing. CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the approach of crossing traffic during reversing, such as when reversing out of a parking space. CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions it may also be able to 88 89 366 Illuminated icon for CTA in the Park Assist System graphic on the screen. If the driver does not observe the warning from CTA and a collision is unavoidable, the auto-brake function takes effect to stop the car, after which the driver display shows an explanatory text message on why the car was braked. WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing. Blind Spot Information * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • • • • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 367) Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 367) Messages for Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 369) BLIS* (p. 362) Park Assist* (p. 392) Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic Alert*90 The driver can select to switch off the warning in the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function – the auto brake subfunction cannot be switched off, however, and continues to be active. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – warning signal and indication on display for the function is deactivated. Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert*91 The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function with auto-brake may have limited functionality in certain situations. Brake intervention is active at speeds below 15 km/h. WARNING The auto-brake subfunction can only detect and brake for other vehicles that are moving – not for stationary obstacles, a cyclist or a pedestrian, for example. CTA has a certain limitation – the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructions, for example. Here are some examples of situations where CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close: The function is activated automatically each time the engine is started. Related information • • 90 91 Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing. Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing. Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 366) Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 367) }} * Option/accessory. 367 DRIVER SUPPORT || object changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases. Examples of further limitations • The auto-brake subfunction only detects moving vehicles and therefore cannot "see" and brake for stationary obstacles, a cyclist or a pedestrian, for example. • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts. • CTA is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system. • For good performance of CTA, there should be no bicycle rack, luggage carrier or similar mounted on the car's towbar. The car is parked deep inside a parking slot. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely “blind” on one side. Blind CTA sector. • • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 366) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”. However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it makes with the obstructing vehicle/ 368 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for Cross Traffic Alert*92 A number of messages regarding Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) can be shown in the driver display. Here are some examples. Message Specification Blind spot sensor The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA. Service required Blind spot system off BLISB and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system. Trailer attached A B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Blind Spot Information System A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message persists, contact a workshopA. Related information • • • 92 Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 366) BLIS* (p. 362) Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 367) Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing. * Option/accessory. 369 DRIVER SUPPORT Road Sign Information* (RSI93) The Road Sign Information function can help the driver to observe speed-related road signs and certain prohibition signs. NOTE In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*. WARNING • • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Examples of readable signs94. RSI can provide information about such things as current speed, when a motorway or road is starting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or when the direction of travel is one-way. If the car passes a speed limit sign, it will be shown on the driver's display and the head-up display*. 93 94 370 The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Activating or deactivating road sign information* (p. 371) • Display mode for road sign information* (p. 371) • Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation* (p. 374) • Warning for speed limitation and speed camera from road sign information* (p. 374) • Limitations of Road Sign Information* (p. 376) Road Sign Information Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Activating or deactivating road sign information* NOTE The Road Sign Information function (RSI95) is optional – the driver can choose to activate or deactivate this function. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. Road Sign Information is activated automatically each time the engine is started. • If the automatic speed limiter function is activated, road sign information is shown in the driver display even if the Road Sign Information function is not activated. • To remove road sign information from the driver display, you must deactivate both the automatic speed limiter and Road Sign Information. • When the automatic speed limiter function is activated but Road Sign Information is deactivated, no warnings are given from Road Sign Information. Road Sign Information must also be activated in order to receive warnings. Related information • • • 95 96 97 Road Sign Information* (p. 370) Automatic speed limiter (p. 297) Limitations of Road Sign Information* (p. 376) RSI: Road Sign Information. Road Sign Information Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples. Display mode for road sign information* The Road Sign Information function (RSI96) shows road signs in different ways depending on the sign and the situation. Example97 of detected speed information. When the function detects a road sign with an imposed speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a symbol combined with a coloured indication on the speedometer. If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*, speed-related information is also obtained from map data, which means that the driver display can show or change information on the speed limit without having passed a speed-related sign. }} * Option/accessory. 371 DRIVER SUPPORT || An additional97 sign, such as "no overtaking", may be shown together with the speed limit symbol. – indirect speed limit signs are only displayed if map data has no information on the speed limit for the road section in question. Example of direct speed limit sign97. Example of indirect speed limit sign97: End of all restrictions. If the driver enters a road marked with a no-entry sign at the roadside, the symbol for this sign97 flashes on and off on the driver display as a warning. The driver display symbol extinguishes after about 5 minutes until the next speed-related sign is passed. End of motorway. If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*, information from map data is used to determine whether the car is being driven in the wrong direction. The driver can also get an acoustic warning when driving towards a road marked with a no-entry sign if the Road Sign Audio Warning function is activated. Speed limit or end of motorway When the function detects an "indirect speed limit sign" stating the end of the current speed limit – e.g. at the end of a motorway – a symbol appears with the corresponding road sign in the driver's display. If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*, speed limit signs are shown in the driver display when map data contains information on the speed limit for the road section in question, even if no direct sign has been passed. If there is no information in map data, the sign goes off after approx. 3 minutes after the last passing of a speed limit sign. The driver display symbol extinguishes after 10-30 seconds and remains so until the next speed related sign is passed. Changed speed limit When passing a direct speed limit sign when a speed limit changes, a symbol with the corresponding road sign appears in the driver's display. If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*, direct speed limit signs are normally displayed 97 372 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Additional signs Examples of additional signs97. Sometimes different speed limits are signed for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example. An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use. If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system and you pass a speed sign with the additional sign "trailer", the indicated speed will appear on the driver display. 97 98 Some speed limits only apply after a certain distance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to this fact by means of a symbol for an additional sign below the speed symbol. The additional symbol in the driver display will show either “DIST” or “TIME”. Related information • • Road Sign Information* (p. 370) Limitations of Road Sign Information* (p. 376) A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the driver display's speed symbol97 means that the function has detected an additional sign with supplementary information for the current speed limit. Sign for "School" and "Children at play" If a warning sign97 for "School" or "Children at play" is included in the satellite navigator's map data98, the driver display shows a sign of this type. Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples. Only in cars with Sensus Navigation*. * Option/accessory. 373 DRIVER SUPPORT Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation* If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*, speed information is read from the navigation unit in the following cases: • On detection of signs that indirectly indicate a speed limit, such as motorway, dual carriageway and city limit signs. • If a previously detected speed sign is assumed not to apply any longer, but no new sign has been detected. Warning for speed limitation and speed camera from road sign information* A speed warning is always given if the speed limit is exceeded in connection with speed camera information. Road sign information (RSI99) includes subfunctions that can warn the driver if a speed limit has been exceeded or in connection with speed cameras. Speed Limit Warning warns the driver when the applicable speed limit or a preselected "top speed" is exceeded – this warning is repeated once after approx. 30 seconds within the same speed limit area unless the driver reduces the speed. Another warning is available only when the driver has reduced the speed by at least 5 km/h (3 mph) and then exceeds the speed limit again, or when the car reaches a new/ different speed limit area. NOTE In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*. NOTE If a downloaded third-party app is used for navigation then there is no support for speed-related information. NOTE Examples of information on speed camera and speed limit in the driver display. Speed Limit Warning Related information • Road Sign Information* (p. 370) 99 Road 100Road 374 The speed warning is given by the driver display symbol100 showing the applicable maximum permitted speed temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded. To get an acoustic warning if you exceed the required speed, the Speed Limit Warning function must be activated and the Road Sign Audio Warning subfunction must be set to On. An acoustic warning is then given if the car's speed exceeds the speed indicated by the Road Sign Information function in the driver display. Sign Information signs are customised for each market – the one shown here is just an example. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Warning for speed camera A car equipped with road sign information and Sensus Navigation can provide information on an upcoming speed camera in the driver display.101 If the car exceeds a detected speed limit with the Speed Limit Warning function activated, a speed warning is given when the car approaches a speed camera, provided that the navigation map for the area in question contains information on speed cameras. NOTE An option is available to receive an acoustic warning for speed cameras independently of the car's speed and exceeded speed limit, and even if the Road Sign Audio Warning function is deactivated. • Road Sign Information* (p. 370) Activating or deactivating warnings from road sign information* (p. 375) Limitations of Road Sign Information* (p. 376) 101 Information on speed cameras 102 Road Sign Information 3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by pressing the up/down arrows on the screen. The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for Road Sign Information (RSI102) is optional – the driver can choose to activate or deactivate this subfunction. Note that the function does not give any consideration to selected limit adjustment when the driver display shows the speed camera symbol. Activating speed warning 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view. 2. Select Speed Limit Warning. > The function is activated and a speed limit selector appears. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning The driver can select to receive a warning at a higher speed than the signed speed. Select limit for speed warning as follows: 1. Related information • • Activating or deactivating warnings from road sign information* Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view. 2. Select Speed Limit Warning. > The function is activated and a speed limit selector appears. on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas. Activating acoustic warning in connection with speed warning. Change setting for acoustic warning as follows: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view. 2. Select/deselect Road Sign Audio Warning to activate/switch off the acoustic warning. With the Road Sign Audio Warning function activated, the driver is also warned when driving towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance. Activate Speed camera warning If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation* and map data contains information on speed cam- }} * Option/accessory. 375 DRIVER SUPPORT || eras, the driver can opt to receive an audible warning when approaching a speed camera. Limitations of Road Sign Information* Change setting for acoustic warning as follows: The Road Sign Information (RSI103) function may have limitations in certain situations. Examples of what can reduce the function are as follows: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view. 2. Select/deselect Speed Camera Audio Warning to activate/switch off the audible speed camera warning. Related information • • • Road Sign Information* (p. 370) Warning for speed limitation and speed camera from road sign information* (p. 374) Limitations of Road Sign Information* (p. 376) • • • • • • • NOTE The RSI function may interpret some types of bicycle rack, connected to the electrical socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In such cases, the driver display may show incorrect speed information. Faded signs Signs positioned on bends NOTE Rotated or damaged signs This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Signs positioned high above the roadway Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned signs Signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt maps104 Digital road are out-of-date, inaccurate or have no speed information105. Related information • • Road Sign Information* (p. 370) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) NOTE In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*. 103Road Sign Information 104 In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*. 105 Map data with speed information does not 376 exist for all areas. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Driver Alert Control WARNING The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is intended to help make the driver aware that he or she is starting to drive less consistently, e.g. if the driver becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep. The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city traffic. The function is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph). Driver Alert Control should not be used to extend a period of driving. The driver should instead plan for breaks at regular intervals and make sure they are well rested. WARNING An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition. The car is being driven erratically in the lane. If driving behaviour becomes noticeably inconsistent, the driver is alerted by this symbol in the driver display, combined with an acoustic signal and the text message Time If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued: • Stop the car safely as soon as possible and rest. Studies have shown that it is just as dangerous to drive while tired as it is to drive under the influence of alcohol or other stimulants. to take a break. If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation* and has the function Rest Stop Guidance activated, suggestions for an appropriate place for a break are also displayed. DAC reads the position of the car in the lane. A camera detects the edge markings painted on the carriageway and compares the alignment of the road with the driver’s steering wheel movements. The warning is repeated after a time if driving behaviour has not improved. }} * Option/accessory. 377 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING • • • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • 378 Activating or deactivating Driver Alert Control The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be activated or deactivated. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning from Driver Alert Control 3. Select or deselect Alertness Warning to activate or deactivate the function. In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the driver can activate a guide that can automatically suggest an appropriate rest area when Driver Alert Control (DAC) issues a warning. It is possible to select whether the Rest Stop Guidance function should be activated or deactivated. Related information 1. 2. Select My Car Alert Control. • • IntelliSafe Driver Driver Alert Control (p. 377) Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 379) Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Select My Car Alert Control. IntelliSafe Driver 3. Select or deselect Rest Stop Guidance to activate or deactivate the function. Related information • • Driver Alert Control (p. 377) Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 379) Driving support systems (p. 284) Activating or deactivating Driver Alert Control (p. 378) • Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning from Driver Alert Control (p. 378) • Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 379) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations of Driver Alert Control Lane assistance The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may have limitations in certain situations. In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example: The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA106) is to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways and similar major routes. Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the steering wheel. • • in strong side winds on rutted road surfaces. WARNING In some cases, driving behaviour is not affected despite driver fatigue – e.g. when using the Pilot Assist* function – resulting in the driver not getting a warning from DAC. Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed range 65–200 km/h (40–125 mph) on roads with clearly visible side lines. On narrow roads the function may be unavailable, in which case it goes into standby mode. The function becomes available again when the road is wide enough. Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane. It is therefore important to always stop and take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue, regardless of whether the function has given a warning. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations. Related information • • Driver Alert Control (p. 377) A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane. Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) 106Lane Keeping Aid }} * Option/accessory. 379 DRIVER SUPPORT || Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in accordance with the following: • Assist activated: When the car is approaching a lane line, the function will actively steer the car back into its lane by applying a slight torque to the steering wheel. • Warning activated: If the car is about to WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. cross a lane line, the driver is warned by means of vibrations in the steering wheel. There is also an option where both steering assistance and warning are activated simultaneously. NOTE When a direction indicator/flasher is switched on, there are no steering corrections or alerts from lane assistance. Lane assistance does not intervene Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside curves. In some situations, lane assistance allows lane lines to be crossed without intervening with either steering assistance or a warning – e.g. when using the direction indicators or cutting bends. Hands on the steering wheel For steering assistance with lane assistance to work, the driver must have his/her hands on the steering wheel, which the system will continue to monitor. If the driver does not keep his/her hands on the steering wheel, a warning signal is heard and a message encourages the driver to steer the car actively: 380 DRIVER SUPPORT • Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering If the driver follows the prompt to start steering, the function is set in standby mode and this message is shown: • Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering applied The function will then be unavailable until the driver starts to steer the car again. Activating or deactivating lane assistance Selecting assistance option for lane assistance The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) function (LKA107) is optional – the driver can choose to activate or deactivate this function. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. The driver can select how the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA108) should react if the car leaves its lane. 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view. Related information • • • • 2. In the event of Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select how the function should react: • Assist – the driver is given steering Driving support systems (p. 284) Activating or deactivating lane assistance (p. 381) • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 382) • Symbols and messages for lane assistance (p. 383) GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. Related information • • • 107 Lane 108Lane Lane assistance (p. 379) Selecting assistance option for lane assistance (p. 381) assistance without a warning. • Both – the driver is given a warning both from the steering wheel vibrating and from steering assistance. • Warning – the driver is only warned by steering wheel vibration. Related information • Lane assistance (p. 379) Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 382) Keeping Aid Keeping Aid 381 DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations of Lane assistance Related information In certain demanding conditions lane assistance (LKA109) may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function. Examples of such conditions are: • • • • • • • • • road works winter road conditions poor road surface a very “sporty” driving style poor weather with reduced visibility roads with unclear or non-existent side markings • sharp edges or lines other than the lane's side markings • as the steering servo for speed-dependent steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to overheating. The function is unable to detect barriers, rails or similar obstacles at the side of the carriageway. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. 109Lane 382 Keeping Aid Lane assistance (p. 379) Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for lane assistance on the driver display. Here are some examples. A number of symbols and messages regarding lane assistance (LKA110) can be shown Symbol Message Specification Driver support system The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA. Reduced functionality Service required Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering Lane Keeping Aid The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car. LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again. Standby until steering applied A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 110 Lane Keeping Aid }} 383 DRIVER SUPPORT || A text message can be cleared by briefly button, located in the centre pressing the of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message persists, contact a workshopA. Related information • • • 384 Lane assistance (p. 379) Display mode for lane assistance (p. 385) Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 382) DRIVER SUPPORT Display mode for lane assistance Unavailable Lane assistance is visualised by symbols in the driver display depending on the situation. Here are some examples of symbols and the situations in which they are shown: Available Related information • • (LKA111) Lane assistance (p. 379) Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 382) Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are GREY. The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines, the speed is too low or the road is too narrow. Indication of steering assistance/warning Available — the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE. Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane lines. Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the symbol are COLOURED. Lane assistance indicates that the system is giving a warning and/or attempting to steer the car back into the lane. 111 Lane Keeping Aid 385 DRIVER SUPPORT Steering assistance at risk of collision The function Collision avoidance assistance can help the driver reduce the risk of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by actively steering the car back into its lane and/or swerving. The function consists of these subfunctions: • • Steering assistance upon risk of run-off • Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision* WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text message: Collision avoidance assistance Automatic intervention • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Activating or deactivating steering assistance in the event of a collision risk (p. 387) • Steering assistance upon risk of run-off (p. 387) • Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision (p. 388) • Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision* (p. 389) • Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 390) • Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision (p. 391) NOTE It is always the driver who decides how much the car should steer – the car can never take command. 386 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Activating or deactivating steering assistance in the event of a collision risk NOTE When the Collision avoidance assistance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off: The steering assistance function is optional – the driver can choose to activate or deactivate it. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. This function is activated automatically each time the engine is started112. Steering assistance upon risk of run-off • Steering assistance at risk of road departure • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance in the event of runoff risk can help the driver and reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the road by actively steering the car back onto the road. The function has two activation levels on intervention: • Steering assistance at risk of rear-end collision* • • Even though it is possible to deactivate the function, it is advisable for the driver to always have it activated since it improves driving safety in most cases. Steering assistance only Steering assistance with brake intervention Steering assistance only Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 386) • Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 390) Intervention with steering assistance. 112 In certain markets, the setting used when the engine is switched off is reactivated. }} * Option/accessory. 387 DRIVER SUPPORT || Steering assistance with brake intervention driving the car, activation of the function will be delayed. Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision Related information Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance upon risk of headon collision can help a distracted driver who does not notice that the car is heading into the opposite lane. • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 386) • Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 390) Intervention with steering assistance and braking. Brake intervention helps in situations where steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The brake force is adapted automatically depending on the situation at the time of road run-off. The function is active within the speed range 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines. A camera scans the edges of the road and the painted side markings. If the car is about to leave the side of the road, the car is steered back onto the road and if the steering intervention is not enough to avoid run-off, the brakes are also activated. However, the function does not intervene with either steering assistance or brake intervention if the direction indicators are used. And if the function detects that the driver is actively 388 The function can assist by guiding the car back to its own lane. Oncoming vehicles Your car At the same time as steering intervention is activated, collision warning for driver support is also activated. However, the brake pulse included in the collision warning will not be activated. DRIVER SUPPORT The function is active within the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines. If the car is about to leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same time, the function can help the driver to steer the car back into its own lane. However, the function does not intervene with steering assistance if the direction indicator is used. And if the function detects that the driver is actively driving the car, activation of the function will be delayed. Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision* the driver to steer the car back into its own lane. Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance if there is a risk of rear-end collision can help a distracted driver who does not notice that the car is about to leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same time, either from behind or in the blind spot. The function can even assist if the driver intentionally changes lanes using direction indicators without noticing that another vehicle is approaching. The lamps in the door mirrors flash during steering intervention, regardless of whether the BLIS113 function is activated. Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 386) • Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk (p. 322) • Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 390) The function is active within the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines. Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 386) • • BLIS* (p. 362) Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 390) The function can assist by steering the car back to its own lane. Other vehicle in the blind spot Your car If the car is about to leave its own lane while another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent lane at the same time, the function can help 113 Blind Spot Information * Option/accessory. 389 DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision In certain situations the function may have limited functionality and fail to intervene in the following cases, for example: • for small vehicles, such as motorcycles • if the majority of the car has steered into the adjacent lane • NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-existent lane markings Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 386) • • outside the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) Steering assistance upon risk of run-off (p. 387) • • as the steering servo for speed-dependent steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to overheating. Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision (p. 388) • Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision* (p. 389) Other demanding situations can include: • • • • • • road works winter road conditions narrow roads poor road surface a very “sporty” driving style poor weather with reduced visibility. In these demanding situations, the function may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function. 390 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision A number of symbols and messages regarding steering assistance may be shown in the driver display. Here are some examples. Symbol Message Specification Collision avoidance assistance When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the system has been activated. Automatic intervention Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 386) • Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 390) 391 DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist* The Park Assist Pilot function can assist the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the distance to obstacles through acoustic signals combined with a graphic in the centre display. The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically. WARNING The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to the sides is active when the car is moving but stops after the car has been stationary for approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind is also active when the car is stationary. At a distance within approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle behind or in front of the car, the tone is constant and the active sensor's field closest to the car symbol is filled. At a distance within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from an obstacle To the sides, the tone pulses intensively and the active sector field changes colour from ORANGE to RED. Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors. The centre display shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacles. The highlighted sector indicates the location of the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a highlighted sector box at the front/back, the shorter the distance between the car and detected obstacle. The side sectors change colour as the distance between the car and an object is reduced. 392 The volume of the parking assistance signal can be adjusted while the signal is sounding by means of the [>II] knob on the centre console. Adjustment can also be performed in the top view's Settings menu option. NOTE Except in the sector nearest to the car symbol, audible warnings are only given for objects directly in the path of the car. • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • • Driving support systems (p. 284) Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides* (p. 393) Activating or deactivating the parking assistance system* (p. 394) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT • Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot (p. 396) Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides* • Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 395) Park Assist Pilot has different behaviour depending on which part of the car is approaching an obstacle. NOTE Parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is used or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox. Forwards IMPORTANT When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle. Backwards The warning signal has a constant tone at less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle. The Parking Assistance System's front detectors are activated automatically when the engine is started. They are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). The measuring range is approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft) in front of the car. The warning signal has a constant tone at less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle. The sensors for reverse are activated if the car rolls backward without a gear engaged or }} * Option/accessory. 393 DRIVER SUPPORT || when the gear lever is moved to reverse position. The measuring range is approx. 1.5 metres (5 ft) behind the car. When reversing with a trailer connected to the car's electrical system, parking assistance backward is deactivated automatically. NOTE When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them. Along the sides Parking assistance side sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. They are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). The measuring range is approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from the sides. However, the detection range of the side sensors increases significantly when the steering angle of the front wheels is increased, and obstacles of up to approx. 90 cm (3 ft) located diagonally behind or in front of the vehicle are detected when the steering wheel is turned. Activating or deactivating the parking assistance system* The park assist function can be activated or deactivated. The front and side parking assistance detectors are activated automatically when the engine is started. The rear detectors are activated if the car rolls backwards or when reverse gear is engaged. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. Related information • • Park Assist* (p. 392) Sensor fields for parking assistance system (p. 402) • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. In cars equipped with a park assist camera*, Park Assist Pilot can also be activated or deactivated from the relevant camera view. Related information • • Park Assist* (p. 392) Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 395) The warning signal pulses intensively at less than approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from an obstacle. 394 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations of Parking assistance The Parking Assistance System cannot detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality in some cases. A driver should be aware about the following examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations: WARNING • The parking sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. • Pay particular attention if there are people and animals near the car. • Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre. IMPORTANT Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone. The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks. • NOTE Since a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, towbar protrusion is included when the function measures the distance to an object behind the car. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 392) In such situations, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since information from the sensors is not always reliable in such situations. WARNING Pay additional attention while reversing when this symbol is shown if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car. The symbol indicates that the parking assistance sensors rearward are switched off and will not warn of any obstacles. IMPORTANT In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external sound sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with. Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc. * Option/accessory. 395 DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. Here are some examples. Symbol Message Specification The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for obstacles/objects. Park Assist System Sensors blocked, cleaning needed Park Assist System One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible. The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA. Unavailable Service required A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message persists, contact a workshopA. Related information • • 396 Park Assist* (p. 392) Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 395) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Park assist camera* Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar park assist line*115 The park assist camera can assist the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obstacles with a camera image and graphics in the centre display. The parking assistance camera is a support function which is activated automatically when reverse gear is selected or manually via the centre display. CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic Alert Objects/obstacles may be closer to the car than they appear to be on screen. WARNING • The parking sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. • Pay particular attention if there are people and animals near the car. • Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre. Example of camera view. Zoom114 - zoom in/out 360° view* - activates/deactivates all cameras PAS* - activates/deactivates the Parking Assistance System Lines - activates/deactivates park assist lines 114 The park assist lines are switched off when 115 Not available for all models and markets. zooming in. }} * Option/accessory. 397 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. • • Activate park assist camera (p. 403) • Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) • • Park Assist* (p. 392) Symbols and messages for Park assist camera (p. 405) Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas* The function can display a composite 360° view and separate views for each of the four cameras: rear, front, left or right camera view. Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 366) Related information • • 398 Driving support systems (p. 284) Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas* (p. 398) • Park assist lines for park assist camera* (p. 400) • Sensor fields for parking assistance system (p. 402) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT A camera symbol on the centre display's car symbol indicates which of the cameras is active. 360° view* Forwards If the car is also equipped with Park Assist System* then distance to detected obstacles is illustrated with fields in different colours. The cameras can be activated automatically or manually. Backwards The forwards parking camera is located in the grille. The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approximate coverage area. The front camera can be helpful on an exit road with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front camera is switched off. The 360° view function activates all parking cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car are shown simultaneously in the centre display, which helps the driver to observe what is around the car when manoeuvring at slow speeds. From the 360° view, each camera view can be activated separately: • Press the screen for the desired “field of vision” of the camera, e.g. on the surface in front of/above the front camera. The backwards-facing camera is fitted above the registration plate. If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute after the forward-facing camera has been extinguished, the camera is reactivated. The backward-facing camera shows a wide area behind the car. For certain models, part of the bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in some cases. Objects shown in the centre display may appear slightly tilted — this is normal. }} * Option/accessory. 399 DRIVER SUPPORT || The sides Park assist lines for park assist camera* The Park assist cameras indicate the position of the car in relation to its surroundings by displaying lines on the screen. The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and respond directly to steering wheel movements, showing the driver the path the car will take - also when the car is turning. These park assist lines include the car's most protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and corners. NOTE • When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car, the park assist lines on the display show the route the car will take – not the trailer. • The screen shows no park assist lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's electrical system. • Park assist lines are not shown when zooming in. The side cameras are positioned in each door mirror. The side cameras can show what is along each side of the car. Related information • • • Park assist camera* (p. 397) Activate park assist camera (p. 403) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Example of park assist lines. Park assist lines show the intended route for the car's external dimensions with the current steering wheel angle - this can facilitate parallel parking, reversing into tight spaces and when connecting a trailer. 400 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT IMPORTANT • Remember, that with the rear camera view selected, the monitor only displays the area behind the car. Be aware of the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring in reverse. • The same applies vice versa - note what happens to the rear parts of the car when the front camera view is selected. • Note that the park assist lines show the shortest route. Therefore, pay extra attention to the car's sides so that they do not go against/over something when the steering wheel is turned when driving forward or that the front sweeps against/over something when the steering wheel is turned when reversing. Park assist lines in 360° view* Towbar assist line* 360° view with park assist lines. With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown behind, in front of and at the side of the car (depending on the direction of travel): • • When driving forwards: Front lines When reversing: Side lines and reversing lines. With front or rear camera selected, the park assist lines appear regardless of the car's direction of travel. With one side camera selected, the park assist lines only appear when reversing. Towbar with park assist line. Towbar - activates the towbar assist line. Zoom - zoom in/out. The camera can facilitate connecting up to a trailer by showing an assist line representing the towbar's intended "path" to the trailer. }} * Option/accessory. 401 DRIVER SUPPORT || 1. Press Towbar (1). > The park assist lines for the towbar's intended "path" appear - the car's park assist lines disappear simultaneously. Park assist lines for both car and towbar cannot be shown at the same time. 2. Press Zoom (2) when a more precise manoeuvring is required. > The camera view zooms in. Sensor fields for parking assistance system If the car is equipped with parking assistance system* then the distance is shown in the 360° view with coloured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle. Sensor fields backwards and forwards Related information • • Park assist camera* (p. 397) Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas* (p. 398) • Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) • Towbar* (p. 472) The fields for the sensors for forwards and reverse change colour as the distance to the obstacle decreases – from AMBER through ORANGE to RED. Field colour reverse Distance in metres (feet) Yellow 0,6-1,5 (2,0-4,9) Orange 0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0) Red 0-0,3 (0-1,0) Field colour forwards Distance in metres (feet) Yellow 0,6–0,8 (2,0–2,6) Orange 0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0) Red 0-0,3 (0-1,0) For RED sensor fields, the pulsating acoustic signal changes over to a constant tone. The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car symbol. 402 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Sensor field to the sides Warning signals depend on the intended route of the car. When the steering wheel is turned, therefore, there may also be a warning for obstacles diagonally in front of or diagonally behind the car, not just straight ahead or directly behind. Right-hand side rear sensor field Activate park assist camera Obstacle sector in the car's intended route in reverse – depending on steering wheel angle. The park assist camera is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged or manually with one of the centre display's function buttons. The colour of the side fields changes with reduced distance to the obstacle – from AMBER to RED. Colour of side fields Distance in metres (feet) Yellow 0,25–0,9 (0,8–3,0) Red 0–0,25 (0–0,8) In the case of RED sensor fields, the acoustic signal changes from pulsing to intensively pulsing. Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be detected. Left-hand side front sensor field Obstacle sector in the car's intended route forwards – depending on steering wheel angle Sector with RED field colour and intensively pulsing tone Related information • • • • Park Assist* (p. 392) Park assist camera* (p. 397) Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas* (p. 398) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Camera view when reversing When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows the 360° view if it or any of the side views was the last used camera view, otherwise the rear view is shown. Camera view for manual camera activation Activate the parking camera with this button in the centre display's function view. The screen then initially shows the last used camera view. However, after each engine start, the previously shown side view is replaced by the 360° view and the previously shown zoomed rear view is replaced by the rear view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. Automatic deactivation of camera The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h (16 mph) to avoid distracting the driver – it }} * Option/accessory. 403 DRIVER SUPPORT || reactivates automatically if the speed drops to 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph). Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h (9 mph) and not reactivated. Related information • • • 404 Park assist camera* (p. 397) Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 395) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for Park assist camera Symbols and messages for Park assist camera can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. Here are some examples. Symbol Message Specification The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings and field marks for obstacles/objects. The camera is disengaged. One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible. Park Assist System Sensors blocked, cleaning needed Park Assist System The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA. Unavailable Service required A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message persists, contact a workshopA. }} 405 DRIVER SUPPORT || Related information • • 406 Park assist camera* (p. 397) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist Pilot* WARNING (PAP116) Park Assist Pilot can assist the driver to manoeuvre the car while parking. The function can also assist with steering when driving out from parallel parking. The function first checks if a space is large enough and if so then assists the driver to steer the car into the space. • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. The centre display indicates with symbols, graphics and text the various operations to be carried out and when to do so. • • • Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 412) Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 412) Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 415) Related information • • • 116 Park Driving support systems (p. 284) Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 408) Using Park Assist Pilot* (p. 409) Assist Pilot * Option/accessory. 407 DRIVER SUPPORT Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot* Perpendicular parking Related information • • Park Assist Pilot (PAP117) can be used for both parallel and perpendicular parking. Parallel parking Park Assist Pilot* (p. 407) Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 412) Principle for perpendicular parking. The function parks the car using the following steps: The principal of parallel parking. The function parks the car using the following steps: 1. A parking space is identified and measured. 2. The car is reversed into the space. 3. The car is positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward. With the Park Out function, a parallel-parked car can also get help from the function with leaving the parking space. 117 408 1. A parking space is identified and measured. 2. The car is reversed into the space and then positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward. NOTE When leaving a parking space, the Park Out function must only be used for a parallel-parked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car. Park Assist Pilot * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Using Park Assist Pilot* NOTE Park Assist Pilot (PAP118) helps the driver park via three steps. The function can also help the driver to leave a parking space. This function measures space and steers the car – the driver's job is to: • keep an eye on what is happening around the car • follow the instructions in the centre display • select a gear (reverse/forward) – an acoustic signal indicates when the driver should change gear • • regulate and maintain a safe speed brake and stop. Symbols, graphic and/or text appear on the centre display when the different steps are to be performed. The function can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started: • • The distance between the car and parking spaces should be 0.5–1.5 metres (1.6–5.0 ft) while the function is searching for a parking space. Parking with Park Assist Pilot The function parks the car using the following steps: 1. A parking space is identified and measured. 2. The car is reversed into the space. Principle for searching before parallel parking. 3. The car is positioned into the space - the system may then request that the driver changes gear and brakes. Find and measure parking spaces The function can be activated in the centre display's function view. It can also be accessed from the camera views. No trailer is attached to the car Speed is lower than 30 km/h (20 mph). • • 118 Park Assist Pilot GREEN button indication – the function is activated. GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. Principle for searching before perpendicular parking. Drive at a maximum of 30 km/h (20 mph) before parking. }} * Option/accessory. 409 DRIVER SUPPORT || 1. Tap on the Park In button in the function view or in the camera view. > The function searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough. Reversing in to the parking space 3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display. 2. Be prepared to stop the car when the graphic and message on the centre display state that a suitable parking space has been found. > A pop-up window is shown. 3. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular parking and select reverse gear. 2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than 7 km/h (4 mph). NOTE • Keep your hands away from the steering wheel when the function is activated. • Make sure that the steering wheel is not hindered in any way and can rotate freely. • To achieve optimum results - wait until the steering wheel is fully turned before starting to drive backward/ forward. Principle for reversing into parallel parking. NOTE The function searches the area for parking, displays instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street: • Activate the direction indicator to the driver's side - then the system searches for a parking space on that side of the car instead. Principle for reversing into perpendicular parking. 1. 410 Check that the area behind the car is clear, then engage reverse gear. DRIVER SUPPORT Positioning the car in the parking space 1. Move the gear selector to the gear position as instructed by the system, wait until the steering wheel has been turned and drive forward slowly. 2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display. 3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly backwards. 4. Be prepared to brake the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display. Principle for positioning during parallel parking. The function is deactivated automatically and the graphics and message show that parking is complete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the car’s position. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked. or behind the car during a parking manoeuvre, the car is auto-braked to stationary. The driver display then shows a pop-up message where the driver can choose to cancel the parking manoeuvre by tapping on Cancel, or tap Resume to continue the parking sequence. Proceed as follows after selecting Resume: – Check that there is free space around the car and follow the instructions in the centre display, such as: To continue – Gently accelerate away from object. Related information • • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 407) Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 412) IMPORTANT The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by Park Assist Pilot (PAP119) compared with when Park Assist System uses the sensors. Principle for positioning during perpendicular parking. Auto-brake during parking sequence If the parking sensors detect a vehicle or pedestrian within the intended route in front of 119 Park Assist Pilot * Option/accessory. 411 DRIVER SUPPORT Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist Pilot* The Park Out function can help the driver to leave a parking space when the car is parallel parked. NOTE When leaving a parking space, the Park Out function must only be used for a parallel-parked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car. The Park Out function is activated in the centre display's function view or in the camera view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. 1. Tap on the Park Out button in the function view or in the camera view. 3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display - follow the instructions in the same way as for the parking procedure. Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when the function is completed - the driver may then need to turn the steering wheel back to the maximum steering angle in order to leave the parking space. Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* The Park Assist Pilot (PAP120) function cannot detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality. WARNING • The parking sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. • Pay particular attention if there are people and animals near the car. If the function considers that the driver can leave the parking space without any extra manoeuvring then the function will be stopped, even if the driver may consider that the car is still in the parking space. • Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre. Related information Objects situated higher than the sensor detection area are not included when calculating the parking manoeuvre, which could cause the function to swing into the parking space too early – such parking spaces should be avoided for this reason. • • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 407) Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 412) IMPORTANT A driver should be aware about the following examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations: 2. Use the direction indicator to select the direction in which the car should leave the parking space. 120 Park 412 Assist Pilot * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Parking is discontinued A parking sequence will be discontinued: • • if the driver moves the steering wheel if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h (4 mph) • if the driver presses Cancel in the centre display • when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic stability control are engaged - e.g. when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road • • as the steering servo for speed-dependent steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to overheating when the parking sensors detect a vehicle or pedestrian within the intended route in front of or behind the car during a parking manoeuvre, the car is auto-braked to stationary. Where applicable, a message in the centre display states the reason for a parking sequence being discontinued. 121 ”Approved IMPORTANT Under certain circumstances, the function is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is interference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works. Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc. There are also a few details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.: • The driver is always responsible for determining whether the space selected by the function is suitable for parking. • Do not use the function if snow chains or a spare wheel are fitted. • Do not use the function if cargo items are protruding from the car. • Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to measure the parking space incorrectly. • During the search and check-measurement of the parking space, the function may miss objects positioned deep in the parking space. • Parking spaces on narrow streets are not always feasible, since the space required for manoeuvring may not be sufficient. • Use approved tyres121 with the correct tyre pressure - this affects the ability of the function to park the car. • The function bases itself on the locations of vehicles already parked nearby – if they are inappropriately parked, your own car's tyres and wheel rims may be damaged by contact with the kerb. • Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed or offered unnecessarily if one NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement. Driver responsibility The driver should bear in mind that the function is an aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function. The driver must therefore be prepared to interrupt a parking step. tyres” refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory. }} 413 DRIVER SUPPORT || parked car is protruding more than other parked cars. • The function is designed for parking on straight streets – not sharp curves or bends. For this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the potential parking spaces when the function measures the space. Related information • • • 414 Park Assist Pilot* (p. 407) Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for Park Assist Pilot* Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP122) can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. Here are some examples. Message Specification Park Assist System One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed Park Assist System The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA. Unavailable Service required A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message persists, contact a workshopA. Related information • • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 407) Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 412) 122 Park Assist Pilot * Option/accessory. 415 STARTING AND DRIVING STARTING AND DRIVING Starting the car To start the car: The car is started using the start knob in the tunnel console when the remote control key is in the passenger compartment. 1. The remote control key must be inside the car. For cars with Passive Start, the key needs to be located in the front part of the passenger compartment. With the option for keyless locking/unlocking* of the car, the key can be anywhere in the car. 2. Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For cars with automatic gear changing, make sure that gear position P or N is selected. For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure that the gear lever is in neutral position or that the clutch pedal is depressed. Start knob in the tunnel console. WARNING Before starting: • • Fasten the seatbelt. • Make sure that the brake pedal can be fully depressed. Adjust the seat, steering wheel and mirrors. 3. Turn the start knob clockwise and then release it. The control automatically returns to its starting position. NOTE For diesel-engined cars, there may be a slight delay before starting is initiated. When the engine is started, the starter motor works until the engine is started or until its overheating protection triggers. Error messages The remote control key is not physically used when starting the car since it is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive start). 1 418 If the Car key not found message is shown in the driver display when starting, place the remote control key by the backup reader. Then try to start the car again. Backup reader's location in the tunnel console. NOTE When the remote control key is positioned by the backup reader, make sure that there are no car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus by the backup reader, (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several car keys close to one another by the backup reader may cause interference with each other. IMPORTANT If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover. If the car is moving, the engine can be started by turning the start knob clockwise. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing. Switching off the car • The car is switched off using the start knob in the tunnel console. Using jump starting with another battery (p. 470) • Selecting ignition mode (p. 421) WARNING Always take the remote control key out from the car when leaving the car and make sure the car's electrical system is in ignition position 0 - especially if there are children in the car. NOTE The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment. Related information • • • • • Switching off the car (p. 419) Ignition positions (p. 420) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 196) Using jump starting with another battery (p. 470) Selecting ignition mode (p. 421) Start knob in the tunnel console. To switch off the car: – Turn the start knob clockwise and release it - the car is switched off. The control automatically returns to its starting position. If the gear selector for cars with an automatic gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls: – Turn the knob clockwise and hold it until the car is switched off. Related information • • • Starting the car (p. 418) Ignition positions (p. 420) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 196) 419 STARTING AND DRIVING Ignition positions The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available. In order to facilitate the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in three different levels – 0, I and II. These levels are described with the denomination "ignition position" throughout the owner's manual. Level 0 The following table shows the functions available in each ignition position/level: Functions • Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminatedA. • • Power* seats can be adjusted. • The centre display is started and can be usedA. • The infotainment system can be usedA. • • • II The power windows can be used. In this mode, the functions are controlled by time and are switched off automatically after a short while. I Level Panorama roof, power windows, 12V power socket in the passenger compartment, Bluetooth, navigation, phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used. Power seats can be adjusted. Functions • • The headlamps come on. • Several other systems are activated. However, heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the car has been started. Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds. This ignition position consumes a lot of current from the battery and should therefore be avoided! A Also activated when the door is opened. Related information Starting the car (p. 418) • • • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 196) • Selecting ignition mode (p. 421) Using jump starting with another battery (p. 470) 12 V power sockets* in the cargo area can be used. Power is taken from the battery in this ignition position. 420 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Selecting ignition mode The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available. • Ignition position I – Turn the start knob clockwise and release it. The control automatically returns to its starting position. • Ignition position II – Turn the start knob clockwise and hold it in position for approx. 5 seconds. Then release the knob, which automatically returns to its starting position. • Back to ignition position 0 – To return to ignition position 0 from position I and II – Turn the start knob clockwise and release. The control automatically returns to its starting position. Selecting ignition position Related information Start knob in the tunnel console. • Ignition position 0 – Unlock the car and store the remote control key inside the car. • • • • • Starting the car (p. 418) Switching off the car (p. 419) Ignition positions (p. 420) Alcohol lock* The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally. The car has an interface for the electrical connection of the different makes and models of alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The interface facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives the option of an integrated function including messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's main display. For information about a specific alcohol lock, please refer to the owner's manual from the respective alcohol lock manufacturer. Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 196) WARNING Using jump starting with another battery (p. 470) The alcohol lock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely. NOTE To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear changing, when these ignition positions are to be selected. Related information • • Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 422) Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock* (p. 423) }} * Option/accessory. 421 STARTING AND DRIVING • • Starting the car (p. 418) Bypass of the alcohol lock* Related information Ignition positions (p. 420) In the event of an emergency situation or if the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car. For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the separate instructions for that specific lock. • • • • Alcohol lock* (p. 421) Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock* (p. 423) Starting the car (p. 418) Ignition positions (p. 420) Activating the bypass function (Bypass) NOTE All bypass activation is logged and saved in the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit. It is not possible to undo a bypass. The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass instead?, is shown in the screen: • If "Cancel/Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing the right arrow button on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad and then on the O button. • If "Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing the O button. The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the car can be started. The number of bypasses possible before service is required is selected during alcohol lock installation. 422 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock* The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened. To bear in mind In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible: • Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test. • Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result. NOTE After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test. Related information • • • • Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 422) Alcohol lock* (p. 421) Starting the car (p. 418) Ignition positions (p. 420) Brake functions Foot brake The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed or prevent the car from rolling. In addition to the foot brake and parking brake, the car is equipped with several automatic brake assist functions. These can assist the driver by not needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal when at a traffic light, when starting on an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill gradient. The foot brake is part of the brake system. The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will therefore be needed to produce the normal braking effect. Depending on the car's equipment, the following auto braking functions are available: • Automatic brake when stationary (Auto Hold) • • • • Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist) Auto braking after a collision City Safety Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control) Related information • • • • • • • Foot brake (p. 423) Parking brake (p. 426) Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429) Auto braking after a collision (p. 431) Help when starting on a hill (p. 430) City Safety™ (p. 346) Hill descent control (p. 451) The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo. WARNING The brake servo only works when the engine is running. If the foot brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the car. In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes should be relieved by using engine braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up. Use drive mode Off Road for increased engine braking while driving on steep downhill gradients at low speeds. Anti-lock braking system The car has anti-lock brakes (ABS2), which prevents the wheels from locking while brak- }} * Option/accessory. 423 STARTING AND DRIVING || ing and allows maintained steering control. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal. WARNING If both the warning lamps for brake fault and ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault has occurred in the brake system. A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the car has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the system may be made at low speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the brake pedal. Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss. 424 If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated. The brake assist system (BAS3) helps to increase brake force during braking, and can thereby shorten the braking distance. The system detects the way in which the driver brakes and increases brake force where necessary. The brake force can be boosted up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The function is suspended when the pressure on the brake pedal decreases. NOTE When BAS is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. Related information Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started: Automatic function check. • • Constant glow for more than 2 seconds: Fault in the ABS system. The car's normal brake system is still working, but without the ABS function. • • • • • 2 Anti-lock Braking System 3 Brake Assist System • Brake assistance When the brake pedal is released, all braking ceases. Brake assistance (p. 424) Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429) Help when starting on a hill (p. 430) Braking on wet roads (p. 425) Braking on gritted roads (p. 425) Brake system maintenance (p. 425) Brake lights (p. 157) Related information • Foot brake (p. 423) STARTING AND DRIVING Braking on wet roads Braking on gritted roads Brake system maintenance When driving for a prolonged period of time in heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may be delayed slightly when next using the brakes. This may also be the case after a car wash. It is then necessary to depress the brake pedal more forcefully. You should therefore maintain a greater distance to the vehicles in front. When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and brake linings. This may extend braking distance. You should therefore maintain a greater safety distance to vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do the following: Check brake system components regularly for wear. To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. After replacing brake linings and brake discs, braking effect is only adapted after they have been "worn in" for a few hundred kilometres (miles). Compensate for the reduced braking effect by depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that are approved for your Volvo. • Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs, enabling them to dry faster and protecting them against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic situation when braking. Brake now and again to remove any layer of salt. Make sure that other road users are not put at risk by the braking. • Gently depress the brake pedal after finishing driving and before starting your next trip. Related information Related information • • Foot brake (p. 423) Braking on gritted roads (p. 425) • • IMPORTANT The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly. Foot brake (p. 423) Braking on wet roads (p. 425) Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Foot brake (p. 423) 425 STARTING AND DRIVING Parking brake Related information The parking brake prevents the car from rolling away from stationary by means of mechanically locking/blocking two wheels. • Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 426) • • Parking on a hill (p. 428) • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429) In the event of a fault in the parking brake (p. 428) Activating and deactivating the parking brake Use the parking brake to prevent the car from rolling from stationary. Activating the parking brake The control for the parking brake is located in the tunnel console between the seats. A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrically-operated parking brake is being applied. The noise can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake. If the car is stationary when the parking brake is activated, it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is activated when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost stationary. 426 1. Pull the control upward. > The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the parking brake is activated. 2. Check that the car is stationary. STARTING AND DRIVING Symbol in the driver display Symbol Specification The symbol is illuminated when the parking brake is activated. If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. Read the message in the driver display. NOTE An acoustic signal sounds while emergency braking is active at high speeds. Deactivating the parking brake 2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Select gear position D or R and depress the accelerator pedal. > The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes. NOTE For automatic deactivation, either the driver has to have put on their seatbelt or the driver door has to be closed. Automatic activation The parking brake is activated automatically • when the car is switched off and the setting for automatic activation of the parking brake is activated in the centre display. • when gear position P is selected on a steep hill. • Automatic parking brake activation setting (p. 428) • if the Auto hold (Automatic brake when stationary) function is activated and • the car has been stationary for a long time (5-10 minutes) • In the event of a fault in the parking brake (p. 428) • • Parking brake (p. 426) • • the car is switched off the driver leaves the car. Emergency brake In an emergency, the parking brake can be activated when the car is in motion by pulling and holding up the control. Braking stops when the control is released, or if the accelerator pedal is depressed. Related information Deactivate manually 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Press the control down. > The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes. Parking on a hill (p. 428) Deactivate automatically 1. Start the car. 427 STARTING AND DRIVING Automatic parking brake activation setting Choose whether the parking brake is to be activated automatically when the car is switched off. To change setting: 1. Related information • Always use the parking brake when parking on a hill. WARNING Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Parking Brake and Suspension to select or deselect the function Auto Activate Parking Brake. • Parking on a hill Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 426) Parking brake (p. 426) If the car is parked facing uphill: • Turn the wheels away from the kerb. If the car is parked facing downhill: • Turn the wheels towards the kerb. Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by pulling the control upwards while driving the car away. Release the control when the engine achieves traction. Related information • 428 Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 426) In the event of a fault in the parking brake Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not possible to deactivate or activate the parking brake after several attempts. An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving with the parking brake activated. If the car must be parked before a possible fault is rectified, then the wheels must be turned as for parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in position P. Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can be neither deactivated nor activated. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low. Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced at a workshop due to the design of the electricallyoperated parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. STARTING AND DRIVING Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. See the message in the driver display. Fault in brake system. See the message in the driver display. Information message in driver display. Automatic braking when stationary Automatic brake when stationary (Auto hold) means that the driver can release the brake pedal while maintaining braking effect when the car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction. When the car has stopped, the brakes are activated automatically. The function can use either foot brake or parking brake to hold the car stationary and it works on all gradients. When driving off, the brakes are released automatically if the driver is wearing the seatbelt or the driver's door is closed. NOTE Related information • • • • When braking to a standstill on an uphill or downhill slope, the brake pedal should be depressed a little harder before being released to ensure the car does not roll. Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 426) Parking on a hill (p. 428) Starter battery (p. 615) Volvo service programme (p. 600) Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the foot brake to keep the car stationary. The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the parking brake to keep the car stationary. Related information • • • • Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill (p. 430) Foot brake (p. 423) Parking brake (p. 426) Help when starting on a hill (p. 430) The parking brake is activated if • • • • the car is switched off the driver's door is opened the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled the car has been stationary for a longer time (5-10 minutes). 429 STARTING AND DRIVING Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill • The function remains deactivated until it is reactivated. The automatic brake function at a standstill is activated using the button in the tunnel console. • When the function is deactivated, hill start assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient. Related information • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429) Help when starting on a hill Hill start assist (HSA4) prevents the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it prevents the car from rolling forwards. The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal. The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver starts to drive away. Hill start assist is available even when the function for automatic brake when stationary (Auto hold) is deactivated. Related information – Press the button in the tunnel console to activate or deactivate the function. > The indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. Activated function remains even when the car is started next time. Applicable when switching off If the function is active and holds the car with the foot brake (A-symbol illuminated in the driver display), the brake pedal must be depressed at the same time as the button is depressed in order to deactivate. 430 • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429) • Foot brake (p. 423) STARTING AND DRIVING Auto braking after a collision Gearbox Automatic gearbox In the event of a collision in which the activation level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large animal is detected, the car's brakes are automatically applied. This function is to prevent or reduce the effects of any subsequent collision. After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no longer possible to control and steer the car. In order to avoid or mitigate a possible further collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's path, the auto braking system is activated automatically and brakes the car in a safe manner. The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain (power transmission) between engine and drive wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements. The car has an eight-speed automatic gearbox. The number of gear changes means that the engine's torque and power range can be used effectively. Two of the gears are overdrive gears that save fuel when driving at constant engine speed. It is also possible to select gears manually. The driver display shows which gear position is currently in use. With an automatic gearbox, the system selects a gear so that you can drive as energy-efficiently as possible. The gearbox also has a manual gearshift mode. The gearbox is available in different versions. The gearbox included in the car can be identified by the gear lever. The different gear levers have different functions. Brake lights and hazard warning lights are activated during braking. When the car has stopped, the hazard warning lights continue to flash and the parking brake is applied. • • If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk of being hit by following traffic, the system can be overridden by the driver depressing the accelerator pedal. Related information Automatic gearbox (p. 431) Gear shift indicator (p. 439) Overview of large gear lever and shift pattern in the driver display. The function assumes that the brake system is intact after the collision. Related information Rear Collision Warning* (p. 361) • • • BLIS* (p. 362) 4 Hill Start Assist Brake functions (p. 423) }} * Option/accessory. 431 STARTING AND DRIVING || Symbols in the driver display If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver display shows a symbol and a message. Symbol Specification Information or error message for gearbox. Follow the recommendation given. Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow the recommendation given. Gear positions for automatic gearbox With an automatic gearbox, an appropriate gear is selected automatically depending on the need for speed and power. Changing gear The gear selector is the shift-by-wire-type where shifting is performed electronically instead of mechanically. This means simpler shifting and more distinct gear positions. Overview of small gear lever and shift pattern in the driver display. Reduced performance/Acceleration performance reduced The driver display shows the gear position selected: In the event of a temporary powertrain fault, the car can go into a Limp home mode with reduced engine power to prevent damage to the powertrain. P, R, N, D or M. For cars that have the small gear lever, the P position is electrical and the shift pattern is instead R, N, D or M. During manual gear changing, the gear being used is also shown. IMPORTANT To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol illuminates in the driver display and a text message is shown - follow the recommendation given. 432 Related information • Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 432) • Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 435) • • • Gear selector inhibitor (p. 437) Kick-down function (p. 438) Gear shift indicator (p. 439) * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING For the small gear lever, change gear position by pressing the spring-loaded gear selector forwards or backwards, or sideways for manual shifting. WARNING Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations. Gear positions Park position - P For the small gear lever, use the P button located next to the gear selector to activate Park position. For the large lever, move the gear lever to gear position P to activate Park position. Overview of large gear lever and gear positions. For the large gear lever, change gear position by pressing the gear selector forwards or backwards, or to the left for manual shifting. The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Select the P position when the car is parked or when starting the engine. The car must be stationary when the park position is selected. To select another gear position when the park position is selected, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. The engine has to be running for cars with the small gear lever. To park - first apply the parking bake and then select park position. Overview of small gear lever and gear positions. 5 Does not apply to cars with the large gear lever. NOTE To be able to lock the car and arm the alarm, the gear position must be in P. Help functions5 For cars with the small gear lever, the system will change to P position automatically. • • if the car is switched off in position D or R. if the driver unfastens the seatbelt and opens the driver's door when the car is running with the gear selector in a position other than P. To park a car without wearing the seatbelt and with the door open - exit the P position by selecting R or D again. If the car is switched off in neutral position, there is no automatic change-over to P position. This is to allow you to wash the car in the type of car wash that requires the car to be rolled through the facility. }} 433 STARTING AND DRIVING || Reverse position - R Select position R to reverse. The car must be stationary when reverse position is selected. Manual gearshift mode - M Neutral position - N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in N position. To be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. The engine has to be running for cars with the small gear lever. Drive position - D D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when changing gear from R position to D position. 434 Overview of the shift pattern in the driver display for large gear lever. The manual gearshift mode can be selected at any time while driving. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released. Select manual gearshift mode by moving the gear selector sideways from position D to the end position at "±". The driver display shows which gear is used. Overview of the shift pattern in the driver display for small gear lever. The manual gearshift mode can be selected at any time while driving. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released. Select manual gear position by moving the gear selector backwards from the D position. The driver display shows which gear is being used. • • Press the gear selector forwards to "+" (plus) to change up one step and release it. Press the gear selector to the right to "+" (plus) to change up one step and release it. • • Press the gear selector backwards to "–" (minus) to change down one step and release it. Press the gear selector to the left to "–" (minus) to change down one step and release it. • • Press the gear selector to the side to its end position at D to return to the D position. Press the gear selector backwards to return to the D position. STARTING AND DRIVING The gearbox automatically shifts down if the speed decreases to a level lower than appropriate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling. Related information Automatic gearbox (p. 431) • • • Gear selector inhibitor (p. 437) • Kick-down function (p. 438) Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* The steering wheel paddles are a complement to the gear selector and make it possible to change gear manually without releasing hands from the steering wheel. Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 435) Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel paddles, large gear lever. "-": Selects the next lower gear. "+": Selects the next higher gear. Activating the steering wheel paddles To be able to change gear with the steering wheel paddles they must first be activated: – Pull one of the paddles toward the steering wheel. > A figure in the driver display indicates current gear. Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel paddles, small gear lever. }} * Option/accessory. 435 STARTING AND DRIVING || In gear position M the steering wheel paddles are automatically activated. Switch To change gear one step: – Pull one of the paddles backwards towards the steering wheel - and release. A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle provided that the engine speed does not leave the permitted range. After each gear change the figure in the driver display changes to show the current gear. Deactivating the function Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel paddles in manual gearshift mode, large gear lever. Manual deactivation in gear position D and M – Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the steering wheel and holding in place until the figure in the driver display for the current gear extinguishes. > The gearbox returns to gear position D. For cars with the large gear lever, it is only possible to disable this function in gear position D. Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel paddles in manual gearshift mode, small gear lever. 436 Automatic deactivation In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are deactivated after a short time if they are not used. This is indicated by means of the figure for the current gear extinguishing. The exception is during engine braking - then the paddles are activated for as long as engine braking is in progress. In gear position M there is no automatic deactivation. Related information • • • Automatic gearbox (p. 431) Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 432) Gear shift indicator (p. 439) STARTING AND DRIVING Gear selector inhibitor Automatic gear selector inhibitor Related information The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental changing between different gear positions in an automatic gearbox. There are two different types of gear selector inhibitor - mechanical and automatic. The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special safety systems. • • Mechanical gear selector inhibitor From park position - P To be able to move the gear selector from the P position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. The engine has to be running for cars with the small gear lever. • Automatic gearbox (p. 431) Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 432) Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor (p. 438) From neutral position - N If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked. Gear selector inhibitor for cars with the large gear lever. The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector. With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D. 6 Applies To be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. The engine has to be running for cars with the small gear lever. Message in the driver display If the gear selector is inhibited, a message is shown in the driver display, e.g. Gear lever Press brake pedal to activate gear lever. The gear selector is not inhibited mechanically.6 to cars with small gear lever 437 STARTING AND DRIVING Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor7 Press a small screwdriver into the hole and hold. When the car is without power, the automatic gear selector inhibitor can be disengaged in cars with the large gear lever. For cars with the small gear lever, it is not possible to disengage the gear selector inhibitor. Move the gear selector to position N and release the button. 4. Put the rubber mat back in place. Kick-down function Kick-down can be used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking. When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown. If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically changes up. Safety function To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor. Overview of the large gear lever. If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a discharged battery, the gear selector must be moved to the N position so that the car can be moved. Lift the rubber mat in the compartment in front of the gear selector. Locate the hole with a spring-loaded button in the bottom of the compartment. Overview of the small gear lever where it is not possible to deactivate the gear selector inhibitor. Related information • • Gear selector inhibitor (p. 437) Automatic gearbox (p. 431) The gearbox does not permit downshifting/ kick-down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed – the original gear remains engaged. On kick-down the car can shift down one or more steps at a time, depending in engine speed. The car shifts up when the engine has reached is maximum engine speed in order to prevent engine damage. Related information • 7 438 The function is not available for cars with the small gear lever. Automatic gearbox (p. 431) STARTING AND DRIVING Gear shift indicator The gear shift indicator in the driver display shows the current gear during manual gearshifting and when it is appropriate to engage the next gear for optimum fuel economy. For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is important to drive in the right gear and to change gear in good time. Gear shift indicator in 8-inch driver display for large gear lever. Gear shift indicator in 8-inch driver display for small gear lever. The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in the driver display and uses an up arrow to indicate when shifting to a higher gear is recommended. The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in the driver display and indicates recommended shifting to a higher gear by a flashing plus sign. Related information • Automatic gearbox (p. 431) Gear shift indicator in 12-inch driver display for large gear lever*. Gear shift indicator in 12-inch driver display for small gear lever*. * Option/accessory. 439 STARTING AND DRIVING All-wheel drive Drive modes* All-wheel drive means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time, which improves traction. To achieve the best possible traction, the motive force is distributed automatically to the wheels with the best grip. The system continuously calculates the need for torque to the rear wheels, and can immediately redistribute up to half of the motor's torque to the rear wheels. Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving characteristics in order to enhance the driving experience and facilitate driving in special situations. Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly have access to the car's numerous functions and settings for different driving needs. The following systems are adapted to maintain driving characteristics that are as good as possible in each drive mode: All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels. When stationary, the allwheel drive is always engaged in preparation for maximum traction during acceleration. • • • • • • • (AWD8) All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on the selected drive mode. Related information • • • Steering Engine/gearbox/all-wheel drive Brakes Shock absorption Driver display Start/stop function Climate settings Low speed control (p. 450) Select the drive mode adapted for the current driving conditions. Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations. Gearbox (p. 431) Selectable drive modes Drive modes* (p. 440) When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode and the start/stop function is activated. The drive mode can be changed when the car has been started, e.g. to the Individual mode. 8 All Wheel Drive 9 Applicable only to 440 When the Individual mode is selected, it is possible to make adjustments for specific preferences, e.g. to show the tachometer. Comfort The Comfort mode is the car's normal mode. These settings mean that the car feels comfortable, the steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and body's movement is smooth. This drive mode is the certification mode for carbon dioxide emissions. In Comfort mode, no tachometer is displayed in the driver display9. Eco Adapt the car for more energy-efficient and environmentally-conscious driving with the Eco mode. • The drive mode means, for example, that the Start/Stop function is activated, the shock absorbers are soft and the output of certain climate settings is reduced. When driving in Eco mode, the driver display shows an eco-meter that indicates in real time how economical your driving is. cars with an 8-inch driver display. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Off Road • Maximise the car's traction when driving in difficult terrain and on poor roads. The steering is light, the all-wheel drive operation and low speed function with hill descent control (HDC10) are activated. Start/Stop function is deactivated. The drive mode can only be activated at low speeds and the speedometer shows the range for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded, Off Road mode is suspended and another drive mode is activated. In the Off Road mode the driver display has a compass between the speedometer and tachometer. NOTE The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads. Dynamic • Dynamic mode means that the car has sportier characteristics and faster response to accelerating. Steering response is faster and shock absorption is harder11 which means that the body follows the roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering. Start/Stop function is deactivated. The Dynamic mode is also available in the Polestar Engineered version*. Individual • Adapting a drive mode according to individual preferences. Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust the settings according to the desired driving characteristics. These settings are saved in the active driver profile and are available each time the car is unlocked with the same remote control key. An individual drive mode is only available if it is first activated in the centre display. Settings view12 for individual drive mode. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and select Individual Drive Mode. The gear changes become faster and more distinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with greater traction. 10 11 12 Hill Descent Control Applies to Four-C. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. }} * Option/accessory. 441 STARTING AND DRIVING || 3. In Presets, select a drive mode to start from: Eco, Comfort, Dynamic or Polestar Engineered*. Possible adjustments apply to settings for: • • • • • • • Driver Display Steering Force Powertrain Characteristics Brake Characteristics Changing drive mode* Select the drive mode adapted for the current driving conditions. Change the drive mode using the control in the centre console. Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations. To change drive mode: Suspension Control Related information • • Start/Stop. Drive modes* (p. 440) Activating and deactivating drive mode Eco with the function button (p. 445) • Activating and deactivating low-speed driving using a function button (p. 451) • Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button (p. 452) ECO Climate Related information • • • • • • • • 3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly on the touch screen to confirm the selection. > The selected drive mode is indicated in the driver display. Changing drive mode* (p. 442) Drive mode Eco (p. 443) Economical driving (p. 453) Start/stop function (p. 445) Low speed control (p. 450) Hill descent control (p. 451) All-wheel drive (p. 440) Driver profiles (p. 133) 1. Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE. > A pop-up menu is opened in the centre display. 2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the desired drive mode is highlighted. 442 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Drive mode Eco Drive mode Eco can help you with more ecofriendly driving, with greater fuel economy. Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environment. The following properties are adapted for Eco mode: • • Gearbox gearshift points. • The Eco Coast freewheel function is activated and engine braking is deactivated when the accelerator pedal is released at speeds between 65 and 140 km/h (40 and 87 mph). • • Engine management and response from the accelerator pedal. Some of the climate control system's settings work at reduced power or are deactivated. The driver display shows information in an ECO gauge which facilitates environmentally-conscious and fuel-efficient driving. Free-wheel function Eco Coast The freewheel function Eco Coast means in practice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel for longer distances. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically disengaged from the engine whose speed is reduced to idling speed with reduced consumption. The function is best used where it is possible to freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a slight downhill gradient or when there is a predictable speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a lower speed limit. Activating the freewheel function The function is activated when the accelerator pedal is fully released, in combination with the following parameters: • • • • Deactivating and switching off the freewheel function In certain situations it may be desirable to deactivate or switch off the function in order to use engine braking. Examples of such situations may be on steep downhill gradients or before an imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be able to do it in the safest way possible. Drive mode Eco is activated. Deactivate the freewheel function as follows The gear selector is in D position. • • • Speed within the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph). The road's downhill gradient is not steeper than approx. 6%. The driver display shows COASTING when the freewheel function is being used. Limitations The freewheel function is not available if • engine and/or gearbox are not at normal operating temperature • the gear selector is moved from the D position to manual position • the speed is outside the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) • the road's downhill gradient is steeper than approx. 6% • Manual gear changing is performed with the steering wheel paddles*. actuate the accelerator or brake pedal move the gear selector to manual position changing gear with steering wheel paddles*. Switch off the freewheel function as follows • • change drive mode* switch off drive mode Eco in the function view. Even without the freewheel function, it is possible to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn, reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel economy it is better to have the freewheel function activated and be able to freewheel for longer distances. Cruise control Eco Cruise When using the cruise control in the Eco drive mode, the car's acceleration and deceleration will be lower compared to other drive modes, which enables further fuel savings. This means }} * Option/accessory. 443 STARTING AND DRIVING || that the car's speed can be slightly above or below the set speed. • On a smooth road, the car's speed can deviate from the set speed when the cruise control is active and the car freerolls. • On a steep uphill slope, the car's speed drops until a downshift is made, then reduced acceleration starts in order to achieve the set speed. • On a downhill slope where the car freerolls, the car's speed can be slightly above or below the set speed. The function uses normal engine braking to maintain the set speed. The foot brake is also used if necessary. NOTE When the Eco drive mode is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced. Certain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only regained by switching off Eco drive mode or adapting Individual* drive mode with full climate functionality. Eco gauge in the 8-inch driver display. The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient the driving is: • Eco gauge in the driver display • With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge shows a low value with the pointer in the green zone. With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the gauge shows a high value. The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show how a reference driver would drive the car under the same driving conditions. This is indicated with the short pointer on the gauge. In the event of difficulties due to misting, press the button for max. defroster which has normal functionality. Related information • • • • • Changing drive mode* (p. 442) Activating and deactivating drive mode Eco with the function button (p. 445) Drive modes* (p. 440) Economical driving (p. 453) Start/stop function (p. 445) ECO climate control Eco gauge in the 12-inch driver display*. 444 In the Eco drive mode, eco climate control is activated automatically in the passenger compartment in order to reduce energy consumption. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Activating and deactivating drive mode Eco with the function button There is a function button for Eco drive mode in the centre display's function view unless the car was equipped with drive mode control in the tunnel console. The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine is switched off, and it must therefore be activated after each time the engine is started. The driver display shows ECO when the function is activated. Selecting Eco drive mode in the centre display function view – Press the Driving Mode ECO button to activate or deactivate the function. Start/stop function Driving with start/stop function With the start/stop function, the engine switches off temporarily when the car has stopped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic queue, and then starts again when it is needed. The start/stop function reduces fuel consumption, which in turn contributes to reduced exhaust emissions. The start/stop function temporarily switches off the engine when stationary and then starts it automatically when required. The Start/Stop function is available when the car is started and can be activated if certain conditions have been met. The system makes it possible to adopt an environmentally-conscious driving style by allowing the car to engine auto-stop when possible. Related information • • • > An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. Driving with start/stop function (p. 445) Conditions for the Start/Stop function (p. 447) Drive modes* (p. 440) The driver display indicates when the function is • • • available active not available. All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work normally, even when the engine is auto-stopped. However, some equipment may have its output temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system. Auto-stop The following is required for the engine to auto-stop: Related information • • • Drive mode Eco (p. 443) Changing drive mode* (p. 442) Drive modes* (p. 440) }} * Option/accessory. 445 STARTING AND DRIVING || • Stop the car with the foot brake and then keep your foot on the brake pedal - the engine stops automatically. • In drive mode Comfort or Eco, the engine may auto-stop before the car is completely stationary. Symbols in the driver display With adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist activated, the engine auto-stops approximately 3 seconds after the car has stopped. • is shown in the tachThe symbol ometer when the function is available. Autostart • A pointer in the tachometer points to The following is required for the engine to auto-start: • • • • 13 446 On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on the brake pedal slightly so that the car begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after a slight speed increase. Release the brake pedal - the engine will autostart and you can continue driving. On an uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA13) engages, which prevents the car from rolling backwards. When the Auto Hold function is activated, auto-start is delayed until the accelerator pedal is depressed. When adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is activated, the engine will autostart when the accelerator pedal is button depressed, or by pressing the on the left keypad of the steering wheel. Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal - the engine auto-starts. Hill Start Assist The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped. when the function is active and the engine is auto-stopped. • The symbol is greyed out when the function is not available. • No symbol is shown when the function is deactivated. For cars with the eight-inch driver display, the symbol is displayed at the bottom of the speedometer. Related information • Deactivating the start/stop function (p. 447) • Conditions for the Start/Stop function (p. 447) • • • Start/stop function (p. 445) Help when starting on a hill (p. 430) Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429) STARTING AND DRIVING Deactivating the start/stop function Conditions for the Start/Stop function In certain situations it may be desirable to deactivate the start/stop function. Deactivate using the Start/ Stop function button in the centre display's function view. The indication in the button is switched off when the function is deactivated. For the Start/Stop function to work requires that a number of conditions are met. If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in the driver display. The function is deactivated until • • it is reactivated • the next time the car is started. • • The engine does not auto-stop in the following cases: • • The ABS system has been activated. • The exhaust system's particulate filter is full. • A trailer is connected to the car's electrical system. The gearbox is not at normal operating temperature. • After a number of repeated auto stops, speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) before the next auto stop. • • The driver has not fastened the seatbelt. The engine is not at normal operating temperature. • • The ambient temperature is below approx. -5 °C (23 °F) or above approx. 30 °C (86 °F). • • The windscreen's electric heating is activated. • The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the set values. • • The car is in reverse. • The driver is making large steering wheel movements. The road is very steep. In the event of heavy braking (even without the ABS system having been activated). Many starts during a short period of time have activated the starter motor's thermal protection. The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) after starting. • When driving at high altitudes when the engine has not reached operating temperature. • • Driving with start/stop function (p. 445) Conditions for the Start/Stop function (p. 447) The bonnet is opened. The engine does not auto-stop the drive mode is changed to Eco or Comfort Related information • • The gear selector is in M (±) position. If traffic conditions allow it (for example in a traffic jam). The engine does not auto-start In the following cases the engine does not auto-start after having auto-stopped: • The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is in P position and the driver's door is open - a normal start must take place. }} 447 STARTING AND DRIVING || The engine auto-starts without the brake pedal having been released In the following cases, the engine auto-starts even if the driver does not take his/her foot off the brake pedal: • High humidity in the passenger compartment forms misting on the windows. • The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the set values. • • • Repeated pumping of the brake pedal. • The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with the gear selector in D or N position. • The gear selector is moved from D to R or M (±) position. • The driver's door is opened with the gear selector in D position - a "ping" sound and text message indicate that the ignition is on. The bonnet is opened. The car starts to roll or increase speed slightly if the car auto-stopped without being completely stationary. WARNING Do not open the bonnet when the engine has auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally before lifting up the bonnet. 448 Related information • • • Start/stop function (p. 445) Driving with start/stop function (p. 445) Deactivating the start/stop function (p. 447) STARTING AND DRIVING Level control* and shock absorption Level control and shock absorption are regulated automatically in the car. Shock absorption (Four-C) On a car equipped with Four-C the shock absorption is adapted according to the drive mode selected and the speed of the car. Shock absorption is normally set for optimum comfort and is regulated continuously depending on the road surface, the car's acceleration, braking and cornering. Symbols and messages in driver display Symbol Message Specification Suspension The active suspension's performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use. If this message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a workshopA. Temporarily reduced performance A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • Settings for level control* (p. 450) Drive modes* (p. 440) * Option/accessory. 449 STARTING AND DRIVING Settings for level control* Low speed control Switch off the level control when the car is to be jacked up in order to prevent problems with automatic regulation. The low speed control function (LSC14) facilitates and improves traction for driving offroad and on slippery surfaces, such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer on a launch ramp. Settings in the centre display Related information • Level control* and shock absorption (p. 449) • Recommendations for loading (p. 588) The function is activated together with hill descent control, (HDC15) which means that speed down steep hills can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, reducing the need to use the brake pedal. The system facilitates a low and even speed while driving on steep downhill gradients. 450 When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response are changed. NOTE In a car with drive mode control*, the function is included in the Off Road drive mode. The function is adapted for off-road driving and driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph). With low-speed control, low gears and allwheel drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheelspin and provides better traction on all wheels. The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order to facilitate traction and speed control at low speed. 14 15 NOTE The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads. NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. Related information • Activating and deactivating low-speed driving using a function button (p. 451) • • • Changing drive mode* (p. 442) Hill descent control (p. 451) All-wheel drive (p. 440) Low Speed Control Hill Descent Control * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving using a function button There is a function button for low-speed driving with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view unless the car was equipped with drive mode control in the tunnel console. Select low-speed driving in the centre display function view – Press the Hill Descent Control button to activate or deactivate the function. Related information • • Low speed control (p. 450) Changing drive mode* (p. 442) Hill descent control Hill descent control (HDC16) is a low speed function with enhanced engine braking. The function makes it possible to increase or reduce the car's speed on steep downhill gradients using only the accelerator pedal, without using the foot brake. In a car with drive mode control*, the function is included in the Off Road drive mode. Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driving at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but can instead focus on steering. WARNING HDC does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid. > An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. This function is disabled automatically when the engine is switched off. NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. 16 Hill Descent Control The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely. Function Hill descent control allows the car to roll at inching speed both forward and backward, assisted by the brake system. The speed can be increased by using the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is then released the car slows back down to crawling speed, }} * Option/accessory. 451 STARTING AND DRIVING || regardless of the gradient of the hill and without the need for the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are switched on when the function is operating. NOTE When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response are changed. The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed, or stop the car at any time by using the foot brake. NOTE The function is activated together with low speed control (LSC17) which facilitates driving and improves traction for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces. The systems are designed for use at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph). The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads. NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. Points to remember when driving with HDC • • • If the function is disabled while driving on a steep downhill gradient, the braking effect will gradually decrease. HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear changing. It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or higher with manual gear changing. Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button There is a function button for hill descent control with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view unless the car was equipped with drive mode control in the tunnel console. Selecting hill descent control in the centre display function view Hill descent control only works at low speeds. – Press the Hill Descent Control button to activate or deactivate the function. Related information • Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button (p. 452) • • • Changing drive mode* (p. 442) Low speed control (p. 450) All-wheel drive (p. 440) > An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. This function is disabled automatically when the engine is switched off. NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. 17 452 Low Speed Control * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Related information • • Hill descent control (p. 451) Changing drive mode* (p. 442) Economical driving Drive economically and in a more eco-friendly way by driving gently and anticipating situations. Adapt your driving style and speed to the prevailing situation. Note the following: • For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco drive mode. • Use the Eco Coast freewheel function in Eco drive mode – engine braking ceases, meaning that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel for longer distances. • When driving with manual gear changing – drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and road – lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption. Use the gear shift indicator. • Drive at a steady speed and keep a good distance to other vehicles and objects to minimise braking. • High speed results in increased fuel consumption - the wind resistance increases with speed. • Trip computer indication for instantaneous fuel consumption can be helpful for driving more economically. • Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive with a normal load right after starting – a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one. • If possible, avoid using the car for driving short distances. The engine does not have time to reach normal operating temperature, which contributes to increased fuel consumption. • Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users. • Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results. • Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a retailer. • Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the consumption. • A roof load and space box increase wind resistance, leading to higher consumption - remove the load carriers when not in use. • Avoid driving with open windows. WARNING Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo. }} * Option/accessory. 453 STARTING AND DRIVING || Related information • • • Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 30) Drive mode Eco (p. 443) Checking tyre pressure (p. 556) Preparations for a long trip Before a driving holiday or some other type of long journey, it is important to check the car's functions and equipment particularly carefully. Check that • the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal • • there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid) • • • • • • • Economical driving (p. 453) Settings for car modem* (p. 530) Recommendations for loading (p. 588) Driving with a trailer (p. 476) Pilot Assist* (p. 313) Speed limiter (p. 294) Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 572) braking effect on braking works as intended • all lamps are working - adjust headlamp level if the car is heavily laden • the tyres have sufficient tread depth and pressure. Change to winter tyres when driving to areas where there is a risk of snowy or icy road surfaces • • • starter battery charging is good the wiper blades are in good condition a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are located in the car - legally required in certain countries Related information • • • • 454 Checking tyre pressure (p. 556) Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 670) Filling washer fluid (p. 653) Winter driving (p. 455) * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Winter driving Slippery driving conditions Driving in water For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks of the car in order to ensure that it can be driven safely. Check the following in particular before the cold season: To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice. Wading means the car being driven through water, e.g. on a flooded road. Driving in water must be performed with great caution. The car can be driven through water to a maximum depth of 30 cm (11 inches) at no more than walking speed. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water. • The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost down to approx. -35°C (-31°F). To avoid health risks, different types of glycol must not be mixed. • The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation. • Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. IMPORTANT Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather. • • The condition of the starter battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the starter battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold. Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir. NOTE The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries. Winter tyres (p. 570) During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function. Snow chains (p. 571) • If necessary, clean the contacts for the electric heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud. • Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions. Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts. Related information • • • • • • • Braking on gritted roads (p. 425) Braking on wet roads (p. 425) Filling washer fluid (p. 653) Starter battery (p. 615) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 651) • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 650) • • Topping up coolant (p. 612) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 666) }} 455 STARTING AND DRIVING || IMPORTANT • Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter. • If water enters the transmission, it reduces the lubricating ability of the oil, which shortens the service life of related systems. • Damage to any component, engine, transmission, turbocharger, differential or its internal components caused by flooding, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is not covered by the warranty. • In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown. Opening and closing the fuel filler flap The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap to be opened18. In the driver display, the arrow next to the tank symbol indicates which side of the car the fuel filler flap is located. 1. 18 456 Refuelling the car at a petrol station Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press on the rear of the flap. 2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap with a gentle press. Related information • • Filling fuel (p. 456) Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 465) Related information • • Filling fuel The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler system. Recovery (p. 483) Low speed control (p. 450) It is important to feed the pump nozzle past the filler pipe's two openable hatches before starting to fuel the car. Fuelling instruction: 1. Switch off the car and open the fuel filler flap. Only locking and unlocking with the remote control key, keyless* or via Volvo On Call affects the status of the fuel filler flap. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING 2. 4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out the first time. > The tank is full. NOTE Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather. Topping up fuel from a fuel can Choose fuel that is approved for use in the car in accordance with the identifier19 on the inside of the fuel filler flap. See information on approved fuels and the identifier in the sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel" respectively. 3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps before refuelling is started. 19 When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel located in the foam block under the floor hatch in the cargo area. 1. Open the fuel filler flap. 2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps before filling can be started. Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Related information • • • • Opening and closing the fuel filler flap (p. 456) Petrol (p. 458) Diesel (p. 460) Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 461) Applicable to cars with fuel-driven auxiliary heater* Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is in a filling station area. The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by 12 October 2018 at the latest. * Option/accessory. 457 STARTING AND DRIVING Handling of fuel IMPORTANT Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect engine power and fuel consumption. Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is applicable to all engines. WARNING Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes. Related information In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. • • • Petrol (p. 458) Petrol It is important to use the correct fuel during refuelling. Petrol is available with different octane ratings that are adapted for different types of driving. Only use petrol from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Identifier for petrol Diesel (p. 460) Handling AdBlue® (p. 464) Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed. Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap. WARNING Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel. Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury. 458 The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by 12 October 2018 at the latest. These are the identifiers that apply for current standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine: STARTING AND DRIVING E5 is a petrol with maximum 2.7% oxygen and maximum 5 volume % ethanol. When driving in temperatures above +38 °C (100 °F), fuel with the highest octane rating is recommended for adapted performance and fuel economy. IMPORTANT E10 is a petrol with maximum 3.7% oxygen and maximum 10 volume % ethanol. • Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter. • Fuel containing metallic additives must not be used. • Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo. IMPORTANT Related information • Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by volume ethanol is permitted. • EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by volume ethanol) is approved for use. • Ethanol higher than E10 (max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted. • • • • Octane rating • • • RON 95 can be used for normal driving. RON 98 is recommended for good power and low fuel consumption. An octane rating lower than RON 95 must not be used. Handling of fuel (p. 458) Filling fuel (p. 456) Petrol particle filter (p. 459) Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 670) Petrol particle filter20 Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for more efficient emission control. Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the petrol particle filter during normal driving. In normal driving conditions, passive regeneration takes place, which leads to the particles being oxidised and burned away. The filter is emptied in this way. If the car is driven at low speed or with repeated cold starts in low outside temperature, active regeneration may be necessary. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes. Fuel consumption may temporarily increase during regeneration. Use the parking heater in cold weather - the engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly. When driving short distances at low speeds in a petrol car The capacity of the emissions system is affected by how the car is driven. Driving varying distances and at different speeds is important in order to achieve performance that is as energy-efficient as possible. Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold climates) frequently, where the engine does not reach normal operating temperature, can lead to problems that can eventually }} 459 STARTING AND DRIVING || cause a malfunction and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regularly drive at higher speeds to allow the emissions system to regenerate. • The car should be driven on A-roads at speeds in excess of 70 km/h (44 mph) for at least 20 minutes between each refuelling. Related information • Petrol (p. 458) Diesel It is important to use the correct fuel during refuelling. Diesel is available in different qualities adapted to different conditions. Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard. Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur and metals. Identifier lowing identifiers may be used in cars with diesel engine: B7 is diesel with maximum 7 volume % fatty acid methyl ester (FAME). At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C (32 °F)) a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to starting problems. The fuel qualities that are sold must be adapted for season and climate zone, but for extreme weather conditions, old fuel or moving between climate zones, paraffin precipitate may occur. The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by 12 October 2018 at the latest. This is the identifier that applies for current standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the fol20 460 Applicable to certain variants. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water. STARTING AND DRIVING IMPORTANT Diesel fuel must: • fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435 standards • have a sulphur content not exceeding 10 mg/kg • have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME21 (B7). Empty tank and diesel engine Diesel particulate filter (p. 462) Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 463) Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 670) Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Before starting the car after the fuel tank has been filled with diesel - proceed as follows: 1. The remote control key must be inside the car. Special additives 2. Set the car in ignition position II – turn the ignition dial clockwise without depressing the brake pedal Or clutch pedal and hold the dial in position for approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob, which automatically returns to its starting position. Marine diesel fuel 3. Wait approx. one minute. Heating oil 4. Start the engine. IMPORTANT Diesel type fuels that must not be used: • • • • • • • FAME22 and vegetable oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty. NOTE Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage: • Stop the car on as flat/level ground as possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply. Related information • • • 21 22 Handling of fuel (p. 458) Filling fuel (p. 456) Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 461) Fatty Acid Methyl Ester Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted. }} 461 STARTING AND DRIVING || Points to remember when filling with a fuel can When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area. Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps before filling can be started. Related information • • • Filling fuel (p. 456) Diesel particulate filter Diesel cars are fitted with particle filters for more efficient emission control. Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the diesel particle filter during normal driving. When these conditions have been met, regeneration starts to burn off the particles and empty the filter. To start regeneration, the engine must have reached normal operating temperature. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes. Diesel (p. 460) NOTE Tool kit (p. 563) The following may arise during regeneration: • a smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily • fuel consumption may increase temporarily • a smell of burning may arise. Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly. 462 IMPORTANT If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced. When driving short distances at low speeds in a diesel car The capacity of the emissions system is affected by how the car is driven. Driving varying distances and at different speeds is important in order to achieve performance that is as energy-efficient as possible. Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold climates) frequently, where the engine does not reach normal operating temperature, can lead to problems that can eventually cause a malfunction and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regularly drive at higher speeds to allow the emissions system to regenerate. • The car should be driven on A-roads at speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at least 20 minutes between each refuelling. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Related information • • • Diesel (p. 460) Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 463) Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 670) Emission control with AdBlue®23 SCR24 AdBlue is an additive used in the system to reduce emissions of noxious substances from a diesel engine. In the SCR system, the AdBlue and the nitrous oxide exhaust gas substance are converted to nitrogen and water vapour, which significantly reduces the emissions of harmful nitrous oxides. AdBlue AdBlue is a colourless liquid consisting of 32.5% urea25 in deionised water and is manufactured in accordance with the ISO 22241 standard. It is specially developed for SCR cleaning technology for diesel engines. AdBlue has its own tank in the car and is topped up via a separate filler pipe behind the fuel filler flap. Consumption depends on driving style, outside temperature and the operating temperature of the system. Conditions for driving with AdBlue AdBlue. If something is wrong, a message is shown in the driver display. IMPORTANT AdBlue is required for the function of the SCR system and legal emissions compliance. It is illegal to modify or manipulate the AdBlue supply system in any way so that no AdBlue reagent is consumed when it is required for legal exhaust emissions compliance. Any such tampering may be a criminal offence which may lead to legal prosecution actions. It is not permitted to operate the car with an empty AdBlue tank, since it will no longer be compliant with the legal requirements for exhaust emissions. Therefore, the car is equipped with a warning system to inform when AdBlue refilling is required. When the fill level in the AdBlue tank is getting low, warnings are displayed to inform that AdBlue refilling is required. There must always be AdBlue of the correct quality in the tank before the car can be started. The SCR system is very sensitive to contaminants. The emission control system continuously monitors the tank level, quality and dosage of 23 24 25 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA) Selective Catalytic Reduction CO(NH2)2 }} 463 STARTING AND DRIVING || Related information Handling AdBlue®26 • • AdBlue consists primarily of water (approx. 67.5% water and 32.5% urea). The fluid is not flammable but should be handled with care since it can irritate the eyes and skin. AdBlue must be stored in tightly sealing original packaging at a temperature above -11 °C (12 °F) and below 30 °C (86 °F). The fluid must not be stored in direct sunlight. Points to remember when handling AdBlue freezes at -11 °C (12 °F) but can be used again when the solution has thawed. • Handling AdBlue® (p. 464) Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 465) Symbols and messages for AdBlue® (p. 467) Avoid inhaling vapour as well as contact with skin and eyes. Preferably use gloves that prevent irritation to sensitive skin when handling the fluid. WARNING Action for first aid: • • For inhalation - get fresh air. • For contact with the eyes - rinse immediately with a lot of water. • For ingestion - rinse the mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. For skin contact - wash the skin with soap and water. Seek medical attention if the discomfort remains or if a large quantity has been ingested. Action in the event of a spill AdBlue spilled on the ground, the car or painted surfaces must be rinsed thoroughly with water. Avoid releasing into the drainage system. 26 464 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA) Storage Related information • Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 465) • Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 463) STARTING AND DRIVING Checking and filling with AdBlue®27 Check the AdBlue level regularly and top up if the message for low AdBlue level is shown in the driver display. AdBlue consumption depends on driving style, which is why filling may be necessary between the normal service intervals. If the AdBlue tank is allowed to drain completely then it will no longer be possible to start the car. Checking AdBlue level 2. 1. Press Status to show the AdBlue level. Open the Car Status app in the app view. NOTE Never run the AdBlue tank dry. Fill the tank in good time before it is empty. If the tank is run dry, it will not be possible to start the engine after it is switched off – not the regular way or using aids. The only way to be able to restart after driving the tank empty is to refill AdBlue of specified quality, with the minimum being the quantity shown in the driver display. Graphic for AdBlue level in the centre display. Each cursor represents approx. 25% of a full tank. When less than 25 % of the tank remains available, the colour of the remaining cursor changes to amber, and at less than 10 % it turns red. 27 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA) }} 465 STARTING AND DRIVING || Filling 3. Fill with AdBlue of the correct quality28. When the AdBlue level starts to become low, a symbol illuminates in the driver display and the AdBlue level low message is shown. 1. Do not overfill the tank. The amount of AdBlue that can be filled is shown in the app Car Status. WARNING When filling from the AdBlue pump at a filling station, it is advisable to use the pump adapted for passenger cars. The AdBlue pump for heavy vehicles can also be used. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press on the rear of the flap. 2. IMPORTANT Wipe away any spilled AdBlue. Exercise caution to prevent AdBlue from coming into contact with the car's paintwork. If it does, rinse with plenty of water since the fluid can affect the paintwork. Open the blue cover for the smaller filler pipe intended for AdBlue. Related information • • • 28 466 ISO 22241 Handling AdBlue® (p. 464) Symbols and messages for AdBlue® (p. 467) Tank capacity for AdBlue® (p. 668) STARTING AND DRIVING Symbols and messages for AdBlue®29 The emission control system continuously monitors the level, quality and dosage of AdBlue. If something is wrong, a message is shown in the driver display. Symbol Message Specification AdBlue level low The AdBlue level is low and the tank needs to be topped up. AdBlue dosing The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function. and AdBlue quality 29 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA) }} 467 STARTING AND DRIVING || Symbol Message Specification Refill AdBlue The AdBlue level is critically low and the tank needs to be topped up immediately. Engine start prohibited The car cannot be started before AdBlue has been filled. Fill with AdBlue to the amount specified in the driver display, or contact a workshopA. and e.g.: Fill a minimum of 4.5 litres of AdBlue Note that the car must be level for the level gauge to be able to correctly register the amount of AdBlue filled. When starting after filling AdBlue, follow the instructions regarding empty tank and diesel engine. Engine start prohibited Service of AdBlue system needed to allow restart A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • • • 468 Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 465) Handling AdBlue® (p. 464) Book service and repair (p. 603) Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 461) The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function. STARTING AND DRIVING Overheating in the engine and drive system Under certain conditions, e.g. hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat – in particular with a heavy load. • In the event of overheating, the engine's power may be limited temporarily. • Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates. • If the temperature in the engine's cooling system becomes too high then a warning symbol is illuminated and the driver display shows the message Engine temperature High temperature Stop safely. Stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes and cool down. • • If the message Engine temperature High temperature Turn off engine or Engine coolant Level low, turn off engine is shown, stop the car and switch off the engine. In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an alternative gear shift program will be selected. In addition, a built-in protection function is activated that, amongst other things, illuminates a warning symbol and the driver display shows the message Transmission warm Reduce speed to lower temperature or Transmission hot Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the recommendation given, reduce speed or stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to enable the gearbox to cool down. • If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily. • Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive. Related information • • • • Topping up coolant (p. 612) Driving with a trailer (p. 476) Preparations for a long trip (p. 454) Gear shift indicator (p. 439) NOTE It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off. Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification High engine temperature. Follow the recommendation given. Low level, coolant. Follow the recommendation given. Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled. Follow the recommendation given. 469 STARTING AND DRIVING Overloading the starter battery The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition position II when the car is switched off. Instead, use ignition position I which uses less power. Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the car is switched off. Examples of such functions are: • • • • 470 3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other. 4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1). IMPORTANT Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment. headlamps windscreen wiper 5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover (2). audio system (high volume). In which case, charge the starter battery by starting the car and then running it for at least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary. Related information • • If the starter battery is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery. ventilation fan If the starter battery voltage is low, a message is shown in the driver display. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system. – Using jump starting with another battery Starter battery (p. 615) Ignition positions (p. 420) Attachment points for the jump leads. The appearance in the engine compartment may vary depending on car model and equipment level. 6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive jump-starting point (2). When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage: 7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3). 1. 8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp onto the car's negative jump-starting point (4). Set the car's electrical system in ignition position 0. 2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V. 9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting attempt. STARTING AND DRIVING 10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm. 11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery. WARNING High voltage can be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention. Do not touch anything on the batteries that is not clearly described in the owner's manual. 12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red. Make sure that none of the black jump lead's clamps comes into contact with the car's positive jump-starting point/donor battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead. • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode. • 48 V support battery must never be used for jump-starting. • • External electrical equipment must not be connected to the 48 V battery under any circumstances. Do not connect the jump leads to any fuel system component or any moving part. Be careful of hot engine parts. • • The 48 V battery may only be serviced and replaced by a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. • If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately. • Never smoke near the battery. IMPORTANT Do not touch the connections between cable and car during the starting attempt. There is a risk of sparks forming. WARNING 471 STARTING AND DRIVING || NOTE If the starter battery has been discharged so much that the car has no normal electrical functions and the engine is then jumpstarted with an external battery or a battery charger, the Start/stop function may continue to be activated. If the Start/stop function then auto-stops the engine shortly afterwards, there is a great risk that engine auto-start will fail due to insufficient battery capacity, because the battery has not had the time to recharge. If the car has been jump-started, or if there is insufficient time to charge the battery with a battery charger, the Start/stop function is temporarily deactivated until the battery has been recharged by the car. In an outside temperature of approx. +15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a lower outside temperature, the charging time may increase to 3–4 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery using an external battery charger. Related information • • • • 472 • Support battery (p. 618) Towbar* The car can be equipped with a towbar that makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind the car. There may be different towbar variants available for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information. IMPORTANT When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery. IMPORTANT The towball needs regular cleaning and lubrication with grease in order to prevent wear. NOTE When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated. This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack that is clamped in around the towball. Starting the car (p. 418) Ignition positions (p. 420) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 196) Selecting ignition mode (p. 421) NOTE If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is no rear mounting for a towing eye. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Related information Specifications for towbar* Dimensions, mounting points in mm (inches) • Extendable and retractable towbar* (p. 474) • • • Driving with a trailer (p. 476) A 1119,24 (44,1) Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 479) B 84,5 (3,3) Specifications for towbar* (p. 473) C 875 (34,4) D 437,5 (17,2) E See the image above F 273,7 (10,8) G Ball centre Dimensions and mounting points for towbar. Related information • • Towbar* (p. 472) Towing capacity and towball load (p. 662) * Option/accessory. 473 STARTING AND DRIVING Extendable and retractable towbar* 1. 2. Press and release the button – extension might not start if the button is pressed for too long. The retractable tow hook is easy to retract or extend as required. In the retracted position, the towbar is completely concealed. WARNING Follow the instructions for retracting and extending the towbar carefully. WARNING Do not press the extend/retract button if a trailer is attached to the towbar. Extending the towbar WARNING Open the tailgate. A button for extending/ retracting the towbar is located on the right-hand side at the rear of the cargo area. An indicator lamp in the button must illuminate with a constant orange glow for the extension function to be active. > The towbar extends out and down in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp flashes orange. The tow hook is ready to continue moving to the locked position. Avoid standing close to the bumper in the centre behind the car when extending the towing hitch. 474 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING 3. NOTE 2. Power save mode activates after a while and the indicator lamp goes out. The system is reactivated by closing and opening the tailgate. This applies when retracting or extending the towbar. If the car detects a connected trailer electrically, the indicator lamp stops illuminating with a constant glow. Move the towbar to its end position, where it is secured and locked in place the indicator lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow. > The towbar is ready for use. IMPORTANT Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in the electrical socket when retracting the towbar. NOTE The towbar must finish the extension procedure before it can then be moved to locked position. This procedure may take several seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked position, wait a few seconds and try again. WARNING Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket. Lock the towbar by moving it back to its retracted position, where it is locked. > The indicator lamp will now illuminate with a constant glow if the towbar is correctly retracted. Retracting the towbar 1. Open the tailgate. Press and release the button on the right-hand side at the rear of the cargo area - retraction might not start if the button is pressed for too long. > The towbar automatically lowers in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp in the button flashes orange. Related information • • Driving with a trailer (p. 476) Towbar* (p. 472) * Option/accessory. 475 STARTING AND DRIVING Driving with a trailer When driving with a trailer, there are a number of points that are important to think about regarding the towbar, the trailer and how the load is positioned in the trailer. Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. • Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights. • Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents. • The maximum indicated trailer weight only applies to heights up to 1000 metres above sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the engine output and the vehicle's climbing ability are reduced due to the reduced air density, and the maximum trailer load must therefore be reduced. The weight of the car and trailer must be decreased by 10% for each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) or part thereof. The car is supplied with the necessary equipment for towing a trailer. • The car's towbar must be of an approved type. • Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towbar complies with the specified maximum towball load. Towball load is calculated as part of the car's payload. • Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. • The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer. • Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km (620 miles). • 476 The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear when shifting manually and adjust your speed. • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%. NOTE Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes, in combination with poorer fuel quality than recommended, are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption. Trailer connector An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground. IMPORTANT When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery. Trailer weights WARNING Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking. NOTE The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow. Level control* The car's system for level control endeavours to maintain a constant height regardless of load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING When driving in hilly terrain and hot climates Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk of overheating when towing a trailer. If the engine and drive system overheats, a warning symbol comes on in the driver display and a message is displayed. Related information • • • • Trailer stability assist* (p. 477) Checking trailer lamps (p. 478) Towing capacity and towball load (p. 662) Overheating in the engine and drive system (p. 469) The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear depending on load and engine speed. • Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 666) Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine speed. • Extendable and retractable towbar* (p. 474) Parking on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully. Trailer stability assist* The function of trailer stability assist (TSA30) is to stabilise cars towing trailers in situations where they begin snaking. The function is included in the stability system ESC31. Reasons for snaking The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. However, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back. In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.: • Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind. • Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole. 4. Release the brake pedal. • Sweeping steering wheel movements. Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill. If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example, end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway. 2. Activate the parking brake. 3. Select gear position P. Starting on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully. 2. Select gear position D. 3. Releasing the parking brake. 4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off. Trailer stability assist function The trailer stability assist function continually monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This }} * Option/accessory. 477 STARTING AND DRIVING || serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car. If snaking is not eliminated the first time that trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is stable once again, the system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car. NOTE The stability function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode by deactivating ESC via the menu system in the centre display. Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation the system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver causing the snaking. 30 31 478 Trailer Stability Assist Electronic Stability Control When Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) is operating, the ESC symbol flashes in the driver display. Related information • • Driving with a trailer (p. 476) Electronic stability control (p. 285) Checking trailer lamps When connecting a trailer - check that all the trailer lamps work before departure. Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display shows a symbol and a message. Other lights on the trailer must be checked manually by the driver before setting off. Symbol Message • Trailer turn indicator Right turn indicator malfunction • Trailer turn indicator Left turn indicator malfunction • Trailer brake light Malfunction If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is broken, the driver display symbol for direction indicators will also flash more quickly than normal. STARTING AND DRIVING Rear fog lamp on trailer When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp may not light up on the car. In such cases, the rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer. Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear fog lamp to travel safely. Checking trailer lamps* Automatic checking After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possible to check that the trailer lamps are working via an automatic lamp activation. The function helps the driver check that the trailer lamps are working before starting off. The car must be switched off to perform the check. 1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar, the Automatic Trailer Lamp Check message is shown in the driver display. 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button. > The lamp check starts. 3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality. > All trailer lamps start to flash - then the lamps are switched on one at a time. 5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash again. > The check is complete. Switching off automatic checking The automatic checking function can be switched off in the centre display. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting. 3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp Check. Manual checking If the automatic checking is switched off then it is possible to start the check manually. 1. When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks that Volvo has developed are recommended. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers. Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with the bicycle rack. • Bicycle rack including load must weigh a maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds). • The bicycle rack may be designed for a maximum of three bicycles. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting. 3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check. > The lamp check starts. Exit the car to check lamp functionality. Related information • Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* Driving with a trailer (p. 476) WARNING Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause damage to the towbar and car. The bicycle rack can loosen from the towbar if it • • is incorrectly fitted on the towball • is used for carrying something other than bicycles. is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's instructions for maximum load weight 4. Visually check that all lamps available on the trailer are operational. }} * Option/accessory. 479 STARTING AND DRIVING || The car's driving characteristics are affected when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar. For example, due to: • • • • increased weight reduced acceleration capacity reduced ground clearance sumption. It may also lead to an increased load on the towbar. Related information • Towbar* (p. 472) Towing During towing, the car is towed by another vehicle by means of a towline. Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before the towing begins. Preparations and towing changed braking capacity. Recommendations for loading bicycles on the bicycle rack The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the towball, the greater the load on the towbar. IMPORTANT Cars with the small gear lever are unable to shift out of P unless the engine is running. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance when towing, or summon professional help for recovery. Load according to the following recommendations: 480 • Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest to the car. • Keep the load symmetrical and as close to the centre of the car as possible, e.g. by loading the bicycles facing alternately if several bicycles are loaded. • Remove loose objects from the bicycle for transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery, child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to reduce the wind resistance, which affects fuel consumption. • Do not use protective covers on the bicycles. This may affect manoeuvrability, impair visibility and increase fuel con- IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward. • Do not tow cars with automatic transmission at speeds higher than 80 km/h (50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80 km (50 miles). * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING • Check that the steering lock is unlocked before towing. • Ignition position II must be active - in ignition position I all airbags are deactivated. • Always keep the remote control key in the car when it is being towed. WARNING The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off - the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal. 1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers. 5. Move the gear selector to neutral position and release the parking brake. If the battery voltage is too low, the parking brake cannot be disengaged. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low. > The towing vehicle can now start towing. Using jump starting with another battery (p. 470) • • Selecting ignition mode (p. 421) Gearbox (p. 431) 6. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking. 7. Be prepared to brake to stop. Jump starting Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged and the engine does not start. 2. Secure the towline in the towing eye. IMPORTANT 3. Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the car. 4. Put the car in the ignition position II - turn the start knob clockwise without pressing the brake pedal or clutch pedal for cars with manual gearbox, and hold the start knob for approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob, which automatically returns to its starting position. • The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine. Related information • • • Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 482) Hazard warning flashers (p. 158) Recovery (p. 483) 481 STARTING AND DRIVING Fitting and removing the towing eye Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear. NOTE If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is no rear mounting for a towing eye. Fitting the towing eye Front: Remove the cover - press on the marking with a finger. > The cover pivots around its centre line and can then be removed. Take out the towing eye from the foam block under the floor in the cargo area. 482 Rear: Remove the cover – press on the marking with a finger while you fold out the opposite side/corner. > The cover pivots around its centre line and can then be removed. STARTING AND DRIVING may be damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing eye. 4. Screw in the towing eye until it reaches its end stop. • If necessary, raise the car by using the recovery vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the towing eye. WARNING No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform. IMPORTANT Screw the eye in firmly. For example, thread through the wheel bolt wrench* and use it as a lever. The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. IMPORTANT It is important that the towing eye is firmly screwed into place - right in until it stops. Removing the towing eye – Points to remember before using the towing eye • The towing eye may be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible. • If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car Unscrew and remove the towing eye after use and return it to its place in the foam block. Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper. Related information • • • Towing (p. 480) Recovery For recovery, the car is taken away with the help of another vehicle. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. The towing eye can be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting device. WARNING No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform. IMPORTANT The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. Recovery (p. 483) Tool kit (p. 563) }} * Option/accessory. 483 STARTING AND DRIVING || IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward. Related information • Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 482) HomeLink®*32 HomeLink®33 is a programmable remote control, integrated in the car's electrical system, which can remotely control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, outdoor and indoor lighting) and thereby replace the remote controls for them. General HomeLink® is supplied built-in to the interior rearview mirror. The HomeLink® panel consists of three programmable buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror glass. For more information about HomeLink®, visit www.HomeLink.com or call 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277)34. Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. when changing to another car or for use in another vehicle). It is also recommended that the programming for the buttons is deleted when the car is sold. Related information • • • Using HomeLink®* (p. 487) Programming HomeLink®* (p. 485) Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 487) The figure is schematic - the version may vary. Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Indicator lamp 32 33 34 484 Applies to certain markets. HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Programming HomeLink®*35 Follow these instructions to program HomeLink®, reset all programming or reprogram individual buttons. NOTE In certain vehicles the ignition must be switched on or in "accessory position" before HomeLink® can be programmed or used. If possible, fit new batteries in the remote control that shall be replaced by HomeLink® for faster programming and improved transmission of the radio signal. The HomeLink® buttons should be reset before programming. WARNING 1. Aim the remote control towards the HomeLink® button to be programmed and hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches) from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink®. Note: The ability of some remote controls to program HomeLink® is improved at a distance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12 inches). Bear this in mind if problems occur with the programming. 2. Press and hold depressed both the button on the remote control and the button to be reprogrammed on HomeLink®. 3. Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has switched from flashing slowly (approx. once per second) to either flashing quickly (approx. 10 times per second) or illuminating with a constant glow. > If the indicator lamp illuminates with a constant glow: Indication that the programming has finished. Press the programmed button twice to activate. If the indicator lamp flashes quickly: The device to be programmed to HomeLink® may have a security function that requires extra steps. Test by pressing the programmed button twice to see whether the programming is working. Otherwise, continue with the following steps. While programming HomeLink®, the garage door or gate being programmed may activate. For this reason, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while programming is in progress. The car should be outside the garage while a garage door opener is being programmed. 35 Applies to certain markets. }} * Option/accessory. 485 STARTING AND DRIVING || call 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277)37. Reprogramming individual buttons To reprogram an individual proceed as follows: 1. 4. Locate programming button36 on the receiver for the garage door or similar. It is normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. 5. Depress and release the receiver's programming button once. The programming must be completed within 30 seconds of the button being depressed. 6. Press and release the button on HomeLink® that you want to program. Repeat the sequence of pressing/holding/ releasing a second time and, depending on the receiver model, even a third time. > Programming is now be complete and the garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed button is depressed. In the event of programming problems, contact HomeLink® at www.HomeLink.com, or 36 37 486 HomeLink® button, Related information • • • Using HomeLink®* (p. 487) HomeLink®* (p. 484) Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 487) Press the desired button and hold it depressed for approx. 20 seconds. 2. Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink® starts to flash slowly, programming can continue as normal. Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is not programmed with a new unit, it will resume the previously saved programming. Resetting the HomeLink® buttons It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink® buttons at the same time, not each button individually. Individual buttons can only be reprogrammed. – Press and hold depressed the outer buttons (1 and 3) on HomeLink® for approx. 10 seconds. > When the indicator lamp changes over from a constant glow to starting to flash, the buttons are reset and ready to be reprogrammed. Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers. Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Using HomeLink®*38 When is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls. Depress the programmed button. The garage door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated (may take a few seconds). If the button is depressed for more than 20 seconds then the reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp illuminates or flashes when the button has been depressed. Naturally the original remote controls can still be used in parallel with HomeLink® if required. NOTE When the ignition has been switched off, HomeLink® works for at least 7 minutes. NOTE HomeLink® cannot be used if the car is locked and the alarm is armed* from the outside. 38 39 Type approval for HomeLink®*39 WARNING HomeLink® • • If HomeLink® is used to control a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is near the door or gate while it is in motion. Do not use HomeLink® for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. Related information • • • HomeLink®* (p. 484) Programming HomeLink®* (p. 485) Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 487) Type approval for EU Gentex Corporation hereby declares that HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU. Wavelength within which the radio equipment functions: • • • • • 433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P. 868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P. 868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P. 869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P. 869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P. Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA For more information, search support information on type approval at www.volvocars.com. Related information • HomeLink®* (p. 484) Applies to certain markets. Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. 487 STARTING AND DRIVING Compass* The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction40 in which the front of the car is pointing. Activating and deactivating the compass* The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction41 in which the front of the car is pointing. The compass is activated automatically when the car is started. To deactivate/activate the compass manually: – Rearview mirror with compass. Eight different compass directions are shown by their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west). Depress the button on the underside of the rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip. > If the compass is deactivated when the car is switched off, it will not be activated the next time the car is started. In this case, the compass needs to be activated manually. Related information • • Compass* (p. 488) Calibrating the compass* (p. 488) Calibrating the compass* The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass42 should be calibrated if the car is moved between several magnetic zones. 1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines. 2. Start the car and switch off all electrical equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and ensure that all doors are closed. NOTE Calibration may fail or not start at all if electrical equipment is not switched off. 3. Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 3 seconds (use a paper clip, for example). The number for the current magnetic zone is shown. Related information • Activating and deactivating the compass* (p. 488) • Calibrating the compass* (p. 488) 40 41 42 488 A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only. A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only. A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING 7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the character C is shown in the display when the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with point 6 above with the heated windscreen activated. 8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. Related information • • Magnetic zones. Compass* (p. 488) Activating and deactivating the compass* (p. 488) 4. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the compass. 5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the character C is shown. 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration. * Option/accessory. 489 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sound, media and Internet Related information The audio and media system consists of media player and radio. You can also connect a phone via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play music wirelessly in the car. When the car is connected to the Internet you can also use apps for media playback. • • • • • • • • • Overview of audio and media Control the functions with your voice, steering wheel keypad or the centre display. The number of speakers and amplifiers depends on which audio system the car is equipped with. Media player (p. 503) Radio (p. 497) Phone (p. 519) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Apps (p. 494) Voice recognition (p. 142) Ignition positions (p. 420) Driver distraction (p. 41) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 601) • License agreement for audio and media (p. 536) • Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 601) Audio settings The sound reproduction quality is preset, but it can be adjusted as well. The volume is normally adjusted with the volume control below the centre display or with the right-hand steering wheel keypad. This applies, for example, during playback of music, radio, ongoing phone calls and active traffic messages. Sound reproduction The sound system is pre-calibrated by means of digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combination of car model and audio system. There is also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the setting of the volume control and vehicle speed. Personal preferences Various settings are available in the top view under Settings Sound depending on the car's audio system. System updating The audio and media system is continuously improved. It is recommended to download system updates when new ones are available. 492 * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins) Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone. • Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer, etc. • Balance – balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/ rear loudspeakers. • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone. Related information • • • • • • Sound experience* (p. 493) Media player (p. 503) Settings for voice recognition (p. 146) Sound experience* Sound experience is an app that provides access to further audio settings. Sound Experience is opened from the app view in the centre display. The following settings can be defined, depending on the audio system fitted to the car: Settings for phone (p. 526) Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins) Sound, media and Internet (p. 492) • Studio – the sound can be adjusted so Internet-connected car* (p. 527) that it can primarily be adapted for Driver, All and Rear. High Performance Pro* (Harman Kardon) • Individual stage – surround sound mode • Equaliser – equalizer setting. • Balance – balance between right/left • Concert hall – reproduces the acoustics loudspeakers and balance between front/ rear loudspeakers. with settings for intensity and enclosure. from Gothenburg's Concert Hall. • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone. High Performance • Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer, etc. • Balance – balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/ rear loudspeakers. • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Recreating the acoustics from Gothenburg Concert Hall. }} * Option/accessory. 493 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || High Performance Pro* (Harman Kardon) • Seat Optimisation – the sound can be adjusted so that it can primarily be adapted for Driver, All and Rear. • Surround – surround sound mode with level settings. • Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer, etc. Apps The app view contains applications (apps) that give access to certain of the car's services. Swipe from right to left1 across the centre display's screen in order to access the app view from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Related information • • Audio settings (p. 492) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market and model) Some basic apps are always available. More apps such as web radio and music services can be downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet. Certain apps are only available for use if the car is connected to the Internet. 1 494 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Start an app by pressing the app in the centre display's app view. All the apps used should be updated to the latest version. Downloading apps New apps can be downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet. NOTE Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services. Related information • • • • • • • • Downloading apps (p. 495) Updating apps (p. 496) Deleting apps (p. 496) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 512) 3. Tap on the row for an app in order to expand in the list and get more information about the app. 4. Select Install in order to start the download and installation of the desired app. > The status of the download and installation is shown while it is in progress. A message is shown if a download cannot be started for the moment. The app will remain in the list and it is possible to try to start a download again. Android Auto* (p. 516) NOTE Internet-connected car* (p. 527) When downloading using a phone, pay extra attention to the data traffic costs. Storage space on hard disk (p. 535) User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 533) 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view. 2. Select New apps in order to open a list of apps that are available but not installed in the car. Cancelling the download – Tap on Abort to cancel a download in progress. Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled. Related information • • • • • • Apps (p. 494) Updating apps (p. 496) Deleting apps (p. 496) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 601) Storage space on hard disk (p. 535) * Option/accessory. 495 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Updating apps The apps can be updated when the car is connected to the Internet. NOTE Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services. NOTE When downloading using a phone, pay extra attention to the data traffic costs. Update some 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view. 2. Select Application updates in order to open a list of all available updates. 3. Locate the desired app and select Install. > Updating is started. Update all 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view. 1. • • • • Apps (p. 494) Downloading apps (p. 495) Deleting apps (p. 496) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 601) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) 2. Select Application updates in order to open a list of all installed apps. 3. Locate the desired app and select Uninstall in order to start the uninstallation of the app. > When the app has been uninstalled, it disappears from the list. Related information • • • • 2. Select Install all. > Updating is started. 496 Open the Download Centre app in the app view. Related information • If an app is being used during an ongoing update, it will be restarted in order for the installation to be completed. Deleting apps Apps can be uninstalled when the car is connected to the Internet. An app that is being used must be closed in order for the uninstallation to be completed. • Apps (p. 494) Downloading apps (p. 495) Updating apps (p. 496) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 601) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Radio AM2 It is possible to listen to the and FM radio frequency bands and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is online, it is also possible to listen to Internet radio. • • • • • • Settings for radio (p. 500) Start radio Digital radio* (p. 502) The radio is started from the centre display app view. 1. Open the required frequency band (e.g. FM) from the app view. RDS radio (p. 502) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) Media player (p. 503) The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display. Related information • • • Start radio (p. 497) Changing radio band and radio station (p. 498) 2. Select a radio station. Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 500) 2 Availability varies depending on model and/or market. }} * Option/accessory. 497 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Related information • • • • • • Radio (p. 497) Searching for radio stations (p. 499) Changing radio band and radio station (p. 498) Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 500) Settings for radio (p. 500) Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) Changing radio band and radio station 2. Select playback from Stations, Favourites, Genres or Ensembles3. There are instructions here for changing the radio band, the list in the radio band and the radio station in the selected list. 3. Tap on the desired station from the list. Changing radio band Swipe to show the app view in the centre display and select the preferred radio band (e.g. FM), or open the driver display's app menu using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel and make your selection from there. Changing lists within the frequency band Favourites - only plays back selected favourite channels. Genres - only plays back channels broadcasting the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop or classical. Changing stations within the selected list – Press on or under the centre display or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. > The highlight moves up or down one place in the selected playlist. You can also change radio station in the selected list via the centre display. Related information • • • • 1. 3 Only 498 Press Library. • • Radio (p. 497) Searching for radio stations (p. 499) Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 500) Settings for radio (p. 500) Application menu in driver display (p. 100) applies to digital radio (DAB*). * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Searching for radio stations Manual tuning Related information • • • The radio automatically compiles a station list of the radio stations within the area that are transmitting the strongest signals. • • The parameters you can search on depend on the frequency band selected: AM4 - station and frequency. • • • FM — station, genre and frequency. 1. Press Library. DAB* - ensembles and stations. . 2. Press > Search view with keyboard is opened. 3. Enter the search terms. > Searching takes place with each input of a character and the search results are shown by category. 4 Availability Radio (p. 497) Start radio (p. 497) Changing radio band and radio station (p. 498) Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) Settings for radio (p. 500) Searching manually makes it possible to find and tune to stations that are not on the automatically compiled list of the strongest stations in the area. On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no longer changes frequency automatically when reception is poor. – Press Manual tuning, pull the control or press or . With a long press, the search jumps to the next available station in the frequency band. It is also possible to use the right keypad on the steering wheel. varies depending on model and/or market. * Option/accessory. 499 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app It is possible to add a radio channel to the Radio favourites app and the favourites list for the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on how to add and remove radio channels can be found below. Radio Favourites The Radio Favourites app shows saved radio channels from all frequency bands. 1. Open the app Radio favourites from the app view. 2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start listening. Adding and removing radio favourites 1. Tap on to add a channel to or from frequency band favourites and the Radio Favourites app. 2. Tap on Library, select Edit and tap on to remove a radio channel from the favourites. When a radio channel is saved from a station list, the radio will automatically search for the best frequency. But if a radio channel is saved 500 from a manual station search, the radio does not automatically change to a stronger frequency. If a radio channel is removed from the Radio Favourite app, the channel will also be removed from the favourites list for the relevant frequency band. Related information • • • • • • • Radio (p. 497) Start radio (p. 497) Searching for radio stations (p. 499) Changing radio band and radio station (p. 498) Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) Settings for radio (p. 500) Application menu in driver display (p. 100) Settings for radio There are various radio functions to activate and deactivate. Cancelling traffic messages The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be in temporarily interrupted by tapping on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping on Cancel in the centre display. Activating and deactivating radio functions Drag down the top view and select Settings Media and the desired radio band to view available functions. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET AM/FM Radio • Show Broadcast Information: shows information on programme content, artists, etc. • Freeze Program Name: select to stop the programme service name from scrolling continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 seconds. • Select Announcements: - Local Interruptions: interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions in the neighbourhood. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. The Local Interruptions function is a geographically restricted version of the Traffic Announcements function. The Traffic Announcements function must be activated at the same time. - News : interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts news. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the news broadcast is finished. - Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. - Traffic Announcements: interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions. Play- back of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. - Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. DAB* (digital radio) • Sort Services: option for how channels will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by service number. - Traffic Flash: receives information about traffic disruptions. • DAB To DAB Handover: starts the func- - News Flash: receives news. tion for linking within DAB. If reception of a radio channel is lost, another channel is found automatically in another channel group (ensemble). - Transport Flash: receives information about public transport, e.g. ferry and train timetables. - Warning/Services: receives information about incidents of lower significance than the Alarm function, e.g. power failures. • DAB To FM Handover: starts the function for linking between DAB and FM. If reception of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM frequency is searched for automatically. • Show Broadcast Information: select to show radio text or selected types of radio text, e.g. artist. • Show Program Related Images: select whether or not to show images for programmes on the screen. Related information • • • Radio (p. 497) Digital radio* (p. 502) Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 121) • Select Announcements: select the types of messages to be received while DAB is playing. Selected messages will interrupt the current media playback to play back the message. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. * Option/accessory. 501 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET RDS radio Related information RDS (Radio Data System) means that the radio automatically changes to the strongest transmitter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic information and to search for certain programme types. RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions: • • • Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor. • Search for programme category, e.g. programme types or traffic information. • Receive text information on current radio programme. NOTE Some radio stations do not use RDS or only selected parts of its functionality. When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio source currently in use. For example, if the CD player* is in use, it is paused. The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast. To go back earlier, press on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel in the centre display. 502 Radio (p. 497) Settings for radio (p. 500) Digital radio* Digital radio (DAB5) is a digital broadcasting system for radio. The radio supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB6. The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display. The digital radio app is launched from app view in the centre display. Digital radio is played back in the same way as other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the option to select playback from Stations, Favourites and Genres, there is also the option to select playback from subchannels and Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio channels (a channel group) broadcasting on the same frequency. In the cases where the radio channel transmits its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside the station name (download time varies). * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET DAB subchannel Secondary components are usually named subchannels. These are temporary and can contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages. Subchannels are indicated with an arrow symbol in the channel list. Link between FM and digital radio* Media player The function enables the digital radio (DAB) to switch from a channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another channel group (ensemble) with better reception, within DAB and/or between DAB and FM. Related information DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking The media player can play back audio from the CD player* and from external audio sources connected via the USB port or Bluetooth. It can also play back video format via the USB port. When the car is connected to the internet, it is also possible to listen to web radio, audio books and music services via apps. • Link between FM and digital radio* (p. 503) • Changing radio band and radio station (p. 498) • • Searching for radio stations (p. 499) • • Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 500) Settings for radio (p. 500) 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Media DAB. 3. Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover and/or DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/deactivate the respective functions. Related information • • • Digital radio* (p. 502) Radio (p. 497) Settings for radio (p. 500) The media player is operated from the centre display, but several functions can be operated using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. The radio is operated in the media player and is described in a separate section. 5 Digital 6 Digital Audio Broadcasting Multimedia Broadcasting }} * Option/accessory. 503 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Media playback Related information • • • • • • • • • • Media playback (p. 504) Controlling and changing media (p. 505) Searching media (p. 506) Apps (p. 494) The media player also operates the radio, which is described in a separate section. Radio (p. 497) CD player* (p. 508) Starting the media source Video (p. 508) Media via Bluetooth® The media player is controlled from the centre display. Several functions can also be operated using the steering wheel's righthand keypad or voice control. (p. 509) CD* 1. Insert a CD. 2. Open the app CD from the app view. 3. Select what to play back. > Playback begins. USB memory 1. Insert the USB memory. 2. Open the app USB from the app view. Media via USB port (p. 510) 3. Select what to play back. > Playback begins. Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Mp3 player and iPod® NOTE To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app (not USB). When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's audio and media system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure. 1. Connect media source. 2. Start playback from the connected media source. App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market and model.) 504 3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from the app view. > Playback begins. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Bluetooth connected device 1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source. 2. Connect media source. 3. Start playback from the connected media source. 4. Open the app Bluetooth from the app view. > Playback begins. Media with Internet connection Play back media from Internet-connected apps: 1. Connect the car to the Internet. 2. Open the current app from the app view. > Playback begins. Read the separate section on how apps are downloaded. Related information • Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 101) • • • Radio (p. 497) Controlling and changing media (p. 505) Connecting a device via USB port (p. 510) • Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 510) • • • • • • • Downloading apps (p. 495) Controlling and changing media The playback of media can be controlled with voice control, steering wheel keypad or the centre display. The media player can be operated by voice recognition, from the steering wheel keypad or the centre display. Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Video (p. 508) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 512) Android Auto* (p. 516) Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) Compatible media formats (p. 511) Video 1. Connect media source. 2. Open the app USB from the app view. 3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play back. > Playback begins. Apple CarPlay CarPlay is described in a separate section. Android Auto Android Auto is described in a separate section. Volume - turn the control knob under the centre display or press on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad in order to increase or decrease the volume. Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the song being played back, the physical buton the ton under the centre display or steering wheel's right-hand keypad. }} * Option/accessory. 505 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Change track/song - tap on the desired track or in the centre display, press on under the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Similar - tap on the button in order to use Gracenote to search for similar music on the USB device and to create a playlist from it. The playlist can contain a maximum of 50 songs. Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis in the centre display and drag sideways, or press and hold or under the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Changing media - select from previous sources in the app, in the app view, press on the desired app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad via the app menu . Library - tap on the button to play back from the library. Shuffle - tap on the button to shuffle the playback order. Searching media It is possible to search by artist, composer, song titles, album, video, audio book, playlist and, when the car is connected to the Internet, podcasts (digital media via Internet). Change device - tap on the button in order to switch between USB devices when several are connected. Related information • • • • • • Media player (p. 503) Searching media (p. 506) Audio settings (p. 492) 1. Apps (p. 494) Press . > Search view with keyboard is opened. Gracenote® (p. 507) 2. Enter the search terms. Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) 3. Press Search. > Connected devices are searched and the search results are listed by category. Swipe sideways across the screen to show each category separately. Related information • • 506 Media player (p. 503) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET • • Media playback (p. 504) Gracenote® Updating Gracenote Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 126) Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles and associated images, which are shown during playback. Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music recognition. Information on the music can be presented by means of the identification and analysis of the metadata in the music files. Sometimes metadata from different sources can be inconsistent or inadequate. For information and download, see support.volvocars.com. Gracenote has support for phonetic processing of artist name, album titles and genres, and in this way, voice control can be used to play back music. 1. The content of the Gracenote database is updated continuously. Download the latest update to take advantage of improvements. Related information • • • Media playback (p. 504) License agreement for audio and media (p. 536) Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Media Gracenote®. 3. Select settings for Gracenote data: • Gracenote® Online Search - searches in Gracenote's online database for playing media. • Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects how to display Gracenote data if there are more than one search results. 1 - the file's original data are used. 2 - Gracenote data are used. 3 - Gracenote or original data can be selected. • None - no results are shown. 507 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET CD player* Video Playing a video The media player can play back CD discs with compatible audio files. Videos on USB-connected devices can be played back using the media player. No picture is shown when the car starts to move, but only the audio is played back. The picture is shown again when the car is stationary. Videos are played using the USB app in the app view. 1. Connecting a media source (USB device). Information on compatible formats for media can be found in a separate section. Disc insert and eject slot. Disc eject button. Related information • • • 508 Media playback (p. 504) 3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play back. > Playback begins. Settings for video (p. 509) Finding video files may be problematic if the USB device also contains music and audio tracks. In this case, it is possible to find them by going to Library and selecting the video tab. Compatible media formats (p. 511) Related information Related information • • • • 2. Open the app USB from the app view. Playing a video (p. 508) Playing back DivX® (p. 509) • • • • Video (p. 508) Playing back DivX® (p. 509) Settings for video (p. 509) Compatible media formats (p. 511) Voice control of radio and media (p. 145) Compatible media formats (p. 511) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Playing back DivX® Settings for video Media via Bluetooth® 2. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the registration code. Certain language settings can be changed for video playback. With the video player in full screen mode, or by opening the top view and pressing Settings Media Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio Language and Subtitle Language. 3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and to complete the registration. The car's media player is equipped with Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files from external Bluetooth devices, such as mobile phones and tablets. For the media player to be able to play back audio files wirelessly from an external device, the device must first be connected to the car via Bluetooth. • Certified® This DivX device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) films. 1. Press Settings in the top view. Related information • • • • Video (p. 508) Playing a video (p. 508) Settings for video (p. 509) Compatible media formats (p. 511) Related information Video (p. 508) Related information • Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 510) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) • • Media playback (p. 504) Compatible media formats (p. 511) 509 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Connecting a device via Bluetooth® Media via USB port Connecting a device via USB port Connect a device to the car for wireless playback of media and to provide the car with an Internet connection where possible. Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth® technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car. An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via the car's USB port. Devices with rechargeable batteries are recharged when connected via USB and the ignition is in position I, II or the engine is running. An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via one of the car's USB ports. The phone must be connected to the USB port with white frame (when there are two USB ports) when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*. For information on compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. The content of the external source can be loaded more quickly if it only consists of compatible formats. Video files can also be played back via the USB port. Bluetooth® The procedure for connecting a media device is the same as for connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth®. Related information • • • Media via Bluetooth® (p. 509) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) Media playback (p. 504) Certain MP3 players have their own file system that the car does not support. Related information • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 510) • • • • Media playback (p. 504) • • 510 Video (p. 508) Ignition positions (p. 420) Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 511) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 512) Android Auto* (p. 516) USB inputs (type A) in the tunnel console. Allow the cable to lie forwards so that it is not trapped when the lid is closed. Related information • • • • Media playback (p. 504) Media via USB port (p. 510) Media player (p. 503) Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 511) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET • Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 511) Technical specifications for USB devices • • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 512) The following specifications must be met to allow the contents of the USB devices to be read. No folder structure will be shown in the centre display during playback. Android Auto* (p. 516) Max number Files 15 000 Folders 1 000 Folder levels 8 Playlists 100 Items in a playlist 1 000 Subfolders No limit Technical specification for USB A connector • • • • Type A socket Version 2.0 Voltage supply 5 V Current supply max. 2.1 A Related information • Media via USB port (p. 510) Compatible media formats The following file formats must be used for media playback. Audio files Format File extension Codec MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III, MPEG2 Layer III, MP3 Pro (mp3 compatible), MP3 HD (mp3 compatible) AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4 part III Audio), HE-AAC (aacPlus v1/v2) WMA .wma WMA8/9, WMA9/10 Pro WAV .wav LPCM FLAC .flac FLAC Video files Format File extension MP4 .mp4, .m4v MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v }} * Option/accessory. 511 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Format File extension Audio codec MP3, AC3 AVI .avi Subtitles XSUB AVI (DivX) .avi, .divx ASF .asf, .wmv Special functions Multiple subtitles, multiple audio, resume play Reference Meets all requirements of the DivX Home Theater profile. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX Home Theater video. Subtitles Format File extension SubViewer .sub SubRip .srt SSA .ssa DivX® DivX certified devices have been tested for high-quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play DivX films. 512 Profile DivX Home Theater Video codec DivX, MPEG-4 Resolution 720x576 Bit rate 4.8Mbps Frame rate 30 fps File extension .divx, .avi Max file size 4 GB Related information • • • Media player (p. 503) Video (p. 508) Playing back DivX® (p. 509) Apple® CarPlay®* CarPlay gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions, send/receive messages and use Siri, all while you stay focused on your driving. CarPlay works with selected iOS devices. If the car does not already support CarPlay there is the option to install it retroactively. Contact a Volvo dealer to install CarPlay. Information about which apps are supported and which iOS devices are compatible is available on Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/ carplay/. Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between the device and the car is broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in CarPlay. When using map navigation via CarPlay, there is no guidance in the driver display or head-up display, but only in the centre display. When navigation is started through Apple CarPlay, ongoing native turn-by-turn route guidance will be ended. The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the centre display, the iOS device or using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain functions). The apps can also be voicecontrolled using Siri. A long press on the * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET steering wheel button starts voice control using Siri and a short press activates the car's own voice control. If Siri breaks off too early, 7 hold the steering wheel button depressed. By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge the following: Apple CarPlay is a service provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not responsible for Apple CarPlay or its features/applications. When using Apple CarPlay, certain information from your car (including its position) is transferred to your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are fully responsible for your and any others person’s use of Apple CarPlay. Using Apple® CarPlay®* To use CarPlay, Siri voice control must be activated on your iOS device. The device also needs an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the mobile network for all functions to work. Connect an iOS device and start CarPlay NOTE 7 Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 513) Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 515) Voice recognition (p. 142) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 131) Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. 3. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is deactivated. A phone or media player connected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore not be available when CarPlay is active. An alternative Internet source must be used to connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*. Related information • • • • 2. Read the terms and conditions and then tap on Accept to connect. > The subview with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown. To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has not been connected previously: 1. Connect an iOS device with support for CarPlay to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used. }} * Option/accessory. 513 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Starting CarPlay To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has been connected previously: 1. Connect an iOS device to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used. > If the setting for automatic start is selected - the name of the device will be shown. The tile with CarPlay is opened automatically in the cases where the home view is shown when connecting the iOS device. 2. If the tile with CarPlay does not open automatically, tap on the device name. The subview with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown. 3. If an app is active in the same tile, tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view. > The subview with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown. 4. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. CarPlay runs in the background if another app is started, or is already active when connecting, in the same tile. To show CarPlay in the subview again - tap on the CarPlay icon in the app view. 8 Apple, 514 Switch the connection between CarPlay and iPod • Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 529) CarPlay to iPod 1. Press Settings in the top view. • Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 530) • Voice recognition (p. 142) 2. Continue to Communication CarPlay. Apple 3. Untick the box for the iOS device that shall no longer start CarPlay automatically when the USB cable is connected. 4. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to the USB port. 5. Open the app iPod from the app view. iPod to CarPlay 1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view. 2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK. 3. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to the USB port. > The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown8. Related information • • • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 510) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 512) Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 515) CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* Settings for iOS device connected with CarPlay9. 2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following: • Voice Control • Navi Voice Guidance • Phone Ringtone Automatic start 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Continue to Communication CarPlay and select setting: Apple • Tick the box - CarPlay starts automatically when the USB cable is connected. • Untick the box - CarPlay does not start automatically when the USB cable is connected. If the car is shared by a lot of people, such as in a car pool, it is worth noting that a maximum of 20 iOS devices can be stored simultaneously in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted. Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* Here are some useful tips for using CarPlay®. Update your iOS device with the latest version of the iOS operating system and ensure that the apps have been updated. • • In the event of a problem with CarPlay, disconnect the iOS device from the USB port and reconnect. Otherwise, try to close the app on the device that is not working and then restart the app, or try closing all apps and restart your device. • If the apps do not appear when CarPlay starts (black screen), try minimising and expanding the tile for CarPlay. • Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between the iOS device and the car is broken. Information about supported apps and compatible telephone devices can be found on the Apple website. You can also search for CarPlay in the App Store to find information about apps that are compatible with CarPlay on your market. • Using Siri it is possible to write/dictate and read out messages. Messages are read out and dictated in the language selected in the settings for Siri. When the message is written/dictated, no text will be shown in the centre display – instead, Related information • • • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 512) Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 513) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 131) To delete the list, the settings must be reset in the centre display (factory reset). System volumes 1. Press Settings in the top view. 9 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. }} * Option/accessory. 515 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || the text will appear on the iOS device. When Siri is used, note that the telephone's microphones are used and that the quality is therefore dependent on the position of the telephone. • • • If the device is connected to the car via Bluetooth, the connection will be interrupted when CarPlay is used. Resume the Internet connection in the car by sharing the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from the device. Some of the CarPlay functions (such as voice call and messages) mean that use of the car's own functions is stopped and CarPlay is shown automatically instead. If this behaviour is not wanted, deselect the display of the equivalent function in CarPlay under the phone's settings for notifications. CarPlay only works with iPhone10. NOTE Availability and functionality may vary depending on market. Related information • • 10 516 Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 512) Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 529) Android Auto* NOTE Android Auto gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions and use car-adapted apps from an Android device. Android Auto works with selected Android devices. When a device is connected to Android Auto it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to another media player. Bluetooth is active while Android Auto is being used. When using map navigation via Android Auto there is no guidance in the driver display or head-up display, but only in the centre display. Android Auto can be controlled via the centre display using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. Holding down the starts Google steering wheel button Assistant and a short press deactivates it. Information about which apps are supported and which Android devices are compatible is available on the website: www.android.com/ auto/. For third-party apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in Android Auto. Android Auto is started from the app view. After Android Auto has been started once, the app will be started automatically the next time the device is connected. Automatic start can be deactivated under settings. By using Android Auto, you acknowledge the following: Android Auto is a service provided by Google Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for Android Auto or its features or applications. When you use Android Auto, your car transfers certain information (including its location) to your connected Android phone. You are fully responsible for your and any other person’s use of Android Auto. Related information • • Using Android Auto* (p. 517) Settings for Android Auto* (p. 517) Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Using Android Auto* To use the Android Auto app, the app must be installed on your Android device and the device must be connected to the car's USB input. NOTE For installation of Android Auto to be possible, the car must be equipped with two USB ports (USB hub)*. If the car only has one USB port then it is not possible to use Android Auto. Previously connected Android 1. Connect your device to the USB input with a white frame. > If the setting for automatic start is selected - the name of the device is shown. Settings for Android Auto* 2. Tap on the device name – the tile with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown. 2. Press Communication and select setting: The first time an Android is connected 1. Connect your Android device to the USB input with a white frame. 3. If the setting for automatic start is not selected - open the Android Auto app from the app view. > The subview with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown. 2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK. 4. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. 3. Tap on Android Auto in the app view. Android Auto runs in the background if another app is started in the same subview. To show Android Auto in the subview again - tap on the Android Auto icon in the app view. 4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap on Accept to connect. > The subview with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown. 5. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. Related information • • • • Android Auto* (p. 516) Settings for Android Auto* (p. 517) Connecting a device via USB port (p. 510) Voice recognition (p. 142) Settings for an Android device that has been connected the first time with Android Auto. Automatic start 1. Press Settings in the top view. Android Auto • Tick the box - Android Auto starts automatically when the USB cable is connected. • Untick the box - Android Auto does not start automatically when the USB cable is connected. A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted. A factory reset has to be executed in order to clear the list. System volumes 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following: • Voice Control • Navi Voice Guidance • Phone Ringtone }} * Option/accessory. 517 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Related information • • • 518 Android Auto* (p. 516) Using Android Auto* (p. 517) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 131) Tips for using Android Auto* • Here are some useful tips for using Android Auto. • Ensure that your apps are updated. • When starting the car, wait until the centre display has started, connect the device and then open Android Auto from the app view. • In the event of problems with Android Auto, disconnect your Android device from the USB port and then reconnect via USB. Otherwise, try closing the app on the device and then restarting the app. • When a device is connected to Android Auto it is still possible to playback media via Bluetooth to another media player. The Bluetooth function is on when Android Auto is used. • If the icon for Android Auto is greyed out, this means no device is connected. When you connect your device the icon will be illuminated. If the icon is not visible at all then the car does not have support for connecting a device for this purpose. • If the device is connected to the car via Bluetooth, the connection will be interrupted when Android Auto is used. Resume the Internet connection in the car by sharing the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from the device. If the car is shared by a lot of people, such as in a car pool, it is worth noting that a maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored simultaneously. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted. A factory reset has to be performed in order to clear the list. Related information • • Android Auto* (p. 516) Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 529) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Phone Overview A phone with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-free system. The audio and media system acts as handsfree, with the facility to remotely control a selection of the phone's functions. The phone can still be operated with its own keys even if it is connected to the car. When a phone has been connected online and connected with the car, it can be used make calls, send/receive messages, play back media wirelessly and be used as an Internet connection. Microphone. The phone is operated from the centre display, but also via voice recognition and the app menu, which are accessed from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 521) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 522) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 523) • Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 523) • • • Settings for phone (p. 526) Phone. Phone operation from centre display. Keypad for operating phone functions that are shown in the driver display and voice recognition. • • Voice recognition (p. 142) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 101) Audio settings (p. 492) Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 528) Driver display. Related information • • • • Managing phone calls (p. 523) Managing the phone book (p. 526) Managing text messages (p. 524) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) 519 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to then be able to make calls from the car, send/ receive messages, play back media wirelessly and connect the car to the Internet. It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices connected at once, in which case one of them can only play back wirelessly. The most recently connected phone will automatically be connected to make calls, send/receive messages, play back media and provide an Internet connection. It is possible to change what the phone is to be used for under Bluetooth Devices via the settings menu in the centre display's top view. Your mobile phone needs to be equipped with Bluetooth and support tethering. After the device has been connected/registered a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer needs to be visible/discoverable, but only have Bluetooth activated. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth devices can be stored in the car. There are two options for connecting. Either search the phone from the car or search the car from the phone. Option 1 - search phone from car 1. 520 Make the phone searchable/visible via Bluetooth. 2. Open the phone tile in the centre display. • If there is no phone connected to the car, tap on Add phone. • If there is a phone connected to the car, . In the pop-up wintap on Change dow, tap on Add phone. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The list is updated as new devices are detected. 3. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected. 4. Check that the specified number code in the car matches that in the phone. In which case, choose to accept in both places. 5. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages. NOTE • The message function must be activated in certain phones. • Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car. Option 2 - search car from phone 1. Open the phone tile in the centre display. • If there is no phone connected to the car, tap on Add phone Make car discoverable. • If there is a phone connected to the car, . In the pop-up wintap on Change dow, tap on Add phone Make car discoverable. 2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone. 3. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. 4. Select the name of the car on the phone. 5. A pop-up window for the connection is shown in the car. Confirm the connection. 6. Check that the specified number code in the car matches the one shown in the external device. In which case, choose to accept in both places. 7. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET NOTE • • The message function must be activated in certain phones. Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car. NOTE If the phone's operating system is updated then the connection may be broken. In which case, delete the phone from the car and then connect again. Compatible phones Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car. • • • • Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 523) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 527) It is possible to connect a phone to the car automatically via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been connected to the car for the first time. It is only the two last connected phones that can be connected automatically. Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 528) 1. 2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher. > The phone will connect. Related information • • • • Phone (p. 519) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 521) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 522) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 523) Phone (p. 519) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 522) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 523) • Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 523) For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. Related information Activate Bluetooth in the phone before setting the car in ignition position I. • • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 527) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) }} * Option/accessory. 521 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET • Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 528) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually Disconnecting a Bluetoothconnected phone • Ignition positions (p. 420) It is possible to connect a phone to the car manually via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been connected to the car for the first time. 1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone. It is possible to disconnect a phone connected to Bluetooth, and it will then no longer be connected to the car. • When the phone is out of range of the car it is automatically disconnected. If disconnection occurs during an active call, then the call will be continued on the phone. 2. Open the subview for phone. > Connected phones are listed. 3. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected. > The phone will connect. Related information • • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 521) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 523) • Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 523) • • • 522 Phone (p. 519) • It is also possible to disconnect the phone by manually deactivating Bluetooth. Related information • • • Phone (p. 519) Settings for phone (p. 526) Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 523) • Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 523) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 527) Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 527) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 528) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Switch between Bluetoothconnected phones Removing devices connected to Bluetooth It is possible to switch between a number of Bluetooth-connected phones. 1. Open the tile for the phone. It is possible to remove phones from the list of registered Bluetooth devices, for example. 1. Press Settings in the top view. or drag down the top 2. Tap on Change view and tap on Settings Communication Bluetooth Devices Add device. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. 2. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices. > Registered Bluetooth devices are listed. 3. Tap on the phone to be connected. Related information • • • • • Phone (p. 519) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 527) Managing phone calls Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-connected phone. 3. Tap on the device to be removed. 4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your selection. > The device is no longer registered to the car. Related information • • Generic illustration. Phone (p. 519) Making phone calls Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) 1. Open the subview for phone. Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522) • Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 523) Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 523) 2. Select call from call history, enter number using the keypad or via the contact list. It is possible to search or browse in the conin the contact list in tact list. Tap on order to add a contact under Favourites. • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 527) 3. Press 4. Tap on to make a call. to end the call. You can also make calls from the call log via the app menu, which is accessed from the . right-hand steering wheel keypad }} 523 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Making multi-party calls During a call: 1. Private call – Press Add call. • Switch to mobile phone - the hands- 2. Choose to make a call from the call log, favourites or the contact list. free function is disconnected and the call continues on your mobile phone. 3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on alongside the contact in the contact list. 4. Tap on Swap call to switch between the parties. • Driver focused - the microphone in the roof on the passenger side is switched off and the call continues with the car's handsfree function. Related information Phone (p. 519) to end the active call. 5. Tap on Conference calls During an active multi-party call: • • 1. • Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 145) • Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 101) • Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 126) Tap on Join calls to merge the active multi-party call. 2. Tap on to end the call. Incoming phone calls Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver display and the centre display. Manage the call on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the centre display. 1. Tap on Answer/Reject. 2. Tap on to end the call. Incoming phone call during an active call 1. Tap on Answer/Reject. 2. Tap on 524 During the current call, press Privacy and select setting: to end the call. • • • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) Managing the phone book (p. 526) Managing text messages (p. 524) Audio settings (p. 492) Managing text messages11 Message handling in the car for a Bluetoothconnected phone. In some phones, the message function must be activated. Not all phones are compatible. In such cases, they cannot display contacts and messages in the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. Managing text messages in the centre display Text messages are only shown in the centre display if the setting is selected. Press Messages in the app view to manage text messages in the centre display. Reading text messages in the centre display Press the icon to get the message read aloud. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sending text messages in the centre display12 1. You can reply to a message or create a new message. • • Reply to message - tap on the contact whose message you wish to reply to, then tap on Answer. Create new message - tap on Create new. Select a contact or enter a number. Message notification Settings for text messages It is possible to activate and deactivate notifications in the text message settings. Settings for text messages on connected phone. 1. Press Settings in the top view. Related information • • • • • 2. Compose the message. Phone (p. 519) Settings for text messages (p. 525) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 145) Managing text messages in the driver display • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) Text messages are only shown in the driver display if the setting is selected. • User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 533) Reading a new text message in the driver display – To have the message read aloud - select Read out with the steering wheel keypad. Dictating a reply in the driver display After the text message has been read out, it is possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car is connected to the Internet. – 11 12 message notifications in the centre display's status bar. Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 126) Text Messages • Notification in centre display - shows Settings for phone (p. 526) • 3. Press Send. 2. Press Communication and select settings: • Notification in driver display - displays notifications in the driver's display and incoming messages can be managed using the steering wheel's righthand keypad. • Text message tone - select tone for incoming text messages. Related information • • • • Phone (p. 519) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) Managing text messages (p. 524) Settings for phone (p. 526) Press Answer with the steering wheel keypad. A dictation dialogue starts. Valid in certain markets only. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information. Only certain phones can send messages via the car. * Option/accessory. 525 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Managing the phone book When a phone is connected to the car with Bluetooth, contacts can be managed directly in the centre display. Up to 3000 contacts can be shown from the phone selected in the centre display. . It is possible to sort by first sorted under name or surname, and this setting is adjusted in the telephone setup. Related information • • • Phone (p. 519) Settings for phone (p. 526) Settings for phone When the telephone is connected to the car, the following settings can be made: 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication select settings: • Ringtones - selection of ring signal. It Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 145) • Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 126) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) Phone and is possible to use a ring signal from the phone or the car. Some phones are not fully compatible and their ring signals may therefore not be available for use in the car. 13 • Sort Order - select sort order of contact list. Call notifications in head up display* 1. Browse between the letters and to find a matching contact. Depending on existing contacts in the phone book, only matching letters are shown. Search contacts - tap on to search for a phone number of name in the contact list. Favourites - tap on to add/remove a contact to/from the favourites list. Sorting The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order where special characters and numbers are 526 Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Displays Display Options. Head-Up 3. Select Show Phone. Related information • • • • Phone (p. 519) Settings for text messages (p. 525) Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 527) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET • • Head-up display* (p. 139) Settings for Bluetooth devices Internet-connected car* Audio settings (p. 492) Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices. 1. Press Settings in the top view. When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible – for example – to use web radio and music services via apps, download software and contact your retailer from the car. The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with the car's built-in modem* (SIM card). 2. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices and select settings: • Add device - starts the pairing of a new device. • Previously paired devices - lists registered/paired devices. • Remove device - removes the connected device. • Allowed services for this device - sets When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible to share the car's Internet connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devices such as tablets can access the Internet14. The Internet status is indicated by a symbol in the centre display's status bar. device usage options: calling, sending/ receiving messages, streaming media and as Internet connection. • Internet connection - connects the car to the Internet via the device's Bluetooth connection. Related information • • • • 13 14 For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi. Phone (p. 519) Settings for phone (p. 526) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) }} * Option/accessory. 527 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || NOTE Data is transferred when using the internet (data traffic), which can have a cost. Activation of data roaming can result in further charges. Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic. NOTE When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi or the car modem*. NOTE When using Android Auto, it is possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or the car modem*. Before connecting the car to the Internet, search support information on terms and conditions for services and privacy policy for customers at www.volvocars.com. Related information 528 • Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 121) • Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 528) • Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 529) Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone • Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 530) • • • Apps (p. 494) Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth by sharing your phone's Internet access and access several online services in the car. 1. To be able to connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone has to have already been connected to the car via Bluetooth for a first time. • • • • No or poor Internet connection (p. 532) Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 531) Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 533) Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 533) Volvo ID (p. 28) User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 533) 2. Make sure that your phone supports tethering and that this function is activated. On an iPhone, this function is known as "tethering". On Android phones, this function may have different names but is frequently known as "hotspot". For iPhones, the menu page "tethering" must also be open until the Internet connection has been established. 3. If the phone has been connected via Bluetooth previously, press Settings in the centre display top view. 4. Press Communication Devices. Bluetooth 5. Tick the box for Bluetooth Internet connection under the heading Internet connection. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET 6. If another connection source has been used, confirm the option to change connection. > Your car is now connected to the Internet via the Bluetooth-connected phone. NOTE The telephone and network provider must support tethering (Internet connection sharing), and the subscription must include data. NOTE When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi or the car modem*. Related information • • Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 530) Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it is used. Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by tethering your phone and access online services in the car. 1. Make sure that your phone supports tethering and that this function is activated. On an iPhone, this function is known as "tethering". On Android phones, this function may have different names but is frequently known as "hotspot". For iPhones, the menu page "tethering" must also be open until the Internet connection has been established. When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved for future use. To show a list of saved networks or manually delete saved networks, go to Settings Communication Wi-Fi Saved networks. 3. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi. 4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Wi-Fi. 5. If another connection source has been used, confirm the option to change connection. • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 520) • Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 529) 7. Enter the network password. > The car connects to the network. Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 512) Note that certain phones switch off tethering after the contact with the car has been disconnected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the next time it is used. The tethering in the phone No or poor Internet connection (p. 532) Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 527) The telephone and network provider must support tethering (Internet connection sharing), and the subscription must include data. 2. Press Settings in the top view. 6. Tap on the network name of the network to be connected. • • • NOTE Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi connection, are described in a separate section. Related information • • • • Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 533) No or poor Internet connection (p. 532) Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 533) * Option/accessory. 529 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) 4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car modem Internet. It is possible to establish an Internet connection via the car modem and a personal SIM card (P-SIM)*. Cars equipped with Volvo On Call will use the Internet connection with car modem for the services. 5. If another connection source has been used, confirm the option to change connection. 6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code. > The car connects to the network. 1. NOTE Note that the SIM card used for Internet connection via P-SIM cannot have the same telephone number as the SIM card that the phone uses. If this is disregarded, it will not be possible to route calls correctly to the telephone. Therefore, use a SIM card with a separate telephone number for the Internet connection, or a data card that does not handle telephone calls and is therefore unable to disrupt the function of the telephone. Fit a personal SIM card into the holder by the floor on the passenger side. Note that a mini SIM is required to fit the car's card reader. 2. Press Settings in the top view. 3. Press Communication Internet. 530 Related information • • • Internet-connected car* (p. 527) No or poor Internet connection (p. 532) Settings for car modem* (p. 530) Settings for car modem* The car is equipped with a modem that can be used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also possible to share the Internet connection via Wi-Fi. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication Car Modem Internet and select settings: • Car modem Internet - select whether to use the car modem as Internet connection. • Data usage - tap on Reset resets the counters for received and sent data volume. • Network Select network operator - automatic or manual selection of network operator. Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car modem will attempt to connect to the Internet when the car is abroad and outside its home network. Note that this may result in heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement for data traffic abroad with your network provider in your home country. • SIM card PIN Car Modem * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be entered. Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code shall be required for access to the SIM card. When the car is online, its Internet connection can be shared to allow other devices to use the Internet connection15. • Send request code - used e.g. to top up or check the balance on a prepaid card. Functionality depends on the provider. NOTE Note that the SIM card used for Internet connection via P-SIM cannot have the same telephone number as the SIM card that the phone uses. If this is disregarded, it will not be possible to route calls correctly to the telephone. Therefore, use a SIM card with a separate telephone number for the Internet connection, or a data card that does not handle telephone calls and is therefore unable to disrupt the function of the telephone. Related information • Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 530) • No or poor Internet connection (p. 532) 15 Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi. The network operator (SIM card) must support tethering (sharing of the Internet connection). 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication Hotspot. Car Wi-Fi 3. Tap on Network name and name the shared connection. 4. Tap on Password and select a password to be entered on connecting devices. 5. Tap on Frequency band and select the frequency on which the hotspot is to transmit data. Note that selection of frequency band is not available in all markets. 6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot. 7. If Wi-Fi has been used as a connection source, confirm the option to change connection. > It is now possible for external devices to connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hotspot). }} 531 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || NOTE Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in further charges from your network operator. Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic. Connection status is indicated by the symbol in the centre display's status bar. Press Connected devices to see a list of the currently connected devices. Related information • Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 121) • • Internet-connected car* (p. 527) No or poor Internet connection (p. 532) No or poor Internet connection Related information Factors that affect the Internet connection. The amount of data transferred is dependent on the services or apps in use in the car. For example, streaming audio can require large amounts of data which requires a good connection and good signal strength. • • Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 533) Phone to car The speed of the Internet connection may vary depending on the location of the phone in the car. Move the phone closer to the centre display in order to increase the signal strength. Ensure that there is no source of interference in between. Phone to network operator The speed of the mobile network varies depending on the coverage in the present location. Poor network coverage may occur, for example in tunnels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or indoors. The speed also depends on the agreement you have with your network. NOTE In the event of problems with data traffic, contact your network operator. Restarting the phone If there are problems with the Internet connection then it may help to restart the phone. 532 * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Remove Wi-Fi network Wi-Fi technologies and security Removing a network that is not to be used. 1. Press Settings in the top view. Possible network types to connect to. It is only possible to connect to the following types of network: 2. Continue to Communication Saved networks. Wi-Fi 3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to be removed. 4. Confirm the selection. > The car will no longer connect to the network in future. Remove all networks All networks can be removed simultaneously by restoring factory settings. Please note that all user data and system settings are reset to original factory settings. Related information • • • Internet-connected car* (p. 527) No or poor Internet connection (p. 532) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 131) • Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 529) 16 17 Selection of frequency is not available on all markets. Does not apply to Volvo On Call*. • • • Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz16. Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n. Security type — WPA2-AES-CCMP. The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle Wi-Fi devices inside the car. If several devices operate on the frequency at the same time then it may result in reduced performance. Related information • Internet-connected car* (p. 527) User terms and conditions and data sharing The first time certain services and apps are started, a pop-up window with the headings Terms and conditions and Data sharing may be shown. The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user terms and conditions and policy for data sharing. By accepting data sharing, the user accepts that certain information is sent from the car. This is required so that certain services and apps can have full functionality. The data sharing function for online services and apps is deactivated as default17. Data sharing needs to be activated so that certain online services and apps in the car can be used. Data sharing can be set from the centre display's settings menu or in connection with the services or apps being started in the centre display. Privacy and data sharing With the software update made available November 2017, privacy and data sharing settings were introduced for online services and downloaded apps. The settings can be found under Privacy and data in the settings menu in the car's centre display. }} * Option/accessory. 533 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || There you can select the online services which are allowed to share data. Data sharing for downloaded apps can also be deactivated there. Note that services and apps cannot be used as intended if data sharing is deactivated. After a factory reset or e.g. a workshop visit or software update, the data sharing settings may have been reset to their default settings. In which case, reactivate data sharing for online services and for downloaded apps. NOTE Privacy and data sharing settings are unique for every driver profile. Related information • Activating and deactivating data sharing (p. 534) Activating and deactivating data sharing Data sharing for services and apps required can be set in the centre display's settings menu. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press System Privacy and data. 3. Select activation or deactivation of data sharing for individual services and all apps. If data sharing has not been activated for an online service or downloaded apps, this can be done when they are started in the centre display. If this is the first time a service is started, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software updates, Volvo's terms and conditions for online services need to be approved. Note that data sharing will then also be activated for other services or apps for which sharing has already been approved. NOTE After a visit to a Volvo workshop, you may need to reactivate data sharing so that the online services and apps shall work again. Related information • 534 User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 533) Data sharing for services If you have not activated data sharing for an online service or for downloaded apps, you can do this in connection with starting them in your centre display. If this is the first time you are starting a service, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software updates, you also need to approve Volvo's terms and conditions for online services. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Activate data sharing when you start a service 2. Select to approve data sharing for the service or to cancel. 1. If you select to approve, data sharing is activated and you can start to use the service. Select the function or service to be activated. > If this is the first time you are using the service, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software updates, you first need to approve Volvo's terms and conditions for online services in order to continue. Activate data sharing when you start an app To approve data sharing for an app that needs the function, start the app and tap on Allow in the pop-up window. You can deactivate data sharing for services and apps in the settings menu under System Privacy and data Data Sharing. Storage space on hard disk It is possible to view how much free space there is on the car's hard disk. Storage information for the car's hard disk, including total capacity, available capacity and how much space is used for installed apps can be shown. The information is available under Settings System System Information Storage. Related information • Apps (p. 494) 535 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET License agreement for audio and media Dirac Unison® A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's agreements with manufacturers/developers. This DivX Certified® device can play back DivX® Home Theater video files up to 576p (including .avi, .divx). Download free software on www.divx.com to create, play back and stream digital video. Bowers & Wilkins Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark of DuPont. 536 DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are used under licence. Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in frequency, time and space for the best possible bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of specific performance venues. Using advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic highprecision measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in perfect unison. DivX® ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating the DivX VOD section in the device's settings menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete the registration. Patent numbers Protected by one or more of the following US patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052. Gracenote® SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Parts of the content are copyright © of Gracenote or its suppliers. Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other countries. Gracenote® End User License Agreement This program or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote ("Gracenote software") activates this program to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track and title ("Gracenote data") from online servers or embedded databases (together called "Gracenote servers") and in order to perform other actions. You may only use Gracenote data in accordance with the intended end-user functions for this program or this device. You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers for your own personal non-commercial use. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote software or any Gracenote data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT. You agree that your non-exclusive right to use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers will be terminated if you violate these restrictions. If your license is terminated you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote will under no circumstances have any obligation to pay you for any information you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the company's rights under this agreement against you directly in its own name. The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track enquiries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to enable the Gracenote service to count enquiries without knowing anything about who you are. Additional information is available on the web page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Gracenote service. The Gracenote software and everything included in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". Gracenote provides no undertakings or warranties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote servers or to change data categories for any reason that Gracenote deems sufficient. No war- ranty is provided that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers are fault-free or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers will operate without interruption. Gracenote has no obligation to provide you with new, improved or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the company reserves the right to discontinue its services at any time. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES. © Gracenote, Inc. 2009 Sensus software This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University of California. All or some portions are derived }} 537 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || 538 from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. This software uses parts of sources from "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/ projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc. This software is based in parts on the work of the FreeType Team. This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]). All rights reserved SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Linux software This product contains software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/LGPL software. You may download Source Code from the following website at no charge: http:// www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ download/TVM_8351_013 The website provides the Source Code "As Is" and without warranty of any kind. By downloading Source Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and complying with the user agreements that accompany each Source Code. Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding the source code. camellia:1.2.0 Copyright (c) 2006, 2007 NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation). All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Unicode: 5.1.0 COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been modified. THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, }} 539 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in 540 advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. Declaration of Conformity SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Country/ Area Brazil: Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário. Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br EU: Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU. For more information, search support information at www.volvocars.com. The United Arab Emirates: }} 541 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Country/ Area Kazakhstan: Model name: NR 0V Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Exporting country: Japan 542 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Country/ Area China: 1. ■ 使用频率 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz ■ 等效全向辐射 ■ 最大 率(EIRP) 率谱密度 天线增益 天线增益 10dBi 时 10dBi 时 ≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ① ≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ① ■ 载频容限 20 ppm ■ 帯外发射 率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP) ■ 杂散发射(辐射) • • • • • 率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外) ≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz) ≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz) ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz) ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz) ≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz) 2.不得擅自更改发射频率 大发射 率(包括额外 3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业 使用 4.使用微 率无线电设备,必须忍 装射频 产生有害干扰 各种无线电业 率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线 一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采 的干扰或工业 措施消除干扰后方可继续 科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰 5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用 }} 543 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Country/ Area Korea: B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재) 이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다. 해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 습니다. Malaysia This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards) Regulations 2000. To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”. Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth) Model: NR-0V Type Approval No.: RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067) 544 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Country/ Area Mexico: Taiwan: 低 率電波輻射性電機管理辦法 第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司 變更頻率 商號或使用者均不得擅自 加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能 第十四條 低 率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應 立停用,改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用 電通信 低 前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線 率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備 之干擾 Related information • • • • • Sound, media and Internet (p. 492) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Media player (p. 503) Gracenote® (p. 507) Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 34) * Option/accessory. 545 ECALL ECALL eCall1 The car can detect an accident and contact the nearest emergency call centre itself. For cars without Volvo On Call* there is a European legal requirement, Pan-European eCall, that provides access to an automatic collision alarm and urgent assistance in emergency situations. Related information • Automatic collision alarm with eCall (p. 548) • Emergency assistance with eCall (p. 549) • Roadside Assistance (p. 549) Automatic collision alarm with eCall2 • Roadside Assistance (p. 549) If a collision occurs, the car reports this automatically to the closest emergency call centre, which can send out emergency assistance. When the car's safety system is triggered, e.g. in an accident in which the activation level is reached for the seatbelt tensioner or airbags, a signal will be automatically sent to the closest emergency call centre. 1. A message, containing car position2, etc., is sent automatically from the car to the emergency call centre. 2. The emergency call centre establishes verbal contact with the car's driver and tries to find out the extent of the collision and the need for help. 3. The emergency call centre sends the necessary assistance (police, ambulance, towing, etc.). If verbal contact cannot be established, the emergency call centre knows the car's position and can assist with appropriate action. Related information • • 1 Applies 2 Applies 548 eCall (p. 548) Emergency assistance with eCall (p. 549) to certain markets. to certain markets. * Option/accessory. ECALL Emergency assistance with eCall3 Roadside Assistance4 Press the SOS button to contact a service centre, or the closest emergency call centre in an emergency situation. To summon help in case of illness, external threats to the car or passengers, the closest emergency call centre can be alerted manually by depressing the SOS button for at least 2 seconds. The emergency call centre is notified and told of the car's position3, etc., and attempts to establish verbal contact with the driver in order to agree what assistance is needed. Summon assistance if you have problems with the car by pressing the ON CALL button in the car's roof. Press the ON CALL button in the car's roof for at least 2 seconds if you have a puncture, run out of fuel or your battery runs out of charge, for example. Verbal contact is established with a roadside assistance company that can send help to the car. Related information • • eCall (p. 548) • Emergency assistance with eCall (p. 549) NOTE The SOS button is only designed for emergencies and must only be used in the event of an accident, illness or an external threat to the car and its passengers. The ON CALL button must be used in the event of problems with the car. Automatic collision alarm with eCall (p. 548) Related information • • eCall (p. 548) • Roadside Assistance (p. 549) Automatic collision alarm with eCall (p. 548) 3 Applies 4 Applies to certain markets. to certain markets. 549 WHEELS AND TYRES WHEELS AND TYRES Tyres New tyres The function of the tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear. The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs. Tyre economy • • The car is fitted with tyres according to the tyre information sticker found on the driver's side door pillar (between the front door and the rear door). WARNING A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car. Recommended tyres On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo original tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is therefore important that the new tyres also have this marking in order for the car's driving characteristics, comfort and fuel consumption to be maintained. 1 552 There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions. tion can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discolouration. Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre is then manufactured in week 07, year 2017. Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The func- Maintain the correct tyre pressure. Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and squealing tyres. • • • Tyre wear increases with speed. • The tyres must have the same direction of rotation during their entire service life. • When you change tyres, the tyres with the best tread must be fitted on the rear wheels to reduce the risk of oversteer during heavy braking. • If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes you can damage the tyres and/or wheel rims permanently. Correct wheel alignment is very important. Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy and travelling comfort. Tyre rotation The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly the tyres age and WHEELS AND TYRES wear. Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear. IMPORTANT Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and dark place, and should never be stored close to solvents, petrol, oils, etc. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front and rear wheels should be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km (approx. 3100 miles) and then at 10000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals. Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, then the least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels. Storing wheels and tyres When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted on wheel rims) they should be hung up or positioned lying on their sides on the floor. Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying on their sides or standing upright, but not hung up. • • Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 673) Recommendations for loading (p. 588) WARNING • Wheel rim size and tyre size for your Volvo are specified to meet stringent requirements for stability and driving characteristics. Unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size may have a negative effect on the car's stability and driving characteristics. • Any damage caused by the fitting of unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size is not covered by the new car warranty. Volvo accepts no liability for death, personal injury or any costs caused by such installations. Related information • • • Checking tyre pressure (p. 556) Tyres' rotation direction (p. 555) Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 556) • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 558) • • Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 572) Dimension designation for tyre (p. 554) * Option/accessory. 553 WHEELS AND TYRES Dimension designation for tyre Speed rating Designations for tyre dimension, load index and speed rating. The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres. Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol), must at least correspond with the car's top speed. The table below shows the maximum permitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The only exception to these regulations is winter tyres2, where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is selected, the car must not be driven more quickly than the tyre is rated for. For example, cars with Q rating tyres must be driven at speeds not exceeding 160 km/h (100 mph). The road conditions and applicable road traffic rules determine how quickly the car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres. Designation of dimensions All tyres have a dimension designation, such as: 235/45 R19 99 V. 235 45 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%) R Radial ply 19 Rim diameter in inches 99 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, tyre load index (LI) The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table. Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 240 km/h (149 mph).) Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on winter tyres) Load index T 190 km/h (118 mph) Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres. H 210 km/h (130 mph) V 240 km/h (149 mph) V 2 Both 554 Tyre width (mm) those with metal studs and those without. NOTE W 270 km/h (168 mph) Y 300 km/h (186 mph) WARNING The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI) and speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each respective engine variant are shown in the specifications, which can be found in the printed owner's manual. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat and be damaged. Related information • • • • Tyres (p. 552) Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 555) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 673) Minimum permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres (p. 674) WHEELS AND TYRES Dimension designation for wheel rim Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below. The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres. Tyres' rotation direction NOTE Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow. Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make. Related information • Tyres (p. 552) All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for example: 7.5Jx18x50.5. 7,5 Rim width in inches J Rim flange profile 18 Rim diameter in inches 50,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the hub) Related information • • • The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. • The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. • Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. • If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected. • Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding). Tyres (p. 552) Dimension designation for tyre (p. 554) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 673) 555 WHEELS AND TYRES Tread wear indicators on the tyres Checking tyre pressure Cold tyres Tread wear indicators show the status of the tyre's tread depth. Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driving stability, save fuel and extend the service life of the tyres. Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and driving characteristics. The tyre pressure must be checked when the tyres are cold. Tyres are considered cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding air. This temperature is normally reached when the car has been parked for at least three hours. A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16 inch), the tread will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow. Related information • 556 Tyres (p. 552) Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the recommended tyre pressure for cold tyres in order to maintain good tyre performance. Tyre pressure that is too low or too high may cause uneven wear on the tyres. WARNING • • Tyre pressure that is too low is the most common cause of tyre failure and may result in serious cracks in the tyre, the tread loosening or the tyre exploding, with unexpected loss of control of the car and increased risk of personal injury. Tyres with pressure that is too low reduce the load capacity of the car. After having driven approximately 1.6 km (1 mile) these tyres are considered as warm. If you have to drive further than this to inflate the tyres, first check and record the tyre pressure and inflate to a suitable tyre pressure when you arrive at the pump. When the outside temperature changes, the tyre pressure also changes. A decrease in temperature of 10 degrees causes the tyre pressure to decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre pressure regularly and adjust to the correct pressure, which is specified on the car's tyre information decal or certification label. If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres are warm then you must never release any air. The tyres are warm due to driving and it is normal for the pressure to increase above the recommended pressure for cold tyres. A warm tyre with tyre pressure equal to or below the recommendation for cold tyres may have a pressure that is far too low. WHEELS AND TYRES Related information • • • • Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 557) Recommended tyre pressure (p. 558) Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 558) Tyres (p. 552) Adjusting tyre pressure Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must therefore sometimes be adjusted in order to maintain the recommended tyre pressure. Use the recommended tyre pressure for cold tyres in order to maintain good tyre performance and even tread wear. NOTE To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tyre and then press the tyre pressure gauge firmly down onto the valve. 2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres. 3. Refit the dust cap. NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. 4. Check the tyres visually for any implanted nails or other objects that could puncture the tyre and cause leakage. 5. Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts, bumps or other irregularities. 6. Repeat this for all tyres, including the spare tyre*. NOTE If you have over-inflated, release air by pressing in the metal pin in the centre of the valve. Then check the pressure again using the tyre pressure gauge. Some spare tyres require a higher tyre pressure than other tyres. Check in the tyre pressure table or on the tyre pressure label. }} * Option/accessory. 557 WHEELS AND TYRES || Related information • • • • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 558) Checking tyre pressure (p. 556) Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 576) Recommended tyre pressure Tyre pressure monitoring system* The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions. The tyre pressure monitoring system3, gives a warning with an indicator symbol in the driver display when the pressure in one or more of the car's tyres is too low. The symbol illuminates to indicate low tyre pressure. Approved tyre pressures (p. 675) If there is a fault in the system the tyre pressure warning symbol flashes for approximately one minute and then remains illuminated. System description The decal displays the designation for the factory-fitted tyres on the car, as well as load limits and tyre pressure. Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures can be chosen for good fuel economy. However, the lower comfort pressures are recommended instead if improved noise and travelling comfort are desired. The tyre pressure monitoring system measures differences in rotation speed between the different wheels via the ABS system in order to be able to determine whether they have the correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with each other the system can determine whether one or more tyres have pressure that is too low. Related information • • 558 Checking tyre pressure (p. 556) Approved tyre pressures (p. 675) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES General information on the tyre monitoring system In the information below, the tyre monitoring system is referred to generically as TPMS. Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be checked once a month. When checking, the tyre should be cold and have the air pressure recommended by the car manufacturer specified on the tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If the car has tyres of a different size than that recommended by the manufacturer, find out what the correct air pressure level is for these. As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS), which shows when the air pressure in one or more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air pressure. Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which can cause a tyre failure. Low tyre pressure also reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life, and can affect car handling and stopping ability. Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for low tyre pressure 3 Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) has not been reached so that the indicator symbol illuminates. • Tyre pressure low Check Car Status The car is also equipped with a TPMS system fault indicator, which indicates when the system is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system fault indicator is combined with the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure. When the system detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display will flash for about one minute and then remain illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when the car is started until the fault has been rectified. When the symbol is illuminated, the system's ability to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be affected. • Tyre pressure system Temporarily app in center display unavailable • Tyre pressure system Service required To bear in mind • Always save a new tyre pressure in the system after changing a wheel or adjusting tyre pressure. • A TPMS system fault can occur for several reasons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from functioning correctly. If you change to tyres of a different size to the ones fitted at the factory, the system must be reset by storing a new tyre pressure for these tyres to avoid false warnings. • Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS after changing one or more tyres in order to ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly with TPMS. If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that the tyre pressure monitoring system does not work correctly due to the differences between the wheels. • The system does not replace the need for regular tyre inspection and maintenance. • It is not possible to switch off the tyre pressure monitoring system. Messages on the instrument panel When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the driver display and a message is shown. Check the tyre pressure in the Car Status app in the centre display. }} * Option/accessory. 559 WHEELS AND TYRES || WARNING • Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car. • The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance. Related information • • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 558) See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 561) • Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 562) • Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 560) Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* In order for the system for tyre pressure monitoring4 to work correctly, a reference value for the tyre pressure must be saved. This must take place every time the tyres are changed or the tyre pressure is changed so that the system can warn about low pressure correctly. For example, when driving with a heavy load or at high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre pressure should be adjusted in accordance with Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. The system is then reset by saving a new tyre pressure. Perform the following procedure to store a new tyre pressure as a reference value in the system: 1. Switch off the car. 2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres. 3. Start the car. 4. Open the Car Status app in the app view. 5. Press TPMS. 4 Indirect 560 NOTE The car must be stationary for the Store Pressure button to be selectable. 6. Press Store Pressure. 7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure in all four tyres has been checked and adjusted. 8. Drive the car until the new tyre pressure has been saved. The new tyre pressure is stored when the car is driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph). > When sufficient data has been collected for the system to be able to detect low tyre pressure, the animation showing storage progress disappears from the centre display. The system does not provide additional confirmation that a new tyre pressure has been saved. If storing fails, a message is shown: Storing pressure unsuccessful. Try again. If the car's ignition is switched off before the new tyre pressure has been saved then the procedure needs to be performed again. Allow the storing to finish within the same driving cycle to ensure that the new tyre pressure has been saved correctly. Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES WARNING The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odourless, but highly toxic. The procedure to save a new tyre pressure must therefore always be performed outdoors or in a workshop with exhaust extraction. Related information • • • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 558) See tyre pressure status in the centre display* With the system for tyre pressure monitoring5, tyre pressure status can be viewed in the centre display. Checking status Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph) are required for the system to become active. Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 557) 1. See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 561) 2. Tap on TPMS to show the status of the tyres. • Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 562) Status indication • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 558) Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) Driver display: Tyre pressure low Check Car Status app in center display The indicator symbol switches on to indicate that there is low tyre pressure in one or more tyres. See the Car Status app in the centre display for more information. Driver display: Tyre pressure system Temporarily unavailable The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is currently unavailable, activated shortly. Driver display: Tyre pressure system Service required The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is not working correctly, contact a workshopA. Open the Car Status app in the app view. The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software. 5 Indirect Below are some examples of the messages that can be shown for tyre pressure status and what they mean. A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. }} * Option/accessory. 561 WHEELS AND TYRES || Related information • Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 560) • Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 562) • • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 558) Car status (p. 602) Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure When the system for tyre pressure6 warns that tyre pressure is too low, action is required. Check and rectify the tyre pressure when the indicator symbol for the system is illuminated and the Tyre pressure low message is shown. 1. NOTE To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. Switch off the car. 2. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with a tyre pressure gauge. 3. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres. NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. 4. Always save a new tyre pressure in the system via the centre display after the tyre pressure has been adjusted. Note that the indicator symbol does not extinguish until the low tyre pressure has been rectified and storing a new tyre pressure has been started. 6 Indirect 562 WARNING • Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car. • The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance. Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES Related information • • • • • • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 558) Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 557) Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 560) When changing wheels Tool kit The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter wheels or a spare wheel. Follow the relevant instructions for removing and fitting wheels. Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel changes or similar are found in the car's cargo area. See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 561) When changing to another tyre dimension Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 558) Check that the tyre dimension is approved for use on the car. Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 576) Related information • • • • • • • Removing a wheel (p. 565) Fitting the wheels (p. 567) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 673) Tool kit (p. 563) Winter tyres (p. 570) Jack* Spare wheel* (p. 569) Tool for removing the plastic caps from the wheel bolts Wheel bolts (p. 565) Funnel for filling fluids Wheel wrench* and towing eye The foam block under the cargo area floor contains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool for removing the plastic caps from the wheel bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts. If the car is fitted with a spare wheel*, there is a jack and a wheel bolt wrench. }} * Option/accessory. 563 WHEELS AND TYRES || Related information • • • • When changing wheels (p. 563) Jack* (p. 564) Jack* IMPORTANT The jack can be used to raise the car, for example, to change to the spare wheel. • When the jack* is not in use it must be stored in its storage space under the cargo area floor. • The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 572) Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 482) The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space. Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If the car is equipped with the air suspension option then this function must be deactivated before the car is raised with the jack. Related information • • 564 Tool kit (p. 563) Raise the car (p. 605) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES Wheel bolts Related information Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the hubs. Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. • • Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts with a torque wrench. Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts. WARNING The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may mean that they are not attached equally as tightly. IMPORTANT The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. (103 foot-pound). Overtightening or loose tightening may damage the nuts and the bolts. Removing a wheel (p. 565) Fitting the wheels (p. 567) Removing a wheel Wheel changes must always be performed correctly. Instructions on how a wheel is undone and what is important to remember are provided below. IMPORTANT • When the jack* is not in use it must be stored in its storage space under the cargo area floor. • The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. Locking wheel bolts* In the foam block under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts. }} * Option/accessory. 565 WHEELS AND TYRES || WARNING • Apply the parking brake and set the gear selector in Park position (P). • Chock the wheels standing on the ground using solid wood blocks or large stones. • Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt. • Check that the jack is resting on a firm, level surface that is not slippery and is not slanted. • The jack must be correctly attached in the jack's bracket. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being changed in a trafficked location. 5. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench until the stop position as per the instructions. 2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear position P, or engage first gear if the car has a manual gearbox. Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If the car is equipped with air suspension, this must be disabled before the car is raised with a jack*. 3. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted in the foam block. IMPORTANT The towing eye must be screwed into the wheel bolt wrench* as far as possible. • Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point. • Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. • If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place. • Use a jack designed for the car when changing tyres. Use supports to secure the car for all other work. Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts. Never crawl under the car or reach under with a part of your body when it is raised on a jack. 4. Chock in front of and behind the wheels that remain on the ground. Use, for example, heavy wooden blocks or large stones. • 566 1. 6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel bolts with the intended tool. 7. With the car still on the ground, use the wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing downwards (anticlockwise). * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES 8. When raising the car, it is important that the jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody. The triangle markings in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the jacking/lifting points. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess for the jack at each point. 11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far away from the side of the car as possible, at which point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the direction of the car. 12. Raise the car high enough to allow the wheel to be removed to move freely. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel. Fitting the wheels Wheel changes must always be performed correctly. Instructions on how a wheel is attached and what is important to remember are provided below. IMPORTANT • When the jack* is not in use it must be stored in its storage space under the cargo area floor. • The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. Related information 9. Position the jack on level, firm and nonslippery ground under the jacking point that will be used. 10. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so that it makes contact with the car's jacking point. Check that the head of the jack (or the lift arms at a workshop) is correctly positioned in the jacking point so that the bump in the centre of the head fits into the jacking point hole and the base is positioned vertically below the jacking point. Settings for level control* (p. 450) • • • • • Raise the car (p. 605) • Fitting the wheels (p. 567) When changing wheels (p. 563) Jack* (p. 564) Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 482) }} * Option/accessory. 567 WHEELS AND TYRES || WARNING • Apply the parking brake and set the gear selector in Park position (P). • Chock the wheels standing on the ground using solid wood blocks or large stones. • Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt. • Check that the jack is resting on a firm, level surface that is not slippery and is not slanted. • The jack must be correctly attached in the jack's bracket. • Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point. • Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. • If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place. • • The car needs to be raised high enough so that the wheel to be loosened can roll freely. 1. Clean the surfaces between wheel and hub. WARNING 2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly. The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may mean that they are not attached equally as tightly. Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts. 3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate. NOTE 4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 foot-pound). Check the tightening torque with a torque wrench. • • • • • • 5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts. • 568 • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. Related information Use a jack designed for the car when changing tyres. Use supports to secure the car for all other work. Never crawl under the car or reach under with a part of your body when it is raised on a jack. 6. Check the tyre pressure and save the new tyre pressure in the system for tyre pressure monitoring*. When changing wheels (p. 563) Raise the car (p. 605) Jack* (p. 564) Tool kit (p. 563) Removing a wheel (p. 565) Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 560) Checking tyre pressure (p. 556) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES Spare wheel* The spare wheel, the Temporary Spare type, can be used to temporarily replace a punctured normal wheel. The spare tyre is only designed for temporary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as possible. The car's driving characteristics can be changed when the spare wheel is used and the ground clearance is reduced. Do not wash the car in an automatic car wash if the Temporary Spare is being used. Recommended tyre pressure must be maintained regardless of the position of the temporary spare wheel on the car. WARNING • Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on the car. • The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel. • The car may have different driving characteristics while driving with the spare wheel. The spare wheel must be replaced with a normal wheel as soon as possible. • The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel, which affects the car's ground clearance. Look out for high kerbs and do not machine-wash the car. • Follow the manufacturer's recommended tyre pressure for the spare wheel. • On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on the rear axle can be disengaged. • If the spare wheel is fitted to the front axle then it is not possible to use snow chains at the same time. • The spare wheel must not be repaired. If the spare tyre is damaged then a new one can be purchased from a Volvo dealer. IMPORTANT The car must not be driven with tyres of different sizes or with a spare tyre other than the one supplied with the car. Using different-sized wheels can cause serious damage to the car's transmission. Related information • • When changing wheels (p. 563) Recommended tyre pressure (p. 558) * Option/accessory. 569 WHEELS AND TYRES Handling the spare wheel Storing the punctured tyre Winter tyres Follow these instructions for handling the spare wheel. 1. Winter tyres are adapted for winter road conditions. Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels. Taking out the spare wheel Screw back the mounting screw that held the spare wheel in place. IMPORTANT Do not attempt to unscrew the lower part of the mounting screw if it is secured in the body. There is a risk it may break. If the lower attachment of the mounting screw does loosen from the body underneath the spare wheel, refit it in the hole and turn clockwise to reattach it. 2. Put the tools back in their right place in the foam block. The illustration is generic and appearance may differ. The spare wheel is located under the cargo area floor in the spare wheel well with the outside down. The spare wheel is secured with the same bolt that attaches in the body. The foam block contains all the tools for changing a wheel. 1. Fold up the cargo area floor. 2. Undo the retaining screw. 3. Lift out the spare wheel. 3. Then fold down the cargo area floor and place the punctured tyre in the cargo area. Related information • • • NOTE Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable. Tips for changing to winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed, mark which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right. Spare wheel* (p. 569) Studded tyres Tool kit (p. 563) Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km (300-600 miles), so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life. Removing a wheel (p. 565) NOTE The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country. 570 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES Tread depth Snow chains Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm (0.15 inches). Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can help to improve the traction in winter conditions. Volvo recommends that snow chains are not used on wheel dimensions greater than 7.5x18 ET 50.5 215/55. Related information • • • • When changing wheels (p. 563) Winter driving (p. 455) Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 556) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 673) WARNING Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow chains are permitted. IMPORTANT Snow chains can be used on the car with the following restrictions: • Always follow the mounting instructions from the manufacturer carefully. Fit the chains as tensioned as possible and tension them at regular intervals. • Snow chains must only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). • In some cases, snow chains must NOT be used, such as if accessory, aftermarket or "special" tyres and wheels are fitted that have a different size to the original tyres and wheels. Sufficient distance must be maintained between the chains and brakes, suspension and body components. • Check local regulations with regard to using snow chains before fitting them. • Never exceed the chain manufacturer's specified maximum speed. You must never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under any circumstances. • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when driving with snow chains. • Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres. In the event of uncertainty about the show chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to the car and lead to an accident. }} 571 WHEELS AND TYRES || • • Driving with snow chains may have a negative effect on the car's driving characteristics. Avoid fast or sharp turns, as well as braking with locked wheels. Some types of chain that are firmly tensioned affect brake components and must therefore NOT be used. You can obtain more information on snow chains from a Volvo dealer. Related information • Winter driving (p. 455) Emergency puncture repair kit The emergency puncture repair kit7, is used to seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust the air pressure in the tyre. Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have the puncture repair kit. The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works as a temporary repair. NOTE The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres with tread punctures but has limited ability to seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do not use the emergency puncture repair kit on tyres displaying larger slits, cracks or similar damage. Sealing fluid expiry date The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste. Related information NOTE The compressor is intended for temporary emergency puncture repair and is approved by Volvo. • • • Using a puncture repair kit (p. 573) Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 576) Tyres (p. 552) Location The puncture repair kit is located in the foam block under the floor in the cargo area. 7 572 Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES Using a puncture repair kit The emergency puncture repair kit can be used to seal a puncture. Sealing fluid bottle (TMK8) Overview Switch Connecting WARNING Please keep the following points in mind when using the tyre sealing system: • The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rubber latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These substances are harmful if swallowed. • The contents of this bottle may cause allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the respiratory tract, the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes. Precautions: Electrical cable Air hose Pressure reducing valve Protective cap Label, maximum permitted speed NOTE Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in. • • • Store out of the reach of children. • Wash thoroughly after handling. 8 Temporary Mobility Kit Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with the skin. If sealing fluid has come into contact with your clothes, remove them. First aid: • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting Bottle holder (orange cap) Pressure gauge Harmful if ingested. }} 573 WHEELS AND TYRES || the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. • • • Inhalation: Move the exposed person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical attention. Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention. Disposal: Dispose of this material and its container at a hazardous or special waste collection point. WARNING • • 1. Do not remove the bottle when the puncture repair kit is being used. Do not remove the air hose when the puncture repair kit is being used. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location. If the puncture was caused by a nail or similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to seal the hole. 9 An 574 authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted speed that is affixed on one side of the compressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a reminder to observe the speed limit. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. 3. Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and locate the electrical cable and the air hose. 4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the compressor, and unscrew the cork from the sealing fluid bottle. 5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bottle holder. The bottle and the bottle holder are equipped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder again. The bottle must be removed at a workshop9. WARNING Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. 6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed in. 7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car. NOTE Make sure that none of the other 12 V sockets is in use when the compressor is operating. WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running. WARNING Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation. WHEELS AND TYRES 8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On). WARNING Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre. NOTE When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds. 10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is 3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high. WARNING If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre. 11. Switch off the compressor and detach the electrical cable. 12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and refit the dust cap on the tyre. 9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes. IMPORTANT The compressor must not be operated for longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating. NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. 13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area. 14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km (2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check. WARNING Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during the first few rotations of the tyre. Make sure that nobody is standing near the car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto them when the car is driven away. The distance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet). 15. Follow-up inspection Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor must be switched off. }} 575 WHEELS AND TYRES || 16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge. • • Maximum mileage with tyres containing sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles). If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar (19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high. WARNING Check the tyre pressure regularly. Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid. The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that these replacements be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. 576 WARNING NOTE The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management. Related information • • • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 558) Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 572) Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 576) Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit. 1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and take out the electrical cable and the air hose. 2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed in. 3. Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car. WARNING Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation. WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running. WHEELS AND TYRES 4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On). IMPORTANT Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes. Related information • • • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 558) Using a puncture repair kit (p. 573) Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 572) 5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pillar. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high. 6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and the electrical cable. 7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre. NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. NOTE The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management. 577 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Passenger compartment interior Rear seat Related information • • • • • • Overview of the passenger compartment's interior and storage locations. Front seat Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 581) Electrical sockets (p. 583) Using the glovebox (p. 586) Sun visors (p. 588) Tunnel console (p. 581) Connecting a device via USB port (p. 510) Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder* in the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the front seat backrest and also electrical sockets in the tunnel console. Storage compartment in the door panel, glovebox and sun visor. WARNING Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision. IMPORTANT Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for example, are easily scratched by metal objects. Do not place keys, phones and other items on sensitive surfaces. Storage spaces with cup holder, electrical socket and USB port in the tunnel console. 580 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Tunnel console WARNING The tunnel console is located between the front seats. Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision. Using the cigarette lighter* The cigarette lighter can be a complement to the 12 V socket in the front section of the tunnel console. IMPORTANT Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for example, are easily scratched by metal objects. Do not place keys, phones and other items on sensitive surfaces. Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch is opened/closed with a push on the handle. NOTE One of the detectors for the alarm* is located under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in the cup holder, since this may trigger the alarm. Storage compartment with cup holder and 12 V socket. Storage compartment and USB port under the armrest. Climate controls for the rear seat climate functions* or storage compartment. Related information • • • • Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 581) Passenger compartment interior (p. 580) Electrical sockets (p. 583) Climate controls (p. 211) Cigarette lighter in tunnel console, front seat. 1. Press the button on the lighter. > The button jumps up when the lighter starts to glow. 2. Pull the lighter out from the socket and use the glow to give a light. 3. Refit the lighter in the socket. WARNING Take care when the lighter is activated so that the glowing part does not, for example, damage the interior or injure passengers. }} * Option/accessory. 581 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || Related information • 582 Passenger compartment interior (p. 580) LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Electrical sockets High voltage socket* There are two 12 V electrical sockets and one 230 V electrical socket* in the tunnel console, and there is one 12 V electrical socket* in the cargo area. If a problem occurs with an electrical socket, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 12 V electrical socket 12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat. Electrical socket in the tunnel console, rear seat. The high-voltage socket* can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as chargers or laptops. Status indication, high-voltage socket An LED1 lamp on the socket indicates the status of the socket: 12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat. The 12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones. 1 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 12 V electrical socket in cargo area*. }} * Option/accessory. 583 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || Status indication Reason Action Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None. Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compartment is too warm). Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool down before reinserting the plug. The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or continuously) or is defective. None. The accessory cannot be connected to the socket. The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the socket. The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest ignition position I. The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery. Extinguished lamp Related information • • 584 Passenger compartment interior (p. 580) Using electrical sockets (p. 585) LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Using electrical sockets 12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones. High-voltage sockets* can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as chargers and portable computers. For the sockets to supply current, the car's electrical system must be set in the lowest ignition position I. The sockets are then active as long as the starter battery level does not become too low. If the engine is switched off and the car is locked, the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is switched off and the car is not locked, or is locked with double lock temporarily deactivated, then the sockets continue to be active for a further seven minutes. 2 LED (Light Emitting Diode) NOTE Remember that use of the electrical socket with the engine switched off entails a risk of discharging the starter battery, which can limit functionality. Accessories that are connected to the electrical sockets may be activated even when the car's electrical system is disconnected or if preconditioning is used. For this reason, disconnect the connectors when they are not in use in order to avoid the starter battery being discharged. Using 12 V sockets 1. 2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up the cover (cargo area) when the socket is not in use or if the socket is left unattended. IMPORTANT Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per socket. WARNING • Do not use accessories with large or heavy connectors - they can damage the socket or come loose when driving. • Do not use accessories that can cause interference to the car's radio receiver or electrical system for example. • Position the accessory so that it is not at risk of injuring the driver or passengers in the event of heavy braking or collision. • Keep an eye on connected accessories as they can generate heat that can burn passengers or the interior. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold down the cover (cargo area) in front of the socket and plug in the accessory's connector. Using high-voltage sockets 1. Pull down the socket cover and insert the accessory's plug. > The LED2 lamp on the socket indicates the status. 2. Check that the lamp is illuminated with a steady green light - only then is current available at the socket. }} * Option/accessory. 585 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || 3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the plug - do not pull on the cable. WARNING Pull up the cover when the socket is not being used or the socket is left unattended. IMPORTANT • Only use accessories that are undamaged and fault-free. The accessories must have a CE marking, UL marking or an equivalent safety marking. • Accessories must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with connectors designed for the socket. • Never allow sockets, connectors or accessories to come into contact with water or other liquids. Do not touch or use the socket if it appears to be damaged or has come into contact with water or other liquid. • Do not connect junction sockets, adapters or extension cables to the socket as these can override the socket's safety features. Maximum socket output is 150 W. WARNING Never modify or repair the high-voltage socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. • The socket is equipped with a protective cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or damages the socket preventing the cover from doing its job. Do not leave children in the car unsupervised when the socket is active. Using the glovebox The glovebox is located on the passenger side. The printed owner's manual and maps can be kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also space for a pen and card holder. Locking and unlocking the glovebox* The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the accompanying key. Failure to follow the advice given above can lead to severe or fatal electric shocks. Related information • • 586 Electrical sockets (p. 583) Passenger compartment interior (p. 580) * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT The key's designated storage space. The figure is schematic - the design may vary. The figure is schematic - the design may vary. The figure is schematic - the design may vary. Locking the glovebox: Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder. Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise. Activating cooling. Deactivating cooling. – Pull out the key. – Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order. Using the glovebox as a cooled area* Activate or deactivate the cooling by moving the control to the end position toward the passenger compartment/glovebox. Related information • • Passenger compartment interior (p. 580) Private locking (p. 277) The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g. drinks or food. The cooling works when the climate control system is active (i.e. when the car is set in ignition position II or when the engine is running). * Option/accessory. 587 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Sun visors Cargo area Recommendations for loading There are sun visors in the roof in front of the driver seat and the front seat passenger seat which can be folded down and angled out to the side when necessary. The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it possible to transport and secure large objects. By folding down the backrests in the rear seat, the cargo area can become quite spacious. Use load retaining eyelets or bag holders to secure the load, and the extendable cargo cover* to conceal the load if desired. There are a number of things that are important to bear in mind when loading the car. Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. WARNING The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area floor. Related information • • • • Recommendations for loading (p. 588) Bag hooks (p. 590) The car’s driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load. Loading in the cargo area Good things to remember when loading: • Position the load firmly against the rear seat's backrest. • The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g. cards or tickets. Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests. • Related information Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery. • Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings. The figure is schematic - the design may vary. The mirror lighting* is switched on automatically when the guard is lifted up. • Passenger compartment interior (p. 580) Load retaining eyelets (p. 591) Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 592) WARNING A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds) can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds). 588 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT WARNING Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised. WARNING Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants. Related information Roof load and loading on load carriers • • Load retaining eyelets (p. 591) • Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 591) • Roof load and loading on load carriers (p. 589) For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers that Volvo have developed are recommended. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey. Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo retailers. • Level control* and shock absorption (p. 449) • Weights (p. 661) Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers. Lowering the backrests in the rear seat (p. 192) • Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom. • Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps. • If the load is longer than the car at the front, e.g. a canoe or kayak, fit the towing eye to its front socket and attach the bungee to this. • The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load. • Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering. Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft. Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off. Increasing the space in the cargo area To expand the cargo area and simplify loading, the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down. A through-load hatch in the rear seat can be folded down for carrying long and narrow loads. }} * Option/accessory. 589 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || WARNING The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. Follow the car's specifications with regard to weights and maximum permitted load. Bag hooks Under the floor hatch* Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading their contents across the cargo area. Along the sides Related information • • Recommendations for loading (p. 588) Weights (p. 661) There are two bag hooks and an elastic strap3 in the cover, which is part of the floor hatch in the cargo area. The strap can be fitted in four different positions. There are two bag hooks in the side panel on each side of the cargo area. IMPORTANT The bag hooks may be loaded with a maximum of 5 kg (11 lbs). Lift up the cover in order to use the bag hooks. Fasten the bags in a suitable position with the enclosed elastic strap. If the bags have handles and are a suitable height - hang them in the hooks. Related information • • • 3 It 590 Recommendations for loading (p. 588) Using the glovebox (p. 586) Fitting and removing the safety net* (p. 595) is possible to reorder additional elastic straps at a Volvo dealer. * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT • • Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 592) Fitting and removing safety grilles* (p. 594) Load retaining eyelets Through-load hatch in the rear seat Use the load retaining eyelets to attach straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area. The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis. WARNING Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking. Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps. Related information • • Recommendations for loading (p. 588) Weights (p. 661) The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. 1. In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and fold down the hatch. 2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat. If the private locking function is used then the through-load hatch must be closed. Related information • • • Recommendations for loading (p. 588) Private locking (p. 277) Load retaining eyelets (p. 591) * Option/accessory. 591 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Fitting and removing cargo cover* Removing cargo cover Operating cargo cover* In the extended position, the cargo cover prevents visual access to the cargo area. In retracted position: There are two extended positions for the cargo cover - a full-cover position and a loading position, where it is partially extended to make it easier to reach further into the cargo area. 1. Fitting cargo cover Depress the button on one of the retracted cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that end. 2. Angle the cover up/out carefully. > The other end piece loosens automatically and the cover can be lifted out of the cargo area. Related information • • Operating cargo cover* (p. 592) Recommendations for loading (p. 588) Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in the recess in the side panel in the cargo area. Then insert the other end piece in the recess in the side panel on the opposite side. Press down the end pieces on both sides one by one. > When a "click" is heard and the red marking on each end piece has disappeared, the cargo cover is attached check that it is affixed securely. 592 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Full-cover position IMPORTANT Do not load objects on top of the cargo cover. 2. Release the handle so that the attachment pins engage. > The cover is locked in the full-cover position. Loading mode IMPORTANT From the full-cover position: The cargo cover may obscure the view to the rear when in the loading position. Make sure the cargo cover is fully extended or fully retracted when driving. – Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out to the end position. Retracting 1. From the full-cover position: Hook the attachment pins into the recesses at the cargo area's rear pillars. > The cargo cover is locked in the fullcover position. Lift up the handle and pull it backward to disengage the cargo cover's attachment pins and then release. From loading position: Press the cargo cover's handle section upwards slightly. > The cover goes up until it stops in the loading position. Returning to full-cover position from loading position: 1. Cargo cover in full-cover position. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover down to the end position. To facilitate, angle up the handle slightly so that the attachment pins pass the stops. Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position. Lift up the handle and pull it backward to disengage the attachment pins and then release. 2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins outside of the side panels until it stops in the retracted position. Related information • Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 592) * Option/accessory. 593 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Fitting and removing safety grilles* The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the cargo area from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment under heavy braking. The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils Volvo's strength requirements. Installation 3. IMPORTANT The safety grille must only be used in the rear position (behind the rear seat) described here. Before first installing the safety grille, the existing plastic roof mountings must be replaced with steel roof mountings. Volvo recommends that replacing roof mountings is performed at an authorised Volvo workshop or retailer. 1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward. Position the safety grille's brackets on the roof mountings. The next step is facilitated if two people hold the safety grille in the right position. 2. Make sure that the safety grille is turned in the right direction. Lift in the safety grille through one of the rear side doors. For safety reasons, the safety grille must always be attached and anchored correctly. WARNING Under no circumstances may anybody remain in the cargo area while the car is moving. This is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident. 594 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Related information 4. • • Recommendations for loading (p. 588) Load retaining eyelets (p. 591) Fitting and removing the safety net* The safety net prevents loads from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking. The safety net is fitted into four mounting points. Insert the supplied screw and tighten using the supplied 6 mm Allen key. Repeat on the other side. Recommended tightening torque: 20 Nm (15 foot-pounds). > Check that the safety grille is properly fitted. 5. Restore the backrest to the upright position. For more information about the tools required and methods for fitting/removal, see the installation instructions that were included with the initial purchase. IMPORTANT The protective grille cannot be folded up or down when a cargo cover is fitted. For reasons of safety, the safety net must always be fastened and anchored as described below. The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can be secured two different locations in the car: • • Rear fitting - behind the rear seat. Front fitting - behind the front seats. }} * Option/accessory. 595 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || WARNING Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net. Fitting the safety net 3. Hook the net's second attachment hook to the roof bracket on the opposite side. 4. The telescopically sprung attachment hooks make it easier to fit. Take care to press forward the net's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position. WARNING It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the puller-straps are hooked in properly. Damaged safety nets must not be used. Rear fitting. For rear fitting: NOTE With forward mounting, the safety net is most easily mounted via one of the rear doors. 1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that the split upper rod in the net is locked in its extended position. 2. Hook one retaining hook of the net into the front or rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap locks turned towards you. 596 With the net fitted in the rear roof mountings, hook the safety net's puller-straps into the front load retaining eyelets in the cargo area. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring straps. Removing the safety net The safety net can be easily removed and folded up. 1. Front fitting. For front fitting: With the net fitted in the front roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps into the outer eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved forward slightly. Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat and backrest hard against the net when they are moved back again only adjust until the seat or backrest makes contact with the net. Reduce safety net tension by pressing the button in the anchoring strap lock and feeding out a little of the anchoring strap on each side. First aid kit* The first aid kit contains first aid equipment. Store the first aid kit in an appropriate place in the cargo area, e.g. in the space on the righthand side. The first aid kit has Velcro straps and can be attached directly to the panel. Related information • Cargo area (p. 588) 2. Press in the catches and detach both of the anchoring strap's hooks. 3. Undo the upper attachments and release the net from the roof mountings. 4. Press the red button on the rod to enable folding and then roll up the net. Store the net in its case. Related information • • Recommendations for loading (p. 588) Load retaining eyelets (p. 591) IMPORTANT If a seat or backrest is pushed backwards hard into the safety net, the net and roof mounts may be damaged. * Option/accessory. 597 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Warning triangle Use the warning triangle to warn other road users if the car is stationary in traffic. Also activate the hazard warning flashers. Storage spaces The warning triangle is located in the compartment on the inside of the tailgate. Folding up the warning triangle Grasp the grip on the tailgate's panel to open the hatch for the warning triangle. Remove the warning triangle from the case, unfold it and put the ends together. Fold out the warning triangle's support legs. Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic. Make sure that the warning triangle and case are properly secured in their storage space and that the hatch is fully closed after use. Related information • • 598 Cargo area (p. 588) Hazard warning flashers (p. 158) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature that can provide the highest quality of service. IMPORTANT For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Related information • • • 600 Car status (p. 602) Book service and repair (p. 603) Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket (p. 40) • Servicing the climate control system (p. 607) • • Brake system maintenance (p. 425) Engine compartment overview (p. 609) Data transfer between car and workshop via Wi-Fi Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi network for data transfer between your car and the workshop. Your workshop visit will be simpler and more efficient when the transfer of diagnostic information and software can take place via the workshop's network. During a workshop visit, your service technician may want to connect your car to the workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform fault-tracing and software download. For this type of communication, the car only connects to a workshop's network. It is not possible to connect the car to another Wi-Fi network, such as at home, in the same way as to a workshop's network. Connection with the remote control key Connection is normally handled by the service technician who then uses the remote control key buttons. That's why it's important to take a key with buttons with you for the workshop visit. Press three times on the lock button on the remote control key to connect the car to the workshop's network via Wi-Fi. When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi network, the symbol appears in the centre display. WARNING The car must not be driven when connected to the workshop's networks and systems. Related information • Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 601) • Book service and repair (p. 603) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Download Center Several of the car's systems can be updated from the centre display with an online car1. The Download Centre app is started from app view in the centre display and enables: Managing system updates via the Download Centre NOTE Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services. Functions for online car and infotainment can be updated via the Download Centre. Updates can be made one at a time or all at once. Searching for update • • • If an update is available, the message New software updates available is shown in the centre display's status bar. searching for and updating system software updating map data for Sensus Navigation* downloading, updating and uninstalling apps. Related information • Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 601) • • • • • Downloading apps (p. 495) Updating apps (p. 496) Deleting apps (p. 496) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) 1 Data 2 Data NOTE An update can be interrupted when the ignition is switched off and the car is left. However, the update does not have to be completed before the car is left, this is because the update is resumed the next time the car is used. For system updates to be possible, the car must be connected to the Internet2. – Go to Download Centre in the centre display's app view. > If no search has been performed since the last time the infotainment system was started, a search is performed. No search is performed if a software installation is in progress. A number on System updates shows how many updates are available. One tap shows a list of the updates that can be installed in the car. is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. Update all system software – Select Install all at the bottom of the list. If no list is desired, then the Install all option can be selected at System updates. Update individual system software programs – Select Install for the software required. }} * Option/accessory. 601 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Cancelling software download – Tap on X in the activity indicator that has replaced Install at the start of the download. Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled. Car status The car's general status can be shown in the centre display along with the opportunity to book service3. The Car Status app is started from app view in the centre display and has four tabs: • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) • Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 463) Deactivating the background search for software update Automatic search for software updates is activated when the car is delivered from the factory, but this function can be deactivated. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press System Download Centre. 3. Deselect Auto Software Update. Related information • • • Download Center (p. 601) Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) 3 Applies to certain markets. 4 AdBlue Applies to cars with 602 • Messages - status messages • Status - checking engine oil level and AdBlue level4 • TPMS - checking the tyre pressure • Appointments - appointment information and car information3. Related information • Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 104) • Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 611) • • • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 558) Book service and repair (p. 603) Sending car information to a workshop (p. 604) diesel engines. * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Book service and repair5 2. Press Appointments. This service provides a way to send a booking request for service and workshop visit directly in the car. When it is time for service, and in some cases when the car is in need of repair, a message will appear in the driver display and at the top of the centre display. The service date is determined by how much time has passed, hours that the engine has been running, or distance driven since the last service. 3. Press Request appointment. Before the service can be used • • • Create a Volvo ID and register it to the car. Select the Volvo retailer you would like to contact by going to www.volvocars.com and logging in. To send and receive booking information, the car must be connected to the Internet6. Book a service Fill in a booking request when so required or when a message indicating that the car needs a service or repair is shown. 1. Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display. 5 Applies to certain markets. 6 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, 7 This time frame may vary depending on market. 8 Applies to Sensus Navigation*. 4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled in. 5. Make sure that the desired Workshop is filled in. The booking enquiry sent from the car includes car information that facilitates workshop planning. The retailer comes back with a digital booking proposal. Information about your dealer is also available in the car so that you can contact your workshop. 6. Fill in the field Tap to write information to the workshop if there is anything you would like done during the workshop visit or any other important information to your workshop. When the car has received an appointment suggestion, a message will be shown at the top of the centre display. 7. Press Send appointment request. > You will receive an appointment suggestion via e-mail within a couple of days7. 2. If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap on Accept. Otherwise, tap on Send new proposal or Decline. You will also receive the same communication via e-mail and when you go to www.volvocars.com and log in. In certain markets, once you have sent the appointment request, the message that the car needs service is extinguished in the driver display. 8. Tap on Cancel request to cancel your request. Accept the appointment suggestion 1. Tap the message. For certain markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled appointment time as it approaches and the navigation system8 can also guide you to the workshop when the time comes. Related information • • Car status (p. 602) Sending car information to a workshop (p. 604) and this may involve a cost. }} * Option/accessory. 603 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) Sending car information to a workshop9 • • Volvo ID (p. 28) It is possible to send information for the car at any time, e.g. if you book a workshop appointment and want to help your workshop by providing them with better data so that your visit can be planned. Sending car information is not the same as booking a service appointment. 1. Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display. Internet-connected car* (p. 527) 2. Press Appointments. 3. Press Send car data. > A message that vehicle data are being sent is shown at the top of the centre display. You can cancel data transmission by tapping the X in the activity indicator. The information is sent via the car's Internet connection10. This car information can be accessed by any retailer if they have the car's identification number (VIN11). 9 Applies to certain markets. 10 Data is transferred (data traffic) 11 Vehicle Identification Number. 604 Car information content The data sent is the last information saved (the last time the car was running) and includes information in the following areas: • • • • • • • • service requirement time since last service function status fluid levels meter reading the car's vehicle identification number (VIN11) the car's software version the car's diagnostics data. Related information Book service and repair (p. 603) • • • Car status (p. 602) • Internet-connected car* (p. 527) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 112) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Raise the car When raising the car, it is important that the jack is fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody. Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If the car is equipped with air suspension, this must be disabled before the car is raised. WARNING If the car is raised using a workshop jack, this must be placed beneath one of the four jacking points. Take care to position the workshop jack so that the car cannot slip off. Make sure that the jack plate is fitted with a rubber guard so that the car remains stable and is not damaged. Always use axle stands or similar. NOTE Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment. The normal car jack is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. }} * Option/accessory. 605 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red). Related information • • • 606 Removing a wheel (p. 565) Jack* (p. 564) Settings for level control* (p. 450) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Servicing the climate control system Cars with R1234yf refrigerant WARNING The air conditioning system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop. The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system. Troubleshooting and repair The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used during leak detection. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. Cars with R134a refrigerant Related information • WARNING Volvo service programme (p. 600) Head up display when replacing the windscreen* Cars with head-up display are equipped with a special type of windscreen that meets the requirements for displaying the projected image. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop when replacing the windscreen. The correct version of the windscreen must be fitted in order that the head-up display's graphics shall be displayed correctly. Related information • • Head-up display* (p. 139) Cleaning the head up display* (p. 638) The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop. * Option/accessory. 607 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Opening and closing the bonnet Close the bonnet The bonnet can be opened using the handle in the passenger compartment and a handle under the bonnet. 1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall from its own weight. 2. When the bonnet stops against the lock catch, push the bonnet to close it completely. Open the bonnet WARNING Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury. Sweep from left to right in the opening under the bonnet, move the handle up and to the side to release the bonnet from the bonnet lock's catch and lift the bonnet. Warning - bonnet not closed Pull the handle near the foot pedals to release the bonnet from its fully closed position. WARNING Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed. The bonnet must engage at both sides audibly. When the bonnet is released, a warning symbol and graphics in the driver display will light up and an acoustic reminder will sound. If the car starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will repeat. NOTE If the warning symbol is lit or the warning signal is heard despite the bonnet being closed properly, contact an authorised Volvo workshop. Bonnet not completely closed. 608 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Engine compartment overview WARNING The overview shows some service-related components. Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after the engine has been switched off. Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. Bonnet completely closed. WARNING The ignition system works at a very high and hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system must always be in ignition position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment. WARNING Never drive with an open bonnet! If this symbol is visible – or something else indicates that the bonnet is not fully closed while driving – stop immediately and close it properly. Related information • • 12 Engine compartment overview (p. 609) Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 51) Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling. The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant. Coolant expansion tank Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the engine is hot. Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driver's side) Washer fluid filler pipe12 Central electrical unit Air filter Engine oil filler pipe Related information • • • • Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 608) Filling washer fluid (p. 653) Topping up coolant (p. 612) Fuses in engine compartment (p. 622) }} 609 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE • • Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 611) Ignition positions (p. 420) Engine oil An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals and warranty can be applied. If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regular basis and the level falls too low, there is a risk that this will cause serious damage to the engine. IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. Volvo recommends: An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected. If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims any liability for any such damage. Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. 610 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Volvo uses different systems to warn about the oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event of low oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the driver display's warning symbol for low oil is used. Other variants have an pressure oil level sensor, when the driver is informed via the driver display's warning symbol and display texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information. Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than the one specified. Related information • Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 611) • • Engine oil — specifications (p. 665) 13 14 Checking and filling with engine oil The oil level is detected with the electronic oil level sensor. WARNING If this symbol is shown together with the message Engine oil level Service required, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil level may be too high. IMPORTANT Filler pipe.13,14 In some cases, oil may need to be topped up between service intervals. No action with regard to engine oil level needs to be taken until a message is shown in the driver display. Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 666) Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick. The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant. If this symbol is shown together with a message about low oil level, such as Engine oil level low Refill 1 litre for example, then only fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart). WARNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire. See oil level in the centre display The oil level is visualised using the electronic oil level gauge in the centre display when the car has been started. The oil level should be checked regularly. }} 611 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || 1. Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display. NOTE If the right conditions for measuring the oil level (time after engine shutdown, the car's inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not met, then the message No value available will be shown in the centre display. This does not mean that there is something wrong in the car's systems. 2. Press Status to show the oil level. Related information • • Graphics for oil level in the centre display. NOTE The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km (approx. 20 miles) and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched off and on level ground before the oil level indication is correct. 612 • • • Engine oil (p. 610) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 666) Engine oil — specifications (p. 665) Ignition positions (p. 420) Car status (p. 602) Topping up coolant The coolant cools the internal combustion engine to the correct operating temperature. The heat that is transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment. When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate. If there is coolant under the car, if there is coolant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx. 2 quarts) have been filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of engine damage due to a defective cooling system when attempting to start the car. WARNING The coolant may be very hot. Never open the cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up is required, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to allow any overpressure to disappear. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE IMPORTANT • Harmful if ingested. May cause organ (kidney) damage. • Use ready-mixed coolant as recommended by Volvo. If concentrated liquid is used, make sure that the ratio is 50 % coolant to 50 % water of an approved quality. • • Coolant expansion tank. Open the lid on the plastic cover. Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if necessary. The coolant level must not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion tank. Do not mix different coolants. Only new coolant should be used when replacing major cooling system components to ensure the system has sufficient corrosion protection. • The engine must only be run with a well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head. • A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system. Reinstall the parts in reverse order. Related information • • Engine compartment overview (p. 609) Coolant — specifications (p. 667) 613 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Bulb replacement This car is equipped only with LED16 lamps and therefore no replaceable bulbs. Contact a workshop15 if a fault occurs in the lighting. If a fault occurs in LED16 lamps, the entire lamp unit usually must be replaced. NOTE For information about bulbs not covered in this Owner's Manual, contact a Volvo dealer or a certified Volvo service technician. NOTE Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time. 16 15 614 LED (Light Emitting Diode) An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Starter battery The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor. WARNING • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode. • Do not connect the jump leads to any fuel system component or any moving part. Be careful of hot engine parts. • The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. The starter battery is a 12 V battery, designed for the carbon dioxide reducing functions Start/stop and regenerative charging, and to support the functionality of the car's different systems. • If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately. The service life and function of the starter battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc. • The starter battery is used to start up the electrical system and drive the starter motor as well as other electrical equipment in the car. The starter battery should be replaced by a workshop17. The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. Never smoke near the battery. Charging points • Never disconnect the starter battery when the engine is running. When connecting an external starter battery or battery charger, use the car's charging points in the engine compartment. • Check that the cables to the starter battery are correctly connected and properly tightened. The battery terminals on the car's starter battery in the luggage/cargo area must not be used. Positive charging point Negative charging point IMPORTANT When charging the starter battery and the support battery, only use a modern battery charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast charging function must not be used since it may damage the battery. During charging, both the starter battery and the support battery are charged. 17 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. }} 615 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || IMPORTANT If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for infotainment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or the message in the driver display about the starter battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection of an external starter battery or battery charger: • The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger - only the car's negative charging point may be used as the grounding point. NOTE Location The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly. The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity. To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging. A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life. The starter battery is located in the cargo area. WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work. IMPORTANT On certain models, the battery is attached with a retaining strap. Make sure the retaining strap is properly tightened. 616 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Specifications for starter battery Battery type H7 AGM H8 AGM 12 12 800 850 Size, L×B×H 315×175×190 mm (12.4×6.9×7.5 inches) 353×175×190 mm (13.9×6.9×7.5 inches) Capacity (Ah) 80 95 Voltage (V) Cold start A B capacityA - CCAB (A) According to EN standard. Cold Cranking Amperes. Volvo recommends entrusting battery replacement to an authorised Volvo workshop. IMPORTANT If the battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same size, cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the decal on the battery). Related information • • • Symbols on the batteries (p. 619) Support battery (p. 618) Using jump starting with another battery (p. 470) • Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165) • Battery recycle (p. 620) 617 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Support battery NOTE Cars with the start/stop function are equipped with two batteries - one more powerful 12 V starter battery for starting and one support battery that helps during the function's starting sequence. • The higher the current take-off in the car, the more the alternator must be working and the batteries charging = Increased fuel consumption. If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger: • When the capacity of the battery has fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start/stop function is disengaged. • Temporarily reduced Start/stop function due to high current take-off means: The 12 V support battery is located in the engine compartment. • The engine starts automatically18 without the driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual gearbox). • The engine starts automatically without the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake pedal (automatic gearbox). The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal starter battery. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 18 618 IMPORTANT Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position. The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger – only the car's negative charging point may be used as the grounding point. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE NOTE If the starter battery has been discharged so much that the car has no normal electrical functions and the engine is then jumpstarted with an external battery or a battery charger, the Start/stop function may continue to be activated. If the Start/stop function then auto-stops the engine shortly afterwards, there is a great risk that engine auto-start will fail due to insufficient battery capacity, because the battery has not had the time to recharge. If the car has been jump-started, or if there is insufficient time to charge the battery with a battery charger, the Start/stop function is temporarily deactivated until the battery has been recharged by the car. In an outside temperature of approx. +15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a lower outside temperature, the charging time may increase to 3–4 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery using an external battery charger. Specifications for support battery Type Voltage (V) Cold start capacityA CCAB (A) 170 Size, L×B×H 150×90×130 mm (5.9×3.5×5.1 inches) Capacity (Ah) 10 A B Use protective goggles. According to EN standard. Cold Cranking Amperes. IMPORTANT If the battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same size, cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the decal on the battery). Related information • • • • Symbols on the batteries There are information and warning symbols on the batteries. Starter battery (p. 615) Further information in the owner's manual for the car. Store the battery out of the reach of children. Start/stop function (p. 445) Symbols on the batteries (p. 619) Battery recycle (p. 620) The battery contains corrosive acid. AGM 12 }} 619 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Avoid sparks and naked flames. Risk of explosion. Battery recycle Fuses and central electrical units A used starter battery or support battery should be recycled in an environmentally sound manner – it contains lead. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. Related information • • • Must be taken for recycling. Related information • • • 620 Starter battery (p. 615) Support battery (p. 618) Battery recycle (p. 620) Starter battery (p. 615) Support battery (p. 618) Symbols on the batteries (p. 619) WARNING Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire. If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop for checking. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Location of central electrical units Replacing a fuse All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. 1. • • Fuses in engine compartment (p. 622) Fuses under glovebox (p. 627) Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse. 2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown. 3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage. The figure is schematic - appearance may vary depending on car model. WARNING Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central electrical units under the glovebox change sides. Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire. Engine compartment Under the glovebox WARNING Contact an authorised Volvo workshop about the fuses not mentioned in the owner's manual. If replacing the fuse is not performed correctly, it can cause serious damage to the electrical systems. Cargo area Related information • • • • Replacing a fuse (p. 621) Fuses in cargo area (p. 632) Fuses in engine compartment (p. 622) Related information Fuses under glovebox (p. 627) • • Fuses and central electrical units (p. 620) Fuses in cargo area (p. 632) 621 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Fuses in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things. 622 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses. The fuse box also provides space for several spare fuses. Positions On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses. Function Ampere Type – – Micro – – Micro – – Micro Ignition coils (petrol); Spark plugs (petrol); Exhaust sensor; Diesel particle sensor 15 Micro Solenoid for engine oil pump; Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda probe, centre (petrol); Lambda probe, rear (diesel); Lambda probe, front (petrol/diesel) 15 Micro Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve for output pulse (diesel); Oil level/temperature sensor (diesel); Glow plugs (GCU) (diesel) 7,5 Micro Engine control module; Actuator; Throttle unit; EGR valve (diesel); Position sensor for turbo (diesel); Valve for turbocharger (petrol) 20 Micro Engine Control Module (ECM) 5 Micro – – Micro Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Thermostat for engine cooling system (petrol); Cooling pump for EGR (diesel); Glow control unit (diesel); Supercharger clutch (petrol); Crankshaft ventilation heater (diesel); Valve, gearbox oil cooler (diesel) 10 Micro Control module for spoiler damper; Control module for radiator damper; Relay coils for output pulse (diesel) 5 Micro Coolant pump 15 Micro }} 623 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Function Ampere Type Engine Control Module (ECM) 20 Micro Starter motor 40 MCaseA Starter motor Shunt MCaseA 30 MCaseA – – MCaseA Calculation unit 5 Micro – – Micro – – Micro – – Micro – – Micro – – Micro 12 V socket in tunnel console, front 15 Micro 12 V socket in tunnel console, by legroom for second seat row* 15 Micro 12 V socket in cargo area* 15 Micro – – Micro Left-hand headlamp, LEDB 15 Micro Right-hand headlamp, LEDB 15 Micro Fuel filter heater (diesel) 624 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Function Ampere Type – Micro Heated windscreen* left-hand side Shunt MCaseA Heated windscreen* left-hand side 40 MCaseA Headlamp washers* 25 MCaseA Washer fluid pump 25 MCaseA Transmission control unit; Electric gear selector 15 Micro Horn 20 Micro Siren* 5 Micro Control module for brake system (valves, parking brake) 40 MCaseA Brake control with 48V battery 30 MCaseA Windscreen wipers 30 MCaseA Rear window washer 25 MCaseA Heated windscreen* right-hand side 40 MCaseA Parking heater* 20 MCaseA – – MCaseA – – MCaseA Shunt MCaseA – Heated windscreen* right-hand side }} * Option/accessory. 625 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Function A B Ampere Type Supplied when the ignition is switched on: Engine control module; Transmission components; Electric steering servo; Central electronic module; Control module for brake system 5 Micro – – Micro Right-hand headlamp, LEDB 15 Micro Alcohol lock* 5 Micro Transmission control module 10 Micro Module for controlling battery engagement 5 Micro Airbags; Passenger weight sensor 5 Micro Left-hand headlamp, LEDB 15 Micro Accelerator pedal sensor 5 Micro This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. LED (Light Emitting Diode) Related information • • 626 Fuses and central electrical units (p. 620) Replacing a fuse (p. 621) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Fuses under glovebox Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst other things, electrical sockets, displays and door modules. }} 627 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses. The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses. Function 628 Positions On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses. Ampere Type Intermediate voltage module 10 Micro Electrical socket in tunnel console, by legroom for rear seat* 30 MCaseA – – Micro Movement detector* 5 Micro Media player 5 Micro Driver display 5 Micro Keypad in centre console 5 Micro Sun sensor 5 Micro – – Micro – – Micro Steering wheel module 5 Micro Module for start knob and for parking brake control 5 Micro Steering wheel module for heated steering wheel* 15 Micro – – Micro * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Function Ampere Type – – Micro – – Micro – – Micro Control module for climate control system 10 Micro Steering lock 7,5 Micro Diagnostic socket OBDII 10 Micro Centre display 5 Micro 40 MCaseA 5 Micro 7,5 Micro 5 Micro 20 Micro Head-up display* 5 Micro Passenger compartment lighting 5 Micro – – Micro Display in roof console (Seatbelt reminder/Indicator for airbag on the front passenger seat) 5 Micro Fan module for climate control system, front USB HUB Controls lighting; Interior lighting; Dimming of interior rearview mirror*; Rain and light sensor*; Keypad in tunnel console, by legroom for rear seat*; Power front seats*; Control panels in rear doors; Fan module for climate control left/right Control module for driver support functions Panorama roof with sun blind* }} * Option/accessory. 629 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Function Ampere Type – – Micro – – Micro Door module in right-hand rear door 20 Micro Fuses in cargo area 10 Micro Control module for online car; Control module for Volvo On Call 5 Micro Door module in left-hand rear door Audio control device (amplifier) 630 Micro 40 MCaseA – – MCaseA Module for multi-band antenna 5 Micro Modules for seat comfort (massage) front* 5 Micro Alcohol lock* 5 Micro Rear window wiper 15 Micro Control module for fuel pump 15 Micro – – Micro Opening the boot lid/tailgate with foot motion* 5 Micro Seat heating, driver's side front 15 Micro Seat heating, passenger side front 15 Micro * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Function Ampere Type 7,5 Micro – Micro Door module in left-hand front door 20 Micro Control module for suspension (active chassis)* 20 Micro – – Micro Sensus control module 10 Micro – – MCaseA – – Micro 20 Micro – – Micro TV* (certain markets) 5 Micro Primary fuse for fuses 52, 53, 57 and 58 15 Micro Coolant pump – Door module in right-hand front door A This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • Fuses and central electrical units (p. 620) Replacing a fuse (p. 621) * Option/accessory. 631 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Fuses in cargo area Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst other things, power seats*, airbags and seatbelt tensioners. 632 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE The central electrical unit is located on the right-hand side. On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses. The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses. }} 633 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Positions Function Ampere Type 30 MCaseA – MCaseA Compressor for air suspension* 40 MCaseA Lock motor for backrest on rear right-hand side 15 MCaseA – – MCaseA Lock motor for backrest on rear left-hand side 15 MCaseA Electrically operated front passenger seat* 20 MCaseA Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 30 MCaseA Power operated tailgate* 25 MCaseA Electrically operated front passenger seat* 20 MCaseA Towbar control module* 40 MCaseA Seatbelt pretensioner module, right-hand side 40 MCaseA 5 Micro Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 15 Micro Door module left-hand side rear 20 Micro Rear window defroster – Door module right-hand side rear Door module right-hand side front Internal relay coils 634 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Function Ampere Type Alcohol lock*, USB hub/accessory port 5 Micro Enhanced accessory module 5 Micro Towbar control module* 25 MCaseA Accessory module 40 MCaseA Power driver seat* 20 MCaseA 40 MCaseA Parking camera* 5 Micro – – Micro – – Micro – – Micro – – Micro – – Micro – – Micro Seat heating left-hand side rear* 15 Micro – – Micro Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* 5 Micro Door module left-hand side front Seatbelt pretensioner module, left-hand side Control module, exterior reversing sound }} * Option/accessory. 635 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Function A Ampere Type – – Micro Seatbelt pretensioner modules 5 Micro Actuator for exhaust gases (petrol, certain engine variants) 5 Micro – – Micro All Wheel Drive (AWD) control module* 15 Micro Seat heating right-hand side rear* 15 Micro – – MCaseA This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • 636 Fuses and central electrical units (p. 620) Replacing a fuse (p. 621) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning the interior Related information Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. • • IMPORTANT • • Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g. dark jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is important to clean and treat these parts of the upholstery as soon as possible. Never use strong solvents such as washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit or concentrated alcohol to clean the interior, since this may damage the upholstery as well as other interior materials. • Never spray the cleaning agent directly onto components that have electrical buttons and controls. Wipe them instead using a moistened cloth containing the cleaning agent. • Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery. • Only use cleaning agents on the type of material for which they were intended. • • • • • Cleaning the centre display (p. 637) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 639) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 639) Cleaning the centre display Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect the centre display's performance and readability. Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre cloth. Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 639) Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 640) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 641) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 641) 1. Turn off the centre display with a long press on the home button. 2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth supplied or use another microfibre cloth of equivalent quality. Wipe the screen with a clean and dry microfibre cloth using small circular movements. If necessary, lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean water. 3. Activate the display with a short press on the home button. }} * Option/accessory. 637 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || IMPORTANT The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre display must be free from sand and dirt. IMPORTANT When cleaning the centre display, only use gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pressure can damage the screen. IMPORTANT • • Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 641) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 641) Cleaning the head up display* Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a clean and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary, lightly moisten the microfibre cloth. Never use strong stain removers. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning. Related information • Activating and deactivating the head-up display* (p. 140) • Head-up display* (p. 139) Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the centre display. Do not use window cleaning agent, other cleaning agents, aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or cleaning agent containing abrasive. Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tissue paper, since they may scratch the centre display. Related information • • • • • 638 Cleaning the interior (p. 637) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 639) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 639) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 639) Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 640) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. When you need to clean the textile upholstery or headliner, never scrape or rub a stain as this may destroy the fabric. Nor should you ever use stain removing agents, as this risks discoloration of the fabric. Related information • • • • • • • Cleaning the interior (p. 637) Cleaning the centre display (p. 637) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 639) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 639) Cleaning the seatbelts Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo retailers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract. Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Each inlay mat is secured with pins. Related information • • • • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 640) • • Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 641) • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 641) Cleaning the interior (p. 637) Cleaning the centre display (p. 637) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 639) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 639) Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 640) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 641) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 641) 1. Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up. 2. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. NOTE The inlay mats must not be swung around without care or hit against objects to remove dirt since this can crack the inlay mats. 3. A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recommended by Volvo retailers. 4. After cleaning, fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin. }} * Option/accessory. 639 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || WARNING Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adjacent to and under the pedals. Related information • • • • • • • Cleaning the interior (p. 637) Cleaning the centre display (p. 637) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 639) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 639) Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 640) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 641) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 641) Cleaning leather upholstery* Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Volvo's leather upholstery* is treated to preserve its original appearance. Leather upholstery* is a natural product that changes and acquires a beautiful patina over time. Regular cleaning and treatment are required in order that the properties and colours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care KitWipes, for cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery. The protective outer layer of the leather is preserved when this is used according to the instructions. To achieve results that are as good as possible, Volvo recommends cleaning and application of the protective cream one to four times per year (or more frequently if required). Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from Volvo dealers. Cleaning the leather upholstery 1. 640 Apply the leather cleaner to a damp sponge and squeeze until a foam is created. 2. Use the sponge on the stain in a circular motion. 3. Thoroughly dampen the stain using the sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the stain without scrubbing. 4. Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow the leather to dry thoroughly. Protecting the leather upholstery 1. Apply a small amount of leather protective agent to a cloth and then apply it to the leather in light circular motions. 2. Allow to dry for about 20 minutes. > Protecting the leather upholstery makes it more resistant to the stresses from the sun's UV radiation. Related information • • • • • Cleaning the interior (p. 637) Cleaning the centre display (p. 637) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 639) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 639) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 639) • Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 641) • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 641) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning the leather steering wheel Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic. We recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes for cleaning the leather steering wheel. First remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or cloth. Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces. IMPORTANT IMPORTANT Related information • • Cleaning the interior (p. 637) Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces are easily scratched. Clean these surfaces with a clean, dry microfibre cloth using small, circular motions. If needed, dampen the microfibre cloth with a little clean water. Cleaning the centre display (p. 637) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 639) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 639) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 639) Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 640) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 641) Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 640) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 641) Do not use solvent that contains alcohol when cleaning the glass for the driver display. Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the leather on the steering wheel. • • • • Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 639) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 639) Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers, either. IMPORTANT • • • • • Related information • • • Cleaning the interior (p. 637) Cleaning the centre display (p. 637) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 639) * Option/accessory. 641 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning the exterior Polishing and waxing The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Carry out cleaning in a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use car shampoo. Automatic car wash (p. 644) Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection. The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight, the surface being polished should be a maximum of 45 °C (113 °F). • Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork. High-pressure washing (p. 646) • Related information • • • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 642) Polishing and waxing (p. 642) Handwashing (p. 643) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 646) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 646) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 647) IMPORTANT Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber. When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer. Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used. IMPORTANT Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax. Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty. Rustproofing (p. 648) Related information • • • • • 642 Cleaning the exterior (p. 642) Handwashing (p. 643) Automatic car wash (p. 644) High-pressure washing (p. 646) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 646) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE • • • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 646) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 647) Rustproofing (p. 648) Handwashing The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Carry out cleaning in a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use car shampoo. Important points to remember when handwashing the car • Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight. This can cause the detergent or wax to dry and have an abrasive effect. • Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. They contain substances that damage and discolour paintwork very quickly. For example, use soft paper or sponge soaked in plenty of water. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discolouration. • Wash the underbody, including wheel housings and bumpers. • Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks. • If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun. • Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water. • Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo. • Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out. • After the car has been washed, tar from asphalt may remain. Use tar remover to get rid of the last spots. WARNING Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. IMPORTANT Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling. Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead. }} 643 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || NOTE Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time. IMPORTANT • Make sure that the panoramic roof* and sun visor are closed before washing the car. • Never use polishing agent with abrasive properties on the panoramic roof. • Never use wax on the rubber mouldings around the panoramic roof. IMPORTANT Remember to remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors and in the sills after washing the car. Related information • • • • 644 Cleaning the exterior (p. 642) Polishing and waxing (p. 642) • • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 646) Automatic car wash Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 646) • • • Cleaning wheel rims (p. 647) The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty, the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching the paintwork. Rustproofing (p. 648) Automatic parking brake activation setting (p. 428) Washing the car in an automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of getting it clean, but it cannot reach everywhere. Volvo recommends washing your car by hand or using an automatic car wash supplemented with washing by hand. NOTE Volvo recommends that the car is not washed in an automatic car wash during the first few months (this is because the paintwork has not fully hardened). IMPORTANT Before driving the car into an automatic car wash, deactivate the functions for automatic braking when stationary and automatic parking brake application. If these functions are not deactivated, the brake system will jam when the car is stationary and the car will not be able to move. Automatic car wash (p. 644) High-pressure washing (p. 646) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE IMPORTANT IMPORTANT For car washes where the car is pulled forward with rolling wheels, the following applies: 1. The system will automatically switch to P mode unless the above step is followed. The wheels are locked in P mode, which they should not be when putting the car through an automatic car wash. Before washing the car, make sure that the automatic rain sensor is deactivated, otherwise there is the risk of it starting and damaging the wiper arms. Be aware that if the car has the keyless locking and unlocking function*, the car can be locked/unlocked when the car is being washed if the remote control key is within range. 3. Drive into the car wash. 5. Switch off the "Automatic parking brake application" function via the top view of the centre display. 6. Switch off the engine by turning the start knob in the tunnel console clockwise. Hold the knob in place for at least 2 seconds. The car is ready for the car wash. Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 264) NOTE 2. Make sure that the door mirrors are retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured, antennas retracted or removed, otherwise they risk being damaged by the automatic car wash. 4. Switch off the "Automatic braking at standstill" function using the button on the tunnel console. • Related information • • • • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 642) Polishing and waxing (p. 642) Handwashing (p. 643) High-pressure washing (p. 646) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 646) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 646) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 647) Rustproofing (p. 648) Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429) Automatic parking brake activation setting (p. 428) * Option/accessory. 645 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE High-pressure washing Cleaning the wiper blades The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty, the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching the paintwork. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo. When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm (13 in.) to the surface of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks. The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty, the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching the paintwork. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo. Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades. When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service position. Related information • • • • • • • • NOTE Cleaning the exterior (p. 642) Polishing and waxing (p. 642) Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents. Handwashing (p. 643) Automatic car wash (p. 644) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 646) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 646) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 647) Rustproofing (p. 648) Related information • • • • • • • • 646 Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty, the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching the paintwork. Carry out cleaning in a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use car shampoo. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully. Avoid washing the car with detergent with a pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can cause discolouration of anodised aluminium components*, as illustrated. We advise against use of abrasive polishing agents, as illustrated. Cleaning the exterior (p. 642) Polishing and waxing (p. 642) Handwashing (p. 643) Automatic car wash (p. 644) High-pressure washing (p. 646) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 646) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 647) Rustproofing (p. 648) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE IMPORTANT Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. This may result in discolouration of anodised aluminium parts such as roof rack and around the side windows. Never use metal polishing agent on anodised aluminium parts, this can result in discolouration and destroy the surface treatment. Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. IMPORTANT Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber. When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer. Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used. Related information • • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 642) Polishing and waxing (p. 642) Handwashing (p. 643) Automatic car wash (p. 644) High-pressure washing (p. 646) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 646) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 647) Rustproofing (p. 648) Cleaning wheel rims The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty, the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching the paintwork. Carry out cleaning in a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use car shampoo. Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo. Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims. Related information • • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 642) Polishing and waxing (p. 642) Handwashing (p. 643) Automatic car wash (p. 644) High-pressure washing (p. 646) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 646) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 647) Rustproofing (p. 648) 647 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Rustproofing Car paintwork The car has protection against corrosion. Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of metallic protective coatings on the sheet metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion-protected and minimised metal overlap, and shielding plastic components, abrasion protection and supplemental rust inhibitor on exposed areas. In the chassis, exposed components of the wheel suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast aluminium. The paintwork consists of several layers and is an important part of the car's rustproofing, and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. Related information • Inspection and maintenance The car's anti-corrosion protection normally requires no maintenance, but a good way to reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solutions must be avoided on glossy trim components. Any stone chips should be rectified as soon as they are discovered. Related information 648 Cleaning the exterior (p. 642) • • • • • • • Automatic car wash (p. 644) • Cleaning wheel rims (p. 647) • Touching up minor paintwork damage Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on e.g. the edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. Touching up minor paintwork damage (p. 648) NOTE When paint is repaired the surface must be clean and dry. The temperature of the surface should be at least 15 °C (59 °F). Colour codes (p. 649) Materials that may be needed • Primer – a special adhesive primer in a spray can is available for e.g. plasticcoated bumpers. • Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks19. • • Masking tape. Polishing and waxing (p. 642) Handwashing (p. 643) High-pressure washing (p. 646) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 646) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 646) Fine sand paper. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Applying touch-up paint to the damaged surface 2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry. 3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried. Colour codes Colour code The decal for the colour code is positioned on the car's right-hand door pillar between the front and rear door and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened. For scratches, implement the same procedure but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork. If the damage has not reached down to the metal, the touch-up paint can be applied directly after the surface has been cleaned. 1. NOTE If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with base coat and clear coat as soon as the surface has been cleaned. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint. If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly. 19 Touch-up pens and spray paints for touching up paintwork are available from Volvo dealers. Related information • • Car paintwork (p. 648) Colour codes (p. 649) Exterior colour code Any secondary exterior colour code Related information • • Car paintwork (p. 648) Touching up minor paintwork damage (p. 648) Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick. 649 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Replacing the wiper blade, rear window Replacing the wiper blade, rear window The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with washer fluid, they aim to clean the windows and ensure visibility while driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced. Grip just above the blade's centre bracket and pull diagonally down to the right until the blade loosens from the arm. Lift the cover for the wiper arm's bracket. Be careful that the wiper arm does not mistakenly fall down to the windscreen again. Lift the wiper arm from the windscreen and pull the upper section of the blade diagonally down to the right. Grip the centre of the wiper arm and lift it from the windscreen to lock position. NOTE There is a lock position at half extension angle that may feel like resistance, this lock prevents the arm from falling back against the windscreen. The wiper arm must be pulled past the lock for wiper blade replacement. 650 Loosen the washer hose from the bracket. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Attach the new washer hose with associated wiper blade into the bracket. Fold down the cover for the wiper arm's bracket. NOTE Make sure that the hose is routed in the same way as in the illustration. Otherwise it risks being pinched by the casing when it is lowered again. • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) Replacing windscreen wiper blades • • Filling washer fluid (p. 653) • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 651) • • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with washer fluid, they aim to clean the windows and ensure visibility while driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced. Set the wiper blades in service position (p. 652) Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) 6. Press the new wiper blade into place. You should hear a click. Check that it is firmly installed. 7. Lower the wiper arm. IMPORTANT Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Service position is activated/deactivated via the function view in the centre display when the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers are not on. Set the wiper blade in removal position by angling it out from the arm until a click sound can be heard. Press and hold the lock button located on the wiper blade mounting. }} 651 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || At the same time, pull the blade straight out parallel with the wiper arm. NOTE When replacing the wiper blades, note that they have different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side. 4. Slide in the new wiper blade until the lock button engages. 5. Angle the blade in towards the arm until a click sound is heard. The blade is then no longer in the removal position and can be moved again. 6. Check that the wiper blade is firmly installed. Set the wiper blades in service position In some situations, the windscreen's wiper blades must be set in service position (vertical position), e.g. when they shall be replaced. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) 7. Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen. • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) The wiper blades are different lengths • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • Filling washer fluid (p. 653) Wiper blades in service position. Set the wiper blades in service position (p. 652) • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 650) In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they must be in service position. • • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) IMPORTANT Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down. Activating/deactivating service mode Service mode can be activated/deactivated when the car is stationary and the windscreen 652 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE wipers are not on. Service mode is activated/ deactivated via the function view in the centre display: Press the Wiper Service Position button. The light indicator in the button illuminates when service mode is activated. When activated, the wipers move to the service position. To deactivate the service mode, press Wiper Service Position again. The light indicator in the button extinguishes when service mode is deactivated. The wiper blades also exit the service position if: • • • • Related information • • The rain sensor is activated. The car is driven away. IMPORTANT If the wiper arms in service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the activation of wiping, washing or the rain sensor, as well as before driving. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet. Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • Filling washer fluid (p. 653) • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 650) • • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Windscreen wiping is activated. Windscreen washing is activated. Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Filling washer fluid Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps as well as the windscreen and rear window. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when the temperature is under the freezing point. Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 651) Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) Washer fluid is filled into the reservoir with the blue cap. The reservoir is used for windscreen washer, rear window washer and headlamp washers* NOTE When approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir, the message Washer fluid Level low, refill is shown in the driver display, together with the symbol. }} * Option/accessory. 653 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended by Volvo – with frost protection during cold weather and for temperatures below freezing point. IMPORTANT Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral water). IMPORTANT Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the temperature is below freezing to avoid the fluid freezing inside the pump, reservoir and hoses. Volume: • Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres (5.8 qts). • Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres (3.7 qts). Related information • • • 654 Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • Set the wiper blades in service position (p. 652) • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 651) • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 650) • • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS Type designations The decals in the car contain information such as chassis number, type designation, colour code, etc. Label location The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model. Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories. 656 SPECIFICATIONS Decal for type designation, vehicle identification number, permissible maximum weights and code designation for exterior colour and type approval number. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened. Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant R134a. Label for parking heater. Decal for engine code and the engine's serial number. Label for engine oil. Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant R1234yf. }} 657 SPECIFICATIONS || NOTE It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car. Decal for gearbox type designation and serial number. Decal for the car's identification number VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). Further information on the car is presented in the registration document. 658 Related information • Air conditioning — specifications (p. 668) SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table. Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches A Ground clearanceA 197 7.8 E Load length, floor 1033 40.7 B Wheelbase 2875 113.2 F HeightB 1504 59.2 C Length 4784 188.3 G Load height 644 25.4 D Load length, floor, folded seat 1821 71.7 H Front track 1649C 64,9C 1640D 64.6D 1636E 64.4E I Dimensions mm inches Rear track 1633C 64.3C 1625D 64.0D 1621E 63.8E J Load width, floor 1064 41.9 K Width 1893 (1850F) 74.5 (72.8F) }} 659 SPECIFICATIONS || Dimensions mm inches L Width including door mirrors 2040 80,3 M Width including folded-in door mirrors 1916 75.4 A B C D E F At kerb weight + 2 people. (Varies slightly depending on tyre dimension, chassis option, etc.) Including roof antenna, for kerb weight. Applies to cars with 18 inch wheels. Applies to cars with 19 inch wheels. Applies to cars with 20 inch wheels. Body width. Related information • 660 Weights (p. 661) SPECIFICATIONS Weights Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car. Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full, plus and all oils and fluids. The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb weight. Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight. NOTE The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory. Examples of accessories that reduce load capacity are the different equipment levels (e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well as other accessories such as towbar, load carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened. Max. gross vehicle weight Max. train weight (car+trailer) Max. front axle load Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car. Max. rear axle load Equipment level WARNING The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed. Max. load: See registration document. Max. roof load: 75 kg. Related information • • Type designations (p. 656) Towing capacity and towball load (p. 662) 661 SPECIFICATIONS Towing capacity and towball load Max. weight braked trailer Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables. NOTE Use of vibration dampers on the towbar is recommended for trailers heavier than 1800 kg. A Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg) T5 AWD B4204T23 Automatic 1800 100 T5 AWD B4204T26 Automatic 1800 100 D3 AWD D4204T4 Automatic 2000 100 D4 AWD D4204T14 Automatic 2000 100 The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine. IMPORTANT When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight (including towball load) by a maximum of 100 kg (220 lbs), provided that speed is limited to 100 km/h (62 mph). National legal requirements for the vehicle combination, such as speed, etc. must be observed. 662 SPECIFICATIONS Max. weight unbraked trailer Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg) 750 50 Related information • • • • Type designations (p. 656) Weights (p. 661) Driving with a trailer (p. 476) Trailer stability assist* (p. 477) * Option/accessory. 663 SPECIFICATIONS Engine specifications Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be found in the table below. Engine Engine codeA Not all engines are available in all markets. Output Output Torque (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rpm) No. of cylinders T5 AWD B4204T23 187/5500 254/5500 350/1500–4800 4 T5 AWD B4204T26 184/5500 250/5500 350/1800-4800 4 D3 AWD D4204T4 110/4250 150/4250 350/1500-2500 4 D4 AWD D4204T14 140/4250 190/4250 400/1750-2500 4 A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine. Related information • • • 664 NOTE Type designations (p. 656) Engine oil — specifications (p. 665) Coolant — specifications (p. 667) SPECIFICATIONS Engine oil — specifications Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table. Volvo recommends: Engine Engine codeA T5 AWD B4204T23 T5 AWD B4204T26 D3 AWD D4204T4 D4 AWD D4204T14 Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter (litres, approx.) A Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 5,6 5,6 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 5,2 5,2 The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine. Related information • • Type designations (p. 656) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 666) • Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 611) • Engine oil (p. 610) 665 SPECIFICATIONS Adverse driving conditions for engine oil IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions. Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys: • • • • towing a caravan or trailer An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected. in mountainous regions at high speeds in temperatures colder than -30 °C (-22 °F) or hotter than +40 °C (+104 °F). The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures. Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine. If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims any liability for any such damage. Volvo recommends: Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. Related information • • 666 Engine oil — specifications (p. 665) Engine oil (p. 610) SPECIFICATIONS Coolant — specifications Transmission fluid — specifications Brake fluid — specifications Prescribed grade: Ready-mixed coolant approved by Volvo. If concentrated coolant is used, mix with 50% water (of approved water quality, not salt water, etc.). Consult a Volvo dealer if unsure. Only coolant approved by Volvo should be used in order to prevent impairment of the cooling system, engine problems, etc. Under normal driving conditions, the transmission fluid does not need to be changed during the service life of the gearbox. However, it may be necessary in adverse driving conditions. The medium in a hydraulic brake system is called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pressure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in turn act on a mechanical brake. Prescribed grade: Volvo Original or equivalent fluid compliant with a combination of Dot 4, 5.1 and ISO 4925 class 6. WARNING Swallowing coolant is hazardous, it may cause damage to organs (kidneys). The product contains ethylene glycol, inhibitor, water, etc. Related information • Topping up coolant (p. 612) Automatic gearbox Prescribed transmission fluid: AW-1 NOTE Related information • Type designations (p. 656) It is recommended that brake fluid is changed or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop. Related information • Engine compartment overview (p. 609) 667 SPECIFICATIONS Fuel tank - volume The fuel tank's filling capacity can be read in the table below. All models Litres (approx) US gallons (approx) 60 Tank capacity for AdBlue®1 Air conditioning — specifications The tank capacity for the additive AdBlue is approx. 11.5 litres. The car's climate control system uses a freonfree refrigerant either R1234yf or R134a depending on market. Information about which refrigerant the car's climate control system uses is printed on a decal located on the inside of the bonnet. Related information • Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 465) 15.9 Related information • Filling fuel (p. 456) Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and lubricants in the air conditioning system can be read in the tables below. A/C decal Decal for R134a 1 668 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA) SPECIFICATIONS Decal for R1234yf Symbol WARNING Meaning The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system. A trained and certified technician is required in order to service the mobile air conditioning system (MAC) Flammable refrigerants Symbol explanation R1234yf Symbol Meaning Caution Mobile air conditioning system (MAC) Lubricant type Refrigerant Compressor oil Cars with R134a refrigerant Weight Prescribed grade 700 g (1.54 lbs) R134a Volume Prescribed grade 130 ml (4.40 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2 Evaporator WARNING IMPORTANT The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop. The A/C system's evaporator must never be repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. A new evaporator must be certified and labelled in accordance with SAE J2842. Cars with R1234yf refrigerant Weight Prescribed grade 650 g (1.43 lbs) R1234yf Related information • Servicing the climate control system (p. 607) 669 SPECIFICATIONS Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions Extra-urban driving (fast) Low value The information in the tables below is in accordance with WLTP (Worldwide Harmonised Light-Duty Vehicles Test Procedure), which is an international test method for vehicles equivalent to a passenger car designed for laboratory testing. Motorway driving (very fast) High value The fuel consumption for a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and carbon dioxide emissions (CO2) are measured in gram CO2 per km. Explanation litres/100 km Combined value (combined driving) NOTE If there is no consumption and emissions data in the table, this is available in an enclosed supplement. gram CO2/km Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox Urban driving (slow) Suburban driving (average) T5 AWD (B4204T26) 670 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – SPECIFICATIONS D3 AWD (D4204T4) D4 AWD (D4204T14) The values in the table above for fuel consumption and CO2 emissions are based on special drive cycles (see below). The car's weight may increase depending on its equipment level. Together with how heavily the car is loaded, this affects fuel consumption and CO2 emissions. According to WLTP, every car has unique fuel consumption and CO2 emission values depending on how the car is equipped. These values range between the low value and high value in the table above. In many markets, you can find your car's unique fuel consumption and CO2 emission values in the car's registration document. There are several reasons for fuel consumption that is higher than the values in the table. Examples of these include: 195 7.4 162 6.2 132 5.0 156 6.0 155 5.9 213 8.2 181 6.9 151 5.8 172 6.6 173 6.6 195 7.4 162 6.2 132 5.0 156 6.0 155 5.9 213 8.2 181 6.9 151 5.8 172 6.6 173 6.6 • If the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects its weight. • • Driving style. If the customer chooses wheels other than those mounted as standard on the basic version of the model, this could increase rolling resistance. • High speed causes increased air resistance. • Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car. A combination of the examples above could increase consumption considerably. There may be huge deviations in fuel consumption if comparing to the drive cycle profiles (see below), which are used in the certifi- cation of the car and on which consumption figures in the table are based. For further information, please refer to the referenced regulations. NOTE Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes, in combination with poorer fuel quality than recommended, are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption. WLTP standard From and including 1 September 2018, a new standard was introduced for calculating consumption values in the car. The WLTP standard (Worldwide Harmonised Light-Duty Vehi- }} 671 SPECIFICATIONS || cles Test Procedure) represents the average driving conditions for everyday driving. In comparison with the previous standard (NEDC), WLTP takes into account more varied traffic situations and speeds, but also equipment and weight classes. Optional equipment that affects consumption is deactivated during testing, e.g. air conditioning, seat heating, etc. The new standard should provide more realistic figures when it comes to fuel consumption, carbon dioxide and emissions. The values are intended to allow comparison between different cars and not to represent your typical normal consumption. Drive cycle profiles A drive cycle simulates actual average driving of the car. The standard is based on four different drive cycle profiles. The four drive cycle profiles are: • • • • Urban driving – slow driving Suburban driving – average driving Extra-urban driving – fast driving Motorway driving – very fast driving. Every drive cycle is determined by different conditions such as speed, time and mileage, for example. The official value for combined driving, which is shown in the table, is a combination of the results from the four drive cycles, in accordance with legal requirements. 672 The exhaust gases are collected in order to extrapolate the carbon dioxide emissions (CO2 emissions) during the four drive cycles. These were then analysed to determine the value for CO2 emissions. Related information • • • Type designations (p. 656) Weights (p. 661) Economical driving (p. 453) SPECIFICATIONS Approved wheel and tyre sizes In certain countries not all approved sizes are indicated by the registration document or Engine other documents. The following table shows all approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres. ✓ = Approved man/ 215/55R18 235/45R19 245/40R20 aut 7,5x18x50,5 8x19x55 8x20x55 T5 AWD (B4204T23) aut ✓ ✓ ✓ T5 AWD (B4204T26) aut ✓ ✓ ✓ D3 AWD (D4204T4) aut ✓ ✓ ✓ D4 AWD (D4204T14) aut ✓ ✓ ✓ Related information • Minimum permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres (p. 674) • • • Type designations (p. 656) Dimension designation for tyre (p. 554) • Snow chains (p. 571) Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 555) 673 SPECIFICATIONS Minimum permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres The table below shows the minimum permitted load index (LI) and speed rating (SS). Engine man/ Minimum permitted load index (LI)A Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B aut T5 AWD B4204T23 aut 95 V T5 AWD B4204T26 aut 95 V D3 AWD D4204T4 aut 95 H D4 AWD D4204T14 aut 95 V A B The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. Related information • • • • • 674 Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 673) Approved tyre pressures (p. 675) Type designations (p. 656) Dimension designation for tyre (p. 554) Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 555) SPECIFICATIONS Approved tyre pressures Approved tyre pressures for each engine alternative can be found in the table. Engine Tyre size 215/55 R18 All engines 235/45 R19 245/40 R20 Temporary Spare Tyre A B NOTE All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets. Speed Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear (kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) 0-160 km/h (0-100 mph) 230 230 260 260 260 160+ km/h (100+ mph) 270 270 300 300 – max 80 km/h (max 50 mph) 420 420 420 420 – Economical driving. In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. Related information • • • • Type designations (p. 656) Checking tyre pressure (p. 556) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 673) Recommended tyre pressure (p. 558) 675 ALPHABETICAL INDEX ALPHABETICAL INDEX 440 overtaking setting the time interval standby mode Symbols and messages WARNING 330 325 308 311 322 A/C (Air conditioning) 227 ABS anti-lock brakes 423 AdBlue filling operation Symbols and messages tank volume 463 465 464 467 668 Additional heater (Auxiliary heater) 237 1, 2, 3 ... 4WD A Accessories and extra equipment installation 39 39 Air distribution Air vents change defrosting Recirculation table of options 206 206, 207 206 219 218 208 Air quality allergies and asthma passenger compartment filter 203, 204 204 205 Air recirculation 218 278 280 279 281 289 Active bending lights 155 Adjusting headlamp pattern/headlamp beam 150 Active main beam 153 Adjusting the steering wheel 196 Alarm deactivation motion and tilt sensors reduced alarm level Active Park Assist Limitations Symbols and messages 407 412 415 Aerial location 267 Alarm about hazard warning flashers Connected Safety Active Yaw Control 285 Adapting driving characteristics 440 Adaptive Cruise Control activate Auto brake change cruise control functionality change of target deactivate fault tracing Limitations managing speed 304 306 326 310 323 307 309 309 324 Airbag Activating/deactivating driver's side passenger side Airbag, see Airbag Air conditioning Air conditioning, fluid volume and grade Air conditioning system repair 53 56 53 54, 56 Alarm about slippery driving conditions Connected Safety 289 53 Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 204 227 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 440 668 Ambience lights adapt 200, 211 607 Alcohol lock 421, 422, 423 161 Android Auto 516, 517, 518 Apple CarPlay 512, 513, 515 Approach lighting 159 677 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Apps 494 Automatic locking Assistance at risk of collision activate/deactivate Limitations Symbols and messages upon risk of head-on collision upon risk of rear-end collision upon risk of run-off 386 387 390 391 388 389 387 Automatic relocking Audio and media 492 Audio settings phone play media Text message 492, 525 526 504, 505 525 Auto climate control 217 Auto hold 429 Automatic brake activate/deactivate after collision Driver support 429 430 431 284 Automatic car wash 644 Automatic car washes 644 Automatic engine stop auto-stop Automatic gearbox kickdown oil trailer 678 445 431, 432 438 667 476 271 243, 265 Automatic speed limiter activate/deactivate Limitations tolerance 297 299 300 300 Auxiliary heater 237 AWD, All Wheel Drive 440 B Backrest front seat, adjusting 187, 188, rear seat, lowering Bag holder Battery jump starting maintenance overload recycling start support symbols on the battery Bicycle rack towbar mounted 182, 183, 186, 189, 190 192 590 470, 615 470 615 470 620 615 618 619 479 BLIS activate/deactivate Limitations Symbols and messages 362 363 364 365 Bluetooth connect connect car to Internet phone settings 510 528 519 527 Bonnet, opening 608 Book service and repair 603 Brake assist after collision 431 Brake fluid grade 667 Brake functions 423 Brakes Anti-lock braking system, ABS automatic when stationary brake assist system, BAS brake light brake system emergency brake lights maintenance on gritted roads on wet roads Parking brake 423 423 429 424 157 423 158 425 425 425 426 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Brake system fluid 667 Bulbs change 614 bypass alcohol lock 422 Car key battery low 246 Car modem connect car to Internet settings 530 530 Car status Tyre pressure 602 561 Car upholstery 637, 639, 640, 641 C Car washing Camera sensor see Camera unit Catalytic converter Recovery 481 CD player 508 central locking 268 Camera unit Limitations maintenance and cleaning 340 340 341 345 642, 643, 644, 646, 647 Cargo cover 592 Cargo grille 594 Centre display change appearance 128 cleaning 637 climate control 211 function view 119 Keyboard 123 messages 137, 138 operation 109, 112, 116, 121 overview 106 settings 129, 130 switch off and change volume 128 symbols in status bar 121 views 112 cargo net 595 Change of owner Car holiday 454 Car care 642, 643, 644, 646, 647 Leather upholstery 640 Car functions in centre display 119 Cargo area electrical socket lighting mounting points protective net 588 583, 585 161 591 595 131 Change of target with adaptive cruise control with Pilot Assist Checking the engine oil level Child safety Child safety locks 323 323 611 61 270 Child seat 61, 62, 65, 66 i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 64 lower mounting points 63 overview table 68 positioning/fitting 65, 66 table for location 69 table of i-Size 71 table of ISOFIX 72 Upper mounting points 62 Cigarette lighter 581 City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles cross traffic evasive manoeuvre prevented evasive manoeuvres Limitations limitations in the case of cross traffic limitations in the case of evasive manoeuvres obstacle detection set warning distance 346 356 353 355 354 356 353 355 350 349 679 ALPHABETICAL INDEX subfunctions Symbols and messages 347 360 Cleaning 639, 641 automatic car wash 644 car washing 642, 643, 644, 646, 647 centre display 637 Fabric upholstery 637, 639, 640 rims 647 Seatbelts 639 upholstery 637, 639, 640, 641 Cleaning wheel rims 647 Cleaning wiper blades 646 Clean Zone 203 Clean Zone Interior Package 204 Climate control 200, 211 auto-regulation 217 centre display 211 experienced temperature 201 fan control 222, 223 Parking 227 rear seat 211 sensors 201 temperature control 224, 225, 226 voice control 202 zones 200 Climate control system Refrigerant Clock, adjustment 680 668 88 CO2 emissions Collision 670 44, 48, 53, 59 Collision warning from behind 361 Collision warning system cross traffic rear see City Safety 366 346 Colour code, paint 649 Colour codes 649 Combined instrument panel settings Compass calibration 79 83 488 488 Condensation in headlamps 643, 644, 646 Connect car to Internet no or poor connection via a mobile device (WiFi) via car modem via telephone (Bluetooth) 532 529 530 528 Connected Safety activate/deactivate Limitations 289 290 291 Connect phone 520 Controls lighting Coolant filling 161 667 612 Cooling system overheating 469 Cornering lights 156 Cornering support activate/deactivate Limitations 328 329 329 Corner Traction Control 285 Cover cargo area 592 Crash, see Collision 44 Cross Traffic Alert activate/deactivate Limitations messages 366 367 367 369 Cruise control activate deactivate managing speed standby mode 301 302 303 324 303 Customer privacy policy CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 38 204 ALPHABETICAL INDEX D Data recording 37 transfer between car and workshop 600 Data link connector Data sharing Daytime running lights Deadlock deactivation 40 533, 534 151 281 282 Defrosting 219 Diesel run out of fuel 460 461 Diesel particle filter 462 Digital radio (DAB) 502 Dimensions Towbar 659 473 dipped beam 151 Dipstick, electronic 611 Direction indicator 154 Direction indicators 154 direction of rotation 555 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 438 Display driver information 79 Display lighting 161 Distance Warning activate/deactivate Limitations Set time interval 291 293 293 325 DivX® 509 Door mirrors Dipping resetting store position Download Centre using Drive-E Environmental philosophy Driver Alert Control activate/deactivate guide to rest stops Limitations Driver display application menu messages settings Driver performance settings Driver profile edit select driver support system Driving mode 167 168 169 184, 185 601 601 30 377 378 378 379 79 100, 101 102 83 87 88 133 134, 135, 136 134 284 327 Drivetrain Gearbox 431 Driving cooling system with a tailer 469 476 Driving economy 453 Driving in water 455 Driving mode change Driver support ECO Driving with a trailer towball load towing capacity 440 442 327 443,
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project